Circuit Card Reference Avaya Communication Server 1000

7.5 NN43001-311, 05.02 November 2010

 2010 Avaya Inc.

Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise, no use should be made of materials on this site, the Documentation, Software, or Hardware provided by Avaya. All content on this site, the documentation and the Product provided by Avaya including the selection, arrangement and design of the content is owned either by Avaya or its licensors and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws including the sui generis rights relating to the protection of databases. You may not modify, copy, reproduce, republish, upload, post, transmit or distribute in any way any content, in whole or in part, including any code and software unless expressly authorized by Avaya. Unauthorized reproduction, transmission, dissemination, storage, and or use without the express written consent of Avaya can be a criminal, as well as a civil offense under the applicable law. Third-party components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements (Third Party Components), which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product (Third Party Terms). Information regarding distributed Linux OS source code (for those Products that have distributed the Linux OS source code), and identifying the copyright holders of the Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on the Avaya Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com/Copyright. Preventing Toll Fraud Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party (for example, a person who is not a corporate employee, agent, subcontractor, or is not working on your company's behalf). Be aware that there can be a risk of Toll Fraud associated with your system and that, if Toll Fraud occurs, it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services. Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by Toll Fraud and you need technical assistance or support, call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at +1-800-643-2353 for the United States and Canada. For additional support telephone numbers, see the Avaya Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com. Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to: securityalerts@avaya.com. Trademarks The trademarks, logos and service marks (Marks) displayed in this site, the Documentation and Product(s) provided by Avaya are the registered or unregistered Marks of Avaya, its affiliates, or other third parties. Users are not permitted to use such Marks without prior written consent from Avaya or such third party which may own the Mark. Nothing contained in this site, the Documentation and Product(s) should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right in and to the Marks without the express written permission of Avaya or the applicable third party. Avaya is a registered trademark of Avaya Inc. All non-Avaya trademarks are the property of their respective owners, and Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Downloading Documentation For the most current versions of Documentation, see the Avaya Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com. Contact Avaya Support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your Product. The support telephone number is 1-800-242-2121 in the United States. For additional support telephone numbers, see the Avaya Web site: http://support.avaya.com.

All Rights Reserved. Notice While reasonable efforts have been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete and accurate at the time of printing, Avaya assumes no liability for any errors. Avaya reserves the right to make changes and corrections to the information in this document without the obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes. Documentation disclaimer Documentation means information published by Avaya in varying mediums which may include product information, operating instructions and performance specifications that Avaya generally makes available to users of its products. Documentation does not include marketing materials. Avaya shall not be responsible for any modifications, additions, or deletions to the original published version of documentation unless such modifications, additions, or deletions were performed by Avaya. End User agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya, Avaya's agents, servants and employees against all claims, lawsuits, demands and judgments arising out of, or in connection with, subsequent modifications, additions or deletions to this documentation, to the extent made by End User. Link disclaimer Avaya is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced within this site or documentation provided by Avaya. Avaya is not responsible for the accuracy of any information, statement or content provided on these sites and does not necessarily endorse the products, services, or information described or offered within them. Avaya does not guarantee that these links will work all the time and has no control over the availability of the linked pages. Warranty Avaya provides a limited warranty on its Hardware and Software (Product(s)). Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty. In addition, Avayas standard warranty language, as well as information regarding support for this Product while under warranty is available to Avaya customers and other parties through the Avaya Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com. Please note that if you acquired the Product(s) from an authorized Avaya reseller outside of the United States and Canada, the warranty is provided to you by said Avaya reseller and not by Avaya. Licenses THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE, HTTP://SUPPORT.AVAYA.COM/LICENSEINFO/ ARE APPLICABLE TO ANYONE WHO DOWNLOADS, USES AND/OR INSTALLS AVAYA SOFTWARE, PURCHASED FROM AVAYA INC., ANY AVAYA AFFILIATE, OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER (AS APPLICABLE) UNDER A COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT WITH AVAYA OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER. UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED TO BY AVAYA IN WRITING, AVAYA DOES NOT EXTEND THIS LICENSE IF THE SOFTWARE WAS OBTAINED FROM ANYONE OTHER THAN AVAYA, AN AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN AVAYA AUTHORIZED RESELLER; AVAYA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO TAKE LEGAL ACTION AGAINST YOU AND ANYONE ELSE USING OR SELLING THE SOFTWARE WITHOUT A LICENSE. BY INSTALLING, DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE, OR AUTHORIZING OTHERS TO DO SO, YOU, ON BEHALF OF YOURSELF AND THE ENTITY FOR WHOM YOU ARE INSTALLING, DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE (HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO INTERCHANGEABLY AS YOU AND END USER), AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND CREATE A BINDING CONTRACT BETWEEN YOU AND AVAYA INC. OR THE APPLICABLE AVAYA AFFILIATE (AVAYA).

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Contents Chapter 1: New in this release...............................................................................................21

Features..........................................................................................................................................................21 Other changes.................................................................................................................................................21 Revision history......................................................................................................................................21

Chapter 2: Customer service..................................................................................................25

Navigation.......................................................................................................................................................25 Getting technical documentation.....................................................................................................................25 Getting product training...................................................................................................................................25 Getting help from a distributor or reseller........................................................................................................25 Getting technical support from the Avaya Web site........................................................................................26

Chapter 3: Introduction...........................................................................................................27
Subject............................................................................................................................................................27 Note on legacy products and releases...................................................................................................27 Applicable systems.........................................................................................................................................27 System migration............................................................................................................................................27 Intended audience...........................................................................................................................................28 Conventions....................................................................................................................................................28 Terminology............................................................................................................................................28 Related information.........................................................................................................................................29 Technical documentation........................................................................................................................29 Online.....................................................................................................................................................29

Chapter 4: Overview................................................................................................................31
Contents..........................................................................................................................................................31 Line cards........................................................................................................................................................32 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card......................................................................................32 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 interface card...................................................................................33 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface card..................................................................................33 NT8D02 Digital Line card.......................................................................................................................33 NT8D09 analog message waiting line card............................................................................................33 Analog line interface units......................................................................................................................38 Digital line interface units........................................................................................................................40 Analog line call operation.......................................................................................................................42 Digital line call operation.........................................................................................................................45 Lineside T1 and E1 call operation..........................................................................................................46 Voice frequency audio level....................................................................................................................54 Off-premise line protection.....................................................................................................................54 Line protectors........................................................................................................................................55 Line protection grounding.......................................................................................................................55 Line and telephone components............................................................................................................56 Trunk cards.....................................................................................................................................................56 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card................................................................................................................57 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card..................................................................................................................57 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk card...........................................................................................58 Installation..............................................................................................................................................58 Operation................................................................................................................................................59 Host interface bus...................................................................................................................................59

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Trunk interface unit.................................................................................................................................64 Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards....................................................................................................................65 Uses.......................................................................................................................................................66 Features.................................................................................................................................................66 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................67 Installation..............................................................................................................................................68 Maintenance...........................................................................................................................................68

Chapter 5: Circuit card installation........................................................................................71

Contents..........................................................................................................................................................71 Card slots - Large System...............................................................................................................................71 Circuit and installation.....................................................................................................................................71 Precautions.....................................................................................................................................................74 Installing a circuit card.....................................................................................................................................76

Chapter 6: Acceptance tests..................................................................................................79

Contents..........................................................................................................................................................79 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................79 Conference cards............................................................................................................................................79 Digitone receiver cards...................................................................................................................................81 Line cards........................................................................................................................................................82 Multifrequency sender cards...........................................................................................................................82 Multifrequency signaling cards........................................................................................................................83 Network cards.................................................................................................................................................83 Trunk cards.....................................................................................................................................................84 Tone and digit switch cards.............................................................................................................................85

Chapter 7: Option settings.....................................................................................................87

Contents..........................................................................................................................................................87 Circuit card grid...............................................................................................................................................87 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card...................................................................................................................89 NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card..................................................................................................................90 General purpose switches......................................................................................................................91 Trunk interface switches.........................................................................................................................91 Ring ground switches.............................................................................................................................92 DCH mode and address select switches................................................................................................92 Illustrations of switch locations and settings...........................................................................................93 NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC......................................................................................................................95 NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card..................................................................................................97 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card.........................................................................................................................98 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card........................................................................................................................101 NT8D17 Conference/TDS card.....................................................................................................................102 NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC....................................................................................................................103 NT8D22 System Monitor...............................................................................................................................103 NT8D22 jumper settings.......................................................................................................................107 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board..................................................................................107 Baud rate..............................................................................................................................................107 Address................................................................................................................................................108 DTE/DCE mode....................................................................................................................................109 QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card.................................................................................................................109 QPC414 Network card...................................................................................................................................110 QPC441 3-Port Extender cards.....................................................................................................................110

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card....................................................................................................113

Chapter 8: NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card................................................117

Contents........................................................................................................................................................117 Introduction....................................................................................................................................................117 Physical description.......................................................................................................................................118 Self Test................................................................................................................................................118 Functional description....................................................................................................................................119 Card interfaces.....................................................................................................................................120 Voice and signaling interfaces..............................................................................................................120 Maintenance communication................................................................................................................121 Power interface.....................................................................................................................................121 Line interface units...............................................................................................................................122 Signaling and control............................................................................................................................122 Card control functions...........................................................................................................................122 Microcontroller......................................................................................................................................122 Card LAN interface...............................................................................................................................123 Software service changes....................................................................................................................123 Port-to-port loss configuration..............................................................................................................124 Electrical specifications.................................................................................................................................125 Circuit power.........................................................................................................................................125 Analog line interface.............................................................................................................................126 Power requirements.............................................................................................................................126 Foreign and surge voltage protection...................................................................................................126 Ringer limitations..................................................................................................................................127 Environmental specifications................................................................................................................127 Operation......................................................................................................................................................127 Incoming calls.......................................................................................................................................128 Outgoing calls.......................................................................................................................................128 Connector pin assignments...........................................................................................................................130 Configuring the OPS analog line card...........................................................................................................131 Jumper strap settings...........................................................................................................................131 Application.....................................................................................................................................................135 Off-premise station application.............................................................................................................135 Other applications.................................................................................................................................136 Transmission considerations................................................................................................................137

Chapter 9: NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card........................................................................141

Contents........................................................................................................................................................141 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................141 Physical description......................................................................................................................................141 Functional description...................................................................................................................................144 Memory.................................................................................................................................................144 Front panel connector pin assignments........................................................................................................145 COM1 and COM2 ports........................................................................................................................145 USB port...............................................................................................................................................145 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports........................................................................................................146 Front panel LED indicators...................................................................................................................146 ITP connector (25 PIN, Debug Only)....................................................................................................147 Post 80 Debug LEDs (Optional)...........................................................................................................147

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 10: NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards.........................................149

Contents........................................................................................................................................................149 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................149 Physical description......................................................................................................................................150 Card connections..................................................................................................................................150 Faceplate..............................................................................................................................................150 Functional description...................................................................................................................................153 Card interfaces.....................................................................................................................................154 T1 interface circuit................................................................................................................................155 Signaling and control............................................................................................................................155 Card control functions...........................................................................................................................155 Electrical specifications.................................................................................................................................157 T1 channel specifications.....................................................................................................................157 Power requirements.............................................................................................................................157 Foreign and surge voltage protections.................................................................................................157 Environmental specifications................................................................................................................158 Installation and configuration........................................................................................................................158 Dip switch settings................................................................................................................................158 Installation............................................................................................................................................163 Cabling the Lineside T1 card................................................................................................................165 Terminal configuration..........................................................................................................................171 Software configuration..........................................................................................................................171 Clocking Requirement...................................................................................................................................173 Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable.................................................................................173 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software........................................................................................176 Description............................................................................................................................................176 Login and password.............................................................................................................................178 Basic commands..................................................................................................................................178 Configuring parameters........................................................................................................................180 Alarm operation and reporting..............................................................................................................184 Performance counters and reporting....................................................................................................186 Testing..................................................................................................................................................188 Applications...................................................................................................................................................190

Chapter 11: NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards.........................................193

Contents........................................................................................................................................................193 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................193 Physical description......................................................................................................................................194 Card connections..................................................................................................................................194 Faceplate..............................................................................................................................................195 Functional description...................................................................................................................................199 Overview...............................................................................................................................................199 Card interfaces.....................................................................................................................................200 E1 interface circuit................................................................................................................................200 Signaling and control............................................................................................................................200 Card control functions...........................................................................................................................201 Microcontrollers....................................................................................................................................201 Card LAN interface...............................................................................................................................201 Sanity Timer..........................................................................................................................................202 Man-Machine Interface.........................................................................................................................202 ELEI additional functionality.................................................................................................................202

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Electrical specifications.................................................................................................................................203 E1 channel specifications.....................................................................................................................203 Power requirements.............................................................................................................................204 Foreign and surge voltage protections.................................................................................................204 Environmental specifications................................................................................................................204 Installation and Configuration........................................................................................................................205 Dip switch settings................................................................................................................................205 MMI port speed selection.....................................................................................................................206 Line Supervisory Signaling protocol.....................................................................................................206 Address of LEI to the MMI....................................................................................................................206 E1 framing............................................................................................................................................206 E1 Coding.............................................................................................................................................206 Line supervision on E1 failure..............................................................................................................207 Daisy-Chaining to MMI.........................................................................................................................208 MMI Master or Slave............................................................................................................................208 Installation.....................................................................................................................................................211 Available and restricted card slots in the NT8D37 IPE module............................................................211 Cabling the LEI card.............................................................................................................................212 Cabling from the I/O panel with the NT5D35AA or NT5D36AA lineside E1 I/O cable..........................212 E1 Connections....................................................................................................................................214 External Alarm Connections.................................................................................................................215 MMI Connections..................................................................................................................................215 Terminal configuration..........................................................................................................................217 Software Configuration.........................................................................................................................217 Disconnect supervision.........................................................................................................................218 Clocking Requirement..........................................................................................................................219 Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable.................................................................................219 Pre requisites........................................................................................................................................220 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software........................................................................................223 Description............................................................................................................................................223 Alarms..................................................................................................................................................223 Login and Password.............................................................................................................................225 Basic commands..................................................................................................................................225 Configuring parameters........................................................................................................................227 Display Configuration (D C)..................................................................................................................235 Alarm operation and reporting..............................................................................................................236 Performance counters and reporting....................................................................................................238 Testing..................................................................................................................................................240 Applications...................................................................................................................................................242

Chapter 12: NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC)...................................................245

Contents........................................................................................................................................................245 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................245 Physical description......................................................................................................................................246 Functional description...................................................................................................................................246 Electrical specifications.................................................................................................................................249 Data transmission specifications..........................................................................................................249 Power requirements.............................................................................................................................250 Environmental specifications................................................................................................................250 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................251 Software service changes....................................................................................................................251

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 13: NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card...................................................................253

Contents........................................................................................................................................................253 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................253 Physical description......................................................................................................................................254 External D-Channel Interface DCH or MSDL.......................................................................................254 NT5D97 faceplate.................................................................................................................................254 Port definitions......................................................................................................................................258 System capacity and performance.......................................................................................................259 Cable requirements..............................................................................................................................260 Cable diagrams....................................................................................................................................267 Functional description...................................................................................................................................270 NT5D97 circuit card locations...............................................................................................................270 NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings......................................................................................................270 Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AA/AB.........................................................................................272 NT5D97AD DIP switch settings............................................................................................................275 DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA daughterboard for NT5D97AD.....................278 MSDL external card..............................................................................................................................279 Architecture...................................................................................................................................................280 Clock operation.....................................................................................................................................280 Reference clock errors.........................................................................................................................281 Automatic clock recovery......................................................................................................................281 Automatic clock switching.....................................................................................................................282 Clock configurations.............................................................................................................................282 Operation......................................................................................................................................................284 Configuring the NT5D97.......................................................................................................................289 Testability and diagnostics....................................................................................................................290

Chapter 14: NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card..................................................................291

Contents........................................................................................................................................................291 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................291 Applications...................................................................................................................................................292

Chapter 15: NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card..................................................................................293

Contents........................................................................................................................................................293 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................293 MFC signaling...............................................................................................................................................293 Signaling levels.....................................................................................................................................294 Forward and backward signals.............................................................................................................294 MFE signaling...............................................................................................................................................295 Sender and receiver mode............................................................................................................................296 Receive mode.......................................................................................................................................296 Send mode...........................................................................................................................................296 XMFC sender and receiver specifications............................................................................................296 XMFE sender and receiver specifications............................................................................................297 Physical specifications..................................................................................................................................298

Chapter 16: NT6D70 SILC Line card....................................................................................301

Contents........................................................................................................................................................301 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................301 ISDN BRI..............................................................................................................................................302 Physical description......................................................................................................................................302 Power consumption..............................................................................................................................303

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Foreign and surge voltage protections.................................................................................................303 Functional description...................................................................................................................................303 Micro Controller Unit (MCU).................................................................................................................305 IPE interface logic.................................................................................................................................306 S/T interface logic.................................................................................................................................307

Chapter 17: NT6D71 UILC line card.....................................................................................309

Contents........................................................................................................................................................309 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................309 Physical description......................................................................................................................................310 Power consumption..............................................................................................................................310 Functional description...................................................................................................................................310 Micro Controller Unit (MCU).................................................................................................................311 IPE interface logic.................................................................................................................................312 U interface logic....................................................................................................................................313

Chapter 18: NT6D80 MSDL card...........................................................................................315

Contents........................................................................................................................................................315 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................315 Physical description......................................................................................................................................316 Functional description...................................................................................................................................317 CPU bus interface................................................................................................................................317 Micro Processing Unit (MPU)...............................................................................................................318 Memory.................................................................................................................................................319 Serial interface......................................................................................................................................319 MSDL operations..................................................................................................................................320 Data flow...............................................................................................................................................321 Engineering guidelines..................................................................................................................................322 Available network card slots.................................................................................................................322 Card mix...............................................................................................................................................322 Address decoding.................................................................................................................................322 Port specifications................................................................................................................................323 Implementation guidelines....................................................................................................................326 Environmental and power requirements...............................................................................................326 Installation.....................................................................................................................................................327 Device number.....................................................................................................................................327 MSDL interfaces...................................................................................................................................327 Installing the MSDL card......................................................................................................................328 Cable requirements..............................................................................................................................329 Cable installation..................................................................................................................................331 MSDL planning form.............................................................................................................................332 Maintenance..................................................................................................................................................333 MSDL states.........................................................................................................................................333 Maintaining the MSDL..........................................................................................................................335 System controlled maintenance...........................................................................................................336 Manually controlled maintenance.........................................................................................................336 Manually isolating and correcting faults................................................................................................338 Replacing MSDL cards.................................................................................................................................339 Symptoms and actions..................................................................................................................................339 System disabled actions...............................................................................................................................340

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 19: NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards.........................................................345

Contents........................................................................................................................................................345 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................345 NT8D02 Digital Line card.....................................................................................................................346 NTDK16 Digital Line card.....................................................................................................................346 Physical description......................................................................................................................................346 Functional description...................................................................................................................................347 NT8D02 Digital Line card.....................................................................................................................347 NTDK16 Digital Line card.....................................................................................................................349 Card interfaces.....................................................................................................................................352 Digital line interfaces............................................................................................................................353 Card control functions...........................................................................................................................353 Circuit power.........................................................................................................................................354 Electrical specifications.................................................................................................................................355 Digital line interface specifications........................................................................................................355 Connector pin assignments...........................................................................................................................356 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................357 Jumper and switch settings..................................................................................................................358 Software service changes....................................................................................................................358

Chapter 20: NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card..................................................361

Contents........................................................................................................................................................361 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................361 Physical description......................................................................................................................................362 Functional description...................................................................................................................................364 Card interfaces.....................................................................................................................................365 Line interface units...............................................................................................................................366 Card control functions...........................................................................................................................366 Circuit power.........................................................................................................................................367 Technical summary or electrical specifications.....................................................................................368 Power requirements.............................................................................................................................370 Foreign and surge voltage protections.................................................................................................370 Overload level.......................................................................................................................................371 Environmental specifications................................................................................................................371 Connector pin assignments...........................................................................................................................371 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................373 Jumper and switch settings..................................................................................................................373 Software service changes....................................................................................................................374

Chapter 21: NT8D14 Universal Trunk card..........................................................................377

Contents........................................................................................................................................................377 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................377 Physical description......................................................................................................................................379 Functional description...................................................................................................................................380 Card interfaces.....................................................................................................................................381 Card control functions...........................................................................................................................382 Signaling interface................................................................................................................................383 Operation......................................................................................................................................................383 Loop start operation..............................................................................................................................383 Ground start operation..........................................................................................................................388 Direct inward dial operation..................................................................................................................392

10

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Two-way, loop dial repeating, TIE trunk operation................................................................................395 Senderized operation for DID and two-way loop DR trunks.................................................................401 Outgoing automatic, incoming dial operation....................................................................................... 404 Recorded announcement trunk operation............................................................................................408 Electrical specifications.................................................................................................................................413 Power requirements............................................................................................................................. 415 Foreign and surge voltage protection...................................................................................................415 Environmental specifications................................................................................................................415 Release control.....................................................................................................................................416 PAD switching.......................................................................................................................................416 Connector pin assignments...........................................................................................................................417 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................418 Jumper strap settings...........................................................................................................................421 Service change entries.........................................................................................................................422 Port-to-port loss configuration.............................................................................................................. 424 Applications...................................................................................................................................................426 Paging trunk operation......................................................................................................................... 426 Music operation....................................................................................................................................427

Chapter 22: NT8D15 E and M Trunk card............................................................................429

Contents........................................................................................................................................................429 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 429 Physical description...................................................................................................................................... 430 Functional description................................................................................................................................... 432 Common features.................................................................................................................................433 Card interfaces.....................................................................................................................................433 Trunk circuit features............................................................................................................................434 Card control functions...........................................................................................................................437 Signaling interface................................................................................................................................438 Maintenance features...........................................................................................................................439 Operation...................................................................................................................................................... 439 Signaling and call control......................................................................................................................439 Electrical specifications.................................................................................................................................448 Power requirements............................................................................................................................. 449 Environmental specifications................................................................................................................450 Foreign and surge voltage protection...................................................................................................450 Connector pin assignments...........................................................................................................................450 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................453 Jumper settings....................................................................................................................................453 Software service entries.......................................................................................................................455 Applications...................................................................................................................................................457 PAD switching.......................................................................................................................................457 Paging trunk operation......................................................................................................................... 458

Chapter 23: NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board...................................461

Contents........................................................................................................................................................461 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 461 Physical description...................................................................................................................................... 462 Functional description................................................................................................................................... 462 System considerations......................................................................................................................... 464 Connector pin assignments...........................................................................................................................464 Configuring the QSDI paddle board..............................................................................................................465

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

11

Option switch settings...........................................................................................................................466 Software service changes....................................................................................................................468 Applications...................................................................................................................................................469 Physical description......................................................................................................................................471 Functional description...................................................................................................................................472 System considerations.........................................................................................................................473 Connector pin assignments...........................................................................................................................474 Configuring the QSDI paddle board..............................................................................................................475 Option switch settings...........................................................................................................................475 Software service changes....................................................................................................................477 Applications...................................................................................................................................................477

Chapter 24: NTAG26 XMFR card..........................................................................................479

Contents........................................................................................................................................................479 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................479 MF signaling..................................................................................................................................................479 Signaling levels.....................................................................................................................................479 XMFR receiver specifications...............................................................................................................480 Physical specifications..........................................................................................................................481

Chapter 25: NTAK02 SDI/DCH card......................................................................................483

Contents........................................................................................................................................................483 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................483 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card.................................................................................................................................483 Connecting to the ports........................................................................................................................484 Characteristics of the low speed port...................................................................................................487 Characteristics of the high speed port..................................................................................................487

Chapter 26: NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card............................................................................489

Contents........................................................................................................................................................489 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................489 Physical description......................................................................................................................................490 NTAK09 DTI/PRI power on self-test.....................................................................................................491 NTAK20 power on self-test...................................................................................................................491 NTAK93 self-test...................................................................................................................................492 DTI/PRI local self-test...........................................................................................................................492 Power requirements.............................................................................................................................492 Foreign and surge voltage protection...................................................................................................492 Functional description...................................................................................................................................493 Architecture...................................................................................................................................................493 Signaling interface................................................................................................................................493 Interconnection.....................................................................................................................................493 Microprocessor.....................................................................................................................................494 Digital pad.............................................................................................................................................494 D-channel interface..............................................................................................................................495 DS-1 Carrier interface...........................................................................................................................495 Clock controller interface......................................................................................................................496 Clock rate converter.............................................................................................................................497

Chapter 27: NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card...................................................................................499

Contents........................................................................................................................................................499 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................499

12

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description......................................................................................................................................500 Power requirements.............................................................................................................................501 Environment.........................................................................................................................................501 Functional description...................................................................................................................................501 Applicability to France..........................................................................................................................502 Architecture...................................................................................................................................................502 DS-30X interface..................................................................................................................................502 Signaling interface................................................................................................................................504 Clock controller interface......................................................................................................................506 Switch settings......................................................................................................................................509

Chapter 28: NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard.......................................................511

Contents........................................................................................................................................................511 Introduction....................................................................................................................................................511 Clocking modes....................................................................................................................................512 Tracking mode......................................................................................................................................512 Free-run (non-tracking).........................................................................................................................513 Physical description......................................................................................................................................513 Faceplate LEDs....................................................................................................................................513 Functional description...................................................................................................................................514 Phase difference detector circuit..........................................................................................................514 Digital phase lock loops........................................................................................................................515 System clock specification and characteristics.....................................................................................515 Digital to analog converter....................................................................................................................516 CPU-MUX bus interface.......................................................................................................................517 Signal conditioning...............................................................................................................................517 Sanity timer...........................................................................................................................................517 Microprocessor.....................................................................................................................................517 External timing interface.......................................................................................................................518 Hardware integrity and regulatory environment....................................................................................518

Chapter 29: NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card..................................................................................519

Contents........................................................................................................................................................519 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................519 Physical description......................................................................................................................................520 NTAK79 switches.................................................................................................................................521 Power requirements.............................................................................................................................523 Environment.........................................................................................................................................523 Functional description...................................................................................................................................523 Architecture...................................................................................................................................................524 DS-30X interface..................................................................................................................................524 Signaling interface................................................................................................................................525 Carrier interface....................................................................................................................................525 Carrier grounding..................................................................................................................................526 CEPT transceiver.................................................................................................................................527 Slip control............................................................................................................................................527 D-channel support interface.................................................................................................................527 Card-LAN interface...............................................................................................................................528 Clock controller interface......................................................................................................................528

Chapter 30: NTDW79AAE5 Universal Digital Trunk card...................................................533

Contents........................................................................................................................................................533

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

13

Introduction...................................................................................................................................................533 Physical description......................................................................................................................................537 Power requirements.............................................................................................................................538 Connectors...........................................................................................................................................538 LED indicators......................................................................................................................................538 Functional description...................................................................................................................................539 UDT card alarms..................................................................................................................................539 Clock reference....................................................................................................................................540 Feature interactions..............................................................................................................................540

Chapter 31: NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard...................................541

Contents........................................................................................................................................................541 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................541 Physical description......................................................................................................................................542 Faceplate LEDs....................................................................................................................................542 Power consumption..............................................................................................................................542 Functional description...................................................................................................................................542 Microprocessors...................................................................................................................................543 DMA controller......................................................................................................................................543 Random Access Memory (RAM)..........................................................................................................543 Read Only Memory (ROM)...................................................................................................................543 LAPD data link/asynchronous controller...............................................................................................543 Counter/timer controller........................................................................................................................543 Software interface circuit......................................................................................................................544 DPNSS/DCHI Port................................................................................................................................544 D-Port - SDTI/PRI interface..................................................................................................................544

Chapter 32: NTBK22 MISP card...........................................................................................545

Contents........................................................................................................................................................545 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................545 Physical description......................................................................................................................................545 Functional description...................................................................................................................................546 Micro Processing Unit (MPU)...............................................................................................................546 High-Level Data Link Controller (HDLC)..............................................................................................546 CPU to MISP bus interface...................................................................................................................547 MISP network bus interface..................................................................................................................547 Power consumption..............................................................................................................................547

Chapter 33: NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card..................................................................................549

Contents........................................................................................................................................................549 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................549 Physical description......................................................................................................................................550 Power requirements.............................................................................................................................551 Environment.........................................................................................................................................551 Functional description...................................................................................................................................552 Architecture...................................................................................................................................................552 DS-30X interface..................................................................................................................................553 Signaling interface................................................................................................................................554 Carrier interface....................................................................................................................................554 Carrier grounding..................................................................................................................................554 CEPT transceiver.................................................................................................................................555 Slip control............................................................................................................................................556

14

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

D-channel support interface.................................................................................................................556 Card-LAN interface...............................................................................................................................556

Chapter 34: NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard.........................559

Contents........................................................................................................................................................559 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................559 Physical description......................................................................................................................................560 Functional description...................................................................................................................................560 Microprocessors...................................................................................................................................561 Main memory........................................................................................................................................561 Shared memory....................................................................................................................................561 EPROM memory..................................................................................................................................561 Flash EPROM memory.........................................................................................................................561 EEPROM memory................................................................................................................................562 Serial communication controller...........................................................................................................562 Sanity timer...........................................................................................................................................562 Bus timer..............................................................................................................................................562 Download operation......................................................................................................................................562 System initialization..............................................................................................................................563 Card enabling or application enabling..................................................................................................563 Card reset.............................................................................................................................................563 Background audit..................................................................................................................................563

Chapter 35: NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards.................................................565

Contents........................................................................................................................................................565 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................565 Physical description......................................................................................................................................566 Switch settings......................................................................................................................................566 Self-test................................................................................................................................................567 Functional description...................................................................................................................................567 Common features.................................................................................................................................567 Operation......................................................................................................................................................568 Loop start operation..............................................................................................................................568 Electrical specifications.................................................................................................................................569 Power requirements.............................................................................................................................569 Environmental specifications................................................................................................................570 Pad switching.......................................................................................................................................570 Connector pin assignments...........................................................................................................................570 Cross connections................................................................................................................................570 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................571 NTCK16AX Central Office trunk card...................................................................................................574 NTCK16BX Central Office trunk card...................................................................................................576 BTID values by country........................................................................................................................578 Applications...................................................................................................................................................578 Periodic Pulse Metering........................................................................................................................578 Busy tone detect...................................................................................................................................579 Loss switching......................................................................................................................................579 Trunk to Trunk connection....................................................................................................................580 Call disconnect.....................................................................................................................................581

Chapter 36: NTDW12AAE5 Universal Clock Controller daughter board..........................583

Contents........................................................................................................................................................583

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

15

Introduction...................................................................................................................................................583 Clocking modes....................................................................................................................................584 Tracking mode......................................................................................................................................585 Free-run (non-tracking).........................................................................................................................585 Physical description......................................................................................................................................586 Faceplate LEDs....................................................................................................................................586 Functional description...................................................................................................................................586 Phase difference detector circuit..........................................................................................................587 Digital phase lock loops........................................................................................................................587 Digital to analog converter....................................................................................................................589 Signal conditioning...............................................................................................................................589 Sanity timer...........................................................................................................................................589 Microprocessor.....................................................................................................................................589

Chapter 37: NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card.......................................................591

Contents........................................................................................................................................................591 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................591 Processor......................................................................................................................................................594 Ethernet ports................................................................................................................................................594 External connections............................................................................................................................594 Internal connections.............................................................................................................................594 Expansion daughterboards...........................................................................................................................594 Backplane interface.......................................................................................................................................595 Serial data interface ports.............................................................................................................................595 TTY default settings..............................................................................................................................595 MGC serial port configuration change..................................................................................................595 Faceplate LED display..................................................................................................................................596 Faceplate LED display..........................................................................................................................596

Chapter 38: NTDW20 Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller card .................................................................................................................................................597
Contents........................................................................................................................................................597 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................597 Processors....................................................................................................................................................600 Chagall-2 Core.....................................................................................................................................600 DSP processors....................................................................................................................................600 Ethernet interfaces........................................................................................................................................601 Backplane interface.......................................................................................................................................601 DS-30X voice/signalling........................................................................................................................601 Card LAN..............................................................................................................................................601 TTY ports..............................................................................................................................................601 LED indicators...............................................................................................................................................602 Network connections and dual homing.........................................................................................................602

Chapter 39: NTDW56 and NTDW59 Common Processor Media Gateway card...............605
Contents........................................................................................................................................................605 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................605 Cabinet and chassis support.........................................................................................................................607 Faceplate......................................................................................................................................................608 Status LED....................................................................................................................................................608 LED display...................................................................................................................................................609 Serial data interface ports.............................................................................................................................610

16

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Ethernet connections....................................................................................................................................610 Media storage................................................................................................................................................611 Security Device (Dongle)..............................................................................................................................613

Chapter 40: NTDW53 and NTDW54 Common Processor Dual Core card........................615
Contents........................................................................................................................................................615 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................615 Cabinet and chassis support.........................................................................................................................616 Faceplate......................................................................................................................................................617 Status LED....................................................................................................................................................617 Ethernet connections............................................................................................................................618 Serial data interface ports.............................................................................................................................618 Media storage...............................................................................................................................................619 Security Device (Dongle)..............................................................................................................................620

Chapter 41: NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card..............621
Contents........................................................................................................................................................621 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................621 Cabinet/chassis support................................................................................................................................624 Media storage...............................................................................................................................................624 Fixed media drive.................................................................................................................................624 Removable media drive........................................................................................................................624 Hard disk drive......................................................................................................................................625 Memory.........................................................................................................................................................628 Memory upgrade..................................................................................................................................628 Ethernet interfaces........................................................................................................................................633 ELAN....................................................................................................................................................633 HSP......................................................................................................................................................634 TLAN....................................................................................................................................................634 Serial data interface ports.............................................................................................................................634 TTY parameters....................................................................................................................................634 USB 2.0 port..................................................................................................................................................635 Security device..............................................................................................................................................635 Faceplate......................................................................................................................................................635 Faceplate buttons.................................................................................................................................637 DIP switch.............................................................................................................................................637 LED indicators...............................................................................................................................................637 Status LED...........................................................................................................................................637 Active CPU LED...................................................................................................................................638 Ethernet LEDs......................................................................................................................................638 Removable and fixed media drive LEDs..............................................................................................639

Chapter 42: NTDW62, NTDW64, and NTDW78 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards .................................................................................................................................................641
Contents........................................................................................................................................................641 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................641 Media Gateway Controller card.....................................................................................................................641 Daughterboard configurations.......................................................................................................................643

Chapter 43: NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card...............................................................645

Contents........................................................................................................................................................645 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................645

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

17

Ethernet ports................................................................................................................................................646 External connections.....................................................................................................................................646 Internal connections.............................................................................................................................646 Backplane interfaces.....................................................................................................................................647 Serial data interface ports.............................................................................................................................647 TTY settings.........................................................................................................................................647 Faceplate LED display..................................................................................................................................647

Chapter 44: NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card.....................................................................649

Contents........................................................................................................................................................649 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................649 Physical description......................................................................................................................................650 Power requirements.............................................................................................................................653 Foreign and surge voltage protection...................................................................................................653 Functional description...................................................................................................................................653 Software description......................................................................................................................................654 Hardware description....................................................................................................................................654 NTRB21 TMDI card..............................................................................................................................654 Architecture...................................................................................................................................................654 Signaling interface................................................................................................................................654 Interconnection.....................................................................................................................................654 Microprocessor.....................................................................................................................................655 Digital pad.............................................................................................................................................655 D-channel interface..............................................................................................................................656 DS-1 Carrier interface...........................................................................................................................657 NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard.....................................................................................658

Chapter 45: NTVQ01xx Media Card.....................................................................................661

Contents........................................................................................................................................................661 Physical description......................................................................................................................................661 Hardware architecture...................................................................................................................................662 Faceplate connectors and indicators....................................................................................................662 Functional description...................................................................................................................................665

Chapter 46: NTC314AAE6 Media Gateway utility card.......................................................667

Contents........................................................................................................................................................667 Physical description......................................................................................................................................667 Functional description...................................................................................................................................667

Chapter 47: QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card........................................................669

Contents........................................................................................................................................................669 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................669 Physical description......................................................................................................................................670 Functional description...................................................................................................................................671 Connector pin assignments...........................................................................................................................672 Configuring the QSDI card............................................................................................................................674 Address switch settings........................................................................................................................675 Baud rate switch settings......................................................................................................................675 DTE/DCE mode switch settings...........................................................................................................676 Test switch setting................................................................................................................................677 Software service changes....................................................................................................................677 Applications...................................................................................................................................................678

18

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Index.......................................................................................................................................681

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

19

20

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 1: New in this release

The following sections detail what is new in Circuit Card Reference, NN43001311 for Avaya Communication Server 1000 (Avaya CS 1000) Release 7.5. Features on page 21 Other changes on page 21

Features
There are no updates to the feature descriptions in this document.

Other changes
There are no other changes for this release.

Revision history
November 2010 November 2010 June 2010 June 2010 October 2009 September 2009 September 2009 September 2009 July 2009 May 2009 Standard 05.02. This document is up-issued to support Avaya Communication Server 1000 Release 7.5 Standard 05.01. This document is up-issued to support Avaya Communication Server 1000 Release 7.5 Standard 04.02. Up-issued to correct a typographical error. Standard 04.01. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. Standard 03.07. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. Standard 03.06. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. Standard 03.05. Up-issued to reflect updates to content. Standard 03.04. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content. Standard 03.03. This document is up-issued to correct the heading of table NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. Standard 03.02. This document is up-issued to include CP PM memory upgrade information.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

21

New in this release

May 2009

Standard 03.01. This document is up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 6.0. This NTP may contain information on or refer to products and naming conventions that are not supported in this release. This information is included for legacy purposes and convenience only. This includes but is not limited to items such as: SSC; ISP 1100; ITG Pentium cards; and Media Cards running certain IP Line applications. Standard 02.09. This document is up-issued to update information about jumper settings for NT8D02GA, NT8D02HA, and NT8D02HAE5 Digital Line Cards. Standard 02.08. This document is up-issued to correct the heading of table NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. Standard 02.07. This document is up-issued to replace NTBK51AA with NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA for Release 5.5. Standard 02.06. This document is up-issued to include additional information in the section 'Jumper and switch settings' for Release 5.5. Standard 02.05. This document is up-issued to support Communication Server Release 5.5. Standard 01.04. This document is up-issued to include information in the NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards on page 345 section. Standard 01.03. This document has been up-issued to include information about additional jumper settings for NT8D22AD/ NT8D22ADE5. Standard 01.02. This document is up-issued to reflect changes in technical content for CoreNet shelf supporting CP PII and CP PIV function. Standard 01.01. This document is up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 5.0. This document contains information previously contained in the following legacy document, now retired, Circuit Card (553-3001-211). Standard 3.00. This document is up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5. Standard 2.00. This document is up-issued for Communication Server 1000 Release 4.0. Standard 1.00. This is a new technical document for Succession 3.0. It was created to support a restructuring of the Documentation Library, which resulted in the merging of multiple legacy technical documents. This new document consolidates information previously contained in the following legacy documents, now retired:

February 2010

July 2009 April 2009 August 2008

December 2007 May 2008

February 2008

June 2007

May 2007

August 2005 September 2004 October 2003

22

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Other changes

Line Cards: Description (553-3001-105) Trunk Cards: Description (553-3001-106) Serial Data Interface Cards: Description (553-3001-107) NT7D16 Data Access Card: Description and operation (553-3001-191) Multi-purpose Serial Data Link: Description (553-3001-195) Circuit Cards: Installation and Testing (553-3001-211) Option 11C and 11C mini Technical Reference Guide (553-3011-100) (Content from Option 11C and 11C mini Technical Reference Guide (553-3011-100) also appears in Avaya Telephones and Consoles Fundamentals , NN43001-567 Circuit Card Reference (553-3023-211)

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

23

New in this release

24

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 2: Customer service

Visit the Avaya Web site to access the complete range of services and support that Avaya provides. Go to www.avaya.com or go to one of the pages listed in the following sections.

Navigation
Getting technical documentation on page 25 Getting product training on page 25 Getting help from a distributor or reseller on page 25 Getting technical support from the Avaya Web site on page 26

Getting technical documentation

To download and print selected technical publications and release notes directly from the Internet, go to www.avaya.com/support.

Getting product training

Ongoing product training is available. For more information or to register, go to www.avaya.com/support. From this Web site, locate the Training link on the left-hand navigation pane.

Getting help from a distributor or reseller

If you purchased a service contract for your Avaya product from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

25

Customer service

Getting technical support from the Avaya Web site

The easiest and most effective way to get technical support for Avaya products is from the Avaya Technical Support Web site at www.avaya.com/support.

26

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 3: Introduction

Subject
This document describes the circuit cards supported for Avaya Communication Server 1000 (Avaya CS 1000).

Note on legacy products and releases

This technical publication contains information about systems, components, and features that are compatible with Avaya CS 1000 software. For more information about legacy products and releases, click Documentation, under Support on the Avaya home page: www.avaya.com

Applicable systems
This document applies to the following systems: Avaya Communication Server 1000E (Avaya CS 1000E) Avaya Communication Server 1000M Single Group (Avaya CS 1000M SG) Avaya Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (Avaya CS 1000M MG)

System migration
When particular Meridian 1 systems are upgraded to run Avaya CS 1000 Release 7.0 software and configured to include a Signaling Server, they become Communication Server 1000 systems. Table 1: Meridian 1 systems to Avaya CS 1000 systems on page 28 lists each Meridian 1 system that supports an upgrade path to a Communication Server 1000 system.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

27

Introduction

Table 1: Meridian 1 systems to Avaya CS 1000 systems

This Meridian 1 system Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet Meridian 1 PBX 61C Meridian 1 PBX 81C Maps to Avaya Communication Server 1000 system Avaya Communication Server 1000E Avaya Communication Server 1000E Avaya Communication Server 1000M Single Group Avaya Communication Server 1000M Multi Group

For more information, see: Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Upgrades Overview, NN43021-458 Avaya Communication Server 1000E Software Upgrades , NN43041-458, Avaya Communication Server 1000E Upgrade Hardware Upgrade Procedures , NN43041-464

Intended audience
This document is intended for individuals responsible for maintaining Communication Server 1000 and Meridian 1 systems.

Conventions
Terminology
In this document, the following systems are referred to generically as system: Avaya Communication Server 1000E (Avaya CS 1000E) Avaya Communication Server 1000M (Avaya CS 1000M) Meridian 1 Unless specifically stated otherwise, the term Element Manager refers to the Communication Server 1000 Element Manager.

28

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Related information

In this document, the Media Gateway 1000E (MG 1000E) and Media Gateway 1010 (MG 1010) are referred to generically as Media Gateway. The following systems are referred to generically as Media Gateway: MG 1000E chassis (NTDK91) and Expander chassis (NTDK92) - legacy hardware MG 1000E cabinet (NTAK11) - legacy hardware MG 1000E chassis (NTDU14) and Expander chassis (NTDU15) MG 1010 chassis (NTC310)

Related information
This section lists information sources that relate to this document.

Technical documentation
This document references the following technical documents: Features and Services Fundamentals, NN43001-106 Unified Communications Management Common Services Fundamentals, NN43001-116 IP Peer Networking Installation and Commissioning, NN43001-313 Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning, NN43001-315 Hospitality Features Fundamentals, NN43001-553

Online
To access Avaya documentation online, click the Documentation link under Support on the Avaya home page: www.avaya.com

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

29

Introduction

30

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 4: Overview

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Line cards on page 32 Installation on page 33 Operation on page 34 Analog line interface units on page 38 Digital line interface units on page 40 Analog line call operation on page 42 Digital line call operation on page 45 Lineside T1 and E1 call operation on page 46 Voice frequency audio level on page 54 Off-premise line protection on page 54 Line protectors on page 55 Line protection grounding on page 55 Line and telephone components on page 56 Trunk cards on page 56 Host interface bus on page 59 Trunk interface unit on page 64 Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards on page 65 Uses on page 66 Features on page 66 Specifications on page 67 Installation on page 68 Maintenance on page 68

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

31

Overview

Line cards
The following line cards are designed using the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) architecture and are recommended for use in all new system designs. Each of the line cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Table 2: Line card characteristics on page 32 lists the line card characteristics. Table 2: Line card characteristics
Part Number NT1R20 Description Off-premise station analog line card Lineside T1 Interface card Lineside E1 Interface card Digital Line card (16 voice/16 data) Analog Message Waiting Line card Lines 8 Line Type Analo g Message Waiting Interrupted dial tone Supervised Architecture Analog Lines Yes IPE

NT5D11

24

T1

None

Yes

IPE

NT5D33/ 34 NT8D02

30

E1

None

Yes

IPE

16

Digital

Message waiting signal forwarded to digital phone for display Lamp

No

IPE

NT8D09

16

Analo g

No

IPE

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line card is an intelligent eight-channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-wire analog terminal equipment such as analog (500/2500type) telephones and analog modems. Each line has integral hazardous and surge voltage protection to protect the system from damage due to lightning strikes and accidental power line connections. This card is normally used whenever the phone lines leave the building in which the switch is installed. The OPS line card supports message waiting notification by interrupting the dial tone when the receiver is first picked up. It also provides battery reversal

32

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Line cards

answer and disconnect analog line supervision and hook flash disconnect analog line supervision features.

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 interface card

The NT5D11/14 Lineside T1 Interface card is an intelligent 24-channel digital line card that is used to connect the switch to T1-compatible terminal equipment on the lineside. The T1compatible terminal equipment includes voice mail systems, channel banks containing FXS cards, and key systems such as the Avaya. The Lineside T1 card differs from trunk T1 cards in that it supports terminal equipment features such as hook-flash, transfer, hold, and conference. It emulates an analog line card to the system software.

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface card

The NT5D33/34 Lineside E1 Interface card is an intelligent 30-channel digital line card that is used to connect the switch to E1-compatible terminal equipment on the lineside. The E1compatible terminal equipment includes voice mail systems. The lineside E1 card emulates an analog line card to the system software.

NT8D02 Digital Line card

The NT8D02 Digital Line card is an intelligent 16-channel digital line card that provides voice and data communication links between Avaya Communication Server (Avaya CS )1000E, Avaya CS 1000M, and Meridian 1switch and modular digital telephones. Each of the 16 channels support voice-only or simultaneous voice and data service over a single twisted pair of standard telephone wire.

NT8D09 analog message waiting line card

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is an intelligent 16-channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-wire terminal equipment such as analog (500/2500-type) telephones, modems, and key systems. This card can also provide a high-voltage, lowcurrent signal on the Tip and Ring pair of each line to light the message waiting lamp on phones equipped with that feature.

Installation
This section provides a high-level description of how to install and test line cards.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

33

Overview

IPE line cards can be installed in any slot of the NT8D37 IPE module. Figure 1: IPE line cards shown installed in an NT8D37 IPE module on page 34 shows where an IPE line card can be installed in an NT8D37 IPE module.

Figure 1: IPE line cards shown installed in an NT8D37 IPE module

When installing line cards, follow these general procedures: 1. Configure the jumpers and switches on the line card (if any) to meet system needs. 2. Install the line card into the selected slot. 3. Install the cable that connects the backplane connector on the IPE module to the module I/O panel. 4. Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF). 5. Connect the line card output to the selected terminal equipment at the MDF. 6. Configure the individual line interface unit using the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10 for analog line interface units and Multiline Telephone Administration program LD 11 for digital line interface units. Once these steps are complete, the terminal equipment is ready for use.

Operation
This section describes how line cards fit into the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 architecture, the busses that carry signals to and from the line cards, and how they connect to terminal equipment. These differences are summarized in Table 3: IPE module architecture on page 35.

34

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Line cards

Host interface bus

Cards based on the IPE bus use a built-in microcontroller. The IPE microcontroller is used to do the following: perform local diagnostics (self-test) configure the card according to instructions issued by the system report back to the system information such as card identification (type, vintage, and serial number), firmware version, and programmed configuration status) Table 3: IPE module architecture
Parameter Card Dimensions Network Interface Communication Interface Microcontroller Peripheral Interface card Network Interface card Modules IPE 31.75 x 25.4 x 2.2 cm (12.5 x 10.0 x 0.875 in.). DS-30X Loops card LAN Link 8031/8051 Family NT8D01 Controller card NT8D04 Superloop Network card NT8D37 IPE module

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

IPE line cards all share a similar architecture. Figure 2: Typical IPE analog line card architecture on page 36 shows a typical IPE line card architecture. The various line cards differ only in the number and types of line interface units. The switch communicates with IPE modules over two separate interfaces. Voice and signaling data are sent and received over DS-30X loops, and maintenance data is sent over a separate asynchronous communication link called the card LAN link. Signaling data is information directly related to the operation of the telephone line. Some examples of signaling commands include: off-hook/on-hook ringing signal on/off message waiting lamp on/off Maintenance data is data relating to the configuration and operation of the IPE card, and is carried on the card LAN link. Some examples of maintenance data include: polling reporting of self-test status

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

35

Overview

CP initiated card reset reporting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage) reporting of firmware version downloading line interface unit parameters reporting of line interface unit configuration enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop bus reporting of card status or T1 link status

Figure 2: Typical IPE analog line card architecture

DS-30X loops
The line interfaces provided by the line cards connect to conventional 2-wire (tip and ring) line facilities. IPE analog line cards convert the incoming analog voice and signaling information to digital form and route it to the Call Server over DS-30X network loops. Conversely, digital

36

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Line cards

voice and signaling information from the Call Server is sent over DS-30X network loops to the analog line cards where it is converted to analog form and applied to the line facility. IPE digital line cards receive the data from the digital phone terminal as 512 kHz Time Compressed Multiplexed (TCM) data. The digital line card converts that data to a format compatible with the DS-30X loop and transmits it in the next available timeslot. When a word is received from the DS-30X loop, the digital line card converts it to the TCM format and transmits it to the digital phone terminal over the digital line facility. A separate dedicated DS-30X network loop is extended between each IPE line/trunk card and the controller cards within an IPE module. A DS-30X network loop is composed of two synchronous serial data buses. One bus transports in the Transmit (Tx) direction towards the line facility and the other in the Receive (Rx) direction towards the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1. Each bus has 32 channels for Pulse Code Modulated (PCM) voice data. Each channel consists of a 10-bit word. See Figure 3: DS-30X loop data format on page 37. Eight of the 10 bits are for PCM data, one bit is the call signaling bit, and the last bit is a data valid bit. The eightbit PCM portion of a channel is called a timeslot. The DS-30X loop is clocked at 2.56 Mbps (one-half the 5.12 MHz clock frequency supplied by the controller card). The timeslot repetition rate for a single channel is 8 kHz. The controller card also supplies a locally generated 1 kHz frame sync signal for channel synchronization. Signaling data is transmitted to and from the line cards using the call signaling bit within the 10-bit channel. When the line card detects a condition that the switch needs to know about, it creates a 24-bit signaling word. This word is shifted out on the signaling bit for the associated channel one bit at a time during 24 successive DS-30X frames. Conversely, when the switch sends signaling data to the line card, it is sent as a 24-bit word divided among 24 successive DS-30X frames.

Figure 3: DS-30X loop data format

DS-30Y network loops extend between controller cards and superloop network cards in the Common Equipment (CE). They function in a manner similar to DS-30X loops. See Figure 5: Digital line interface unit block diagram on page 41. A DS-30Y loop carries the PCM timeslot traffic of a DS-30X loop. Four DS-30Y network loops form a superloop with a capacity of 128 channels (120 usable timeslots). See Avaya

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

37

Overview

Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Planning and Engineering (NN43021-220) for more information about superloops.

Card LAN link

Maintenance communication is the exchange of control and status data between IPE line or trunk cards and the Call Server by way of the NT8D01 Controller card. Maintenance data is transported through the card LAN link. This link is composed of two asynchronous serial buses (called the Async card LAN link in Figure 2: Typical IPE analog line card architecture on page 36). The output bus is used by the system controller for output of control data to the line card. The input bus is used by the system controller for input of line card status data. A card LAN link bus is common to all of the line/trunk card slots within an IPE module. This bus is arranged in a master/slave configuration where the controller card is the master and all other cards are slaves. The module backplane provides each line/trunk card slot with a unique hardwired slot address. This slot address enables a slave card to respond when addressed by the controller card. The controller card communicates with only one slave at a time. In normal operation, the controller card continually scans (polls) all of the slave cards connected to the card LAN to monitor their presence and operational status. The slave card sends replies to the controller on the input bus along with its card slot address for identification. In its reply, the slave informs the controller if any change in card status has taken place. The controller can then prompt the slave for specific information. Slaves only respond when prompted by the controller; they do not initiate exchange of control or status data on their own. When an IPE line card is first plugged into the backplane, it runs a self-test. When the selftest is completed, a properly functioning card responds to the next controller card poll with the self-test status. The controller then queries for card identification and other status information. The controller then downloads all applicable configuration data to the line card, initializes it, and puts it into an operational mode.

Analog line interface units

Once the 8-bit digital voice signal is received by the analog line card, it must be converted back into an analog signal, filtered, converted from a 4-wire transmission path to a 2-wire transmission path, and driven onto the analog telephone line. Figure 4: Typical analog line interface unit block diagram on page 39 shows a typical example of the logic that performs these functions. Each part of the analog line interface unit is discussed in the following section.

38

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Line cards

Figure 4: Typical analog line interface unit block diagram

Coder/Decoder circuit
The Coder/Decoder (CODEC) performs Analog to Digital (A/D) and Digital to Analog (D/A) conversion of the line analog voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either the A-Law or the -Law companding algorithm. On some analog line cards, the decoding algorithm depends of the type of CODEC installed when the board is built. On others, it is an option selected using a software overlay.

Variable gain filters

Audio signals received from the analog phone line are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic filter that limits the frequency spread of the input signal to a nominal 200 to 3400 Hz bandwidth. The audio signal is then applied to the input of the CODEC. Audio signals coming from the CODEC are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic filter that integrates the amplitude modulated pulses coming from the CODEC, and then filters and amplifies the result. On some of the line cards, the gain of these filters can be programmed by the system controller. This allows the system to make up for line losses according to the loss plan.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

39

Overview

Balancing network
Depending on the card type, the balancing network provides a 600 , 900 , 3COM or 3CM2 impedance matching network. It also converts the 2-wire transmission path (tip and ring) to a 4-wire transmission path (Rx/ground and Tx/ground). The balancing network is usually a transformer/analog (hybrid) circuit combination, but can also be a monolithic Subscriber Line Interface Circuit (SLIC) on the newer line cards.

Line interface and foreign voltage protection

The line interface unit connects the balancing network to the telephone tip and ring pairs. The off-premise line card (NT1R20) has circuitry that protects the line card from foreign voltage surges caused by accidental power line connections and lightning surges. This protection is necessary if the telephone line leaves the building where the switch is installed. The line interface unit has a relay that applies the ringing voltage onto the phone line. See Figure 4: Typical analog line interface unit block diagram on page 39. The RSYNC signal from the 20 Hz (nominal) ringing voltage power supply is used to prevent switching of the relay during the current peak. This eliminates switching glitches and extends the life of the switching relay. The off-hook detection circuit monitors the current draw on the phone line. When the current draw exceeds a preset value, the circuit generates an off-hook signal that is transmitted back to the system controller. The message waiting circuit on message waiting line cards monitors the status of the message waiting signal and applies 150 V dc power to the tip lead when activated. This voltage is used to light the message waiting lamps on phones that are equipped with that feature. The high voltage supply is automatically disconnected when the phone goes off-hook. Newer line cards can sense when the message waiting lamp is not working and can report that information back to the system controller.

Digital line interface units

The NT8D02 Digital Line card provides voice and data communication links between a switch and modular digital telephones. These lines carry multiplexed PCM voice, data and signaling information as Time Compression Multiplexed (TCM) loops. Each TCM loop can be connected to an Avaya "Meridian Modular Digital" telephone. The digital line interface card contains one or more digital line interface units. See Figure 5: Digital line interface unit block diagram on page 41. Each digital line interface unit contains a Digital Line Interface Circuit (DLIC). The purpose of each DLIC is to demultiplex data from the DS-30X Tx channel into integrated voice and data bitstreams and transmit those bitstreams as Bi-Polar Return to Zero, Alternate Mark Inversion (BPRZ-AMI) data to the TCM loop. It also

40

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Line cards

does the opposite: receives BPRZ-AMI bitstreams from the TCM loop and multiplexes the integrated voice and data bitstream onto the DS-30X Rx channel. The 4-wire to 2-wire conversion circuit converts the 2-wire tip and ring leads into a 4-wire (Tx and ground and RX and ground) signal that is compatible with the digital line interface circuit.

TCM loop interfaces

Each digital phone line terminates on the digital line card at a TCM loop interface circuit. The circuit provides transformer coupling and foreign voltage protection between the TCM loop and the digital line interface circuit. It also provides power for the digital telephone.

Figure 5: Digital line interface unit block diagram

To prevent undesirable side effects from occurring when the TCM loop interface cannot provide the proper signals on the digital phone line, the system controller can remove the 15 V dc power supply from the TCM loop interface. This happens when either the card gets a command from the NT8D01 Controller card to shut down the channel, or when the digital line card detects a loss of the 1 KHz frame synchronization signal. Each TCM loop interface circuit can service loops up to 3500 ft. in length when using 24 gauge wire. The circuit allows for a maximum ac signal loss of 15.5 dB at 256 KHz and a maximum DC loop resistance of 210 ohms.

Signaling
The digital line interface units also contain signaling and control circuits that establish, monitor, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the system controller to operate the digital line interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

41

Overview

from the controller and return incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X network loop.

Analog line call operation

The applications, features, and signalling arrangements for each line interface unit are configured in software and implemented on the card through software download messages. When an analog line interface unit is idle, it provides a voltage near ground on the tip lead and a voltage near 48 V dc on the ring lead to the near-end station. (The near-end station is the telephone or device that is connected to the analog line card by the tip and ring leads.) An on-hook telephone presents a high impedance toward the line interface unit on the card.

Incoming calls
Incoming calls to a telephone that is connected to an analog line card can originate either from stations that are local (served by the PBX), or remote (served through the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)). The alerting signal to a telephone is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing. When an incoming call is answered by the near-end station going off-hook, a low-resistance dc loop is placed across the tip and ring leads (towards the analog line card) and ringing is tripped. See Figure 6: Call connection sequence - near-end station receiving call on page 43.

Outgoing calls
For outgoing calls from the near-end station, a line interface unit is seized when the station goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads towards the analog line card. See Figure 7: Call connection sequence - near-end originating call on page 44. When the card detects the low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits. When the system is ready to receive digits, it returns dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the near-end station in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones.

42

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Line cards

Figure 6: Call connection sequence - near-end station receiving call

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

43

Overview

Figure 7: Call connection sequence - near-end originating call

Message waiting
Line cards that are equipped with the message waiting feature receive notification that a message is waiting across the Card LAN link (IPE cards). On cards that drive a message waiting light, the light is turned on by connecting the ring side of the telephone line to the 150 V dc power supply. When the line card senses that the telephone is off-hook, it removes

44

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Line cards

the 150 V dc voltage until the telephone goes back on-hook. Line cards that use an interrupted dial tone to indicate message waiting do nothing until the receiver is picked up. The line card then interrupts the dial tone at a regular interval to indicate that a message is waiting. In both cases, the message waiting indication continues until the user checks his or her messages. At that time, the system cancels the message waiting indication by sending another message across the Card LAN link or network loop.

Analog line supervision

Analog line supervision features are used to extend the answer supervision and disconnect supervision signals when the line card is connected to an intelligent terminal device (Key system or intelligent pay phone). Two types of analog line supervision are provided: battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision hook flash disconnect supervision

Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision

Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision is only used for calls that originate from the terminal device. It provides both far-end answer supervision and far-end disconnect supervision signals to the terminal device. In an intelligent pay phone application, these signals provide the information necessary to accurately compute toll charges. In the idle state, and during dialing and ringing at the far end, the line card provides a ground signal on the tip lead and battery on the ring lead. See Figure 8: Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision sequence on page 47. When the far-end answers, these polarities are reversed. The reversed battery connection is maintained as long as the call is established. When the far-end disconnects, the system sends a message that causes the line card to revert the battery and ground signals to the normal state to signal that the call is complete.

Hook Flash disconnect supervision

Hook flash disconnect supervision is only used for incoming calls that terminate at the terminal device (typically a Key system). See Figure 9: Hook flash disconnect supervision sequence on page 48. The disconnect signal is indicated by the removal of the ground connection to the tip lead for a specific length of time. The length of time is programmed in LD10, and ranges from a minimum of 10 milliseconds to a maximum of 2.55 seconds. See Avaya Software Input/ Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for more information.

Digital line call operation

Digital line call operation is controlled entirely by use of messages between the digital telephone and the system. These messages are carried across the TCM loop interface. There is no call connection sequence similar to the one used for analog telephone line operation.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

45

Overview

Lineside T1 and E1 call operation

The lineside T1/E1 card's call operation is performed differently depending on whether the T1/ E1 link is configured to process calls in loop start mode or ground start mode. Configuration is performed through dip switch settings on the lineside T1/E1 card. The lineside T1/E1 card performs calls processing separately on each of its 24 channels. Signaling is performed using the "A/B robbed bit" signaling standard for T1/E1 communication. A/B robbed bit signaling simulates standard analog signaling by sending a meaningful combination of ones and zeros across the line that correlates to the electrical impulses that standard analog signaling sends. For example, to represent that an analog line interface unit is idle, the analog line card provides a ground on the tip lead and 48Vdc on the ring lead. The lineside T1/E1 card accomplishes the same result by sending its A bit as 0 (translated as ground on the tip lead) and its B bit as 1 (translated as 48V dc on the ring lead). However, measuring the voltage of the ring lead on the T1/E1 line would not return 48V dc, because actual electrical impulses are not being sent.

46

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Line cards

Figure 8: Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision sequence

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

47

Overview

Figure 9: Hook flash disconnect supervision sequence

Call operation is described by categorizing the operation into the following main states: Idle (on-hook) Incoming calls Outgoing calls Calls disconnected by the CO Calls disconnected by the telephone

48

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Line cards

Loop Start Mode

In Loop Start mode, the A and B bits meaning is: Transmit from LTI:A bit = 0 (tip ground on); B bit = Ringing (0=on, 1=off) Receive to LTI: A bit = Loop (0=open, 1=closed); B bit = 1 (no ring ground) When a T1 channel is idle, the Lineside T1 card simulates a ground on the tip lead and 48Vdc on the ring lead to the terminal equipment by setting its transmit A bit to 0 and transmit B bit to 1. Accordingly, an on-hook channel on the terminal equipment simulates an open loop toward the Lineside T1 card, causing the Lineside T1 card's receive bits to be set to A = 0 and receive B = 1.

Incoming calls
Incoming calls to terminal equipment attached to the Lineside T1 card can originate either from stations that are local (served by the PBX), or remote (served through the PSTN). To provide the ringing signal to a telephone the Lineside T1 card simulates an additional 90V on the ring lead to the terminal equipment by alternating the transmit B bit between 0 and 1 (0 during ring on, 1 during ring off). When an incoming call is answered by the terminal equipment going offhook, the terminal equipment simulates tripping the ringing and shutting off ringing, causing the Lineside T1 card's receive A bit to be changed from 0 to 1.

Outgoing calls
During outgoing calls from the terminal equipment, a channel is seized when the station goes off-hook. This simulates a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the Lineside T1 card, causing the lineside T1's receive A bit to be changed from 0 to 1. This bit change prepares the Lineside T1 to receive digits. Outward address signaling is then applied from the terminal equipment in the form of DTMF tones or loop (interrupting) dial pulses that are signaled by the receive A bit pulsing between 1 and 0.

Call disconnect from far end PSTN, private network or local Station
When a call is in process, the central office may disconnect the call from the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1. If the Lineside T1 port is configured with the supervised analog line (SAL) feature, the Lineside T1 card responds to the distant end disconnect message by momentarily changing its transmit A bit to 1 and then returning it to 0. The duration of time that the transmit A bit remains at 1 before returning to 0 depends upon the setting that was configured using the SAL. If the terminal equipment is capable of detecting distant end disconnect, it responds by changing the Lineside T1 card's receive A bit to 0 (open loop). The call is now terminated and the interface is in the idle (on-hook) state. For the Lineside T1 card to support distant end disconnect in loop start mode, the following configuration parameters must exist: The Supervised Analog Line (SAL) feature must be configured for each Lineside T1 port. Note: By default, the SAL feature opens the tip side for 750 m/s in loop start operation. This is configurable in 10 m/s increments. For outgoing trunk calls, the trunk facility must provide far end disconnect supervision.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

49

Overview

To detect distant end disconnect for calls originating on the Lineside T1 card, the battery reversal feature within the SAL software must be enabled. Enabling the battery reversal feature does not provide battery reversal indication but only provides a momentary interruption of the tip ground by asserting the A bit to 1 for the specified duration. To detect distant end disconnect for calls terminating on the Lineside T1 card, the hook flash feature within the SAL software must be enabled. To detect distant end disconnect for calls originating and terminating on the Lineside T1 card, both the battery reversal and hook flash features must be enabled within the SAL software.

Call disconnect from Lineside T1 terminal equipment

Alternatively, while a call is in process, the terminal equipment may disconnect by going onhook. The terminal equipment detects no loop current and sends signaling to the Lineside T1 card that causes its receive A bit to change from 1 to 0. The call is now released. Table 4: Loop Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings on page 50 outlines the lineside T1's A and B bit settings in each state of call processing. Table 4: Loop Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings
Transmit State Idle Incoming Calls: Idle Ringing is applied from Lineside T1 card Terminal equipment goes off-hook Lineside T1 card stops ringing Outgoing Calls: Idle Terminal equipment goes off-hook Call Disconnect from far end: Steady state (call in progress) Far end disconnects by dropping loop current and Lineside T1 card changes Transmit A bit to 1 momentarily. Terminal equipment responds causing Receive A bit to change to 0. 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1/0 1/0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 A 0 B 1 Receive A 0 B 1

50

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Line cards

Transmit State Lineside T1 responds by changing its Transmit A bit to 0. Call is terminated and set to idle state. Call disconnect from terminal equipment: Steady state (call in progress) Terminal equipment goes on-hook causing the Receive A bit to change to 0. Call is terminated and set to idle state. 0 0 1 1 A 0 B 1

Receive A 0 B 1

1 0

1 1

Ground Start Mode

In Ground Start mode, the A and B bits meaning is: Transmit from LTI:A bit = Tip ground (0=grounded, 1=not grounded); B bit = Ringing (0=on, 1=off) Receive to LTI: A bit = Loop (0=open, 1=closed); B bit = Ring ground (0=grounded, 1=not grounded) When a T1 channel is idle, the Lineside T1 card simulates a ground on the tip lead and -48V dc on the ring lead to the terminal equipment by setting the transmit A bit to 1 and transmit B bit to 1. Accordingly, an on-hook telephone simulates an open loop toward the Lineside T1 card, causing the Lineside T1 card's receive bits to be set to A = 0 and B = 1.

Incoming Calls
Incoming calls to terminal equipment that is connected to the Lineside T1 card can originate either from stations that are local (served by the PBX), or remote (served through the public switched telephone network). To provide the ringing signal to the terminal equipment the Lineside T1 card simulates the 90V ring signal on the ring lead by alternating the transmit B bit between 0 and 1 (0 during ring on, 1 during ring off), and ground on the tip lead by setting the transmit A bit to 0. When an incoming call is answered (by the terminal equipment going off-hook), the terminal equipment simulates tripping the ringing and shutting off ringing by causing the lineside T1's receive A bit to change from 0 to 1. The Lineside T1 card responds to this message by simulating loop closure by holding the transmit B bit constant at 1.

Outgoing Calls
During outgoing calls from the terminal equipment, a channel is seized when the terminal equipment goes off-hook, simulating a ground to the ring lead toward the Lineside T1 card by causing the lineside T1's receive B bit to change from 1 to 0. In turn, the Lineside T1 card simulates grounding its tip lead by changing the transmit A bit to 0. The terminal equipment responds to this message by removing the ring ground (lineside T1's receive B bit is changed to 1) and simulating open loop at the terminal equipment (lineside T1's receive A bit is changed to 0).

Call disconnect from far end PSTN, private network or local station
While a call is in process, the far end might disconnect the call. If the Lineside T1 port is configured with the Supervised Analog Line (SAL) feature, the Lineside T1 responds to the

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

51

Overview

distant end disconnect message by opening tip ground. This causes the Lineside T1 card to change the transmit A bit to 1. When the terminal equipment sees the transmit A bit go to 1, it responds by simulating open loop causing the lineside T1's receive A bit to change to 0. The call is terminated and the interface is once again in the idle condition. For the Lineside T1 card to support distant end disconnect in ground start mode, the following configuration parameters must exist: The Supervised Analog Line (SAL) feature must be configured for each Lineside T1 port. Note: By default, the SAL feature opens the tip side for 750 m/s in loop start operation. This is configurable in 10 m/s increments. To detect distant end disconnect for calls originating on the Lineside T1 card, the "battery reversal" feature within the SAL software must be enabled. Enabling the battery reversal feature does not provide battery reversal indication when a call is answered; it only provides battery reversal indication when a call is disconnected. To detect distant end disconnect for calls terminating on the Lineside T1 card, the "hook flash" feature within the SAL software must be enabled. To detect distant end disconnect for calls originating and terminating on the Lineside T1 card, both the "battery reversal" and "hook flash" features within the SAL software must be enabled.

Call disconnect from Lineside T1 terminal equipment

Alternatively, while a call is in process, the terminal equipment may disconnect by going onhook, causing the lineside T1's receive A bit to change to 0. The Lineside T1 card responds to this message by simulating the removal of ground from the tip by changing its transmit A bit to 1. The call is now terminated and the interface is once again in the idle condition. Table 5: Ground Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings on page 52 outlines the lineside T1's A and B bit settings in each state of call processing. Table 5: Ground Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings
Transmit State Idle Incoming Calls (to terminal equipment): Idle Ringing is applied from Lineside T1 card by simulating ground on tip lead and ringing on ring lead. Terminal equipment goes off-hook by simulating ground on tip lead and ringing on ring lead. Outgoing Calls (from terminal equipment): 1 0 1 0/1 0 0 1 1 A 1 B 1 Receive A 0 B 1

0/1

52

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Line cards

Transmit State Idle Terminal equipment goes off-hook. The Lineside T1 simulates grounding its tip lead Terminal equipment opens ring ground and closes loop Call Disconnect from far end: Steady state (call in progress) The Lineside T1 ungrounds tip Terminal equipment opens loop current Call disconnect from terminal equipment: Steady state (call in progress) Terminal equipment goes open loop current Lineside T1 card opens tip ground 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 A 1 1 0 0 B 1 1 1 1

Receive A 0 0 0 1 B 1 0 0 1

1 1 0

1 1 1

1 0 0

1 1 1

Ground Start Restrictions

If the Lineside T1 card is used in ground start mode, certain restrictions should be considered. Because the system treats the Lineside T1 card as a standard loop start analog line card, the ground start operation of the Lineside T1 card has operational limitations compared to typical ground start interface equipment relating to start of dialing, distant end disconnect and glare potential.

Distant end disconnect restrictions

If the SAL feature is not available in the CS 1000 software, the Lineside T1 card is not capable of indicating to the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) when a call is terminated by the distant end. In this case, the Lineside T1 card continues to provide a grounded tip indication (A=0) to the CPE until it detects an open loop indication (A=0) from the CPE, at which time it provides an open tip indication (A=1). Therefore, without SAL software, the Lineside T1 card is not capable of initiating the termination of a call to the CPE. With the SAL software configured for each Lineside T1 line, the Lineside T1 card provides an open tip indication to the CPE when it receives an indication of supervised analog line from the system. This provides normal ground start protocol call termination.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

53

Overview

Glare restrictions
In telephone lines or trunks, glare occurs when a call origination attempt results in the answering of a terminating call that is being presented by the far end simultaneously with the call origination attempt by the near end. The Lineside T1 detects presentation of a terminating call (outgoing to Lineside T1 terminal equipment) by detecting ringing voltage. If application of the ringing voltage is delayed due to traffic volume and ringing generator capacity overload, the Lineside T1 ground start operation cannot connect the tip side to ground to indicate the line is seized by the system. In ground start mode, glare conditions need to be considered if both incoming and outgoing calls to the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) are going to be encountered. If the system and the CPE simultaneously attempt to use a Lineside T1 line, the system completes the call termination. It does not back down and allow the CPE to complete the call origination, as in normal ground start operation. If both incoming and outgoing calls are to be handled through the Lineside T1 interface, separate channels should be configured in the system and the CPE for each call direction. This eliminates the possibility of glare conditions on call origination.

Voice frequency audio level

The digital pad for Lineside T1 card audio level is fixed for all types of call connection (0 dB insertion loss in both directions), and differs from the analog line. Audio level adjustments, if required, must be made in the Lineside T1 terminal equipment.

Off-premise line protection

Off-premise applications are installations where the telephone lines are extended outside the building where the PBX system is housed, but the lines are not connected to public access facilities. This application is commonly referred to as a "campus installation." In off-premise applications, special protection devices and grounding are required to protect PBX and telephone components from any abnormal conditions, such as lightning strikes and power line crosses. The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Line card has built-in protection against lightning strikes and power line crosses. These should be the preferred cards for an off-premise application. Other cards can be used when external line protectors are installed. When using the Lineside T1 card for an off-premise or network application, external line protectors must be installed. Install an isolated type Channel Service Unit (CSU) as part of the terminal equipment, to provide the necessary isolation and outside line protection. The CSU should be an FCC part 68 or CSA certified unit.

54

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Line cards

Line protectors
Line protectors are voltage-absorbing devices that are installed at the cross-connect terminals at both the main building and the remote building. The use of line protectors ensure that system and telephone components are not damaged from accidental voltages that are within the limit of the capacity of the protection device. Absolute protection from lightning strikes and other stray voltages cannot be guaranteed, but the use of line protection devices significantly reduces the possibility of damage. Avaya has tested line protection devices from three manufacturers. See Table 6: Line protection device ordering information on page 55. Each manufacturer offers devices for protection of digital as well as analog telephone lines. Table 6: Line protection device ordering information
Device order code Analog Line UP2S-235 Digital Line UP2S-75 Manufacturer ITW Linx Communication 201 Scott Street Elk Grove Village, IL 60007 (708) 952-8844 or (800) 336-5469 Oneac Corporation 27944 North Bradley Road Libertyville, IL 60048-9700 (800) 553-7166 or (800) 327-8801 x555 EDCO Inc. of Florida 1805 N.E. 19th Avenue P.O. Box 1778 Ocala, FL 34478 (904) 732-3029 or (800) 648-4076

6AP

6DP

ESP-200

ESP-050

These devices are compatible with 66 type M1-50 split blocks or equivalent. Consult the device manufacturer if more specific compatibility information is required.

Line protection grounding

In conjunction with line protectors, proper system (PBX) grounding is essential to minimize equipment damage. Avaya recommends following the grounding connection requirements as described in Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning, NN43021-310. This requirement includes connecting the ground for the protection devices to the approved building earth ground reference. Any variances to these grounding requirements could limit the functionality of the protection device.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

55

Overview

Line and telephone components

Because testing of the line protectors was limited to the line cards and telephones shown below, only these components should be used for off-premise installations.

Telephones
Meridian Modular Telephones (digital) Meridian Digital Telephones Standard analog (500/2500-type) telephones

Line cards
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Line card NT8D02 Digital Line card

Trunk cards
The following trunk cards are designed using the IPE architecture, and are recommended for use in all new system designs. Each of the trunk cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Use Table 7: Trunk card characteristics on page 56 to select the trunk card that meets system needs. Table 7: Trunk card characteristics
Part Number NT8D14 Description Universal Trunk card Trunk s 8 Trunk Types CO/FX/WATS trunks*, direct inward dial trunks, TIE trunks, Loop Dial Repeating trunks Recorded Announcement trunks, Paging trunks 2-wire E and M Trunks, 4wire E and M Trunks, 4wire DX trunks, Paging trunks Architectur e IPE

NT8D15

E and M Trunk card

IPE

56

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Trunk cards

Part Number NTCK16

Description Generic Central Office Trunk card

Trunk s 8

Trunk Types CO trunks

Architectur e IPE

* Central office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FX), and Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) trunks.

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is an intelligent four-channel trunk card that is designed to be used in a variety of applications. It supports the following five trunk types: Central office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FEX), and Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) trunks Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks TIE trunks: two-way Loop Dial Repeating (LDR) and two-way loop Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID) Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunks Paging (PAG) trunks The universal trunk card also supports Music, Automatic Wake Up, and Direct Inward System Access (DISA) features.

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card is an intelligent four-channel trunk card that is designed to be used when connecting to the following types of trunks: 2-wire E and M Type I signaling trunks 4-wire E and M Trunks with: - Type I or Type II signaling - Duplex (DX) signaling Paging (PAG) trunks The trunk type and function can be configured on a per port basis. Dialing outpulsing is provided on the card. Make and break ratios are defined in software and downloaded by software commands.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

57

Overview

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk card

The NTCK16 generic central office trunk cards support up to eight analog central office trunks. They can be installed in any IPE slot that supports IPE. The cards are available with or without the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) feature. The cards are also available in numerous countries.

Installation
This section provides a high-level description of how to install and test trunk cards. IPE trunk cards can be installed in any IPE slot of the NT8D37 IPE module. Figure 10: IPE trunk cards installed in an NT8D37 IPE module on page 58 shows where an IPE trunk card can be installed in an NT8D37 IPE module. When installing trunk cards, these general procedures should be used:

Installing a trunk card

1. Configure the jumpers and switches on the trunk card (if any) to meet the system needs. 2. Install the trunk card into the selected slot.

Figure 10: IPE trunk cards installed in an NT8D37 IPE module

3. Install the cable that connects the backplane connector on the IPE module to the module I/O panel. 4. Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).

58

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Trunk cards

5. Connect the trunk card output to the selected terminal equipment at the MDF. 6. Configure the individual trunk interface unit using the Trunk Administration program (LD 14) and the Trunk Route Administration program (LD 16). Once these steps are complete, the trunk card is ready for use.

Operation
This section describes how trunk cards fit into the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 architecture, the buses that carry signals to and from the trunk cards, and how they connect to terminal equipment. See Table 8: Differences between IPE parameters on page 59 for IPE parameters.

Host interface bus

Cards based on the IPE bus use a built-in microcontroller. The IPE microcontroller is used for the following: to perform local diagnostics (self-test) to configure the card according to instructions issued by the system processor to report back to the system processor information such as card identification (type, vintage, and serial number), firmware version, and programmed configuration status. Table 8: Differences between IPE parameters
Parameter Card Dimensions Network Interface Communication Interface Microcontroller Peripheral Interface card Network Interface card Modules IPE 31.75 x 25.4 x 2.2 cm. (12.5 x 10.0 x 0.875 in.) DS-30X Loops card LAN Link 8031 NT8D01 Controller card NT8D04 Superloop Network card NT8D37 IPE module

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

IPE trunk cards all share a similar architecture. Figure 11: Typical IPE trunk card architecture on page 60 shows a typical IPE trunk card architecture. The various trunk cards differ only in the number and types of trunk interface units.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

59

Overview

Figure 11: Typical IPE trunk card architecture

The switch communicates with IPE modules over two separate interfaces. Voice and signaling data are sent and received over DS-30X loops and maintenance data is sent over a separate asynchronous communication link called the card LAN link. Signaling data is information directly related to the operation of the telephone line or trunk. Some examples of signaling commands are as follows: off hook/on hook ringing signal on/off message waiting lamp on/off Maintenance data is data relating to the configuration and operation of the IPE card, and is carried on the card LAN link. Some examples of maintenance data are as follows: polling reporting of self-test status

60

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Trunk cards

CPU initiated card reset reporting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage) reporting of firmware version downloading trunk interface unit configuration reporting of trunk interface unit configuration enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop bus reporting of card status

DS-30X loops
The interfaces provided by the line and trunk cards connect to conventional 2-wire (tip and ring) line facilities. IPE analog line and trunk cards convert the incoming analog voice and signaling information to digital form, and route it to the Common Equipment (CE) CPU over DS-30X network loops. Conversely, digital voice and signaling information from the CPU is sent over DS-30X network loops to the analog line and trunk cards where it is converted to analog form and applied to the line or trunk facility. A separate dedicated DS-30X network loop is extended between each IPE line/trunk card and the controller cards within an IPE module (or the controller circuits on a network/DTR card in a CE module). A DS-30X network loop is composed of two synchronous serial data buses. One bus transports in the transmit (Tx) direction toward the line facility and the other in the receive (Rx) direction toward the common equipment. Each bus has 32 channels for pulse code modulated (PCM) voice data. Each channel consists of a 10-bit word. See Figure 12: DS-30X loop data format on page 62. Eight of the 10 bits are for PCM data, one bit is the call signaling bit, and the last bit is a data valid bit. The 8-bit PCM portion of a channel is called a timeslot . The DS-30X loop is clocked at 2.56 Mbps (one-half the 5.12 MHz clock frequency supplied by the controller card). The timeslot repetition rate for a single channel is 8 kHz. The controller card also supplies a locally generated 1 kHz frame sync signal for channel synchronization. Signaling data is transmitted to and from the trunk cards using the call signaling bit within the 10-bit channel. When the line card detects a condition that the switch needs to know about, it creates a 24-bit signaling word. This word is shifted out on the signaling bit for the associated channel one bit at a time during 24 successive DS-30X frames. Conversely, when the switch sends signaling data to the line card, it is sent as a 24-bit word divided among 24 successive DS-30X frames.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

61

Overview

Figure 12: DS-30X loop data format

DS-30Y network loops extend between controller cards and superloop network cards in the common equipment, and function in a manner similar to DS-30X loops. See Figure 13: Network connections to IPE modules on page 63. Essentially, a DS-30Y loop carries the PCM timeslot traffic of a DS-30X loop. Four DS-30Y network loops form a superloop with a capacity of 128 channels (120 usable timeslots). See Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Planning and Engineering (NN43021-220) for more information about superloops.

Card LAN link

Maintenance communication is the exchange of control and status data between IPE line or trunk cards and the CE CPU by way of the NT8D01 Controller Card. Maintenance data is transported via the card LAN link. This link is composed of two asynchronous serial buses (called the Async card LAN link in Figure 11: Typical IPE trunk card architecture on page 60). The output bus is used by the controller for output of control data to the trunk card. The input bus is used by the controller for input of trunk card status data.

62

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Trunk cards

Figure 13: Network connections to IPE modules

A card LAN link bus is common to all of the line/trunk card slots within an IPE module (or IPE section of a CE module). This bus is arranged in a master/slave configuration where the controller card is the master and all other cards are slaves. The module backplane provides each line/trunk card slot with a unique hardwired slot address. This slot address enables a slave card to respond when addressed by the controller card. The controller card communicates with only one slave at a time. In normal operation, the controller card continually scans (polls) all of the slave cards connected to the card LAN to monitor their presence and operational status. The slave card sends replies to the controller on the input bus along with its card slot address for identification. In this reply, the slave informs the controller if any change in card status is taken place. The controller can then prompt the slave for specific information. Slaves only respond when prompted by the controller; they do not initiate exchange of control or status data on their own. When an IPE line or trunk card is first plugged into the backplane, it runs a self-test. When the self test is completed, a properly functioning card responds to the next controller card poll with

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

63

Overview

the self-test status. The controller then queries for card identification and other status information. The controller then downloads all applicable configuration data to the line/trunk card, initializes it, and puts it into an operational mode. The network card regularly polls the IPE cards during TS0 to see if any of them has a message to be sent. When an IPE card has a message waiting it responds to the poll by sending a series of 1s during the next five successive timeslot 0s. The network card responds by sending a "message send enable" message (all 1s). The IPE card replies by sending 1, 1, 1, 0, and then the message in successive timeslot 0s.

Trunk interface unit

Once the 8-bit digital voice signal is received by the trunk card, it must be converted back into an analog signal, filtered, and driven onto the analog trunk line through an impedance matching and balance network. The trunk interface also includes the logic necessary to place outgoing call signaling onto the trunk, or the logic to connect to special services such as recorded announcement and paging equipment. Figure 14: Typical trunk interface unit block diagram on page 64 shows a typical example of the logic that performs these functions. Each part of the trunk interface unit is discussed in the following section.

Figure 14: Typical trunk interface unit block diagram

Coder/Decoder circuit
The coder/decoder (codec) performs Analog to Digital (A/D) and Digital to Analog (D/A) conversion of the line analog voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either the A-Law or the -Law companding algorithm. On some trunk cards the decoding algorithm depends of the type of codec installed when the board is built. On others, it is an option selected using a software overlay.

64

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards

Variable gain filters

Audio signals received from the analog phone trunk are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic filter that limits the frequency spread of the input signal to a nominal 2003400 Hz bandwidth. The audio signal is then applied to the input of the codec. Audio signals coming from the CODEC are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic filter that integrates the amplitude modulated pulses coming from the CODEC, and then filters and amplifies the result. On some of the trunk cards, the gain of these filters can be programmed by the system controller. This allows the system to make up for line losses according to the loss plan.

Balancing network
Depending on the card type, the balancing network is capable of providing either a 600 ohm or a 900 ohm (or both) impedance matching network. It also converts the 2-wire transmission path (tip and ring) to a 4-wire transmission path (Rx/ground and Tx/ground). The balancing network is a transformer/analog (hybrid) circuit combination.

Signaling circuits
Signaling circuits are relays that place outgoing call signaling onto the trunk. Signal detection circuits monitor the incoming call signaling.

Control signals
Control signals and logic are provided when the trunk is going to be connected to special services such as recorded announcement and paging equipment.

Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards

The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board provides four bidirectional asynchronous serial ports for the system processor, and the QPC841 QSDI card also provides four. Any device that conforms to the RS-232-C serial communication standard can be connected to these serial ports. The electrical interface uses either standard RS-232-C signals or a special high-speed interface that combines the high-speed differential interface of the RS-422-A standard with the handshake signals of the RS-232-C standard. The RS-232-C interface is normally used when data rates are less than 19.2 Kbps, and the cable length is less than 15.24 m (50 ft). The high-speed interface is used when the signal rates are greater than 19.2 kbps (up to 64 kbps) and/or when the cable length is greater than 15.24 m (50 ft). Table 9: Serial data interface cards on page 65 shows compatibility between the three SDI cards and the various switch options. Table 9: Serial data interface cards
Compatible System Options Card NT8D41BA Ports 4 Port types RS-232-C asynchronous 51C, 61C X 81C X

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

65

Overview

Compatible System Options Card QPC841 Ports 4 Port types RS-232-C asynchronous 51C, 61C X 81C X

The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board does not use a front panel. It mounts to the rear of the backplane in the NT5D21 Core/Network module, and does not consume a module slot. The RS-232-C connections are brought out through special cables to the backplane I/O panel. The QPC841 Quad SDI card mounts in standard backplane slots and its serial interface connectors are located on the card front panels. A list of the modules that can be mounted in is given in the section on the individual card.

Uses
Examples of asynchronous devices that can be connected to the system processor using the NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board and the QPC841 Quad SDI card are: an administration and maintenance terminal a background terminal for use in a hotel/motel the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature the Call Detail Recording (CDR) feature

Features
The NT8D41 QSDI paddle board and the QPC841 QSDI card provide the following features: asynchronous serial data interface ports, each supporting - RS-232-C interface - 8bit ASCII data with parity and stop bit - Asynchronous, start-stop operation - Data rates of 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600 baud - Data terminal equipment (DTE) emulation mode - Data communication equipment (DCE) emulation mode enable/disable switch and LED input/output (I/O) device address selectable by on-board switches.

66

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards

Specifications
This section lists the specifications shared by all of the SDI cards. See the appropriate section in this document for information specific to any particular card.

Power consumption
The SDI cards obtain their power directly from the module backplane. Power consumption for each of the cards is shown in Table 10: Power consumption on page 67. Table 10: Power consumption
Maximum power consumption Voltage +5 VDC 5% +12 VDC 5% 12 VDC 5% NT8D41BA 1.0 Amp 100 mA 100 mA QPC841 1.5 Amp 100 mA 100 mA

Environmental
The SDI cards operate without degradation under the conditions listed in Table 11: Environmental specifications on page 67. Table 11: Environmental specifications
Specification Ambient temperature Relative humidity (noncondensing) Altitude Operation 0 to 50C; (32 to 122F) 5% to 95% 3500m; (11 000 ft) Storage 55 to +70C; (58 to 158F) 0% to 95% 15 000m; (50 000 ft)

Electrostatic discharge
The SDI cards meet the requirements of the IEC 801-2, clause 8.0 procedure. They can withstand a direct discharge of 5 to 20 kV without being damaged.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

67

Overview

Electromagnetic interference
The CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 systems meet the requirements of FCC Part 15 and CSA C108.8 electromagnetic interference (EMI) standards as a class "A" computing device. To accomplish this, the SDI cables must exit the module through EMI filters on the I/ O panel.

Reliability
The Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) for all SDI cards is 55 years at 40C and 29 years at 55C.

Installation
To use a serial data interface card in a CS 1000E, CS 1000M, or Meridian 1 system, first install the card in the system, and then configure the system software to recognize it. These steps are discussed in the following sections. Instructions for cabling the serial data interface cards to the various system consoles and peripherals are found in Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310).

Configuring the system software

Once an SDI card is installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for the Configuration Record program are found in Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611).

Maintenance
The following maintenance programs are used to maintain individual SDI asynchronous ports. The program used depends on the application of the port. LD 37 Input/Output Diagnostics Used for system terminal, printer, background terminal ports, and system monitor status. LD 42 Call Detail Recording (CDR) Diagnostic For checking CDR links and CDR system terminals.

68

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards

The following maintenance program is used to maintain individual SDI synchronous ports. LD 48 Link Diagnostic For checking Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Meridian Link ports. Instructions for running the various maintenance programs are found in Avaya Software Input/ Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611). System messages are interpreted in Avaya Software Input/Output Reference System Messages (NN43001-712).

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

69

Overview

70

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 5: Circuit card installation

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Card slots - Large System on page 71 Circuit and installation on page 71 Precautions on page 74 Installing a circuit card on page 76

Card slots - Large System

The following table in this chapter identifies card slot compatibility in the following modules: NT4N41 Core/Network module required for CS 1000M SG, CS 1000M MG, Meridian 1 PBX 61C Call Processor (CP) PII, CP PIV, and Meridian 1 PBX 81C NT4N46 Core/Network module required for CS 1000M MG and Option 81C CP PII, CP PIV NT6D60 Core/Network module required for the CS 1000M MG and Option 81C only NT8D35 Network module required for CS 1000M MG and Meridian 1 81C NT8D37 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) module required for CS 1000M HG, CS 1000M SG, CS 1000M MG, Meridian 1 Option 51, Meridian 1 61C , and Meridian 1 81C

Circuit and installation

Table 12: Large System card slots
Component A0786611 Call Processor Pentium II card Large System 81C Core/Net: "CP"

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

71

Circuit card installation

Component A0810486 Call Processor Pentium II NT1P61 Fiber Superloop Network card NT1P62 Fiber Peripheral Controller card NT1R52 Remote Carrier Interface NT1R20 Off-Premise Station NT4D18 Hybrid Bus Terminator NT4D19 and NT423 Hybrid Bus Terminator NT4D20 and NT422 Hybrid Bus Terminator NT4N43 Multi-Medium DIsk Unit NT4N64 Call Processor Pentium II card NT4N64 Call Processor Pentium II card NT4N39 Call Processor Pentium IV card NT4N39 Call Processor Pentium IV card NT4N65 cPCI Core to Network Interface card NT4N66 cPCI Core to Network Interface Transition card NT4N67 System Utility card NT4N68 System Utility Transition card

Large System 81C Core/Net: "CP" Core/Net: 07 IPE: "Contr" IPE: "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" Core/Net: between 11 and 12 Core/Net: between 0 and 1 Core/Net: between 1 and 2 81C Core/Net: 61C Core/Net: CP PII 81C Core/Net: CP PII 61C Core/Net: CP PIV 81C Core/Net: CP PIV 81C Core/Net: c9c12 81C Core/Net cPCI Core backplane: 912 81C Core/Net: c15 81C Core/Net cPCI Core backplane:

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Line side T1 Line card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI card NT5D61 Input/Output Disk Unit with CDROM (MMDU) NT5K02 Analog Line card NT5K07 Universal Trunk card NT5K17 Direct Dial Inward Trunk card NT5K18 Central Office Trunk card NT5K19 E and M Trunk card NT5K35 D-channel Handler Interface NT5K36 Direct Inward/Direct Outward Dial Trunk card NT5K70 Central Office Trunk card NT5K71 Central Office Trunk card Core/Net: 07 61C Core/Net: 17, 18 and 19 IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" Core/Net: 0-7 Net: 5-12 IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr"

72

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Circuit and installation

Component NT5K72 E and M Trunk card NT5K82 Central Office Trunk card NT5K83 E and M Trunk card NT5K84 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card NT5K90 Central Office Trunk card NT5K93 Central Office Trunk card NT5K96 Analog Line card NT5K99 Central Office Trunk card NT5K20 Extended Tone Detector NT6D65 Core to Network Interface NT6D66 Call Processor card NT6D70 S/T Interface Line card NT6D71 U Interface Line card NT6D72 Basic Rate Signal Concentrator card NT6D73 Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor card NT6D80 MSDL NT7D16 Data Access card NT7R51 Local Carrier Interface NT8D01 Controller card NT8D02 Digital Line card NT8D04 Superloop Network card

Large System IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" 61C Core/Net: 12 61C Core/Net: 15 and 16 IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" Core/Net: 07 Core/Net: 07 IPE: any slot but "Contr" Core/Net: 07 IPE: "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" Core/Net: 07 Net: 5-12

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card IPE: any slot but "Contr" NT8D14 Universal Trunk card NT8D15 E and M Trunk card NT8D16 Digitone Receiver card NT8D17 Conference/TDS card IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" Core/Net: 07

NT8D41 Dual Port Serial Data Interface card Serial Port back of Core/Net module NT9D19 Call Processor card NTAG03 Central Office Trunk card 61C Core/Net: 15 and 16 IPE: any slot but "Contr"

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

73

Circuit card installation

Component NTAG04 Central Office/Direct Inward Dial Trunk card NTAG36 Avaya Integrated Recorded Announcer NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel daughterboard NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk card NTCK43AA Primary Rate Interface card NTRB33 FIber Junctor Interface card NTRE39 Optical Cable Management card QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card QPC71 E&M/DX Trunk card QPC414 Network card QPC441 3-Port Extender card QPC471 Clock Controller card

Large System IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: any slot but "Contr" Connects to DDP card IPE: any slot but "Contr" Core/Net: 0-7 Net: 5-11, 13-14 For 81C: Core/Net: 8 and 9, Net module: 2 and 3 For 81C: Net module: the slot to the right side of 14, the slot to the left of the 3PE in slot 1 Core/Net: 10 Net: 4 IPE: any slot but "Contr" Core/Net: 07 Net: 5-12 Core/Net: 11 Net: 1 61C Core/Net: 9 Net: 5 -12 For 81C, use NT8D35 Net slot 13; in QSD39 shelf, use Net slot 2; in QSD40 shelf, use slot 13 IPE: any slot but "Contr" IPE: "DLB" Core/Net: 07 Net: 511, 1314 61C Core/Net: slot 14. For 81C use NT8D35 Net slot 13; in QSD39 shelf, use Net slot 2; in QSD40 shelf, use slot 13.

QPC578 Integrated Services Digital Line card QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card QPC775 Clock Controller

QPC789 16-Port 500/2500 Message Waiting IPE: any slot but "Contr" Line card QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card Core/Net: 0-7

Precautions
To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, review the following guidelines before handling system equipment.

74

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Precautions

Warning: Module covers are not hinged; do not let go of the covers. Lift covers away from the module and set them out of your work area. Warning: Circuit cards may contain a lithium battery. There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not replace components on any circuit card; you must replace the entire card. Dispose of circuit cards according to the manufacturer's instructions. To avoid damage to circuit cards from static discharge, wear a properly connected antistatic wrist strap when you work on system equipment. If a wrist strap is not available, regularly touch one of the bare metal strips in a module to discharge static. Figure 15: Static discharge points on page 76 shows the recommended connection points for the wrist strap and the bare metal strips you should touch. Handle circuit cards as follows: Unpack or handle cards away from electric motors, transformers, or similar machinery. Handle cards by the edges only. Do not touch the contacts or components. Set cards on a protective antistatic bag. If an antistatic bag is not available, hand-hold the card, or set it in a card cage unseated from the connectors. Store cards in protective packing. Do not stack cards on top of each other unless they are packaged. Keep cards installed in the system as much as possible to avoid dirty contacts and unnecessary wear. Store cards in a cool, dry, dust-free area.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

75

Circuit card installation

Figure 15: Static discharge points

During repair and maintenance procedures do the following: Turn off the circuit breaker or switch for a module power supply before the power supply is removed or inserted. In AC-powered systems, capacitors in the power supply must discharge. Wait five full minutes between turning off the circuit breaker and removing the power supply from the module. Software disable cards, if applicable, before they are removed or inserted. Hardware disable cards, whenever there is an enable/disable switch, before they are removed or inserted. Return defective or heavily contaminated cards to a repair center. Do not try to repair or clean them.

Installing a circuit card

This procedure provides detailed installation instructions for circuit cards.

76

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installing a circuit card

Danger: To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, read all of the guidelines in Circuit and installation on page 71 before you begin installation and follow all guidelines throughout the procedure.

Installing a circuit card

1. Open the protective carton and remove the circuit card from the antistatic bag. Return the antistatic bag to the carton and store it for future use. 2. Inspect the card components, faceplate, locking devices, and connectors for damage. If damaged, tag the card with a description of the problem and package it for return to a repair center. 3. Refer to the work order to determine the module and slot location for the card. 4. If there is an enable/disable (Enb/Dis) switch on the faceplate, set it to Dis. 5. If there are option switches or jumpers on the card, set them according to the work order (see Option settings on page 87). Caution: System Failure Incorrectly set switches on common equipment circuit cards may cause a system failure. 6. Squeeze the ends of the locking devices on the card and pull the tabs away from the latch posts and faceplate (see Figure 16: Installing the circuit card in the card cage on page 77).

Figure 16: Installing the circuit card in the card cage

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

77

Circuit card installation

7. Insert the card into the card aligning guides in the card cage. Gently push the card into the slot until you feel resistance. The tip of the locking device must be behind the edge of the card cage (see Figure 16: Installing the circuit card in the card cage on page 77). 8. Lock the card into position by simultaneously pushing the ends of the locking devices against the faceplate. Note: When IPE cards are installed, the red LED on the faceplate remains lit for two to five seconds as a self-test runs. If the self-test is completed successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED does not follow the pattern described or operates in any other manner (such as continually flashing or remaining weakly lit), replace the card. 9. If there is an enable/disable switch, set it to Enb. Note: Do not enable the switch on an NT8D04 Superloop Network card or QPC414 Network card until network loop cables are installed. 10. If you are adding a voice, conference, or tone and digit loop, press the manual initialize (Man Int) button on the NT5D03 or the NT5D10 Call Processor if the card is associated with the active Call Processor: Note: An initialization causes a momentary interruption in call processing. 11. If you are installing the card in a working system, refer to the work order and the technical document, Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) to add the required office data to the system memory. 12. Go to the appropriate test procedure in Acceptance tests on page 79.

78

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 6: Acceptance tests

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 79 Conference cards on page 79 Digitone receiver cards on page 81 Line cards on page 82 Multifrequency sender cards on page 82 Multifrequency signaling cards on page 83 Network cards on page 83 Trunk cards on page 84 Tone and digit switch cards on page 85

Introduction
Test procedures for most circuit cards require that internal and external cabling be installed. See the appropriate installation document for your system and Avaya Telephones and Consoles Fundamentals (NN43001-567) for cabling procedures.

Conference cards
Testing conference cards
Use this procedure to test a conference card or to test the conference function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. 1. Log into the system:

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

79

Acceptance tests

LOGI (password) 2. Request the status of a loop on the conference card: LD 38 STAT loop Conference status is formatted as follows: CNFC n DSBL n BUSY "n" represents the number of conference groups disabled and busy CHAN n DSBL n BUSY "n" represents the number of channels disabled and busy UNEQ card is not equipped in the system DSBL card is disabled in software 3. If the conference card loop is disabled, enable it. For an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter: ENLX loop (the conference loop is the odd loop of the conference/TDS loop pair) Note: The conference/TDS card is not enabled automatically when it is inserted. You must enable the card with the command ENLX. (This command is used in LD 34 and LD 46 to address even loops and in LD 38 to address odd loops.) Enabling the loops with the command ENLL does not enable the hardware for the card. For other than an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter: ENLL loop (the conference loop must be an even loop for cards other than the NT8D17) If the system response is other than OK, see Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 4. Test the conference loop for channel, group, and switching faults: CNFC loop If the conference loop passes the tests, the output is OK . If the system response is other than OK , see Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 5. Prepare the system for a manual conference call on a specified loop: CNFC MAN loop c Where "c" is the manual conference group (1-15) A manual conference test is performed by stepping through conference channels and groups and listening for noise that indicates a faulty card. The manual conference test can be performed through a system terminal or BCS maintenance telephone. If commands are entered from a maintenance telephone, this telephone automatically becomes part of the manual conference call. Only one manual conference call is allowed at one time. A manual conference consists of only two telephones, where one telephone acts as a signal source while the other acts as a listening monitor. After you enter the CNFC command, any two telephones (one may already be the maintenance telephone) dialing the special service prefix code (SPRE) and the

80

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Digitone receiver cards

digits 93 enter the manual conference call. The prime directory number (PDN) indicator, if equipped, lights on each telephone. Going on-hook takes the telephone out of the manual conference call, and the test must be restarted. See LD 38 in Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for more detailed information about using this command. 6. Test various channels and conference groups audibly with the command CNFC STEP When stepping through channels and groups, a clicking followed by silence is normal. Any distortion or other noises indicates a faulty card. Once the CNFC STEP command is entered, entering C on the system terminal or maintenance telephone steps through the conference channels. Entering G steps through the conference groups. There are 15 channels per group and 15 groups per conference card. Entering an asterisk (*) and END stops the test. See "LD 38" in Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Maintenance (NN43001-711) for detailed information about using this command. 7. End the session in LD 38: ****

Digitone receiver cards

Note: The DTR daughterboard connected to a QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card cannot be assigned when the IPE shelf is used in single loop mode.

Testing digitone receiver cards

Use this procedure to test a Digitone receiver (DTR) card, a DTR daughterboard, or the DTR function on the NT8D18 Network/DTR card. 1. Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2. See if the Digitone receiver to be tested is disabled: LD 34 STAT The system responds with the terminal number (TN), or numbers, of any disabled Digitone receivers. 3. If the Digitone receiver is disabled, enable it: ENLR l s c uloop, shelf, card, and unit numbers 4. Test the Digitone receiver: DTR l s c uloop, shelf, card, and unit numbers

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

81

Acceptance tests

If the system response is other than OK, see Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 5. End the session in LD 34: ****

Line cards
Testing line cards
Use this procedure to test a line card. 1. Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2. Perform a network memory test, continuity test, and signaling test on a specific loop and shelf: LD 30 SHLF l sloop and shelf numbers If the system response is other than OK, see Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 3. For a line card on a superloop, perform a signaling test on a specific card or unit: UNTT l s c loop, shelf, and card numbers For the NT8D02 Digital Line card, enter: UNTT l s c u loop, shelf, card, and unit numbers If the system response is other than OK, see Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 4. End the session in LD 30: ****

Multifrequency sender cards

Testing multifrequency sender cards
Use this procedure to test a multifrequency sender (MFS) card or the MFS function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. 1. Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2. Test and enable an MFS loop: LD 46 MFS loop (on the NT8D17 Conference/ TDS card, the TDS/MFS loop is the even loop of the conference/TDS loop pair) Note: The conference/TDS card is not enabled automatically when it is inserted. You must enable the card with the command ENLX. (This command is used in LD 34 and LD 46 to address even loops and in LD 38 to address odd loops.) Enabling the loops with the command ENLL does not enable the hardware for the card.

82

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Multifrequency signaling cards

If the system response is other than OK, see Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 3. Access the system from a maintenance telephone; then enter: LD 46 Give the system approximately 20 seconds to load the program. See "Communicating with the Meridian 1" in Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for details on accessing the system from a maintenance telephone. 4. Obtain 10-second bursts of digits 1 to 9, 0, and 11 to 15 (in that order) for all digits on the specified loop: TONE loop ALL Each burst should sound different. If the bursts do not sound different, replace the card. 5. End the session in LD 46: ****

Multifrequency signaling cards

Testing multifrequency signaling cards
Use this procedure to test a multifrequency signaling card. 1. Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2. Test and enable the specified unit: LD 54 ATST l s c u (loop, shelf, card, and unit numbers) If the system response is other than OK, see Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 3. End the session in LD 54: ****

Network cards
Testing network cards
Use this procedure to test a network card. 1. Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2. Perform a network memory test, continuity test, and signaling test: LD 30 LOOP <loop> where <loop> can be a specific loop number or ALL If ALL is specified, all enabled loops (except attendant console loops) and all shelves on each loop are tested.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

83

Acceptance tests

If only one loop is being tested and it is disabled, enter ENLL loop to enable and test a network card associated with the specified loop. (This command cannot enable network cards disabled by LD 32.) If the system response is other than OK, see Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 3. End the session in LD 30: ****

Trunk cards
Use the following procedures to test a trunk card.

Testing a trunk card using a maintenance telephone

1. Access the system from a maintenance telephone. See "Communicating with the Meridian 1" in Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for details on accessing the system from a maintenance telephone. 2. Test the trunk unit: LD 36 TRK l s c u (loop, shelf, card, and unit numbers) 3. If the maintenance telephone is hooked up to a monitor and the system response is other than OK, see Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration, (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages.

Testing a trunk card using a system terminal

1. Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2. Enter: LD 36 3. To test a trunk from a remote test center, seize a Central Office (CO) monitor trunk: CALL or CALL l s c u Seize the automatic number identification (ANI) trunk: TRK l s c u loop, shelf, card, and unit numbers When you see the DN? prompt, enter the directory number (DN) you want the system to dial. If the system response is other than OK, see Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 4. End the session in LD 36: **** 5. Test an automatically identified outward dialing (AIOD) trunk card: LD 41 AIOD l s c (loop, shelf, and card numbers) If the system response is other than OK, see Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 6. End the session in LD 41: ****

84

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Tone and digit switch cards

Tone and digit switch cards

Testing tone and digit switch cards
Use this procedure to test a tone and digit switch (TDS) card or to test the TDS function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. 1. Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2. Obtain a list of terminal numbers (TNs) for disabled TDS cards: LD 34 STAD 3. If the TDS loop to be tested is disabled, enable it. For an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter: ENLX loop (The TDS/MFS loop is the even loop of the conference/TDS loop pair.) Note: The conference/TDS card is not enabled automatically when it is inserted. You must enable the card with the command ENLX. (This command is used in LD 34 and LD 46 to address even loops and in LD 38 to address odd loops.) Enabling the loops with the command ENLL does not enable the hardware for the card. For other than an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter: ENLL loop 4. Test the TDS loop: TDS loop If the system response is other than OK, see Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the messages. 5. End the session in LD 34: **** 6. Using a maintenance telephone, log into the system. See "Communicating with the Meridian 1" in Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for details on accessing the system using a maintenance telephone. 7. From the maintenance telephone, enter: LD#34## To test outpulsers and channels for the TDS loop, see Table 13: TDS tone tests on page 85 for a sample of the input commands used with the maintenance telephone. See Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for all tones that can be tested. 8. Exit LD 34 from the maintenance telephone: **** Table 13: TDS tone tests
Input command BSY#loop## Dial pad equivalent Description

279#loop## Provides busy tone from TDS loop specified.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

85

Acceptance tests

Input command C## DIA#loop## OVF#loop## RBK#loop## RNG#loop## ****

Dial pad equivalent 2##

Description Removes any active tone.

342#loop## Provides dial tone from TDS loop specified. 683#loop## Provides overflow tone from TDS loop specified. 725#loop## Provides ringback tone from TDS loop specified. 764#loop## Provides ring tone from TDS loop specified. Exits TDS test program.

86

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 7: Option settings

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Circuit card grid on page 87 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card on page 89 Table 15: General purpose switch settings on page 91 NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC on page 95 NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card on page 97 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card on page 98 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card on page 101 NT8D17 Conference/TDS card on page 102 NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC on page 103 NT8D22 System Monitor on page 103 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board on page 107 QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card on page 109 QPC414 Network card on page 110 QPC441 3-Port Extender cards on page 110 QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card on page 113

Circuit card grid

Some circuit cards contain option switches or jumpers, or both, that define specific functions. A switch or jumper can be identified by an alphanumeric coordinate (such as D29) that indicates a location on the card, or by a switch number (such as SW2) printed on the circuit

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

87

Option settings

board (see Figure 17: Circuit card grid on page 88). Positions on a switch (for example, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 on SW2) are labeled on the switch block. On a circuit card: ON may be indicated by the word "on," the word "up," the word "closed," the number "1," an arrow pointing up, or a solid dot (). OFF may be indicated by the word "down," the word "open," the number "0," or an arrow pointing down. Throughout this document, if neither ON nor OFF is given (there is a blank space) for a position on a switch, that position may be set to either ON or OFF because it has no function for the option described.

Figure 17: Circuit card grid

88

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card

Table 14: OPS analog line card configuration on page 89 lists option settings for the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station analog card. Table 14: OPS analog line card configuration
Application Class of Service (CLS) (Note 1) Loop resistance (ohms) Jumper strap setting (Note 6) Class of Service (CLS) (Note 1) Loop loss (dB) (Note 3) TIMP (Notes 1, 4) Class of Service (CLS) (Note 1) BIMP (Notes 1, 4) Gain treatment (Note 5) 600 ohms 01.5 600 ohms On-premise station (ONS) ONP Off-premise station (OPS) OPX

0460

02300 (Note 2)

Both JX.0 and JX.1 off ONP

Both JX.0 and JX.1 off

Both JX.0 and JX.1 on

OPX

>1.52.5 >2.5 3.0 600 ohms ONP 600 ohms

01.5 600 ohms

>1.52.5 600 ohms

>2.54.5

>4.515

600 ohms 600 ohms OPX

3COM1

3COM 2

600 ohms No

3COM1

3COM2

3COM2 Yes

Note: Note 1: Configured in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program (LD 10). Note: Note 2: The maximum signaling range supported by the OPS analog line card is 2300 ohms.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

89

Option settings

Application

On-premise station (ONS)

Off-premise station (OPS)

Note: Note 3: Loss of untreated (no gain devices) metallic line facility. Upper loss limits correspond to loop resistance ranges for 26 AWG wire. Note: Note 4: Default software impedance settings are: ONP CLS 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms OPX CLS 600 ohms

TIMP: BIMP:

3COM2

Note: Note 5: Gain treatment, such as a voice frequency repeater (VFR) is required to limit the actual OPS loop loss to 4.5 dB, maximum. VFR treatment of metallic loops having untreated loss greater than 15 dB (equivalent to a maximum signaling range of 2300 ohms on 26 AWG wire) is not recommended. Note: Note 6: Jumper strap settings JX.0 and JX.1 apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the unit number, 07. "Off" indicates that a jumper strap is not installed across both pins on a jumper block. Store unused straps on the OPS analog line card by installing them on a single jumper pin as shown below:

NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card

Switch setting tables for this card are listed in subsections according to their function. Bold font designates factory (default) settings.

90

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card

General purpose switches

Use switch set SW9 for Trunk 0; use switch set SW15 for Trunk 1 (see Table 15: General purpose switch settings on page 91). Table 15: General purpose switch settings
Switch 1 2 3 4 Description Framing Mode Yellow Alarm Method Zero Code Suppression Mode Unused SW9/SW15 switch setting off - ESF on - SF off - FDL on - Digit2 off - B8ZS on - AMI off

Trunk interface switches

A switch provides selection of T1 transmission. Use switch SW4 for Trunk 0; use switch SW10 for Trunk 1 (see Table 16: Trunk interface transmission mode switch settings on page 91). Table 16: Trunk interface transmission mode switch settings
Description For future use T1 SW4/SW10 switch setting off on

A set of three switches provides selection of dB values. Use SW5, SW6, and SW7 for Trunk 0; use SW11, SW12, and SW13 for Trunk 1 (see Table 17: Trunk interface line build out switch settings on page 91). Table 17: Trunk interface line build out switch settings
Switch Setting Description 0 dB 7.5 dB 15 dB SW5/SW11 off on on SW6/SW12 off on off SW7/SW13 off off on

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

91

Option settings

A set of four DIP switches provides selection among three values for receiver impedance. Use SW8 for Trunk 0; use SW14 for Trunk 1 (see Table 18: Trunk interface impedance switch settings on page 92). Table 18: Trunk interface impedance switch settings
Description 75 100 120 off on off SW8/SW14 Switch Settings off off off on off off off on on

Ring ground switches

A set of four DIP switches selects which Ring lines are connected to ground (see Table 19: Ring ground switch settings on page 92). Table 19: Ring ground switch settings
Switch 1 2 3 4 Description Trunk 0 Transmit Trunk 0 Receive Trunk 1 Transmit Trunk 1 Receive S2 switch setting off - Ring line is not grounded on- Ring line is grounded off - Ring line is not grounded on - Ring line is grounded off - Ring line is not grounded on - Ring line is grounded off - Ring line is not grounded on - Ring line is grounded

DCH mode and address select switches

One switch selects an on-board NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA D-Channel daughterboard and an external MSDL/DCHI card. Four other switches provide the daughterboard address (see Table 20: DCH mode and address select switch settings on page 92). Table 20: DCH mode and address select switch settings
Switch 1-4 5-7 8 Description D-Channel daughterboard Address For future use External DCH or Onboard DDCH S3 Switch Setting See the next table. off off - MSDL or DCHI card

92

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card

Switch

Description

S3 Switch Setting on - Onboard DDCH daughterboard

Table 21: NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA daughterboard address select switch settings

Device Address1 02 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on Switch Setting off off off off on on on on off off off off on on on on off off off off off off off off on on on on on on on on

Note: 1. The maximum number of DCHI, MSDL, and DDCH devices in the system is 16. The Device Addresses are equivalent to the MSDL DNUM designations. For programming information about the MSDL, refer to technical document Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) guide. Note: 2. Device address 0 is commonly assigned to the System Monitor.

Illustrations of switch locations and settings

Figure 18: Switch functions and areas on page 94 displays functional areas for switches on the NT5D12 DDP card.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

93

Option settings

Figure 18: Switch functions and areas

Figure 19: Switch default settings on page 95 displays default settings for switches on the NT5D12 DDP card.

94

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC

Figure 19: Switch default settings

NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC

Table 22: NT6D42 recommended options for North American and British Telecom on page 95 through Table 27: NT6D42CC SW2 on page 97 list option settings for the NT6D42 Ringing Generator. Table 22: NT6D42 recommended options for North American and British Telecom
Application North America Ringing frequency 20 Hz Ringing voltage 86 V ac Jumper locations P5 High voltage message waiting P4 No high voltage Ringing output Low impedance

British Telecom

25 Hz

80 V ac

Low impedance

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

95

Option settings

Application

Ringing frequency

Ringing voltage

Jumper locations message waiting

Ringing output

Table 23: NT6D42 jumper locations P4 and P5

High voltage message waiting Disable Enable Note: One jumper must be installed. Pin location Jumper in P4 Jumper in P5

Table 24: NT6D42 jumper location J7

Ringing output Low impedance (normal) High impedance (Australia) Jumper location J7 Connect pins 1 and 2 Connect pins 2 and 3

Table 25: NT6D42 SW1

Ringing frequency (Hz) 20 25 50 Position SW1 1 2 3

Table 26: NT6D42CB SW2

SW2 Ringing voltage 86 V ac 86 V ac 80 V ac 80 V ac 75 V ac 75 V ac 70 V ac 70 V ac Message waiting voltage 120 V dc 150 V dc 120 V dc 150 V dc 120 V dc 150 V dc 120 V dc 150 V dc 1 off off on on off off off off 2 off off off off on on off off 3 off off off off off off on on 4 off on off on off on off on

96

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card

Table 27: NT6D42CC SW2

SW2 Ringing voltage 86 V ac 86 V ac 80 V ac 80 V ac 75 V ac 75 V ac 70 V ac 70 V ac Message waiting voltage 100 V dc 150 V dc 100 V dc 150 V dc 100 V dc 150 V dc 100 V dc 150 V dc 1 off off on on off off off off 2 off off off off on on off off 3 off off off off off off on on 4 off on off on off on off on

NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card

Table 28: NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card
Port 0SW4 RS-232-D DTE or DCE* RS-422-A DTE (terminal) RS-422-A DCE (modem) all off all off all on Port 0SW8 all off all on all off

Port 1SW3 RS-232-D DTE or DCE* RS-422-A DTE RS-422-A DCE all off all off all on Port 2SW2 RS-232-D DTE or DCE* RS-422-A DTE RS-422-A DCE all off all off all on Port 3SW1 RS-232-D DTE or DCE* RS-422-A DTE RS-422-A DCE all off all off all on

Port 1SW7 all off all on all off Port 2SW6 all off all on all off Port 3SW5 all off all on all off

* RS-232-D DTE and DCE modes are software configured. RS-422-A DTE and DEC modes are switch configured.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

97

Option settings

Note: The device number for the MSDL card is configured in LD17 at the prompt DNUM. You must also set the device number, using switches S9 and S10, on the MSDL card. S9 designates ones and S10 designates tens. To set the device number as 14, for example, set S10 to 1 and S9 to 4.

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Table 29: NT8D14 vintage AA jumper strap settings on page 98 through Table 33: NT8D14 vintages BA/BB cable loop resistance and loss on page 100 list option settings for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Table 29: NT8D14 vintage AA jumper strap settings
Modes Central Office (CO) 2-way tie trunk (loop dial repeat) 2-way tie trunk (outgoing/incoming dial) Recorded announcement (RAN) Paging trunk Japan CO/DID operation DID operation: loop length > = 2000 DID operation: loop length < 2000 Note: off = no strap present. Note: Locations (J1, J2) apply to all eight units. Location J1, J2 J1, J2 J1, J2 J1, J2 J1, J2 J1, J2 J1, J2 J1, J2 Jumper strap off off off off off off on off

Table 30: NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings-factory standard

Trunk types CO/FX/WATS 2-way tie (LDR) 2-way tie (OAID) Loop length Zero1524 m (5000 ft) Off Jumper strap settings J1.X J2.X Off J3.X 12 J4.X 12

98

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Trunk types DID RAN: continuous operation mode Paging

Loop length Zero600 ohms Not applicable: RAN and paging trunks should not leave the building.

Jumper strap settings J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X

Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the unit number, 07. "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block. Store unused straps on the universal trunk card by installing them on a single jumper pin as shown below:

Table 31: NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings-extended range

Trunk types CO/FX/WATS 2-way tie (LDR) 2-way tie (OAID) DID RAN: pulse start or level start modes > 600 ohms Not applicable: RAN trunks should not leave the building. On Off On Off 12 23 23 12 Loop length > 1524 m (5000 ft) Off Jumper strap settings J1.X J2.X Off J3.X 12 J4.X 23

Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the unit number, 07. "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.

Table 32: NT8D14 vintages BA/BB trunk types-termination impedance and balance network
Trunk types Terminating impedance (Note 1) 600 or 900 ohms Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) Zero915 m (zero3000 ft) 600 ohms 9151524 m (30005000 ft) 3COM1 > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) 3COM2

CO/FX/WATS

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

99

Option settings

Trunk types

Terminating impedance (Note 1) 600 or 900 ohms

Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) Zero915 m (zero3000 ft) 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 9151524 m (30005000 ft) 3COM1 3COM1 3COM1 N/A N/A > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) 3COM2 3COM2 3COM2 3COM2 N/A

2-way tie (LDR)

2-way tie (OAID) 600 or 900 ohms DID (loop < 600 ohms) 600 or 900 ohms

DID (loop 600 600 or 900 ohms ohms) RAN: continuous operation mode Paging

600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms

600 ohms

600 ohms

N/A

N/A

Note: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment. Note: The balance network of each trunk unit is software selectable between resistive 600 or 900 ohms or 3COM and is jumper selectable between 3COM1 and 3COM2.

Table 33: NT8D14 vintages BA/BB cable loop resistance and loss
Cable loop resistance (ohms) Cable length 915 m (3000 ft) 22 AWG 97 24 AWG 155 260 378 607 960 26 AWG 251 417 609 977 1544 0.9 1.6 2.3 3.7 5.9 Cable loop loss (dB) (nonloaded at 1kHz) 22 AWG 24 AWG 1.2 2.0 3.0 4.8 7.6 26 AWG 1.5 2.5 3.7 6.0 9.4

1524 m (5000 ft) 162 2225 m (7300 ft) 236 3566 m (11700 ft) 5639 m (18500 ft) 379 600

100

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Table 34: NT8D15 E and M Trunk card
Jumper (Note 1) Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk Type I Paging Type I 4-wire trunk Type II DX tip & ring pair Mrcv M xmt J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X J5.X J6.X J7.X J8.X J9.X off on off off off off off off Pins 23 off off off on off off off off off off Pins 23 Pins 12 off (Note 4) Pins 23 (Note 4) on on on Pins 12 Ercv M xmt Pins 23 off (Note 4) Pins 12 (Note 4) on on on Pins 12

on (Note 3) on off off off off off off Pins 23 off off off off off off Pins 23

Note: 1. Jumper strap settings J1.X through J9.X apply to all 4 units; "X" indicates the unit number, 03. Note: 2. Off indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block. Note: 3. Paging trunk mode is not zone selectable. Note: 4. Jumper strap installed in this location only if external loop resistance exceeds 2500 ohms. Note: 5. Dot next to the jumper block indicates pin 1.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

101

Option settings

NT8D17 Conference/TDS card

Switch and jumper settings are used to select the companding law and to change the conference attenuation PAD levels. These PAD levels are used if prompt CPAD = 1 in LD 97. The J1 connector on the faceplate is reserved for future use. You can enable or disable a warning tone for conference calls. When the option is enabled, the tone lets callers know they are entering a conference call. The switch for this option is preset to disable the warning tone. Table 35: NT8D17 Conference/TDS card Companding law
Companding law -law (North America), A-law Special cases Jumper at J3 connect pins 2 and 3 connect pins 1 and 2

Table 36: NT8D17 Conference/TDS card Attenuation levels

Attenuation levels 1 10.2 dB 8.5 dB 6 dB 6 dB 4.5 dB 3 dB 0 dB 0 dB on on off off on on off off SW2 (see Note) 2 on off on off on off on off 33 on on on on off off off off

Note: Set SW2 position 4 to ON to disable the warning tone option. When the warning tone is enabled, select the warning tone level as shown below: 24 dB Connect pins 1 and 2 30 dB Connect pins 2 and 3

102

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC

NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC

Frequency 20 Hz 25 Hz 25 Hz 25 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz Amplitude P1 86 V ac 70 V ac 80 V ac 86 V ac 70 V ac 80 V ac open open open open 14 710 36 912 Settings P2 open 14 710 36 912 25 811 open open P3 25 811 open open open open open

NT8D22 System Monitor

The master system monitor, located in the column with CP 0, must be numbered 0. Slave system monitors are numbered from 1 to 63. For examples of system monitor option settings in basic configurations, see "Sample settings for NT8D22 System Monitors." Configure the system monitor in Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) columns as slaves. There is no serial connection between RPE columns. Table 37: NT8D22 SW1
SW1 function 1 Not used Meridian 1 columns only Position 1 is OFF (Meridian 1 columns only) Not used Position 1 is ON, master column contains CP:master slaves DC-powered system AC-powered system on off off off on off 2 3 Position 4 5 6 7 8

on off

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

103

Option settings

SW1 function 1 PFTU is activated by this column due to overtemperature PFTU is not activated by this column Position 1 is OFF (Meridian 1 columns only) Not used Not used Position 1 is OFF (Meridian 1 columns only) Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Meridian 1 columns only 2 3

Position 4 on off 5 6 7 8

off on off off on off on on off off on off on off

Table 38: NT8D22 SW2

SW2 indication 1 Master system monitor Slave system monitor Not used All other operation on off on Always off Configure 38 according to the Table 40: NT8D22 settings for total number of slaves-SW2 on master on page 105. Configure 38 according to the Table 41: NT8D22AD/NT8D22ADE5 slave address-SW2 on slave on page 106. 2 3 Position 4 5 6 7 8

For master, indicates total number of slaves For each slave, indicates the slave address

Table 39: NT8D22 SW3

SW3 indication 1 CTA CTR master slave master slave on off on off Position 2 3 4

104

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

NT8D22 System Monitor

SW3 indication 1 FAIL MAJOR master slave master slave

Position 2 3 on off on off 4

Table 40: NT8D22 settings for total number of slaves-SW2 on master

How many slave units 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Switch position 3 4 5 6 7 8 on on on on on on on on on on on off on on on on off on on on on on off off on on on off on on on on on off on off on on on off off on on on on off off off on on off on on on on on off on on off on on off on off on on on off on off off on on off off on on on on off off on off on on off off off on on on off off off off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off on on off on on off on on off off on off on off on on on off on off on off on off on off off on How many slave units 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Switch position 3 4 5 6 7 8 off on on on on on off on on on on off off on on on off on off on on on off off off on on off on on off on on off on off off on on off off on off on on off off off off on off on on on off on off on on off off on off on off on off on off on off off off on off off on on off on off off on off off on off off off on off on off off off off off off on on on on off off on on on off off off on on off on off off on on off off off off on off on on off off on off on off off off on off off on

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

105

Option settings

How many slave units 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Switch position 3 4 5 6 7 8 on off on off off off on off off on on on on off off on on off on off off on off on on off off on off off on off off off on on on off off off on off on off off off off on on off off off off off

How many slave units 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

Switch position 3 4 5 6 7 8 off off on off off off off off off on on on off off off on on off off off off on off on off off off on off off off off off off on on off off off off on off off off off off off on off off off off off off

Table 41: NT8D22AD/NT8D22ADE5 slave address-SW2 on slave

Slave unit address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Position 3 4 5 6 7 8 on on on on on off on on on on off on on on on on off off on on on off on on on on on off on off on on on off off on on on on off off off on on off on on on on on off on on off on on off on off on on on off on off off on on off off on on on on off off on off on on off off off on on on off off off off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off on on off on Slave unit address 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Position 3 4 5 6 7 8 off on on on on off off on on on off on off on on on off off off on on off on on off on on off on off off on on off off on off on on off off off off on off on on on off on off on on off off on off on off on off on off on off off off on off off on on off on off off on off off on off off off on off on off off off off off off on on on on off off on on on off off off on on off on

106

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Slave unit address 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Position 3 4 5 6 7 8 on off on on off off on off on off on on on off on off on off on off on off off on on off on off off off on off off on on on on off off on on off on off off on off on on off off on off off on off off off on on on off off off on off on off off off off on on off off off off off off on on on on on

Slave unit address 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

Position 3 4 5 6 7 8 off off on on off off off off on off on on off off on off on off off off on off off on off off on off off off off off off on on on off off off on on off off off off on off on off off off on off off off off off off on on off off off off on off off off off off off on off off off off off off

NT8D22 jumper settings

EA-GND short (Pins 2 and 3 short) Accessing External EPROM. EA-VCC short (Pins 2 and 1 short) Accessing Internal EPROM.

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Baud rate
Switches SW13, SW10, SW11, and SW12 determine the baud rate for ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See the configuration for these switches in Table 42: QSDI paddle board baud rate switch settings on page 108.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

107

Option settings

Table 42: QSDI paddle board baud rate switch settings

SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2), SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4) 1 on on on on on on on on 2 off on off on off on off on 3 on off off on on off off on 4 on on on off off off off on

Baud rate 150 300 600 1,200 2,400 4,800 9,600 19,200* * For future use.

Baud Clock (kHz) 2.40 4.80 9.60 19.20 38.40 76.80 153.60 307.20

Address
Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the card always address the four UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 14 and 15. The configurations for both switches are shown in Table 43: QSDI paddle board address switch settings on page 108. To avoid system problems, switches SW15 and SW16 must not be configured identically. Table 43: QSDI paddle board address switch settings
SW15 SW16 Port 1 Port 3 0 2 Device pair addresse s 4 6 8 10 12 14 Port 2 Port 4 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1* E E E E E E E E 2+ X X X X X X X X 3 off off off off off off off off Switch settings 4 off off off off off off off off 5 off off off off off off off off 6 off off off off on on on on 7 off off on on off off on on 8 off on off on off on off on

* To enable ports 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. To enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON. + For each X, the setting for this switch makes no difference, because it is not used.

108

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card

DTE/DCE mode
Each serial port can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment) or a modem (DCE equipment). Instructions for configuring the DTE/DCE switches SW2, SW3, SW4, SW5, SW6, SW7, SW8, and SW9 are shown in Table 44: QSDI paddle board DTE/DCE mode switch settings on page 109. Example: Port 1 is changed from DTE to DCE by reversing every switch position on SW3 and SW2; that is, switches that were off for DTE are turned on for DCE, and switches that were on for DTE are turned off for DCE. Table 44: QSDI paddle board DTE/DCE mode switch settings
Port 1 - SW 3 Mode DTE (terminal) DCE (modem) 1 on off 2 on off 3 on off 4 off on 5 on off 6 off on 1 off on 2 on off Port 1 -SW 2 3 off on 4 on off 5 off on 6 on off

Port 2 SW 5 DTE (terminal) DCE (modem) on off on off on off off on on off off on off on on off

Port 2 SW4 off on on off off on on off

Port 3 SW 7 DTE (terminal) DCE (modem) on off on off on off off on on off off on off on on off

Port 3 SW 6 off on on off off on on off

Port 4 SW 9 DTE (terminal) DCE (modem) on off on off on off off on on off off on off on on off

Port 4 SW 8 off on on off off on on off

QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card

Options (minimum vintage N) NT5D21 Core/Network module NT8D35 Network module Plug location F13

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

109

Option settings

QPC414 Network card

Application Pin connection J3/S2 and J4/S1 T-1 facilities (including PRI/DTI),* channel service connect pins 1 and 2 (pin 1 is next to the unit white dot) Note: Possible jumper locations for vintage B (for different styles/series): J3E11 or H11J4H17 or E7S1 and S2E33 Note: Possible jumper locations for vintage A (for different styles/series). These cards can only be used in the option A setting: J3H5 or E11J4H17 or E7S1 and S2E33 Note: Connectors and loop relations: Even loop: J1 faceplate connector, jumper at J4 or S1Odd loop: J2 faceplate connector, jumper at J3 or S2

QPC441 3-Port Extender cards

For CS 1000M SG and MG systems, QPC441 vintage F or later must be used in all modules. Table 45: QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT4N41CP PII Core Net modules
Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to "A". Switch Settings Module NT4N41 CP Core/Net modules only Group 0 Core/Net 0 (Shelf 0) Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 D20 switch position 1 off off off off 2 on on on on 3 on on on on 4 off off off off 5 on on on on 6 on on off off 7 on off on off 8 on on on on

110

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

QPC441 3-Port Extender cards

Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Core/Net 1 (Shelf 1) Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7

off off off off off off off off off off off off

on on on on on on on on on on on on

on on on on on on on on on on on on

off off off off off off off off off off off off

off off off off on on on on off off off off

on on off off on on off off on on off off

on off on off on off on off on off on off

on on on on off off off off off off off off

Table 46: QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT5D21 modules

Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to "A". Switch Settings Module 1 NT5D21 (Option 61C) Core/Network 0 Core/Network 1 NT5D21 (Option 81C) Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Core/Net 0 (Shelf 0) Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Core/Net 1 (Shelf 1) Group 0 Group 1 off off off off off off off off off off on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on off off off off off off off off off off on on on on off off off off on on on on off off on on off off on on on off on off on off on off on off on on on on on on on on off off off off on on on on off off on on on on on on on off 2 D20 switch position 3 4 5 6 7 8

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

111

Option settings

Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7

off off off off off off

on on on on on on

on on on on on on

off off off off off off

on on off off off off

off off on on off off

on off on off on off

off off off off off off

Table 47: QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT8D35 module

Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to "A". Switch Settings D20 switch position Modules Option 81, 81C (Note 1) Shelf Group 0 1 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 off 2 on 3 on 4 on 5 on on on on off off off off on on on on off off off off 6 on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off 7 on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off 8 on on on on on on on on off off off off off off off off

112

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card

QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card

Table 48: QPC841 port 1 and 2 address selection on page 113 through Table 51: QPC841 DTE or DCE selection on page 114 list option settings for the QPC841 4-Port SDI card. Table 48: QPC841 port 1 and 2 address selection
Device number Port 1 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 Port 2 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 off off off off off off off off 2 off off off off off off off off 3 off off off off off off off off 4 off off off off off off off off SW14 5 off off off off off off off off 6 on on on on off off off off 7 on on off off on on off off 8 on off on off on off on off

Note: On SW16, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 must be OFF. Note: To avoid address conflicts, SW14 and SW15 can never show identical settings. Note: To disable ports 1 and 2, set SW14 position 1 to ON.

Table 49: QPC841 port 3 and 4 address selection

Device number Port 3 0 2 4 6 8 10 Port 4 1 3 5 7 9 11 1 off off off off off off 2 off off off off off off 3 off off off off off off 4 off off off off off off SW15 5 off off off off off off 6 on on on on off off 7 on on off off on on 8 on off on off on off

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

113

Option settings

Device number Port 3 12 14 Port 4 13 15 1 off off 2 off off 3 off off 4

SW15 5 off off 6 off off 7 off off 8 on off off off

Note: On SW16, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 must be OFF. Note: To avoid address conflicts, SW14 and SW15 can never show identical settings. Note: To disable ports 3 and 4, set SW15 position 1 to ON.

Table 50: QPC841 baud rate

Baud rate 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 Port 1 SW10 1 off off off off off off off 2 off on off on off on off 3 on off off on on off off 4 on on on off off off off 1 off off off off off off off Port 2 SW11 2 off on off on off on off 3 on off off on on off off 4 on on on off off off off 1 off off off off off off off Port 3 SW12 2 off on off on off on off 3 on off off on on off off 4 on on on off off off off 1 off off off off off off off Port 4 SW13 2 off on off on off on off 3 on off off on on off off 4 on on on off off off off

Table 51: QPC841 DTE or DCE selection

Mode 1 DTE (terminal) DCE (modem) NT1P61 (Fiber) 2 on on off off on off Port 1SW8 3 on off off 4 on off on 5 on off off 6 on off off 1 off on on 2 off on off Port 1SW9 3 off on off 4 off on off 5 off on on 6 off on on

Port 2SW6 DTE DCE NT1P61 (Fiber) on on off off on off on off off on off on on off off on off off off on on

Port 2SW7 off on off off on off off on off off on on off on on

Port 3SW4

Port 3SW5

114

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card

Mode 1 DTE DCE 2 on on off off

Port 1SW8 3 on off 4 on off 5 on off 6 on off 1 off on 2

Port 1SW9 3 off on 4 off on 5 off on 6 off on off on

Port 4SW2 DTE DCE on on off off on off on off on off on off off on

Port 4SW3 off on off on off on off on off on

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

115

Option settings

116

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 8: NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 117 Physical description on page 118 Functional description on page 119 Electrical specifications on page 125 Operation on page 127 Connector pin assignments on page 130 Configuring the OPS analog line card on page 131 Application on page 135

Introduction
The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card is an intelligent eight-channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-wire analog terminal equipment such as analog (500/2500type) telephones and analog modems. The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card provides eight full-duplex analog telephone line interfaces. Each line has integral hazardous and surge voltage protection to protect the system from damage due to lightning strikes and accidental power line connections. This card is normally used whenever the phone lines must leave the building in which the switch is installed.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

117

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

The NT1R20 OPS analog line card provides: line supervision hookflash battery reversal Each unit is independently configured by software control in the Analog (500/2500 type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. You can install this card in any IPE slot. A maximum of four analog line cards can be installed in each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. The NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the Media Gateway Expansion.

Physical description
The OPS card measures 31.75 by 25.40 cm (12.5 by 10 in.) It connects to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. A 25-pair amphenol connector below the card is cabled to the cross connect terminal. Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog line card at the cross connect using a wiring plan similar to trunk cards. See Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for cross connect terminations. The OPS analog line card mounts in any IPE slot.

Self Test
The faceplate of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card is equipped with a red LED. When an OPS analog line card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test is completed successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software; then the LED goes out. If the LED continues to flash or remains weakly lit, replace the card. See Figure 20: OPS analog line card - faceplate on page 119.

118

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Figure 20: OPS analog line card - faceplate

Functional description
This functional description of the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card is divided into two parts. First, a description of the card's control, signaling, and power interfaces is given, followed by a description of how the card itself functions. See Figure 21: OPS analog line card block diagram on page 120.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

119

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Figure 21: OPS analog line card - block diagram

Card interfaces
The OPS analog line card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. See Intelligent Peripheral Equipment on page 59 for more details.

Voice and signaling interfaces

The eight line interfaces provided by the NT1R20 OPS analog line card connect to conventional, 2-wire (tip and ring), analog line facilities. Incoming analog voice and signaling information from a line facility is converted by the OPS analog line card to digital form and routed to the Avaya Communication Server 1000 (Avaya CS 1000) CPU over DS-30 network loops. Conversely, digital voice and signaling information from the CPU is sent over DS-30

120

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

network loops to the OPS analog line card where it is converted to analog form and applied to the line facility. The OPS analog line card uses only eight of the 30 available timeslots for its eight line interfaces. The OPS analog line card can be configured in software to format PCM data in the -law or A-law conventions.

Maintenance communication
Maintenance communication is the exchange of control and status data between line or trunk cards and the Avaya CS 1000 CPU. Maintenance data is transported through the card LAN link. The card LAN link supports the following functions on the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card: polling reporting of self-test status CPU initiated card reset reporting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage) reporting of firmware version reporting of line interface unit configuration enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop busy reporting of card status

Power interface
Power is provided to the OPS circuit card by the NTAK78 AC/DC or NTAK72 DC power supply. The following card functions are described in this section: Line interface units Card control functions Circuit power Software service changes Port-to-port loss configuration Line interface units Card control functions Circuit power

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

121

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Software service changes Port-to-port loss configuration

Line interface units

The NT1R20 OPS analog line card contains eight independently configurable interface units. Relays are provided in each unit to apply ringing onto the line. Signal detection circuits monitor on-hook/off-hook signaling. Two codecs are provided for performing Analog/Digital (A/D) and Digital/Analog (D/A) conversion of analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals. Each codec supports four interface units and contains switchable pads for control of transmission loss on a per unit basis. The following features are common to all units on the card: OPS or ONS service configurable on a per unit basis terminating impedance (600 or 900 ohms) selectable on a per unit basis standard or complex balance impedance (600 or 900 ohms, 3COM1 or 3COM2) selectable on a per unit basis loopback of PCM signals over DS-30X network loop for diagnostic purposes

Signaling and control

This portion of the card provides circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the CPU to operate line interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CPU and return incoming call status information over the DS-30X network loop.

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface, and signaling and control circuits on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card.

Microcontroller
The OPS analog line card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller controls the following: reporting to the CE CPU through the card LAN link: - card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number)

122

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

- firmware version - self-test status - programmed configuration status receipt and implementation of card configuration: - programming of the CODECs - enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card - programming of input/output interface control circuits for administration of line interface unit operation - enabling/disabling of an interrupted dial tone to indicate call waiting - maintenance diagnostics - transmission loss levels

Card LAN interface

Maintenance data is exchanged with the CPU over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link. The Card LAN link is described in the section Intelligent Peripheral Equipment on page 35. The NT1R20 OPS analog line card has the capability of providing an interrupted dial tone to indicate that a message is waiting or that call forwarding is enabled. The line card (optionally) receives messages stating that these conditions exist over the Card LAN Interface and interrupts the dial tone when either of these conditions are detected.

Software service changes

Individual line interface units on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card are configured to either OPS (for OPS application) or On-premises Station (ONS) (for ONS application) Class of Service (CLS) in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. See Table 52: OPS analog line card configuration on page 124. LD 10 is also used to select unit terminating impedance and balance network impedance at the TIMP and BIMP prompts, respectively. The message waiting interrupted dial tone and call forward reminder tone features are enabled by entering data into the customer data block using LD 15. See Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 and LD 15 service change instructions.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

123

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Table 52: OPS analog line card configuration

Application Class of service Loop resistance Jumper strap settingb Loop loss dBc TIMP BIMP Gain treatment e On-premise station (ONS) ONS 0 - 460 ohm Both JX. 0 and JX 1 off Off-premise station (OPS) OPS 0 - 2300 ohm Both JX. 0 and JX. 1 Both JX. 0 and JX. 1 off on 0-1.5 >1.5-2.5 >2.5-4.5 >4.5-15

0-1.5

>1.5-2.5

>2.5-3.0

600 ohm 600 ohm 600 ohm 600 ohm 600 ohm 600 ohm 600 ohm 600 ohm 3COM 3CM2 600 ohm No 3COM 3CM2 3CM2 Yes

a. Configured in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program (LD 10). b. Jumper strap settings JX 0 and JX. 1 apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the unit number, 0-7. "OFF" indicates that a jumper strap is not installed across both pins on a jumper block. Store unused straps on the OPS analog line card by installing them on a single jumper pin. c. Loss of untreated (no gain devices) metallic line facility. Upper loss limits correspond to loop resistance ranges for 26 AWG wire. d. Default software impedance settings are: ONS TIMP: BIMP: 600 ohm 600 ohm CLSOPS CLS 600 ohm 3COM2

e. Gain treatment, such as a voice frequency repeater (VFR) is required to limit the actual OPS loop loss to 4.5 dB, maximum. VFR treatment of metallic loops having untreated loss greater than 15dB (equivalent to a maximum signaling range of 2300 ohm on 26 AWG wire) is not recommended.

Port-to-port loss configuration

The loss plan for the NT1R20 OPS analog line card determines port-to-port loss for connections between an OPS analog line card unit (port) and other ports. The transmission properties of each line unit are characterized by the OPS or ONS class of service assigned in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. The OPS analog line card provides transmission loss switching for control of end-to-end connection loss. Control of loss is a major element in controlling transmission performance

124

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Electrical specifications

parameters such as received volume, echo, noise, and crosstalk. The loss plan for the OPS analog line card determines port-to-port loss for connections between an OPS analog line card unit (port) and other IPE ports. LD 97 is used to configure systems for port-to-port loss. See Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 97 service change instructions. Table 53: OPS analog line card - cable loop resistance and loss
Cable length Cable loop loss (dB) (non-loaded at 1kHz) 26 AWG 847 m (2800 ft) 1.5 1411 m (4600 ft) 1694 m (5600 ft) 2541 m (8300 ft) 2.5 3 4.5 24 AWG 1.2 2 2.4 3.7 12.2 22 AWG 0.9 1.6 1.9 2.8 9.4 Cable loop resistance (ohms) 26 AWG 231.4 385.6 462.8 694.2 2313.9 24 AWG 144.2 240.3 288.3 432.5 1441.7 22 AWG 90 150 180 270 900

8469 m (27800 15 ft)

Electrical specifications
This section lists the electrical characteristics of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card.

Circuit power
The +8.5 V DC input is regulated down to +5 V DC for use by the digital logic circuits. All other power to the card is used by the line interface circuits. The 15.0 V DC inputs to the card are used to power the analog circuits. The +5 V DC from the module power supply is used for the analog hybrid. The 48.0 V DC input is for the telephone battery. Ringing power for telephones is 86 Vrms AC at 20 Hz on 48 V DC. The Rsync signal is used to switch the 20 Hz ringing on and off at the zero cross-over point to lengthen the life of the switching circuits.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

125

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Analog line interface

Table 54: OPS analog line card - electrical characteristics on page 126 lists the electrical characteristics of NT1R20 OPS analog line card line interface units. Table 54: OPS analog line card - electrical characteristics
Characteristic Terminal impedance (TIMP) Balance impedance (BIMP) DC signaling loop length (max) Battery supply voltage Minimum detected loop current Ground potential difference Line leakage AC induction rejection 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms, 3COM, or 3CM2 2300 ohm loop (including resistance of telephone) with nominal battery of 48 V dc 42 to 52.5 V dc 16 mA 3V 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-toground 10 V rms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground Specification

Power requirements
Table 55: OPS analog line card - power requirements on page 126 shows the maximum power consumed by the card from each system power supply. Table 55: OPS analog line card - power requirements
Voltage 15.0 V dc +8.5 V dc +5.0 V dc 48.0 V dc Tolerance 5% 2% 5% 5% Current (max.) 150 mA 200 mA 100 mA 350 mA

Foreign and surge voltage protection

The NT1R20 OPS analog line card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage (power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements for hazardous and surge voltage limits.

126

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Ringer limitations
The OPS line card supports up to three NE-C4A (3 REN) ringers on each line for either ONS or OPS applications. See Table 56: OPS analog line card - ringer limitations on page 127. Table 56: OPS analog line card - ringer limitations
ONS Loop Range 010 ohms > 10460 ohms 0 10 ohms > 10 900 ohms > 900 2300 ohms 3 2 3 2 1 Maximum Number of Ringers (REN)

Environmental specifications
Table 57: OPS analog line card - environmental specifications on page 127 shows the environmental specifications of the OPS analog line card. Table 57: OPS analog line card - environmental specifications
Parameter Operating temperature Operating humidity Storage temperature Specifications 0 to +60 C (+32 to +140 F), ambient 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) 40 to +70 C (40 to +158 F)

Operation
The applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each unit on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card are assigned through LD 10 and/or jumper strap settings on the card. The operation of each unit is configured in software and implemented in the card through software download messages. When the NT1R20 OPS analog line card unit is idle, it provides a ground on the tip lead and 48 V dc on the ring lead. The on-hook telephone presents a high impedance toward the line interface unit on the card.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

127

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Incoming calls
Incoming calls to a telephone connected to the NT1R20 OPS analog line card originate from stations that can be local (served by the PBX) or remote (served through the public switched telephone network). The alerting signal to telephones is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing. When an incoming call is answered, ringing is tripped as the telephone goes off-hook, placing a lowresistance DC loop across the tip and ring leads toward the OPS analog line card. (see Table 58: Call connection sequence-near-end station receiving call on page 128). Table 58: Call connection sequence-near-end station receiving call
State Line card unit idle Signal / Direction Far-end / Near-end Group on tip, battery on ring High resistance loop Remarks No battery current drawn. Far-end station goes off-hook and addresses (dials-up) the near-end station. The system receives the incoming call on a trunk and determine the TN. The system applies 20 Hz ringing to ring lead.

Incoming call Near-end station off-hook Two-way voice connection

Ringing Low resistance loop

The system detects increase in loop current, tips ringing, and put call through to near-end station. If near end station hangs-up first, the line card detects the drop in loop current. Line card unit is ready for the next call. If the far-end hangs-up first, the system detects disconnect signalling from the trunk. The person at the near-end recognizes the end of the call and hangs-up. Line card unit is ready for the next call.

Near end station High-resistance loop hangs up first Line card unit idle Far end station hangs up first Group on tip, battery on ring High resistance loop High resistance loop

Line card unit idle

Ground on tip/battery on ring High resistance loop

Outgoing calls
For outgoing calls from a telephone, a line unit is seized when the telephone goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads towards the NT1R20 OPS analog

128

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

line card (see Table 59: Call connection sequence-near-end station receiving call on page 129). When the card detects the low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits. When the system is ready to receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the telephone in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones. Table 59: Call connection sequence-near-end station receiving call
State Line card unit idle Call request Signal / Direction Far-end / Near-end Group on tip, battery on ring High resistance loop Low resistance loop Remarks No battery current drawn. Near-end station goes off-hook. Battery current is drawn, causing detection of off-hook state. Dial tone is applied to the near end station from the system. Near-end station dials number (loop pulsing or DTMF tones). The system detects start of dialing and remove dial tone. Ringback (or busy) The system decodes addressing, route calls, and supply ringback tone to nearend station if far-end is on-hook. (Busy tone is supplied if far-end is off-hook). When call is answered, ringback tone is removed, and call is put through to farend station. High resistance loop If near end station hangs-up first, the line card detects the drop in loop current. Line card unit is ready for the next call. If the far-end hangs-up first, the system detects disconnect signalling from the trunk. The person at the near-end recognizes the end of the call and hangs-up. Line card unit is ready for the next call.

Dial Tone Outpulsing Addressing signals

Two-way voice connection Near-end station hangsup first Line card unit idle Far end station hangs up first

Group on tip, battery on ring High resistance loop High resistance loop

Line card unit idle

Ground on tip/battery on ring High resistance loop

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

129

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Connector pin assignments

The OPS analog line card brings the eight analog telephone lines to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables. Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for trunk cards. A typical connection example is shown in Figure 22: OPS analog line card - typical cross connection example on page 131, and a list of the connections to the analog line card is shown in Table 60: OPS analog line card backplane pinouts on page 130. See Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for more detailed I/O panel connector information and wire assignments for each tip/ring pair. Table 60: OPS analog line card - backplane pinouts
Backplane Connector Pin 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 18A 19A Signal Unit 0, Ring Unit 1, Ring Unit 2, Ring Unit 3, Ring Unit 4, Ring Unit 5, Ring Unit 6, Ring Unit 7, Ring Backplane Connector Pin 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B 19B Signal Unit 0, Tip Unit 1, Tip Unit 2, Tip Unit 3, Tip Unit 4, Tip Unit 5, Tip Unit 6, Tip Unit 7, Tip

130

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuring the OPS analog line card

Figure 22: OPS analog line card - typical cross connection example

Configuring the OPS analog line card

The line type, terminating impedance, and balance network configuration for each unit on the card is selected by software service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card.

Jumper strap settings

Each line interface unit on the card is equipped with two jumper blocks that are used to select the proper loop current depending upon loop length. See Table 61: OPS analog line card configuration on page 132.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

131

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

For units connected to loops of 460 to 2300 ohms, both jumper blocks must be installed. For loops that are 460 ohms or less, jumper blocks are not installed. Figure 23: OPS analog line card - jumper block locations on page 134 shows the location of the jumper blocks on the OPS analog line card. Table 61: OPS analog line card - configuration
Application Class of Service (CLS) (Note 1) Loop resistance (ohms) Jumper strap setting (Note 6) On-premise station (ONS) ONP Off-premise station (OPS) OPX

0460

02300 (Note 2)

Both JX.0 and JX.1 off

Both JX.0 and JX.1 off

Both JX.0 and JX.1 on

Loop loss (dB) 01.5 (Note 3) TIMP (Notes 1, 4) BIMP (Notes 1, 4) Gain treatment (Note 5) 600 ohms 600 ohms

>03.0 600 ohms 3COM

>2.53.0 01.5 600 ohms 3CM2 600 ohms 600 ohms No

>1.52.5 >2.54.5 >4.515 600 ohms 3COM 600 ohms 3CM2 600 ohms 3CM2 Yes

Note: 1. Configured in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. Note: 2. The maximum signaling range supported by the OPS analog line card is 2300 ohms. Note: 3. Loss of untreated (no gain devices) metallic line facility. Upper loss limits correspond to loop resistance ranges for 26 AWG wire. Note: 4. The following are the default software impedance settings: ONP CLS Termination Impedance (TIMP): 600 ohms OPX CLS 600 ohms

132

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuring the OPS analog line card

Application

On-premise station (ONS) ONP CLS

Off-premise station (OPS) OPX CLS 3CM2

Balanced Impedance (BIMP):

600 ohms

Note: 5. Gain treatment, such as a Voice Frequency Repeater (VFR) is required to limit the actual OPS loop loss to 4.5 dB, maximum. VFR treatment of metallic loops having untreated loss greater than 15 dB (equivalent to a maximum signaling range of 2300 ohms on 26 AWG wire) is not recommended. Note: 6. Jumper strap settings JX.0 and JX.1 apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the unit number, 0 7. "Off" indicates that a jumper strap is not installed across both pins on a jumper block. Store unused straps on the OPS analog line card by installing them on a single jumper. pin.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

133

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Figure 23: OPS analog line card - jumper block locations

Before the appropriate balance network can be selected, the loop length between the nearend (Meridian 1) and the far-end station must be known. To assist in determining loop length, Table 53: OPS analog line card - cable loop resistance and loss on page 125 shows some typical resistance and loss values for the most common cable lengths for comparison with values obtained from actual measurements. 1. Set the jumpers on the NT1R20 OPS card. 2. Insert the OPS card in its assigned slot 3. Cross-connect off-premise telephones.

134

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Application

Application
Off-premise station application
The NT1R20 OPS analog line card is designed primarily to provide an interface for offpremise station lines. An OPS line serves a terminal usually, but not exclusively, a telephone remote from the PBX either within the same serving area as the local office, or through a distant office. The line is not switched at these offices; however, depending on the facilities used, the local office serving the OPS station can provide line functions such as battery and ringing. Facilities are generally provided by the local exchange carrier (usually, OPS pairs are in the same cable as the PBX-CO trunks). The traditional OPS scenario configuration is shown in Figure 24: Traditional OPS application configuration on page 136. Note: Do not confuse OPS service with Off-Premise Extension (OPX) service. OPX service is the provision of an extension to a main subscriber loop bridged onto the loop at the serving CO or PBX. Do not confuse CLS OPS (assigned in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10) with OPX, which denotes Off-Premise Extension service.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

135

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Figure 24: Traditional OPS application configuration

Other applications
The operating range and built-in protection provisions of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card make it suitable for applications which are variants on the traditional configuration shown in Figure 24: Traditional OPS application configuration on page 136. Examples of such applications are: a PBX in a central building serving stations in other buildings in the vicinity, such as in an industrial park, often called a campus environment. Facilities can be provided by the local exchange carrier or can be privately owned. Protection could be required. termination to other than a telephone, such as to a fax machine or a key telephone system. individual circuits on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card can also be configured as OnPremise Station (ONS) ports in LD 10: - ONS service with hazardous and surge voltage protection (not available on other analog line cards)

136

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Application

- to use otherwise idle NT1R20 OPS analog line card ports

Transmission considerations
The transmission performance of OPS lines depends on the following factors: the port-to-port loss for connections between OPS ports and other ports the transmission parameters of the facilities between the OPS port and the off-premise station or termination the electrical and acoustic transmission characteristics of the termination These factors must be considered when planning applications using the NT1R20 OPS analog line card. They are important when considering configurations other than the traditional OPS application as shown in Figure 24: Traditional OPS application configuration on page 136. The following sections provide basic transmission planning guidelines for various OPS applications.

Port-to-port loss
Loss is inserted between OPS analog line card ports and other ports in accordance with the loss plan. This plan determines the port-to-port loss for each call. When a port is configured for CLS OPS, loss is programmed into the OPS analog line card on a call-by-call basis. When configured for CLS ONS, an OPS analog line card port is programmed to a value that is fixed for all calls. The loss in the other port involved in the call can vary on a call-by-call basis to achieve the total loss scheduled by the plan. For satisfactory transmission performance, particularly on connections between the public network and an OPS termination, it is recommended that facilities conform to the following: Total 1 kHz loss from the local serving CO to the OPS terminal should not exceed 7.0 dB. The total loss in the facility between the PBX and the terminal must not exceed 4.5 dB. See Figure 24: Traditional OPS application configuration on page 136. The following requirements are based on historic Inserted Connection Loss (ICL) objectives: - PBX CO trunk: 5 dB with gain; 0 4.0 dB without gain - OPS line: 4.0 dB with gain; 0 4.5 dB without gain. In recent times economic and technological considerations led to modifications of these historic objectives. As the loss provisions in the PBX for OPS are constrained by regulatory requirements as

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

137

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

well as industry standards, they are not designed to compensate for modified ICL designs in the connecting facilities. Avaya recommends that the attenuation distortion (frequency response) of the OPS facility be within 3.0 dB over the frequency range from 300 to 3000 Hz. It is desirable that this bandwidth extend from 200 to 3200 Hz. The terminating impedance of the facility at the OPS port be approximately that of 600 ohms cable. If the OPS line facility loss is greater than 4.5 dB but does not exceed 15 dB, line treatment using a switched-gain Voice Frequency Repeater (VFR) extends the voice range. The overall range achievable on an OPS line facility is limited by the signaling range (2300 ohms loop including telephone resistance). The signaling range is unaffected by gain treatment; so gain treatment can be used to extend the voice range to the limit of the signaling range. For example, on 26 AWG wire, the signaling range of 2300 ohms corresponds to an untreated metallic loop loss of 15 dB. Gain treatment (such as a VFR) with 10.5 dB of gain would maintain the OPS service loss objective of 4.5 dB while extending the voice range to the full limit of the signaling range.
15.0 dB = 4.5 dB 10.5 dB (loss corresponding to the maximum signaling range) (OPS service loss objective) (required gain treatment)

The use of dial long line units to extend signaling range of OPS analog line cards beyond 15 dB is not recommended.

Termination transmission characteristics

The loss plan for OPS connections is designed so that a connection with an OPS termination provides satisfactory end-to-end listener volume when the OPS termination is a standard telephone. The listener volume at the distant end depends on the OPS termination transmit loudness characteristics; the volume at the OPS termination end depends on the OPS termination receive loudness characteristics. A feature of many (though not all) standard telephones is that the loudness increases with decreased current. So as the line (PBX to OPS termination) facility gets longer and loss increases, the increased loudness of the telephone somewhat compensates for the higher loss, assuming direct current feed from the PBX with constant voltage at the feeding bridge. However, this compensation is not available when: the termination is a non-compensating telephone the OPS port is served by a line card using a constant-current feeding bridge the OPS termination is to telephones behind a local switch providing local current feed, such as a fax machine or a key telephone system OPS line terminations with loudness characteristics designed for other applications can also impact transmission performance. For example, wireless portables loudness characteristics

138

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Application

are selected for connections to switching systems for wireless communication systems; if used in an OPS arrangement without consideration for these characteristics, the result could be a significant deviation from optimum loudness performance.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

139

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

140

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 9: NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 141 Physical description on page 141 Functional description on page 144 Front panel connector pin assignments on page 145

Introduction
The NT4N39AA Call Processor Pentium IV (CP PIV) Large System processor card was introduced in Avaya Communication Server 1000 (Avaya CS 1000) Release 4.5. It features the following: a PCI-based design that is compatible with current CP PII architecture an Intel Pentium processor two CompactFlash (CF) sockets (one on-board and one hot-swappable on the faceplate). The on-board CF is referred to as the Fixed Media Disk (FMD), and the faceplate CF is referred to as the Removable Media Disk (RMD). See Figure 25: CP PIV card (front) on page 143 and Figure 26: CP PIV card (side) on page 144. 512 MBytes of Double Data Rate (DDR) memory

Physical description
The NT4N39AA card measures 23 cm by 16 cm (9,2 in. by 6.3 in.). See Figure 25: CP PIV card (front) on page 143 and Figure 26: CP PIV card (side) on page 144.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

141

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card

The CP PIV front panel is equipped with an EMC gasket and two ejector/injector handles. A reset button and two double LED packages (four LEDs in total) are placed at the front panel as well. The front panel features the following: stacked dual standard DB9 Serial ports USB Connector stacked dual RJ-45 Ethernet ports with LEDs power good LED LEDs indication for activity on CompactFlashes and secondary IDE interface reset Switch INI switch front panel handle part# 3688785, 3688784 (replacement for customer suggested parts 3686134, 3686135 which are now obsolete)

142

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Figure 25: CP PIV card (front)

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

143

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card

Figure 26: CP PIV card (side)

Functional description
The card employs an Intel Pentium Processor as the central processing unit. The internal core clock frequency reaches from 600MHz to1.1GHz. The processor is manufactured in 0.09 um process technology and provides 32 KB of on die data and instruction cache as well as 1 MB of on die L2 cache running at core clock frequency. The processor is a mobile processor with a 478 pin FCBGA package with a maximum junction temperature of 100 C. Processor power dissipation must not exceed 12 W. The front side bus runs at 400 MHz and uses an AGTL+ signaling technology. The quad pumped data interface (data running at 4*100 MHz = 400 MHz) is 64 bit wide providing a total bandwidth of 3.2 GBytes/s. The double pumped address bus (addresses running at 2*100 MHz = 200 MHz) is 32 bit wide supporting an address range of up to 4 GBytes. The processor voltage specification is compliant with IMVP IV specification.

Memory
CP PIV memory uses DDR SDRAM technology. The CP PIV provides a maximum of two GBytes using two verticall DIMM sockets to install off-the-shelf DIMM modules. CP PIV only supports DDR SDRAM DIMM memory with a supply voltage of +2.5 V.

144

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Front panel connector pin assignments

are supportedThe memory data path is 72-bit wide. The Intel 855GME Host Bridge supports 64 Mbit, 128 MByte, 256 MByte and 512 Mbyte SDRAM technologies with a maximum ROW page size of 16 Kbytes and CAS latency of 2 or 2.5. The maximum height of the DIMM modules possible on CP PIV is one inch or 25.4 mm. The DDR interface runs at 100 MHz synchronously to the front side bus frequency. The SPD (Serial Presents Detect) -SROM available on DIMM modules provide all necessary information (speed, size, and type) to the boot-up software. The SPD-SROM can be read via SMBUS connected to the Intel Hance Rapids South Bridge.

Front panel connector pin assignments

COM1 and COM2 ports
The physical interface for the COM1 and COM2 ports to the front panel is through a stacked dual Male DB9 Connector. The corresponding pin details are shown in Table 62: COM1 and COM2 pin assignments on page 145. Table 62: COM1 and COM2 pin assignments
Pin number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD RXD TXD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS RI Pin name

USB port
The physical interface for thetwo USB ports to the front panel is through a standard USB connector. The corresponding Pin details are shown in Table 63: USB connector pin outs on page 146.Table 27. USB Connector Pin Outs

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

145

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card

Table 29. ITP CONNECTOR Pin Outs Table 63: USB connector pin outs
Pin number 1 2 3 4 USB VCC USBUSB+ USB GND Pin name

10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports

The physical interface for the two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports to the front panel is through a stacked dual RJ 45 connector with magnetics and LEDs. The corresponding pin details are shown in Table 64: Ethernet connector pin outs on page 146. Table 64: Ethernet connector pin outs
Pin number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AX+ AXBX+ CX+ CXBXDX+ DXPin name

Front panel LED indicators

The CP PIV card has a total of four LEDS on the front panel. Two of the LEDs are 15 KV ESD protected and can be controlled via CPLD. Table 65: Front panel LED functionality on page 146 explains the function of each LED. Table 65: Front panel LED functionality
LED LED1 Color Green Functionality Power ON LED Off Default

146

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Front panel connector pin assignments

LED LED2 LED3 LED4

Color Green Green Green

Functionality Secondary IDE HD activity CompactFlash activity CompactFlash activity Off -Off -Off

Default

ITP connector (25 PIN, Debug Only)

Table 66: ITP connector pin outs
Pin P1 P3 P5 P7 P9 P11 P13 P15 P17 P19 P21 P23 P25 GND BPM0N BPM1N BPM2N BPM3N BPM4N BPM5N ITP_CPURSTN TCK CLK CLKN BPM5N GND Signal Name P2 P4 P6 P8 P10 P12 P14 P16 P18 P20 P22 P24 Pin GND NC RESETN GND TDI TMS TRSTN TCK NC GND PWR TDO Signal Name

Post 80 Debug LEDs (Optional)

CP PIV has post 80 debug LEDs to assist in debugging the board and solving boot related problems. Using a GPCS from Super I/O X-bus, data lines are latched using latch 74F374. These help identify Post 80 codes. This feature is available only in debug boards.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

147

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card

148

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 10: NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 149 Physical description on page 150 Functional description on page 153 Electrical specifications on page 157 Installation and configuration on page 158 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software on page 176 Applications on page 190

Introduction
This section describes the two Lineside T1 interface cards: NT5D11 applicable for Large Systems only NT5D14 applicable for Small Systems only Note: Unless otherwise stated, the information in this section applies to both the NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 interface cards. The NT5D11 Lineside T1 Interface card is an intelligent 24-channel digital line card that is used to connect the switch to T1-compatible terminal equipment on the lineside. The T1compatible terminal equipment includes voice mail systems, channel banks containing FXS cards, and key systems such as the Avaya. The Lineside T1 card differs from trunk T1 cards in that it supports terminal equipment features such as hookflash, transfer, hold, and conference.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

149

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

This card occupies two card slots in the main or expansion cabinets. The Lineside T1 card can be installed in the system's main cabinet or one of the expansion cabinets (there are no limitations on the number of cards that can be installed in the Cabinet system). The Lineside T1 card emulates an analog line card to the system software; therefore, each channel is independently configurable by software control in LD 10. The Lineside T1 card also comes equipped with a Man-Machine Interface (MMI) maintenance program. This feature provides diagnostic information regarding the status of the T1 link. The NT5D11 Lineside T1 interface card is an IPE line card that can be installed in the NT8D37 IPE module. Up to eight cards can be installed.

Physical description
The Lineside T1 card mounts into any two consecutive IPE slots. The card consists of a motherboard and a daughterboard. The motherboard circuitry is contained on a standard 31.75 by 25.40 cm. (12.5 by 10.0 in) printed circuit board. The daughterboard is contained on a 5.08 by 15.24 cm (2.0 by 6.0 in) printed circuit board and mounts to the motherboard on six standoffs.

Card connections
The Lineside T1 card uses the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cable to connect from the IPE backplane to the 25-pair amphenol connector on the IPE I/O input/output (I/O) panel. The I/ O panel connector then connects directly to a T1 line, external alarm, and an MMI terminal or modem using the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable available from Avaya.

Faceplate
The faceplate of the card is twice as wide as the other standard analog and digital line cards, and occupies two card slots. It comes equipped with four LED indicators. See Figure 27: Lineside T1 card faceplate on page 151.

150

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Figure 27: Lineside T1 card faceplate

In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table 67: NT5D14AA Lineside T1 faceplate LEDs on page 151. Table 67: NT5D14AA Lineside T1 faceplate LEDs
LED STATUS State On (Red) Off RED On (Red) Definition The NT5D14AA card either failed its self-test or it hasn't yet been configured in software. The card is in an active state. A red alarm is detected from the T1 link. (This includes, but is not limited to: not receiving a signal, the signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or frame slip thresholds.)

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

151

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

LED Off YEL

State No red alarm exists.

Definition

On (Yellow)

A yellow alarm state is detected from the terminal equipment side of the T1 link. If the terminal equipment detects a red alarm condition, it may send a yellow alarm signal to the Lineside T1 card (this depends on whether or not your terminal equipment supports this feature). No yellow alarm. The card detects whether tests are being run or that alarms are disabled through the Man-Machine Interface. The LED remains lit until these conditions are no longer detected. The Lineside T1 card is fully operational.

Off MAINT On (Red)

Off

The STATUS LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has successfully passed its self test, and is functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the selftest runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED goes out. If the LED flashes continuously, or remains weakly lit, replace the card. Note: The STATUS LED indicates the enabled/disabled status of both card slots of the Lineside T1 card simultaneously. To properly enable the card, both the motherboard and the daughterboard slots must be enabled. The STATUS LED turns off as soon as either one of the Lineside T1 card slots are enabled. No LED operation is observed when the second card slot is enabled. To properly disable the card, both card slots must be disabled. The LED does not turn on until both card slots are disabled. The RED ALARM LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has detected an alarm condition from the T1 link. Alarm conditions can include such conditions as not receiving a signal or the signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or frame slip thresholds. See Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software on page 176 for information about T1 link maintenance. If one of these alarm conditions is detected, the red LED lights. Yellow alarm indication is sent to the far-end as long as the near-end remains in a red alarm condition. Depending on how the Man-Machine Interface (MMI) is configured, this LED remains lit until the following actions occur: If the "Self-Clearing" function is enabled in the MMI, the LED clears the alarm when the alarm condition is no longer detected. This is the factory default. If the "Self-Clearing" function hasnot been enabled or it is subsequently disabled in the MMI, the LED stays lit until the command "Clear Alarm" is typed in the MMI, even though the carrier automatically returned to service when the alarm condition was no longer detected. The YELLOW ALARM LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has detected a yellow alarm signal from the terminal equipment side of the T1 link. See Man-Machine T1 maintenance

152

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

interface software on page 176 for information about T1 link maintenance. If the terminal equipment detects a red alarm condition, such as not receiving a signal or the signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or frame slip thresholds, it can send a yellow alarm signal to the Lineside T1 card, depending on whether or not the terminal equipment supports this feature. If a yellow alarm signal is detected, the LED lights. The MAINT LED indicates if the Lineside T1 card is fully operational because of certain maintenance commands being issued through the MMI. See Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software on page 176 for information about T1 link maintenance. If the card detects that tests are being run or that alarms are disabled through the MMI, the LED lights and remains lit until these conditions are no longer detected, then it turns off.

Functional description
Figure 28: Lineside T1 card - block diagram on page 153 shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the Lineside T1 card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages.

Figure 28: Lineside T1 card - block diagram

The NT5D14AA provides the following features and functions: Card interfaces T1 interface circuit

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

153

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Signaling and control Card control functions Microcontroller Card LAN interface Sanity Timer Man-Machine Interface (MMI) The Lineside T1 card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective all-digital connection between T1-compatible terminal equipment (such as voice mail systems, voice response units, and trading turrets) and the system. The terminal equipment is assured access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone type line functionality such as hook flash, SPRE codes and ringback tones generated from the switch. Usually, the Lineside T1 card eliminates the need for channel bank type equipment normally placed between the switch and the terminal equipment. This provides a more robust and reliable end-to-end connection. The Lineside T1 card supports line supervision features such as loop and ground start protocols. It can also be used in an offpremise arrangement where analog (500/2500-type) telephones are extended over T1 with the use of channel bank equipment. The Lineside T1 interface offers significant improvement over the previous alternatives. For example, if a digital trunk connection were used, such as with the DTI/PRI interface card, lineside functionality would not be supported. Previously, the only way to achieve the lineside functionality was to use analog ports and channel bank equipment. No channel bank equipment is required, resulting in a more robust and reliable connection. The Lineside T1 interface offers a number of benefits when used to connect to third-party applications equipment: It is a more cost-effective alternative for connection because it eliminates the need for expensive channel bank equipment. The Lineside T1 supports powerful T1 monitoring and diagnostic capability. Overall costs for customer applications can also be reduced because the T1compatible IPE is often more attractively priced than the analog-port alternatives. The Lineside T1 card is compatible with all IPE based systems and standard public or private DSX-1 type carrier facilities. Using A/B robbed bit signaling, it supports D4 or ESF channel framing formats as well as AMI or B8ZS coding. Because it uses standard PCM in standard T1 timeslots, existing T1 test equipment remains compatible for diagnostic and fault isolation purposes.

Card interfaces
The Lineside T1 card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops through the DS-30X Interfaces circuits and maintenance data over the card LAN link.

154

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

T1 interface circuit
The Lineside T1 card contains one T1 line interface circuit which provides 24 individually configurable voice interfaces to one T1 link in 24 different time slots. The circuit demultiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS-30X Tx signaling bitstreams from the DS-30X network loop and converts it into 1.544 mHz T1 Tx signaling bitstreams onto the T1 link. It also does the opposite, receiving Rx signaling bitstreams from the T1 link and transmitting Rx signaling bitstreams onto the DS-30X network loop. The T1 interface circuit performs the following: Provides an industry standard DSX-1 (0 to 655 ft./200 meters) interface. Converts DS-30X signaling protocol into FXO A and B robbed bit signaling protocol. Provides switch-selectable transmission and reception of T1 signaling messages over a T1 link in either loop or ground start mode.

Signaling and control

The Lineside T1 card also contains signaling and control circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the system controller to operate the T1 line interface circuit during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the controller and return incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X network loop.

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on the Lineside T1 card. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the card if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.

Microcontrollers
The Lineside T1 card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller controls the following: reporting to the CPU via the card LAN link: - card identification (card type, vintage, serial number) - firmware version - self-test results

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

155

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

- programmed unit parameter status receipt and implementation of card configuration: - control of the T1 line interface - enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card - programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of channel operation - maintenance diagnostics interface with the line card circuit: converts on/off-hook, and ringer control messages from the DS-30X loop into A/B bit manipulations for each time slot in the T1 data stream, using robbed bit signaling. the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card.

Card LAN interface

Maintenance data is exchanged with the CPU over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link.

Sanity timer
The Lineside T1 card also contains a sanity timer that resets the microcontroller in the event of a loss of program control. The microcontroller must service the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly serviced, it times out and causes the microcontroller to be hardware reset.

Man-Machine Interface
The Lineside T1 card provides an optional Man-Machine Interface (MMI) that is primarily used for T1 link performance monitoring and problem diagnosis. The MMI provides alarm notification, T1 link performance reporting and fault isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the I/O panel to a terminal or modem. The MMI is an optional feature because all T1 configuration settings are performed through dip switch settings or preconfigured factory default settings. The Lineside T1 card provides an optional Man-Machine Interface (MMI) that is primarily used for T1 link performance monitoring and problem diagnosis. The MMI provides alarm notification, T1 link performance reporting and fault isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the I/O panel to a terminal or modem. Multiple cards (up to 64) can be served through one MMI terminal or modem by cabling the cards together.

156

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Electrical specifications

Electrical specifications
T1 channel specifications
Table 68: Lineside T1 card - line interface unit electrical characteristics on page 157 provides specifications for the 24 T1channels. Each characteristic is set by dip switches. See Installation and configuration on page 158 for the corresponding dip switch settings. Table 68: Lineside T1 card - line interface unit electrical characteristics
Characteristics Framing Coding Signaling Distance to Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) or Channel Service Unit ESF or D4 AMI or B8ZS Loop or ground start A/B robbed-bit 0-199.6 meters (0655 feet) Description

Power requirements
The Lineside T1 card requires +15 V, 15 V, and +5 V from the backplane. One NT8D06 IPE Power Supply AC or NT6D40 IPE Power Supply DC can supply power to a maximum of eight Lineside T1 cards. See Table 69: Lineside T1 card - power required on page 157. Table 69: Lineside T1 card - power required
Voltage + 5.0 V dc +15.0 V dc 15.0 V dc Current (max.) 1.6 Amp 150 mA. 150 mA.

Foreign and surge voltage protections

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on the Lineside T1 card. It does protect against accidental shorts to 52 V dc analog lines.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

157

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

When the card is used to service off-premise terminal equipment through the public telephone network, install a Channel Service Unit (CSU) as part of the terminal equipment to provide external line protection.

Environmental specifications
Table 70: Lineside T1 card - environmental specifications on page 158 lists the environmental specifications of the Lineside T1 card. Table 70: Lineside T1 card - environmental specifications
Parameter Operating temperature-normal Operating temperature-short term Operating humidity-normal Operating humidity-short term Storage temperature Storage humidity Specifications 15 to +30 C (+59 to 86F), ambient 10 to +45 C (+50 to 113F), ambient 20% to 55% RH (non-condensing) 20% to 80% RH (non-condensing) 50 to +70 C (58 to 158F), ambient 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)

Installation and configuration

Installation and configuration of the Lineside T1 card consists of six basic steps: 1. Configure the dip switches on the Lineside T1 card for the environment. 2. Install the Lineside T1 card into the selected card slots in the IPE shelf. 3. Cable from the I/O panel to the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) or CSU, MMI terminal or modem (optional), external alarm (optional), and other Lineside T1 cards for daisy chaining use of MMI terminal (optional). 4. Configure the MMI terminal. 5. Configure the Lineside T1 card through the system software and verify self-test results. 6. Verify initial T1 operation and configure MMI (optional). Steps 1-5 are explained in this section. Step 6 is covered in Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software on page 176.

Dip switch settings

Begin the installation and configuration of the Lineside T1 card by selecting the proper dip switch settings for the environment. The Lineside T1 card contains two dip switches, each

158

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation and configuration

containing eight switch positions. They are located in the upper right corner of the motherboard circuit card as shown in Figure 29: Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations on page 159. The configuration for these switches are shown in Table 71: Lineside T1 card-T1 Switch 1 (S1) dip switch settings on page 161 through Table 74: Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 - 5) on page 163. When the line-side T1 card is oriented as shown in Figure 29: Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations on page 159, the dip switches are ON when they are up, and OFF when they are down. The dip switch settings configure the card for the following parameters:

Figure 29: Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations

MMI port speed selection

This dip switch setting selects the appropriate baud rate for the terminal or modem (if any) that is connected to the MMI.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

159

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Line Supervisory Signaling protocol

As described in Functional description on page 153, the Lineside T1 card is capable of supporting loop start or ground start call processing modes. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of line signaling the CPE equipment supports.

Address of Lineside T1 card to the MMI

The address of the Lineside T1 card to the MMI is made up of two components: The address of the card within the shelf The address of the shelf in which the card resides These two addresses are combined to create a unique address for the card. The MMI reads the address of the card within the shelf from the card firmware; however the address of the shelf must be set by this dip switch. The shelf address dip switch can be from 0 15. 16 is the maximum number of Lineside T1 IPE shelves (a maximum of 64 Lineside T1 cards) capable of daisy chaining to a single MMI terminal. For ease, it is recommended that this address be set the same as the address of the peripheral controller identifier in LD 97 for type: XPE. This is not possible because the dip switch is limited to 16; however, this is not mandatory.

T1 framing
The Lineside T1 card is capable of interfacing with CPE or CSU equipment either in D4 or ESF framing mode. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of framing the CPE or CSU equipment supports.

T1 coding
The Lineside T1 card is capable of interfacing with CPE or CSU equipment using either AMI or B8ZS coding. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of coding the CPE or CSU equipment supports.

DSX-1 length
Estimate the distance between the Lineside T1 card and the hardwired local CPE, or the Telco demarc RJ48, for the carrier facility connecting the Lineside T1 and the remote CPE. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on this distance.

160

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation and configuration

Line supervision on T1 failure

This setting determines in what state all 24 ports of the Lineside T1 card appears to the Avaya Communication Server (Avaya CS 1000M), Avaya CS 1000E and Meridian 1 in case of T1 failure. Ports can appear as either in the on-hook or off-hook states on T1 failure. Note: All idle Lineside T1 lines go off-hook and seize a Digitone Receiver when the off-hook line processing is invoked on T1 failure. This may prevent DID trunks from receiving incoming calls until the Lineside T1 lines time-out and release the DTRs.

Daisy-chaining to MMI
If two or more Lineside T1 cards are installed and the MMI is used, daisy-chain the cards together to use one MMI terminal or modem, See Figure 31: Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI on page 170. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on how many Lineside T1 cards are installed.

MMI master or slave

This setting is used only if daisy-chaining the cards to the MMI terminal or modem. This setting determines whether this card is a master or a slave in the MMI daisy-chain. Select the master setting if this card is the card that is cabled directly into the MMI terminal or modem; select the slave setting if this card is cabled to another Lineside T1 card in a daisy chain. Table 71: Lineside T1 card-T1 Switch 1 (S1) dip switch settings on page 161 through Table 74: Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 - 5) on page 163 describes the proper dip switch settings for each type of T1 link. After the card is installed, the MMI displays the DIP switch settings the command Display Configuration is used. See QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card on page 109 for details on how to invoke this command. Table 71: Lineside T1 card-T1 Switch 1 (S1) dip switch settings
Dip Switch Number 1 2 36 Characteristic MMI port speed selection T1 signaling XPEC Address for the Lineside T1 card Selection On = 1200 baud Off = 2400 baud On = Ground start Off = Loop start See Table 72: Lineside T1 card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

161

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Dip Switch Number

Characteristic

Selection S1, positions 3 - 6) on page 162

7 8

Not Used Reserved for SL-100 use

Leave Off Leave Off

Table 72: Lineside T1 card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3 6)
XPEC Address 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 S1 Switch Position 3 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On On On On On On S1 Switch Position 4 Off Off Off Off On On On On Off Off Off Off On On On On S1 Switch Position 5 Off Off On On Off Off On On Off Off On On Off Off On On S1 Switch Position 6 Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On

Table 73: Lineside T1 card - T1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings

Dip Switch Number 1 2 T1 framing T1 Coding Characteristic On = D4 Off = ESF On = AMI Off = B8ZS Selection

162

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation and configuration

Dip Switch Number 35

Characteristic CPE or CSU distance

Selection See Table 74: Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 - 5) on page 163 On = On-hook Off = Off-hook On = Yes Off = No On = Master Off = Slave

6 7 8

Line processing on T1 link failure Daisy-chaining to MMI MMI Master or Slave

Table 74: Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 - 5)
Distance 0133 134266 267399 400533 534655 S2 Switch Position 3 S2 Switch Position 4 S2 Switch Position 5 On Off Off Off Off Off On On Off Off Off On Off On Off

Installation
This section describes how to install and test the Lineside T1 card. When installed, the Lineside T1 card occupies two card slots. It can be installed into an NT8D37 IPE module. When installing the Lineside T1 card into NT8D37 IPE module, determine the vintage level module. If the 25-pair I/O connectors are partially split between adjacent IPE card slots, the Lineside T1 card works only in card slots where Unit 0 of the motherboard card slot appears on the first pair of the 25-pair I/O connector. Certain vintage levels carry dedicated 25-pair I/O connectors only for card slots 0, 4, 8, and 12. These vintage levels are cabled with only 16 pairs of wires from each card slot to the I/O panel. Some of the 25-pair I/O connectors are split between adjacent card slots. Other vintage levels cable each card slot to the I/O panel using a unique, 24-pair connector on the I/O panel. In these vintage levels, the Lineside T1 card can be installed in any available pair of card slots. However, because of the lower number of wire pairs cabled to the I/O panel in the lower vintage level, only certain card slots are available to the Lineside T1 card.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

163

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

See Table 75: Lineside T1 card - NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port cabling on page 164 for the vintage level information for the NT8D37 IPE modules. Table 75: Lineside T1 card - NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port cabling
Vintage Level NT8D37AA NT8D37BA NT8D37DC NT8D37DE NT8D37EC Number of ports cabled to I/O panel 16 ports 24 ports 16 ports 16 ports 24 ports

Vintage levels cabling 24 ports

For modules with vintage levels that cabled 24 ports to the I/O panel, the Lineside T1 card can be installed in any pair of card slots 015.

Vintage levels cabling 16 ports

For modules with vintage levels that cabled 16 ports to the I/O panel, the Lineside T1 card can be installed into the following card slot pairs:
Available: Motherboard/Daughterboard 0 and 1 1 and 2 4 and 5 7 and 8 8 and 9 9 and 10 12 and 13 13 and 14

The Lineside T1 card cannot be installed into the following card slot pairs:
Restricted: Motherboard/Daughterboard 2 and 3 3 and 4 6 and 7 10 and 11 11 and 12

164

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation and configuration

14 and 15

If the Lineside T1 card must be installed into one of the restricted card slot pairs, rewire the IPE module card slot to the I/O panel by installing an additional NT8D81 cable from the Lineside T1 card motherboard slot to the I/O panel. Rearrange the three backplane connectors for the affected card slots. This permits the connection of the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 card carrier and maintenance external I/O cable at the IPE module I/O panel connector for card slots that are otherwise restricted. Also, all Lineside T1 card connections can be made at the main distribution frame instead of connecting the NT5D13 Lineside T1 card external I/O cable at the I/O panel. This eliminates these card slots restrictions. The Lineside T1 card cannot be installed into the following card slot pairs:

Cabling the Lineside T1 card

After configuring the dip switches and installing the Lineside T1 card into the selected card slots, the Lineside T1 card is ready to be cabled to the CPE or CSU equipment. Connections can also be made to the MMI terminal or modem (optional), an external alarm (optional), and other Lineside T1 cards for daisy-chain use of the MMI terminal (optional). The Lineside T1 card is cabled from its backplane connector through connections from the motherboard circuit card only (no cable connections are made from the daughterboard circuit card) to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the IPE module. The connections from the Lineside T1 card to the I/O panel are made with the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cables provided with the IPE module.

Cabling from the I/O panel with the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable
Usually, the I/O panel is connected to the T1 link and other external devices through the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable. See Figure 30: Lineside T1 card - connection using the NTSD13AA Lineside T1 cable on page 166. This cable consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which plugs into the I/O panel. The other end has 4 connectors: 1. a DB15 male connector (P2) which plugs into the T1 line 2. a DB9 male connector (P3) which plugs into an external alarm system 3. a second DB9 male connector (P5) which connects to an MMI terminal or modem 4. a DB9 female connector (P4) that connects to the next Lineside T1 card's P4 connector for MMI daisy chaining

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

165

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Figure 30: Lineside T1 card - connection using the NTSD13AA Lineside T1 cable

Cabling from the I/O panel at the Main Distribution Frame

All Lineside T1 connections can be made at the main distribution frame (MDF) if it is preferred to not use the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable at the I/O panel.

166

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation and configuration

Connecting to the MDF

To make the connections at the MDF, follow this procedure: 1. Punch down the first eight pairs of a standard telco 25-pair female-connectorized cross-connect tail starting with the first tip and ring pair of the Lineside T1 motherboard card slot on the cross-connect side of the MDF terminals. 2. Plug the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable into this 25-pair cross-connect tail at the MDF, regardless of the card slot restrictions that exist from the vintage level of IPE or CE module used. This connection can also be made at the MDF without using the NT5D13 Lineside T1 I/O cable, by cross-connecting according to the pinouts in Table 76: Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts on page 167. 3. Turn over the T1 transmit and receive pairs, where required for hardwiring the Lineside T1 card to local CPE T1 terminal equipment. The backplane connector is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of pins. Table 76: Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts on page 167 shows the I/O pin designations for the backplane connector and the 25-pair Amphenol connector from the I/O panel. Although the connections from the I/O panel only use 14 of the available 50 pins, the remaining pins are reserved and cannot be used for other signaling transmissions. The information in Table 76: Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts on page 167 is provided as a reference and diagnostic aid at the backplane, because the cabling arrangement can vary at the I/O panel. See Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for cable pinout information for the I/O panel. Table 76: Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts
Backplane Connector Pin 12A 12B 13A 13B 14A 14B 15A 15B 16A 16B 17A 17B 18A I/O Panel Connector Pin 1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 5 30 6 31 7 Signal T1 Tip, Receive Data T1 Ring, Receive Data T1 Tip, Transmit Data T1 Ring, Transmit Data Alarm out, Normally open Alarm out, Common Alarm out, Normally closed No Connection No Connection Away from MMI terminal, Receive Data Away from MMI terminal, Transmit Data Towards MMI terminal, Transmit Data Towards MMI terminal, Receive Data

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

167

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Backplane Connector Pin 18B 19A 19B

I/O Panel Connector Pin 32 8 33

Signal Daisy-chain Control 2 Daisy-chain Control 1 Ground

Table 77: Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA connector pinouts on page 168 shows the pin assignments when using the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable. Table 77: Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA connector pinouts
I/O pane connect or pin Lead designations NT5D13A Lineside T1 cable connector to A Lineside external equipment T1 I/O connector pin 11 3 1 9 1 2 3 2 3 5 7 9 5 7 9 3 2 DB9 female away from MMI (P4) Wired as DTE Data is transmitted on pin 2 (TXD) and received on pin 3 (RXD) DB9 male towards MMI (P5) Wired as DCE Data is transmitted on pin 2 (RXD) and received on pin 3 (TXD) DB9 male to external alarm (P3) DB15 male to T1 (P2) Lineside T1 card is CPE transmit to network and receive from network

1 26 2 27 3 28 4 7 31 33 8 32 33 8 32 30 6

T1 Tip Receive Data T1 Ring Receive Data T1 Tip Transmit Data T1 Ring Transmit Data Alarm out common Alarm out (normally open) Alarm out (normally closed) Towards MMI terminal Receive Data Towards MMI terminal Transmit Data Ground Control 1 Control 2 Ground Control 1 Control 2 Away from MMI terminal Transmit Data Away from MMI terminal Receive Data

168

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation and configuration

T1 connections
T1 signaling for all 24 channels is transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11 as shown in Table 77: Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA connector pinouts on page 168. Plug the DB15 male connector labeled "P2" into the T1 link. T1 transmit and receive pairs must be turned over between the Lineside T1 card and CPE equipment that is hardwired without carrier facilities. If the Lineside T1 card is connected through T1 carrier facilities, the transmit and receive pairs must be wired straight through to the RJ48 at the Telco demarc, the CSU, or other T1 carrier equipment. The T1 CPE equipment at the far end has transmit and receive wired straight from the RJ48 demarc at the far end of the carrier facility.

External alarm connections

P3 connector pins 3, 4, and 28 can be plugged into any external alarm hardware. Plug the male DB9 connector labeled "P3" into the external alarm. These connections are optional, and the functionality of the Lineside T1 card is not affected if they are not made. The MMI (described in detail in Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software on page 176) monitors the T1 link for specified performance criteria and reports on problems detected. One of the ways it can report information is through this external alarm connection. If connected, the Lineside T1 card's microprocessor activates the external alarm hardware if it detects certain T1 link problems that it has classified as alarm levels 1 or 2. See ManMachine T1 maintenance interface software on page 176 for a detailed description of alarm levels and configuration. If an alarm level 1 or 2 is detected by MMI, the Lineside T1 card closes the contact that is normally open, and opens the contact that is normally closed. The MMI command Clear Alarm returns the alarm contacts to their normal state.

MMI connections
P5 connector pins 2, 3, 5, 7 and 9 are used to connect the Lineside T1 card to the MMI terminal and daisy chain Lineside T1 cards together for access to a shared MMI terminal. When logging into a Lineside T1 card, "control 2" is asserted by that card, which informs all of the other cards not to talk on the bus, but rather to pass the data straight through. The pins labeled "control 1" are reserved for future use. As with the external alarm connections, MMI connections are optional. Up to 128 Lineside T1 cards, located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves, can be linked to one MMI terminal using the daisy chaining approach. If only one Lineside T1 card is being installed, cable from the DB9 female connector labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem. For installations of only one card, no connection is made to the DB9 male connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal). If two or more Lineside T1 cards are being installed into the system, the MMI port connections can be daisy-chained together so that only one MMI terminal is required for up to 128 Lineside

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

169

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

T1 cards. See Figure 31: Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI on page 170. Cards can be located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves. Any card slot in the IPE shelf can be connected to any other card slot; the card slots connected together do not need to be consecutive.

Connecting two or more Lineside T1 cards to the MMI terminal

Follow this procedure for connecting two or more Lineside T1 cards to the MMI terminal: 1. Cable the DB9 male connector labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem. 2. Make the connection from the first card to the second card by plugging the DB9 female connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal) from the first card into the DB9 male connector of the second card labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal). 3. Repeat Step 2 for the remaining cards. 4. When the last card in the daisy chain is reached, make no connection to the DB9 male connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal). 5. If two Lineside T1 cards are located too far apart to connect the "P4" and "P5" connectors together, connect them together with an off-the-shelf DB-9 female to DB-9 male straight-through extension cable, available at any PC supply store.

Figure 31: Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI

170

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation and configuration

Terminal configuration
For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the Lineside T1 card, the interface characteristics must be configured to the following: Speed 1200 or 2400 bps, depending on the setting of switch position 1 of Switch 1 Character width 8 bits Parity bit none Stop bits one Software handshake (XON/XOFF) off

Software configuration
Although much of the architecture and many of the features of the Lineside T1 card differ from the analog line card, the Lineside T1 card is designed to emulate an analog line card to the CS 1000 software. Because of this, the Lineside T1 card software configuration is performed the same as two adjacent analog line cards. All 24 T1 channels carried by the Lineside T1 card are individually configured using the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. Use Table 78: DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping on page 171 to determine the correct unit number and the technical document Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 service change instructions. The Lineside T1 card circuitry routes 16 units (0-15) on the motherboard and eight (0-7) units on the daughterboard to 24 T1 channels. The motherboard circuit card is located in the left card slot, and the daughterboard circuit card is located in right card slot. For example, if the Lineside T1 card is installed into card slots 0 and 1, the motherboard would reside in card slot 0 and the daughterboard would reside in card slot 1. To configure the terminal equipment through the switch software, the T1 channel number must be cross-referenced to the corresponding card unit number. This mapping is shown in Table 78: DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping on page 171. Table 78: DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping
Item Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard TN 0 1 2 3 4 5 T1 Channel Number 1 2 3 4 5 6

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

171

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Item Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard

TN 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

T1 Channel Number 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Disconnect supervision
The Lineside T1 card supports far-end disconnect supervision by opening the tip side toward the terminal equipment upon the system's detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call. The Supervised Analog Line feature (SAL) must be configured in LD 10 for each Lineside T1 port. At the prompt FTR, respond: OSP <CR> and against FTR respond: ISP <CR> The Lineside T1 card treats OSP and ISP for both originating and terminating calls as hook flash disconnect supervision, also known as cut-off disconnect. Originating calls are outgoing from the terminal equipment. Terminating calls are incoming to the terminal equipment. The Lineside T1 card does not support battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision on originating calls.

172

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Clocking Requirement

After the software is configured, power up the card and verify the self test results. The STATUS LED on the faceplate indicates whether or not the Lineside T1 card has passed its self test, and is functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED goes out. The LED goes out if either the motherboard or daughterboard is enabled by the software. If the LED flashes continuously or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

Clocking Requirement
The clocking for the NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card in the Communication Server 1000 system (Release 5.0 and later) is as follows: Lineside T1 cards are clock master of their T1 link, which has a clock accuracy requirement of +/-50ppm MGC does not provide a backplane clock with +/-50ppm accuracy at freerun An accurate clock source is needed for Lineside T1 application The following are the two methods to bring an accurate clock source to MCG: Configure a digital trunk card with Clock Controller within the same cabinet/chassis as Lineside T1 cards. With Clock Controller enabled, in both freerun or locked state, an accurate clock will be provided to MGC. Use an MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable (NTDW67AAE5) to bring a clock source from other CS 1000 cabinet/chassis that has a Central Office Link. With accurate clock source available, MGC locks to the reference and provide an backplane clock as accurate as the clock source.

Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable

The following sections elaborate on how to connect an MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable.

Prerequisites
The prerequisites for connecting an MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable are the following: MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable --- NTDW67AAE5. Figure 32: MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable on page 174 shows the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable. It is used to provide clock reference between CS 1000 Media Gateway Cabinet/chassis.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

173

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Figure 32: MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable

Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable

1. Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable to the AUI port of the back of the MG1000 chassis. Figure 33: MG1000 chassis on page 174 shows the AUI port of the MG1000 chassis.

Figure 33: MG1000 chassis

2. In the Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis, connect to 15-pin DSUB connector on the back panel formerly used for the 10Base-T AUI connection. Figure 34: Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis on page 175 shows the 10Base-T AUI connection of the Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis.

174

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Clocking Requirement

Figure 34: Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis

3. Use an MGC Breakout Adapter for Option 11C (NTDW63AAE5) Connect the adapter to 25 pairs MDF connector at Slot 0 Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable (NTDW67AAE5) to 15-pin DSUB connector on the Breakout Adapter. Figure 35: Option 11C Cabinet on page 175 shows the Option 11C Cabinet.

Figure 35: Option 11C Cabinet

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

175

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software

Description
The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) supplies a maintenance interface to a terminal that provides T1 link diagnostics and historical information. See Installation and configuration on page 158 for instructions on how to install the cabling and configure the terminal for the MMI. This section describes the features of MMI and explains how to configure and use the MMI firmware. The MMI provides the following maintenance features: default and reconfigurable alarm parameters notification of T1 link problems by activating alarms Reports on current and historical T1 link performance T1 tests for T1 verification and fault isolation to Lineside T1 card, T1 link, or CPE equipment

Alarms
MMI activates alarms for the following T1 link conditions: excessive bit error rate frame slip errors out of frame condition loss of signal condition blue alarm condition The alarms are activated in response to pre-set thresholds and error durations. Descriptions of each of these T1 link alarm conditions, instructions on how to configure alarm parameters, and access alarm reporting can be found in Alarm operation and reporting on page 184. Two levels of alarm severity exist for bit errors and frame slip errors. For these conditions, two different threshold and duration configurations are established. When the first level of severity is reached (alarm level 1), the MMI does the following: activates the external alarm hardware lights the appropriate LED on the faceplate (either RED ALARM or YELLOW ALARM)

176

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software

displays an alarm message on the MMI terminal creates entry in the alarm log When the second level of severity is reached (alarm level 2), the MMI performs all of the same functions as alarm level 1, and in addition, forces the Lineside T1 card to enter trunk processing mode. In this mode, the terminal equipment sends either "on-hook" or "off-hook" signals for all 24 ports to the CS 1000M, and Meridian 1, depending on how the dip switch for trunk processing was set (dip switch #2, position #6). If the MMI detects T1 link failures for any of the remainder of the conditions monitored (out of frame condition, loss of signal condition, and blue alarm condition), the Lineside T1 card automatically performs all alarm level 2 functions. The MMI also sends a yellow alarm to the distant end CPE or CSU. Alarms can be configured to self-clear or not self-clear when the alarm condition is no longer detected. All alarms activated produce a record in an alarm log. The alarm log maintains records for the most recent 100 alarms and can be displayed, printed and cleared. The alarm log displays or prints the alarms listing the most recent first in descending chronological order. The alarms are stamped with the date and time they occurred.

T1 performance counters and reports

The MMI maintains performance error counters for the following T1 conditions: errored seconds bursty seconds unavailable seconds framer slip seconds loss of frame seconds It retains the T1 performance statistics for the current hour, and for each hour for the previous 24 hours. Descriptions of each of these performance error counters, and instructions on how to report on them and clear them can be found in Performance counters and reporting on page 186.

T1 verification and fault isolation testing

The MMI performs various tests to verify that the T1 is working adequately, or help to isolate a problem to the Lineside T1 card, the T1 link, or the CPE equipment. Descriptions of all of these tests and instructions on how to run them can be found in Testing on page 188.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

177

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Login and password

The MMI can be accessed through a TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem. After installing the MMI terminal and card cables, the MMI firmware can be accessed. For single card installations, log in by entering: L<CR> For multiple card installations connected in a daisy-chain, log in by entering: L <address> where the four-digit address is the two-digit address of the IPE shelf as set by dip switch positions (dip switch #1, positions 3-6) on the card (as opposed to the address set in the CS 1000 software), plus the two-digit address of the card slot that the motherboard occupies. For example, to login to a card located in shelf 13, card slot 4, type: L 13 4 <CR> A space is inserted between the login command (L), the shelf address, and the card slot address. The MMI then prompts for a password. The password is "LTILINK", and it must be typed all in capital letters. After logging in, the prompt looks like the following: LTI:::> for single-card installations LTI:ss cc> for multi-card installations, where ss represents the two-digit address, and cc represents the two-digit card slot address

Basic commands
MMI commands can now be executed. There are seven basic commands that can be combined together to form a total of 19 command sets. They are: Alarm Clear Display Set Test Help Quit

178

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software

If ?<CR> is typed, the MMI lists the above commands along with an explanation of their usage. A screen similar to the following appears. The help screen also appears by typing H<CR>, or HELP<CR>.
ALARM CLEAR DISPLAY HELP SET TEST QUIT USAGE: Alarm [Enable | Disable] USAGE: Clear [Alarm] | [Error counter] [Log] USAGE: Display [Alarm | Status | Perform | History] [Pause] USAGE: Help | ? USAGE: Set [Time | Date | Alarm | Clearing | Name | Memory] USAGE: Test [Carrier All] USAGE: Quit

Notation Used: CAPS - Required Letters [ ] - Optional | - Either/Or

Each of these commands can be executed by typing the first letter of the command or by typing the entire command. Command sets are entered by typing the first letter of the first command, a space, and the first letter of the second command or by typing the entire command. Table 79: MMI commands and command sets on page 179 shows all the possible command sets, listed in alphabetical order. These commands are described by subject later in this section. Table 79: MMI commands and command sets
Command AD AE CA CAL CE D A [P] DC Description Alarm Disable Disables all alarms. Alarm Enable Enables all alarms. Clear Alarm Clears all alarms, terminates line processing, and resets the T1 bit error rate and frame slip counters. Clear Alarm Log Clears the alarm log. Clear Error Clears the error counter for the T1. Display Alarms [Pause] Displays the alarm log a list of the most recent 100 alarms along with time and date stamps. Display Configuration Displays the configuration settings for the cards including: the serial number of the card MMI firmware version date and time alarm enable/disable setting self-clearing enable/disable setting

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

179

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Command

Description settings entered in Set Configuration dip switch settings

D H [P] DP D S [P] H or ? L Q

Display History [Pause] Displays performance counters for the past 24 hours. Display Performance Displays performance counters for the current hour. Display Status [Pause] Displays carrier status, including whether the card is in the alarm state, and what alarm level is currently active. Help Displays the help screen. Login Logs into the MMI terminal when the system has one Lineside T1 card. Quit Logs the terminal user out. If multiple Lineside T1 cards share a single terminal, logout after using the MMI. Because of the shared daisychained link, if a Lineside T1 card is logged in, it occupies the bus and no other Lineside T1 cards are able to notify the MMI of alarms. Set Alarm parameters Alarm parameters include the allowable bit errors per second threshold and alarm duration. Set Clearing Sets the alarm self-clearing function to either enable or disable. Set Date Sets date or verifies current date. Set time Sets time or verifies current time. Test Initiates the T1 carrier test function. To terminate a test in process, enter the STOP TEST (S) command at any time.

SA SC SD ST Tx

Configuring parameters
The MMI is designed with default settings so that no configuration is necessary. However, it can be configured to suit a specific environment.

Set Time
Before configuring the MMI, login to the system and enter the current time. Do this by typing in the Set Time (S T) command set. The MMI then displays the time it has registered. Enter a new time or press "Enter" to leave it unchanged. The time is entered in the "hh:mm:ss" military time format.

180

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software

Set Date
The current date must be set. Do this by typing in the Set Date (S D) command set. The MMI then displays the date it has registered. Enter a new date or press "Enter" to leave it unchanged. The date is entered in the "mm/dd/yy" format.

Alarm parameters
The Set Alarm (S A) command set establishes the parameters by which an alarm is activated, and its duration. There are three alarm activation levels: Alarm Level 0 (AL0) consists of activity with an error threshold below the AL1 setting. This is a satisfactory condition and no alarm is activated. Alarm Level 1 (AL1) consists of activity with an error threshold above the AL1 setting but below AL2 setting. This is a minor unsatisfactory condition. In this situation, the external alarm hardware is activated by closing the normally open contact. The RED ALARM LED on the faceplate lights and an alarm message is created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal. Alarm Level 2 (AL2) consists of activity with an error threshold above the AL2 setting. This is an unsatisfactory condition. In this situation, the external alarm hardware is activated by closing the normally open contact. The RED ALARM LED on the faceplate lights, an alarm message is created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal. The Lineside T1 card enters line processing mode and a yellow alarm message is sent to the CPE/CSU. The Line processing sends the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1either all "onhook" or all "off-hook" signals depending on the dip switch setting of the card. When the Set Alarm command is used, a prompt appears to configure the threshold level and duration period for alarm levels 1 and 2. The threshold value indicates the number of bit errors detected per second that is necessary to activate the alarm. The T1 link processes at a rate of approximately 1.5 mb/s. The threshold value can be set between 3 and 9 and can be different for each alarm level. Any other value entered causes the software to display a "Parameter Invalid" message. The threshold number entered represents the respective power of 10 as shown in Table 80: T1 bit error rate threshold settings on page 182. Note: The error rate threshold for a level 2 alarm must be greater (a smaller power of 10) than for a level 1 alarm.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

181

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Table 80: T1 bit error rate threshold settings

Alarm threshold bit errors per second in power of 10 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 Threshold to set alarm 1500/second 150/second 15/second 1.5/second 1.5/10 seconds 1.5/100 seconds 1.5/1000 seconds Allowable duration periods 121 seconds 1218 seconds 12148 seconds 13600 seconds 103600 seconds 1003600 seconds 10003600 seconds

The duration value is set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 hour). This duration value indicates how long the alarm lasts. Low bit error rates (10-7 through 10-9) are restricted to longer durations because it takes more than one second to detect an alarm condition above 10-6. Higher bit error rates are restricted to shorter durations because the MMI error counter fills at 65,000 errors. If the Set Clearing (S C) "Enable Self Clearing" option is set, the alarm indications (LEDs and external alarm contacts) clear automatically after the duration period expires. Otherwise, the alarm continues until the command set Clear Alarm (C A) is entered. When an alarm is cleared, the following activity caused by the alarm is cleared: the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally open is reopened) the LED light turns off an entry is made in the alarm log of the date and time when the alarm clears carrier fail line supervision ceases (for alarm level 2 only) If self-clearing alarm indications are disabled, carrier fail line supervision terminates when the alarm condition ceases, but the alarm contact and faceplate LED remain active until the alarm is cleared. Note: A heavy bit error rate can cause 150 bit errors to occur in less than 100 seconds. This causes the alarm to be activated sooner. An alarm is not automatically cleared until the system no longer detects the respective bit error threshold during the corresponding duration period. For example, if an AL1 threshold of 6 (representing 106) and a duration period of 100 seconds is specified, an alarm is activated if more than 150 bit errors occur in any 100 second period (1.5 seconds X 100 seconds = 150/100 seconds). As soon as the alarm is activated, the bit counter is reset to 0. If the next 100 seconds pass, and less than 150 bit errors are detected, then the alarm clears after the duration period. However, if more than 150 bit errors are detected in the next 100 seconds, the alarm continues for the designated duration period. The alarm finally clears when the alarm condition is no

182

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software

longer detected for the designated duration period either by self-clearing (if this function is enabled), or when the Clear Alarm (C A) command set is entered. In addition to bit errors, the Set Alarm function configures parameters for detecting frame slip errors, by establishing a threshold necessary to activate an alarm. If the threshold value is exceeded, a level 2 alarm is activated. The frame slip threshold can be specified from 1 to 255 frame slips per time period. The duration time period can be specified from 1 to 24 hours. When entering the Set Alarm command set, the MMI scrolls through the previously described series of alarm options. These options are displayed along with their current value. Enter a new value or press Enter to retain the current value. Table 81: Set alarm options on page 183 outlines the options available in the Set Alarm function. Table 81: Set alarm options
Option AL1 Threshold AL1 Duration AL2 Threshold AL2 Duration Frame Slip Threshold Frame Slip Duration Description Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to 9) before alarm level 1 is activated. Factory default is 106. Sets the duration in seconds (from 1 to 3,600 seconds) that alarm level 1 is activated. Factory default is 10 seconds. Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to 9) before alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 10-5. Sets the duration in seconds (from 1 to 3,600 seconds) that alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 10 seconds. Sets the allowable frame slips per time period (from 1 to 255) before alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 5. Sets the duration in hours (from 1 to 24) that the frame slips are counted. After this time period, the counter is reset to 0. Factory default is 2 hours.

Note: If the duration period is set too long, the Lineside T1 card can be slow to return to service automatically even when the carrier is no longer experiencing any errors. The Clear Alarm command must be entered manually to restore service promptly. To avoid this, the duration period should normally be set to 10 seconds.

Set Clearing
Use the Set Clearing (S C) command set to enable or disable alarm self-clearing. Answer Y or N to the question: "Enable Self Clearing? (YES or NO)". If "Enable Self-Clearing" is chosen (the factory default condition), the system automatically clears alarms after the alarm condition is no longer detected for the corresponding duration period. The "Disable Self-Clearing" option causes the system to continue the alarm condition until the Clear Alarm (C A) command set is entered. Line processing and the yellow alarm indication to

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

183

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

the CPE is terminated as soon as the alarm condition clears, even if "Disable Self-Clearing" is set.

Display Configuration
The Display Configuration (D C) command set displays the various configuration settings established for the Lineside T1 card. Entering the Display Configuration (D C) command set causes a screen similar to the following to appear:
LTI S/N 1103 Software Version 1.01 3/03/95 1:50 Alarms Enabled: YES Self Clearing Enabled: YES Alarm Level 1 threshold value: E-7 Threshold duration (in seconds): 10 Alarm Level 2 threshold value: E-5 Threshold duration (in seconds): 1 Frame slips alarm level threshold: 5 Threshold duration (in hours): 2 Current dip switch S1 settings (S1..S8) On Off Off On Off Off Off On Current dip switch S2 settings (S1..S8) On Off On Off Off Off On Off

Alarm operation and reporting

The MMI monitors the T1 link according to the parameters established through the Set Alarm command set for the following conditions: Excessive bit error rate Frame slip errors Out of frame condition Loss of signal condition Blue alarm (AIS) condition Descriptions of the excessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions can be found in Configuring parameters on page 180. Bit errors may activate either a level 1 or level 2 alarm. The remaining conditions, when detected, always cause the system to activate a level 2 alarm. An out of frame condition is declared if two out of four frame bits are in error. If this condition occurs, the hardware immediately attempts to reframe. During the reframe time, the T1 link is declared out of frame, and silence is sent on all receive timeslots. A loss of signal condition is declared if a full frame (192 bits) of consecutive zeros is detected at the receive inputs. If this condition occurs, the T1 link automatically attempts to resynchronize with the distant end. If this condition lasts for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm is declared and silence is sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm is cleared if, after two seconds, neither a loss of signal, out of frame condition, nor blue alarm condition occurs. If a repeating device loses signal, it immediately begins sending an unframed all 1's signal to the far-end to indicate an alarm condition. This condition is called a blue alarm, or an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). If an AIS is detected for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm is

184

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software

declared, and silence is sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm is cleared if, after two seconds, neither a loss of signal, out of frame condition, nor blue alarm condition occurs.

Alarm Disable
The Alarm Disable (A D) command disables the external alarm contacts. When this command is typed, the MMI displays the message "Alarms Disabled" and the MAINT LED turns on. In this mode, no yellow alarms are sent and the Lineside T1 card does not enter line processing mode. Alarm messages are still sent to the MMI terminal and the LED light continues to indicate alarm conditions.

Alarm Enable
The Alarm Enable (A E) command set does the opposite of the Alarm Disable command set. It enables the external alarm contacts. When this command set is typed in, the MMI displays the message "Alarms Enabled." In this mode, yellow alarms can be sent and the Lineside T1 card can enter line processing mode.

Clear Alarm
The Clear Alarm (C A) command set clears all activity initiated by an alarm: the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally open is reopened), the LED light goes out, an entry is made in the alarm log of the date and time when the alarm clears, and line processing ceases (for alarm level 2 only). When this command set is typed in, the MMI displays the message "Alarm acknowledged." If the alarm condition still exists, the alarm is declared again.

Display Alarms
A detailed report of the most recent 100 alarms with time and date stamps can be displayed by entering the Display Alarms (D A) command set into the MMI. Entering the Display Alarms (D A) command set causes a screen similar to the following to appear:
Alarm Log 3/03/95 1:48 Yellow alarm on T1 carrier 3/03/95 1:50 Initialized Memory 3/03/95 2:33 T1 carrier level 1 alarm 3/03/95 3:47 T1 carrier level 2 alarm 3/03/95 4:43 T1 carrier performance within thresholds 3/03/95 15:01 Log Cleared

The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time by entering D A P.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

185

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Clear Alarm Log

Clear all entries in the alarm log by typing in the Clear Alarm Log (C A L) command set.

Display Status
The Display Status (D S) command set displays the current alarm condition of the T1 link as well as the on-hook or off-hook status of each of the 24 ports of the Lineside T1 card. Entering the Display Status (D S) command set causes a screen similar to the following to appear:
LTI S/N Software Version 1.01 3/03/95 1:50 In alarm state: NO T1 link at alarm level 0 Port 0 off hook, Port 1 on hook, Port 2 on hook, Port 3 on hook, Port 4 on hook, Port 5 on hook, Port 6 off hook, Port 7 off hook, Port 8 off hook, Port 9 on hook, Port 10 on hook, Port 11 on hook, Port 12 off hook, Port 13 on hook, Port 14 on hook, Port 15 on hook, Port 16 on hook, Port 17 on hook, Port 18 off hook, Port 19 off hook, Port 20 off hook, Port 21 on hook, Port 22 on hook, Port 23 on hook

Performance counters and reporting

The MMI monitors the performance of the T1 link according to several performance criteria including errored, bursty, unavailable, loss of frame and frame slip seconds. It registers the performance of these criteria by reading their status every second and counting their results. These counts are accumulated for an hour, and then they are reset to 0. Previous hour count results are maintained for each hour for the previous 24 hours. Performance counts are maintained for the following: Errored seconds one or more CRC-6 errors, or one or more out of frame errors in a second. Bursty seconds more than one and less than 320 CRC-6 errors in a second. Unavailable seconds unavailable state starts with 10 consecutive severely errored seconds and ends with 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (excluding the final 10 non-severely errored seconds). Severely errored seconds are defined as more than 320 CRC-6 errors, or one or more out of frames in a second. Loss of frame seconds loss of frame or loss of signal for three consecutive seconds. Framer slip seconds one ore more frame slips in a second. The MMI also maintains an overall error counter that is a sum of all the errors counted for the five performance criteria listed above. The error counter can only be cleared by entering the "Clear Error" command. It stops counting at 65,000. The error counter provides an easy method

186

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software

to determine if an alarm condition is corrected. Simply clear the error counter, wait a few minutes, and display performance to see if any errors occurred because the counter was cleared. Display the reports on these performance counters by entering the Display Performance (D P) or the Display History (D H) command sets into the MMI.

Display Performance
Enter the Display Performance (D P) command set to display performance counters for the past hour. A screen similar to the following appears:
LTI T1 Interface Performance Log 3/03/95 1:37 Data for the past 37 Minutes Errored Bursty Unavailable Loss ble Frame Slip Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds 2263 0 2263 2263

Frame Seconds 352

Error Counter 321

Each column, except the error counter, indicates the number of errors in the current hour and is reset to zero every hour on the hour. When these counters are reset to zero, the performance counter values are put into the history log. The error counter indicates the number of errors that occurred because the error counter was cleared.

Display History
Enter the Display History (D H) command set to display performance counters for each hour for the past 24 hours. A screen similar to the following appears:
LTI T1 Interface History Performance Log 3/03/95 1:35 Hour Errored Bursty Unavailable Frame Slip Ending Seconds Seconds Seconds 20:00 139 0 129 19.00 0 0 0 18.00 0 0 0 17.00 0 0 0 16.00 0 0 0

Loss Seconds 139 0 0 0 0

Frame Seconds 23 0 0 0 0

Error Counter 162 0 0 0 0

Use the pause command to display a full screen at a time by entering D H P.

Clear Error
Reset the error counter to zero by entering the Clear Error (C E) command set. The error counter provides a convenient way to determine if the T1 link is performing without errors because it can be cleared and examined at any time.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

187

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Testing
The Test Carrier (T C) command set enables tests to be run on the Lineside T1 card, the T1 link, or the CPE device. These three tests provide the capability to isolate faulty conditions in any one of these three sources. See Table 82: MMI Tests on page 188 for additional information about these three test types. After entering the T C command set, select which test to start. The prompt appears, similar to the following:
Test 1: Local Loopback Test Test 2: External Loopback Test Test 3: Network Loopback Test (1,2,3 or S to cancel):

Tests can be performed once (for 1 through 98 minutes), or continuously (selected by entering 99 minutes) until a "Stop Test" command is entered. Tests continue for the duration specified even if a failure occurs, and terminate at the end of the time period or when a "Stop Test" command is issued. Only a "Stop Test" command stops a test with a duration selection of 99. After entering the test number selection, a prompt similar to the following appears:
Enter Duration of Test (1-98 Mins, 0 = Once, 99 = Forever) Verify DS-30A Links are disabled. Hit Q to quit or any Key to Continue

Before a test is run, verify that DS-30A links are disabled because the tests interfere with calls currently in process. During a test, if an invalid word is received, a failure peg counter is incremented. The peg counter saturates at 65,000 counts. At the end of the test, the Test Results message indicates how many failures, if any, occurred during the test. Table 82: MMI Tests on page 188 shows which test to run for the associated equipment. Table 82: MMI Tests
Test number 1 2 3 Equipment tested Lineside T1 card T1 link, Lineside T1 card and T1 network CPE device and T1 network Test description Local loopback External loopback Network loopback

Test 1, local loopback, loops the T1 link signaling toward itself at the backplane connector, and test data is generated and received on all timeslots. If this test fails, it indicates that the Lineside T1 card is defective. Figure 36: MMI local loopback test on page 189 demonstrates how the signaling is looped back toward itself.

188

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software

Figure 36: MMI local loopback test

Test 2, external loopback, assumes an external loopback is applied to the T1 link. Test data is generated and received by the Lineside T1 card on all timeslots. If test 1 passes but test 2 fails, it indicates that the T1 link is defective between the Lineside T1 card and the external loopback location. If test 1 was not run and test 2 fails, the T1 link or the Lineside T1 card could be defective. To isolate the failure to the T1 link, tests 1 and 2 must be run in tandem. Figure 37: MMI external loopback test on page 189 demonstrates how an external loopback is applied to the T1 link.

Figure 37: MMI external loopback test

Test 3, network loopback, loops the received T1 data back toward the CPE equipment. No test data is generated or received by the Lineside T1 card. If test 2 passes but test 3 fails, it indicates that the CPE device is defective. If test 2 was not run and test 3 fails, the T1 link or the CPE device could be defective. To isolate the failure to the CPE device, tests 2 and 3 must be run in tandem. Figure 38: MMI network loopback test on page 189 demonstrates how the signaling is looped back toward the CPE equipment.

Figure 38: MMI network loopback test

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

189

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Applications
The Lineside T1 interface is an IPE line card that provides cost-effective connection between T1-compatible IPE and a system or off-premise extensions over long distances. Some examples of applications where a Lineside T1 card can be interfaced to a T1 link are: T1-compatible Voice Response Unit (VRU) equipment T1-compatible turret systems T1-compatible wireless systems Remote analog (500/2500-type) telephones through T1 to a channel bank Remote Norstar sites behind CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 over T1 The Lineside T1 card is appropriate for any application where both T1 connectivity and "lineside" functionality is required. This includes connections to T1-compatible voice response units, voice messaging and trading turret (used in stock market applications) systems. See Figure 39: Lineside T1 interface connection to IPE on page 190.

Figure 39: Lineside T1 interface connection to IPE

For example, the Lineside T1 card can be used to connect the system to a T1-compatible VRU. An example of this type of equipment is Avaya Open IVR system. In this way, the system can send a call to the VRU. Because the Lineside T1 card supports analog (500/2500-type) telephones, the VRU can send the call back to the system for further handling. The Lineside T1 card can also be used to provide off-premise extensions to remote locations (up to 500 miles from the system). In this application, the analog telephone functionality is

190

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Applications

extended over T1 facilities, providing a telephone at a remote site with access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone lines. See Figure 40: Lineside T1 interface in off-premise application on page 191. An audible message-waiting indicator can be provided as well.

Figure 40: Lineside T1 interface in off-premise application

Similarly, the Lineside T1 can be used to provide a connection between the system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 41: Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system on page 192. In this case, channel banks would not be required if the Norstar system is equipped with a T1 interface.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

191

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Figure 41: Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system

Note: The Lineside T1 card audio levels must be considered when determining the appropriateness of an application.

192

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 11: NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 193 Physical description on page 194 Functional description on page 199 Electrical specifications on page 203 Installation and Configuration on page 205 Installation on page 211 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software on page 223 Applications on page 242

Introduction
Two vintages of NT5D33 and NT5D34 cards are supported: NT5D33AB/NT5D34AB standard Lineside E1 Interface (LEI) cards The LEI card is an IPE line card that provides an all-digital connection between E1 compatible terminal equipment (such as a voice mail system) and Avaya Communication Server 1000E (Avaya CS 1000E), Avaya CS 1000M, or Meridian 1. The LEI interfaces one E1 line, carrying 30 channels, to the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, or Meridian 1, and emulates an analog line card to the system software. Each channel is independently configured by software control in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. The LEI also comes equipped with a Man-Machine

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

193

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Interface (MMI) maintenance program, which provides diagnostic information regarding the status of the E1 link. NT5D33AC/NT5D34AC Enhanced Lineside E1 Interface (ELEI) cards The ELEI card is similar to an LEI card, but is enhanced to allow the capability of transporting caller information using the proprietary signaling interface Channel Associated Signaling (CAS+). ELEI cards can operate in one of two modes: LEI mode, or enhanced (ELEI) mode. In LEI mode, this card is fully compatible with, and provides the same functionality as, the standard LEI card. In ELEI mode, this card can be connected to any CAS+ compliant systems. This includes wireless server hosting Digital Enhanced Cordless Telephones (DECTs), voice response units, voice messaging systems, and trading turret systems (used in stock market applications). More information regarding CAS+ can be obtained through Avaya Development Partner program. Note: As the ELEI cards provide identical functionality to LEI cards, references to LEI cards in this chapter also apply to ELEI cards unless specified otherwise. Install the NT5D33 version of the LEI/ELEI card in the NT8D37 IPE module. Install the NT5D34 version of the LEI/ELEI card in: the NTAK11 Cabinet the NTAK12 Expansion Cabinet the NT1P70 Small Remote IPE Main Cabinet the NTAK12 Small Remote IPE Expansion Cabinet

Physical description
The LEI mounts in two consecutive card slots in the IPE shelf. It uses 16 channels on the first slot and 14 channels on the second. The LEI includes a motherboard (31.75 by 25.40 cm (12.5 by 10 in) and a daughterboard (5.08 by 15.24 cm (2 by 6 in).

Card connections
The LEI uses the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cable to connect from the IPE backplane to the 25pair Amphenol connector on the IPE Input/Output (I/O) panel. The I/O panel connector connects to a E1 line, external alarm and an MMI terminal or modem, using the NT5D35 or NT5D36 lineside I/O cable available from Avaya.

194

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Faceplate
The LEI faceplate is twice as wide as the other standard analog and digital line cards. It occupies two card slots. The LE1 faceplate has four LEDs. SeeFigure 36: MMI local loopback test on page 189 Figure 42: NT5D33AB LEI card - faceplate on page 196 (IPE version), and Figure 43: NT5D34AB LEI card - faceplate on page 197 (Cabinet system).

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

195

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Figure 42: NT5D33AB LEI card - faceplate

196

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Figure 43: NT5D34AB LEI card - faceplate

The LEDs give status indications on the operations as described in Table 83: LEI card LED operation on page 197. Table 83: LEI card LED operation
LED Status Red alarm Yellow alarm Line card E1 near end E1 far end Operation

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

197

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

LED Maint Maintenance

Operation

The STATUS LED indicates if the LEI has successfully passed its self test, and therefore, if it is functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the selftest runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED goes out. If the LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card. The STATUS LED indicates the enabled/disabled status of both card slots of the LEI simultaneously. To properly enable the card, both the motherboard and the daughterboard slots must be enabled. The STATUS LED turns off as soon as either one of the LEI slots are enabled. No LED operation is observed when the second card slot is enabled. To properly disable the card, both card slots must be disabled. The LED does not turn on until both card slots are disabled. The RED ALARM LED indicates if the LEI has detected an alarm condition from the E1 link. Alarm conditions can include such conditions as not receiving a signal, the signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or frame slip thresholds. See Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software on page 223 for information about E1 link maintenance. If one of these alarm conditions is detected, this LED turns on. Yellow alarm indication is sent to the far end as long as the near end remains in a red alarm condition. Depending on how the Man Machine Interface (MMI) is configured, this LED remains lit until one of the following actions occur: If the "Self-Clearing" function is enabled in the MMI, the LED clears the alarm when the alarm condition is no longer detected. This is the factory default configuration. If the "Self-Clearing" function is not enabled or it is subsequently disabled in the MMI, the LED alarm indication stays lit until the command "Clear Alarm" is typed in the MMI, even though the carrier automatically returned to service when the alarm condition was no longer detected. The YELLOW ALARM LED indicates that the LEI has detected a yellow alarm signal from the terminal equipment side of the E1 link. See Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software on page 223 for information about E1 link maintenance. If the terminal equipment detects a red alarm condition such as not receiving a signal, or the signal exceeds bit-error thresholds or frame-slip thresholds, a yellow alarm signal is sent to the LEI, if the terminal equipment supports this feature. If a yellow alarm signal is detected, the LED turns on. The MAINT LED indicates if LEI is fully operational because of certain maintenance commands that are issued through the MMI. See Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software on page 223 for information about E1 link maintenance. If the card detects that tests are being run or that alarms are disabled through the MMI, the LED lights and remains lit until these conditions are no longer detected, then it turns off.

198

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Functional description
Figure 44: LEI card - block diagram on page 199 shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the LEI card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages.

Figure 44: LEI card - block diagram

Overview
The LEI card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective, all-digital connection between E1-compatible terminal equipment (such as voice mail systems, voice response units, trading turrets, etc.) and the system. In this application, the terminal equipment can be assured access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone line functionality such as hook flash, SPRE codes and ringback tones. The LEI supports line supervision features such as loop and ground start protocols. It can also be used in an off-premise arrangement where analog (500/2500-type) telephones are extended over twisted-pair or coaxial E1 with the use of channel bank equipment. The LEI offers significant improvement over the previous alternatives. For example, if a digital "trunk-side" connection were used, such as with the DTI/PRI interface card, "lineside" functionality would not be supported. Previously, the only way to achieve lineside functionality

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

199

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

was to use analog ports and channel bank equipment. With the LEI, a direct connection is provided to the IPE. No channel bank equipment is required, resulting in a more robust and reliable connection. When used for connecting to third-party applications equipment, the LEI offers a number of benefits. It is a more cost-effective alternative for connection because it eliminates the need for expensive channel bank equipment. The LEI card supports powerful E1 monitoring, and diagnostic capability. Overall costs for customer applications may also be reduced because the E1-compatible IPE is often more attractively priced than the analog-port alternatives. The LEI is compatible with all IPE-based systems and with standard public or private CEPTtype carrier facilities. It supports CRC-4- or FAS only framing formats as well as AMI or HDB3 coding. Because it uses standard PCM in standard E1 timeslots, existing E1 test equipment remains compatible for diagnostic and fault isolation purposes. A/B Bit signaling may be customized according to the user's system, including the Australian P2 signaling scheme.

Card interfaces
The LEI passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops through the DS-30X Interface circuits and maintenance data over the card LAN link.

E1 interface circuit
The LEI contains one E1 line-interface circuit which provides 30 individually configurable voice interfaces to one E1 link in 30 different time slots. The circuit demultiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS-30X transmit signaling bitstreams from the DS-30X network loop and converts it into 2.048 mHz E1 transmit signaling bitstreams onto the E1 link. It also does the opposite, receiving receive signaling bitstreams from the E1 link and transmitting receive signaling bitstreams onto the DS-30X network loop. The E1 interface circuit provides the following: An industry standard CEPT (0 to 655 feet) interface DS-30X signaling protocol into FXO A- and B-channel-associated signaling protocol Switch-selectable transmission and reception of E1 signaling messages over an E1 link in either loop or ground start mode Switch-selectable call processing between the Australian P2, North American Standard, or other user-configurable schemes

Signaling and control

The LEI also contains signaling and control circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the system controller to operate the E1 line interface

200

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

circuit during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the controller and return incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X network loop.

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a card LAN link on the LEI. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the card if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.

Microcontrollers
The LEI contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller controls the following: reporting to the CE CP through the card LAN link - card identification (card type, vintage, serial number) - firmware version - self-test results - programmed unit parameter status receipt and implementation of card configuration - control of the E1 line interface - enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card - programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of channel operation - maintenance diagnostics interface with the line card circuit converts on/off-hook, and ringer control messages from the DS-30X loop into A/B bit manipulations for each time slot in the E1 data stream, using channel associated signaling. the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card.

Card LAN interface

Maintenance data is exchanged with the Common Equipment CPU over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link. The Card LAN link is described in Card LAN link on page 38.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

201

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Sanity Timer
The LEI also contains a sanity timer that resets the microcontroller in the event of a loss of program control. If the timer is not properly serviced by the microcontroller, it times out and causes the microcontroller to be hardware-reset. If the microcontroller loses control and fails to service the sanity timer at least once per second, the sanity timer automatically resets the microcontroller restoring program control.

Man-Machine Interface
The LEI provides an optional Man-Machine Interface (MMI) that is primarily used for E1 link performance monitoring and problem diagnosis. The MMI provides alarm notification, E1 link performance reporting, and fault isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the I/O panel to a terminal or modem. Multiple cards (up to 64) can be served through one MMI terminal or modem by linking the LEIs through a daisy chain. The MMI is an optional feature, because all E1 configuration settings are performed through dip switch settings or preconfigured factory default settings. Available MMI commands, and their functionality, are discussed in-depth in Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software on page 223.

ELEI additional functionality

As mentioned earlier, ELEI cards are enhanced to allow CAS+ compliance, as shown in Figure 45: CAS+ compliance on page 203. This enhancement provides several additional benefits for systems with ELEI cards installed. Note: MDECTS and ELEI (operating in enhanced mode) cannot be configured on the same system.

202

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Electrical specifications

Figure 45: CAS+ compliance

Key Benefits of using CAS+ signaling (ELEI mode) over traditional A/B bit signaling (LEI mode) include: 1. Calling Line ID Presentation (CLIP) When an incoming call over the TDM/IP network or a CS 1000originated call is directed towards the CAS+ compliant system, Calling Line ID can be provided over the CAS+ interface. This is assuming that the incoming call has the CLID without any presentation restrictions. 2. Redirecting Line ID Presentation (RLIP) When an incoming call over the TDM/IP network or a CS 1000originated call which has undergone redirections is directed towards the CAS+ compliant system, Redirecting Line ID can be provided over the CAS+ interface. This is assuming that the incoming call has the Redirecting Line ID without any presentation restrictions. 3. Message waiting indication (MWI) Message waiting indication can be provided over the CAS+ interface.

Electrical specifications
Table 84: LEI card - line interface unit electrical characteristics on page 204 provides a technical summary of the E1 line interface. Table 85: LEI card - power required on page 204 lists the maximum power consumed by the card.

E1 channel specifications
Table 84: LEI card - line interface unit electrical characteristics on page 204 provides specifications for the 30 E1 channels. Each characteristic is set by a dip switch. Installation and Configuration on page 205 for a discussion of the corresponding dip switch settings.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

203

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Table 84: LEI card - line interface unit electrical characteristics

Characteristics Framing Coding Signaling Distance to LTU Description CRC-4 or FAS, only AMI or HDB3 Loop or ground start A/B robbed-bit 0-199.6 meters (0-655 feet)

Power requirements
Table 85: LEI card - power required on page 204 shows the voltage and maximum current that the LEI requires from the backplane. One NT8D06 IPE Power Supply AC or NT6D40 IPE Supply DC can supply power to a maximum of eight LEIs. Table 85: LEI card - power required
Voltage 5.0 V dc +15.0 V dc -15.0 V dc Max. Current 1.6 Amp 150 mA 150 mA

Foreign and surge voltage protections

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning strikes is not provided on the LEI. It does, however, protect against accidental shorts to 52 V dc analog lines. When the card is used to service off-premise terminal equipment through the public telephone network, install a Line Termination Unit (LTU) as part of the terminal equipment to provide external line protection.

Environmental specifications
Table 86: LEI card - environmental specifications on page 204 shows the environmental specifications of the LEI. Table 86: LEI card - environmental specifications
Parameter Operating temperature normal Specifications 15 to +30 C (+59 to 86 F), ambient

204

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation and Configuration

Parameter Operating temperature short term Operating humidity normal Operating humidity short term Storage temperature Storage humidity

Specifications 10 to +45 C (+50 to 113 F), ambient 20% to 55% RH (non-condensing) 20% to 80% RH (non condensing) 50 to + 70 C (58 to 158 F), ambient 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)

Installation and Configuration

Installation and configuration of the LEI consists of six basic steps: 1. Configure the dip switches on the LEI for the call environment. 2. Install the LEI into the selected card slots. 3. Cable from the I/O panel to the LTU, MMI terminal or modem (optional), external alarm (optional), and other LEIs for daisy chaining use of MMI terminal (optional). 4. Configure the MMI terminal. 5. Configure the LEI through the CS 1000 software and verify self-test results. 6. Verify initial E1 operation and configure MMI (optional). Steps 1-5 are explained in this section. Step 6 is covered in Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software on page 223. Installation and configuration of the ELEI follows the same steps. If enhanced functionality is required, then one additional step is required: 7. The Meridian 1 line unit(s) associated with the lineside E1 must be programmed for wireless operation (set WTYP=DECT, and WRLS=Yes in LD 10) in non concentrated mode. Refer to Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) details on LD 10.

Dip switch settings

Begin the installation and configuration of the LEI by selecting the proper dip switch settings for the environment. The LEI contains two dip switches, each containing eight switch positions. They are located in the upper right corner of the motherboard circuit card as shown in Figure 46: LEI card - E1 protocol dip switch locations on page 207. The settings for these switches are shown in Table 87: LEI card - Switch 1 dip switch settings on page 208 through Table 90: LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings on page 210. When the LEI card is oriented as shown in Figure 46: LEI card - E1 protocol dip switch locations on page 207, the dip switches are ON when they are up, and OFF when they are down. The dip switch settings configure the card for the following parameters:

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

205

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

MMI port speed selection

This dip switch setting selects the appropriate baud rate for the terminal or modem (if any) that is connected to the MMI.

Line Supervisory Signaling protocol

The LEI is capable of supporting loop start or ground start call processing modes. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of line signaling the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) supports.

Address of LEI to the MMI

The address of the LEI to the MMI is made up of two components: the address of the card within the shelf the address of the shelf in which the card resides These two addresses are combined to create a unique address for the card. The MMI reads the address of the card within the shelf from the card firmware; the address of the shelf must be set by this dip switch. The shelf address dip switch can be from 0 to 15, 16 being the maximum number of lineside E1 IPE shelves (a maximum of 64 LEI cards) capable of daisy chaining to a single MMI terminal. For ease, it is recommended that this address be set the same as the address of the peripheral controller identifier in LD 97 for type: XPE. This is not possible because the dip switch is limited to 16; however, this is not mandatory.

E1 framing
The LEI is capable of interfacing with LTU equipment either in CRC-4 or FAS only framing mode. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of framing the LTU equipment supports.

E1 Coding
The LEI is capable of interfacing with LTU equipment using either AMI or HDB3 coding. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on the type of coding the LTU equipment supports.

206

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation and Configuration

Figure 46: LEI card - E1 protocol dip switch locations

Line supervision on E1 failure

This setting determines in what state all 30 LEI ports appear to the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1in case of E1 failure. Ports can appear as either in the "on-hook" or "off-hook" states on E1 failure. Note: All idle LEI lines go off-hook and seize a Digitone Receiver when the off-hook line processing is invoked on E1 failure. This may prevent DID trunks from receiving incoming calls until the LEI lines time-out and release the DTRs.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

207

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Daisy-Chaining to MMI
If two or more LEIs are installed and the MMI used, daisy-chain the cards together to use one MMI terminal or modem. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on how many LEIs are being installed.

MMI Master or Slave

This setting is used only if daisy-chaining the cards to the MMI terminal or modem. It determines whether this card is a master or a slave in the daisy chain. Select the master setting if there are no LEIs between this card and the MMI terminal or modem. Select the slave setting if there are other cards in the daisy chain between this card and the MMI. Table 87: LEI card - Switch 1 dip switch settings on page 208 through Table 89: LEI card XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3-6) on page 209 show the dip switch settings for Switch 1. Table 90: LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings on page 210 shows the dip switch settings for Switch 2. Table 87: LEI card - Switch 1 dip switch settings
Characteristic MMI port speed selection E1 signaling IPE Shelf address for LEI Selection 1200 baud 2400 baud Ground start Loop start Table 89: LEI card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3-6) on page 209 XTI = 19 XMLC = 18 See Table 88: LEI card signaling-type dip switch settings on page 209 Switch Position 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 Switch Setting ON OFF ON OFF Table 89: LEI card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3-6) on page 209 ON OFF OFF Factory Default OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Card type for ringer allocation E1 signaling

7 7 8

OFF OFF

208

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation and Configuration

When dip switch #1, positions 2 and 8 are set to "Table," AB Bits are configured by the user through the Set Mode MMI command (see Set Mode on page 231). Otherwise, the signaling scheme selected by dip switch 1, positions 2 and 8 are used. Table 88: LEI card - signaling-type dip switch settings
Switch #1 Characteristic Signaling Type Selection Loop start Ground start Australian P2 Table Position 2 OFF ON OFF ON Position 8 OFF OFF ON ON

Table 89: LEI card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3-6)
XPEC Address 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 S1 Switch Position 3 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON S1 Switch Position 4 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON S1 Switch Position 5 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON S1 Switch Position 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

When setting E1 Switch 2 dip switch settings, there are differences between vintages. For NT5D33AB or NT5D34AB cards, use Table 90: LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings on page 210. For NT5D33AC or NT5D34AC cards, use Table 90: LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings on page 210.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

209

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Table 90: LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings

Characteristic E1 framing E1 coding NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED Selection CRC-4 Disabled CRC-4 Enabled AMI HDB3 leave ON leave ON leave ON Switch Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Switch Setting ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Factory Default OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON

Line processing on E1 link On-hook failure Off-hook Daisy-chaining to MMI MMI master or slave YES NO Master Slave

Table 91: ELEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings

Characteristic E1 framing E1 coding NOT USED NOT USED Mode Selection CRC-4 Disabled CRC-4 Enabled AMI HDB3 leave ON leave ON LEI Mode ELEI Mode Switch Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Switch Setting ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Factory Default ON OFF ON OFF Off OFF OFF ON

Line processing on E1 link On-hook failure Off-hook Daisy-chaining to MMI MMI master or slave YES NO Master Slave

After the card is installed, display the dip switch settings using the MMI command Display Configuration (D C). See Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software on page 223 for details on this and the rest of the available MMI commands.

210

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation

Installation
Because of the wiring in some of the system modules and cabinets, the LEI only works in certain card slot pairs. These restrictions depend on the type of module or cabinet. In all other modules or cabinets where the conditions listed below do not exist, the LEI works in any two adjacent card slots: In the NTAK12 Small Remote IPE Expansion Cabinet only card slots 10-15 are available. In the NT8D37 IPE module, if the 25-pair I/O connectors are partially split between adjacent IPE card slots, the LEI works only in card slots where Unit 0 of the motherboard card slot appear on the first pair of the 25-pair I/O connector. If installing the LEI into the NT8D37 IPE module, determine the vintage level model. Certain vintage levels carry dedicated 25-pair I/O connectors only for card slots 0, 4, 8, and 12. These vintage levels are cabled with only 16 pairs of wires from each card slot to the I/O panel. Some of the 25-pair I/O connectors are split between adjacent card slots. Other vintage levels cable each card slot to the I/O panel using a unique, 24-pair connector on the I/O panel. In these vintage levels, the LEI can be installed in any available pair of card slots. However, because of the lower number of wire pairs cabled to the I/O panel in the lower vintage level, only certain card slots are available to the LEI. See Table 92: LEI card - NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port cabling on page 211 for the vintage level information for the NT8D37 IPE modules. Table 92: LEI card - NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port cabling
Vintage Level NT8D37BA NT8D37DE NT8D37EC Number of ports cabled to I/O panel 30 ports 16 ports 30 ports

Available and restricted card slots in the NT8D37 IPE module

If installing the LEI into an NT8D37 IPE module, the card slots available depend on the vintage level module.

Vintage levels cabling 30 ports:

For modules with vintage levels that cabled 30 ports to the I/O panel, the LEI can be installed in any pair of card slots 0-15.

Vintage levels cabling 16 ports:

For modules with vintage levels that cable 16 ports to the I/O panel, the LEI can be installed into the card slot pairs shown in the following card slots:

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

211

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Available:

Motherboard/Daughterboard 0 and 1 1 and 2 4 and 5 5 and 6 8 and 9 9 and 10 12 and 13 13 and 14

LEIs must not be installed into the following card slot pairs:
Restricted: Motherboard/Daughterboard 2 and 3 3 and 4 6 and 7 10 and 11 11 and 12 14 and 15

If the LEI must be installed into one of the restricted card slot pairs, rewire the IPE module card slot to the I/O panel by installing an additional NT8D81 cable from the LEI motherboard slot to the I/O panel, and re-arranging the three backplane connectors for the affected card slots. This permits the connection of the NT5D35AA or NT5D36AA LEI card carrier and maintenance external I/O cable at the IPE and CE module I/O panel connector for card slots that are otherwise restricted. Alternatively, all LEI connections can be made at the main distribution frame instead of connecting the NT5D35AA or NT5D36AA LEI card external I/O cable at the I/O panel. This eliminates these card slot restrictions.

Cabling the LEI card

After the dip switches are configured and the LEI installed into the selected card slots, the LEI can be cabled to the LTU equipment, the MMI terminal or modem (optional), an external alarm (optional), and other LEIs for daisy chaining use of the MMI terminal (optional). The LEI is cabled from its backplane connector through connections from the motherboard circuit card only to the I/O panel on the rear of the IPE module. No cable connections are made from the daughterboard circuit card. The connections from the LEI to the I/O panel are made with the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cables provided with the IPE module.

Cabling from the I/O panel with the NT5D35AA or NT5D36AA lineside E1 I/O cable
In a twisted-pair E1 installation, make the connection from the I/O panel to the E1 link and other external devices with the NT5D35AA lineside E1 I/O cable. This cable consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which plugs into the I/ O panel. The other end has four connectors: 1. a DB15 male connector (P2), which plugs into the E1 line 2. a DB9 male connector (P3), which plugs into an external alarm system 3. a second DB9 male connector (P5), which connects to an MMI terminal or modem 4. a DB9 female connector (P4), which connects to the next LEI's P4 connector for MMI daisy chaining

212

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation

In a coaxial E1 installation, make the connection from the I/O panel to the E1 link and other external devices through the NT5D36AA lineside E1 I/O cable. This cable consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which plugs into the I/ O panel. The other end has 4 connectors: 1. a DB15 female connector (P2) with an adapter that breaks out Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive) connectors, which that plug into the E1 line 2. a DB9 male connector (P3), which plugs into an external alarm system 3. a second DB9 male connector (P5), which connects to an MMI terminal or modem 4. a DB9 female connector (P4), which connects to the next LEI's P4 connector for MMI daisy chaining. The Tx marking on the adapter at P2 is the LEI output. The E1 data stream coming from the network into the LEI connects at the Rx coaxial connector Table 93: LEI card - LEI backplane and I/O panel pinouts on page 213 shows the pin assignments of the LEI backplane and I/O Panel. Table 93: LEI card - LEI backplane and I/O panel pinouts
Backplane connector pin 12A 12B 13A 13B 14A 14B 15A 15B 16A 16B 17A 17B 18A 18B 19A 19B I/O Panel connector pin 1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 5 30 6 31 7 32 8 33 Signal E1 Tip, Receive data E1 Ring, Receive data E1 Tip, Transmit data E1 Ring, Transmit data Alarm out, normally open Alarm out, common Alarm out, normally closed No connection No connection Away from MMI terminal, receive data Away from MMI terminal, transmit data Toward MMI terminal, transmit data Toward MMI terminal, receive data Daisy chain control 2 Daisy chain control 1 Ground

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

213

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Table 94: LEI card - lineside E1 I/O cable pinouts on page 214 shows the pin assignments from the I/O panel relating to the pin assignments of the lineside E1 I/O cable. Table 94: LEI card - lineside E1 I/O cable pinouts
I/O Panel Connector Pin 1 Lead Designations LEI Connector Pin 11 LEI Cable Connector to External Equipment DB15 male to E1 (P2). LEI is CPE transmit and receive to network

E1 Tip Receive data

26 2 27 3 28 4 7 31 33 8 32 33 8 32 30 6

E1 Ring Receive data E1 Tip Transmit data E1 Ring Transmit data Alarm out, common Alarm out (normally open) Alarm out (normally closed) Toward MMI terminal, receive data Toward MMI terminal, transmit data Ground Control 1 Control 2 Ground Control 1 Control 2 Away from MMI terminal, transmit data Away from MMI terminal, receive data

3 1 9 1 2 3 2 3 5 7 9 5 7 9 3 2 DB9 female away from MMI terminal (P4) DB9 male toward MMI (P5). Wired as DCE. Data is transmitted on pin 2 (RXD) and received on pin 3 (TXD) DB9 male to external alarm (P3)

E1 Connections
For twisted-pair installations, E1 signaling for all 30 channels is transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11, as shown in Table 94: LEI card - lineside E1 I/O cable pinouts on page 214. Plug the DB 15 male connector labeled "P2" into the E1 link. E1 transmit and receive pairs must be turned over between the LEI and the CPE that is hardwired without carrier facilities.

214

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation

If the LEI is connected through E1 carrier facilities, the transmit and receive pairs must be wired straight through to the RJ48 at the Telco demarc, the LTU, or other E1 carrier equipment. The E1 CPE at the far-end has transmit and receive wired straight from the RJ48 demarc at the far-end of the carrier facility. For 75 ohm coaxial installations, E1 signaling for all 30 channels is transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11 though an adapter and out two coaxial connectors Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive). Tx is the LEI output, and Rx is the LEI input from the E1 stream. E1 transmit and receive pairs must be turned over between the LEI and the CPE that is hardwired without carrier facilities. If the LEI is connected through E1 carrier facilities, the transmit and receive pairs must be wired straight through to the RJ48 at the Telco demarc, the LTU, or other E1 carrier equipment. The E1 CPE at the far end has Tx and Rx wired straight from the RJ48 demarc at the far end of the carrier facility.

External Alarm Connections

P3 connector pins 1, 2 and 3 can be plugged into any external alarm-sensing hardware. Plug the DB9 male connector labeled "P3" into an external alarm. These connections are optional, and the LEI functionality is not affected if they are not made. The MMI monitors the E1 link for specified performance criteria and reports on problems detected. One of the ways it can report information is through this external alarm connection. If connected, the LEI's microprocessor activates the external alarm hardware if it detects certain E1 link problems it has classified as alarm levels 1 or 2. See Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software on page 223 for a detailed description of alarm levels and configuration. If an alarm level 1 or 2 is detected by the MMI, the LEI closes the contact that is normally open, and opens the contact that is normally closed. The MMI command "Clear Alarm" returns the alarm contacts to their normal state.

MMI Connections
P5 connector pins 2, 3, 5, 7 and 9 are used to connect the LEI to the MMI terminal, connecting LEIs in a daisy chain for access to a shared MMI terminal. When logging into a LEI, "control 2" is asserted by that card, which informs all of the other cards not to talk on the bus, but rather to pass the data straight through. The pins labeled "control 1" are reserved for future use. As with the external alarm connections, MMI connections are optional. Up to 128 LEIs can be linked, located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves, to one MMI terminal using the daisy chain approach. If only one LEI is installed, cable from the DB9 male connector labeled "P5" (toward MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem. For installations of only one card, no connection is made to the DB9 female connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal).

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

215

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

If two or more LEIs are being installed into the system, the MMI port connections can be daisychained together so that only one MMI terminal is required for up to 128 LEIs. See Figure 47: LEI card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI on page 216. Cards can be located in up to 15 separate IPE shelves. Start with any card slot in the IPE shelf and connect to any other card slot. Connected card slots do not need to be consecutive.

Connecting two or more LEIs to the MMI terminal

Follow this procedure for connecting two or more LEIs to the MMI terminal: 1. Cable the DB9 male connector labeled "P5" (toward MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem. 2. Make the connection from the first card to the second card by plugging the DB9 female connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal) from the first card into the DB9 male connector of the second card labeled "P5" (toward MMI terminal). 3. Repeat step 2 for the remaining cards. 4. At the last card of the daisy chain, make no connection from the DB9 female connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal). 5. If two LEIs are too far apart to connect the "P4" and "P5" connectors connect them with an off-the-shelf DB9 female to DB9 male straight-through extension cable, available at any PC supply store.

Figure 47: LEI card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI

216

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation

Terminal configuration
For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the LEI, the interface characteristics must be set to: speed 1200 or 2400 bps character width 7 bits parity bit mark stop bits one software handshake (XON/XOFF) off

Software Configuration
Although much of the architecture and many features of the LEI card are different from the analog line card, the LEI is designed to emulate an analog line card to the CS 1000 software. Because of this, the LEI software configuration is the same as for two adjacent analog line cards. All 30 E1 channels carried by the LEI are individually configured using the analog (500/2500type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. Use Table 95: Card unit number to E1 channel mapping on page 217 to determine the correct unit number, and refer to Avaya Software Input/ Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 service-change instructions. LEI circuitry routes 16 units (0 15) on the motherboard and 14 (0 13) units on the daughterboard to 30 E1 channels. The motherboard circuit card is located in the left card slot, and the daughterboard circuit card is located in right card slot. For example, if installing the LEI into card slots 0 and 1, the motherboard would reside in card slot 0 and the daughterboard in card slot 1. To configure the terminal equipment through the switch software, the E1 channel number must be cross-referenced to the corresponding card unit number. This mapping is shown in Table 95: Card unit number to E1 channel mapping on page 217. Table 95: Card unit number to E1 channel mapping
Item Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard TN 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 E1 Channel Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

217

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Item Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard Daughterboard

TN 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

E1 Channel Number 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Disconnect supervision
The LEI supports far-end disconnect supervision by opening the tip side toward the terminal equipment upon the system's detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call. The Supervised Analog Line feature (SAL) must be configured in LD 10 for each LEI port. At the prompt FTR respond: OSP <CR> Against FTR respond:

218

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation

ISP <CR> The LEI treats OSP and ISP for both originating and terminating calls as hook flash disconnect supervision, also known as cut-off disconnect. Originating calls are outgoing from the terminal equipment. Terminating calls are incoming to the terminal equipment. The LEI does not support battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision on originating calls. After the software is configured, power-up the card and verify the self-test results. The STATUS LED on the faceplate indicates whether or not the LEI has successfully passed its self test, and is, therefore, functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED goes out. The LED goes out if either the motherboard or daughterboard is enabled by the software. If the LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

Clocking Requirement
The clocking for NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface card in CS 1000 system is as follows: Lineside E1 cards are clock master of their E1 link, which has a clock accuracy requirement of +/-50ppm MGC does not provide a backplane clock with +/-50ppm accuracy at freerun An accurate clock source is needed for Lineside E1 application The following are the two methods to bring an accurate clock source to MCG: Configure a digital trunk card with Clock Controller within the same cabinet/chassis as Lineside E1 cards. With Clock Controller enabled, in both freerun or locked state, an accurate clock will be provided to MGC. Use an MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable (NTDW67AAE5) to bring a clock source from other Communication Server 1000 cabinet/chassis that has a Central Office Link. With accurate clock source available, MGC locks to the reference and provide an backplane clock as accurate as the clock source.

Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable

The following sections elaborate on how to connect an MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

219

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Pre requisites
The pre requisites for connecting an MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable are the following: MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable --- NTDW67AAE5. Figure 48: MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable on page 220 shows the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable. It is used to provide clock reference between Media Gateway Cabinet/ chassis.

Figure 48: MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable

Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable

1. Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable to the AUI port of the back of the MG1000 chassis. Figure 49: MG1000 chassis on page 221 shows the AUI port of the MG1000 chassis.

220

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation

Figure 49: MG1000 chassis

2. In the Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis, connect to 15-pin DSUB connector on the back panel formerly used for the 10Base-T AUI connection. Figure 50: Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis on page 222 shows the 10Base-T AUI connection of the Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

221

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Figure 50: Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis

3. Use an MGC Breakout Adapter for Option 11C (NTDW63AAE5) Connect the adapter to 25 pairs MDF connector at Slot 0 Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable (NTDW67AAE5) to 15-pin DSUB connector on the Breakout Adapter. Figure 51: Option 11C Cabinet on page 222 shows the Option 11C Cabinet.

Figure 51: Option 11C Cabinet

222

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software

Description
The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) provides E1-link diagnostics and historical information for the LEI system. See Installation and Configuration on page 205 for instructions on how to install the cabling and configure the terminal for the MMI. The following sections describe the options available through the LEI's MMI terminal and explain how to set up, configure, and use the MMI. The MMI provides the following maintenance features: configurable alarm parameters E1-link problem indicator current and historical E1-link performance reports E1 verification and fault isolation testing configuration of A\B bits (North American Standard, Australian P2, or customized settings are available)

Alarms
The MMI may be used to activate alarms for the following E1-link conditions: excessive bit-error rate, frame-slip errors, out-of-frame, loss-of-signal, and blue alarm. Preset thresholds and error durations trip LEI alarm notifications. For descriptions of each of these E1-link alarm conditions, see Performance counters and reporting on page 238. For instructions on how to set alarm parameters, see Set Alarm on page 228. For information about accessing alarm reporting, see Display Alarms on page 237, Display Status on page 238 and Display Performance on page 239. Two levels of alarm severity exist for bit errors. Different threshold and duration settings must be established for each level.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

223

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

When the first level of severity is reached (alarm level 1), the MMI causes the following: the external alarm hardware activates the RED ALARM LED on the faceplate is lit an alarm message is displayed on the MMI terminal an entry is created in the alarm log and printed to the MMI port When the second level of severity is reached (alarm level 2), the MMI performs all functions at alarm level 1. In addition, the LEI enters line-conditioning mode. In this mode, the LEI sends either "on-hook" or "off-hook" signals for all 30 ports to the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1, depending on how the dip switch for line processing is set (dip switch 2, position 6). See Table 90: LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings on page 210. If the MMI detects E1-link failures for any of the other conditions monitored (out-of-frame, excess frame slips, loss-of-signal, and blue alarm condition), the LEI automatically performs all alarm level 2 functions. The MMI also sends a yellow alarm to the far-end LTU. Alarms may be configured to self-clear when the alarm condition is no longer detected. See Set Clearing on page 230. All alarms activated produce a record in the alarm log. The alarm log maintains records for the most recent 100 alarms, and can be displayed, printed, and cleared. The alarm log displays or prints the alarms in descending chronological order, beginning with the most recent alarm. Notifications in the alarm log include the date and time of the alarm's occurrence.

E1 Performance Counters and Reports

The MMI maintains performance error counters for the following E1 conditions: errored seconds bursty seconds unavailable seconds framer-slip seconds loss-of-frame seconds The MMI retains E1 performance statistics for the current hour, and for each hour for the previous 24. For descriptions of these performance error counters and instructions on how to create a report on them and clear them, see Performance counters and reporting on page 238.

E1 Verification and Fault Isolation Testing

The MMI enables various tests to be performed that either verify that the E1 is working adequately, or help to isolate a problem to the LEI, the E1 link, or the CPE. For descriptions of all of these tests and instructions on how to run them, see Testing on page 240.

224

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software

Login and Password

The MMI can be accessed through any TTY, PC running a terminal emulation program, or modem. After installing the MMI terminal and card cables, the MMI can be configured. For single-card installations, it is accessed by entering L<CR> to login. For multiple-card installations connected in a daisy chain, it is accessed by entering L <address>, where the four-digit address is a combination of the two-digit address of the IPE shelf as set by dip switch positions on the card Switch 1, positions 3-6, plus the address of the card slot the motherboard occupies. See Table 92: LEI card - NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port cabling on page 211. For example, to login to a card located in shelf 13, card slot 4, type: L 13 4 <CR> Spaces are inserted between the login command (L), the shelf address, and the card slot address. The MMI prompts for a password. The password is "LEILINK," and it must be typed in all capital letters. After logging in, the prompt looks like this: LEI:: > (for single-card installations) LEI::ss cc> (for multi-card installations, where ss represents the shelf address and cc represents the card slot address.)

Basic commands
MMI commands can now be executed. The seven basic commands are: Help Alarm Clear Display Set Test Quit

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

225

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Type ? <CR> to list these commands, along with an explanation of their usage. A screen similar to Figure 52: HELP (H, ?) screen on page 226 appears. The help screen also appears by typing H<CR>, or HELP<CR>.

Figure 52: HELP (H, ?) screen

Each of these commands can be executed by entering the first letter of the command or by entering the entire command. Commands with more than one word are entered by entering the first letter of the first word, a space, and the first letter of the second word or by entering the entire command. Table 96: MMI commands and command sets on page 226 shows all possible MMI commands in alphabetical order. These commands are also described later in this section. Table 96: MMI commands and command sets
Command AD AE CA CAL CE D A(P) Description Alarm Disable. Disables all alarms. Alarm Enable. Enables all alarms. Clear Alarm. Clears all alarms, terminates time processing, and resets the E1 bit error rate and frame slip counters. Clear Alarm Log. Clears alarmlog. Clear Error. Clears the E1 error counter. Display Alarms. Displays the alarm log, which is a list of the 100 most recent alarms with time and date stamps. (Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P. Continue scrolling by typing any other key.) Display Configuration. Displays the configuration settings for the LEI(s), single- or multiple-card system. Display includes each card's serial number, MMI firmware version, date and time, alarm disable/enable setting, selfclearing disable/enable setting, values entered through the Set Configuration command, and dip switch settings. (Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P. Continue scrolling by typing any other key.)

D C(P)

226

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software

Command D H(P)

Description Display History. Displays performance counters for the past 24 hours. (Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P. Continue scrolling by typing any other key.) Display Performance. Displays performance counters for the current hour. Display Status. Displays carrier status, including alarm state and, if active, alarm level. (Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P. Continue scrolling by typing any other key.) Help. Displays the Help screen. Login. Logs into the MMI terminal in a single-LEI system. Login. Logs into the MMI terminal in a daisy-chained system, where xx represents the address of the card to be configured. Quit. Logs out of the MMI terminal. Note: If it is a daisy-chained system, be certain to log out when finished with configuration. In a daisy-chained system, only one card can occupy the bus at a given time and all other LEIs cannot notify the MMI of alarms unless logged-out of configuration mode.

DP D S(P)

H or ? L Lxx Q

SA SC SD SM SS

Set Alarm. Sets alarm parameters, such as the allowable bit-errors per second, threshold, and alarm duration. Set Clearing. Sets the alarm self-clearing function, "enable" or "disable." Set Date. Sets the date or verifies the current date. Set Mode. Sets the A/B Bits mode. Set Simple. Sets whether or not the LEI waits for the terminal equipment to return an idle-state message before returning the channel to idle at call disconnect from the far-end. Set Time. Sets the time or verifies current time. Test. Initiates the E1 carrier test function. To terminate a test in-process, enter the STOP TEST command at any time.

ST T

Configuring parameters
The MMI is designed with default settings so that no configuration is necessary. However, it can be configured based on the call environment.

Set Time
Before beginning to configure the MMI, login to the system and verify the current time. Do this by entering the Set Time (S T) command. The MMI displays the time it has registered.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

227

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Enter a new time or hit Enter to leave it unchanged. The time is entered in the "hh:mm:ss," the 24-hour, or military, format.

Set Date
Verify the current date. Do this by entering the Set Date (S D) command. The MMI then displays the date it has registered. Enter a new date or hit Enter to leave it unchanged. The date is entered in the "mm/dd/yy" format.

Set Alarm
The Set Alarm (S A) command sets the parameters by which an alarm is activated and the duration of the alarm after it is activated. There are three alarm levels as described below: Alarm Level 0 (AL0) consists of activity with an error threshold below the AL1 setting, which is a satisfactory condition and no alarm is activated. Alarm Level 1 (AL1) consists of activity with an error threshold above the AL1 setting, but below the AL2 setting that is deemed to be of minor importance. In this situation, the external alarm hardware is activated by closing the normally open contact, the RED ALARM LED on the faceplate lights, and an alarm message is created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal. Alarm Level 2 (AL2) consists of activity with an error threshold above the AL2 setting which is deemed to be of major importance. In this situation, the following happens: - the external alarm hardware is activated by closing the normally open contact - the RED ALARM LED on the faceplate lights - an alarm message is created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal - the LEI card enters line-conditioning mode - a yellow alarm message is sent to the CPE/LTU Line processing sends the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1either all "on-hook" or all "off-hook" signals, depending on the dip switch setting of the card. See Table 90: LEI card E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings on page 210. When the Set Alarm command is selected, the prompt appears for setting the threshold level and duration for alarm levels 1 and 2. The E1 link processes at a rate of approximately 2.0 mb/s. The threshold value indicates the ratio of the total number of bits that must be detected as being in error per second before the LEI activates an alarm. It can be set between 3 and 9 and can be different for each alarm level. Any other value entered causes the MMI to display a "Parameter Invalid" message. The digit entered as the threshold value is a number representing a negative power of 10 as shown in Table 97: E1 bit error rate threshold settings on page 229.

228

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software

Note: The error-rate threshold for a level 2 alarm must be greater (a smaller power of 10) than for a level 1 alarm. Remember that the numbers being represented are negative numbers. because 3 represents 3, and 4 represents 4, 4 represents a smaller number than 3 does. Table 97: E1 bit error rate threshold settings
Alarm threshold bit errors per second in power of 10 10-3 10-4 10-5 10-6 10-7 10-8 10-9 Threshold to set alarm 2,000/ second 200/second 20/second 2.0/second 2.0/10 seconds 2.0/100 seconds 2.0/1000 seconds Allowable Duration Periods 1-21 seconds 1-218 seconds 1-2148 seconds 1-3600 seconds 10-3600 seconds 100-3600 seconds 1000-3600 seconds

The duration value is set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3,600 seconds (1 hour). This duration value indicates how long the alarm condition must last before an alarm is declared. Low bit-error rates (107 through 109) are restricted to longer durations because it takes more than one second to detect an alarm condition above106. Higher bit-error rates are restricted to shorter durations because the MMI error counter fills at 65,000 errors. If the Set Clearing (S C) "Enable Self Clearing" option is set, the alarm indications (LEDs and external alarm contacts) is automatically cleared after the specified period, or duration, expires. Otherwise, the alarm continues until the command Clear Alarm (C A) is entered. When an alarm is cleared, all activity caused by the alarm indications is cleared: the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally open is reopened) the LED goes out an entry is made in the alarm log of the date and time the alarm was cleared carrier-fail line supervision ceases (for alarm level 2 only) If self-clearing alarm indications are disabled, carrier-fail line supervision terminates when the alarm condition has ceased, but the external alarm contact and faceplate LED remain active until the alarm is cleared. A heavy bit-error rate can cause 200 bit errors to occur much more quickly than 100 seconds. This causes the alarm to be declared sooner. An alarm condition is not automatically cleared until the system no longer detects the respective bit error threshold during the corresponding duration period. For example, if AL1 threshold of 6 (representing 10-6) is specified, and a duration period of 100 seconds is specified, an alarm is activated if more than 200 bit errors occur in any 100

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

229

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

second period. As soon as the alarm is activated, the bit counter is reset to 0. If the next 100 seconds pass, and less than 200 bit errors are detected, then the alarm clears after the alarm's duration period. However, if more than 200 bit errors are detected in the next 100 seconds, the alarm condition continues for the designated time period. The alarm finally clears when the alarm condition is no longer detected for the designated period, either by self-clearing (if this function is enabled), or when the Clear Alarm (C A) command is entered. In addition to bit errors, the Set Alarm function sets parameters for detecting frame-slip errors by establishing a threshold necessary to activate an alarm. If the threshold value is exceeded, a level 2 alarm is activated. The frame slip threshold can be specified from 1 to 255 frame slips per time period. The duration time period can be specified from 1 to 24 hours. When entering the Set Alarm (S A) command, the MMI scrolls through the previously described series of alarm options. These options are displayed along with their current value, at which point a new value can be entered or enter <CR> to retain the current value. Table 98: Set alarm options on page 230 outlines the options available in the Set Alarm (S A) function. Table 98: Set alarm options
Option AL1 Threshold AL1 Duration AL2 Threshold AL2 Duration Frame Slip Threshold Frame Slip Duration Description Sets the allowable bit errors per second before alarm level 1 is activated. Factory default is 6. Sets the duration in seconds (from 1 to 3,600 seconds) that alarm level 1 is activated. Factory default is 10 seconds. Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to 9) before alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 10-5. Sets the duration in seconds (from 1 to 3,600 seconds) that alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 10 seconds. Sets the allowable frame slips per time period (from 1 to 255) before alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 5. Sets the duration in hours (from 1 to 24) that the frame slips are counted. After this time period, the counter is reset to 0. Factory default is 2 hours.

Note: If the duration period set is too long, the LEI card is slow to return to service automatically even when the carrier is no longer experiencing errors. The CLEAR ALARM (C A) command has to be entered manually to restore service promptly. To avoid this, an alarm's duration period is normally set to 10 seconds.

Set Clearing
The SET CLEARING (S C) command allows self-clearing of alarms by responding to the question: Enable Self Clearing? (YES or NO). If YES is chosen (the factory default setting),

230

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software

the system automatically clears (resets) alarms after the alarm condition is no longer detected. Choosing the NO option causes the system to continue the alarm condition until the Clear Alarm (C A) command is entered. Line processing and yellow alarm indication to the CPE terminates as soon as the alarm condition clears, even if self-clearing is disabled.

Set Simple
The SET SIMPLE command controls call tear-down signaling when the far-end disconnects from a call. When the far-end terminates a call, Release 1 of LEI's AB vintage sends a disconnect message to the terminal equipment and waits for the terminal equipment to go idle before going idle itself. A NO response to the S S command configures Release 2 (and later) boards to operate in this way. See Figure 53: Set Simple (S S) no screen on page 231. Release 2 of AB vintage LEIs gives the administrator the option of using the signaling described above, or configuring the LEI to take its channel idle immediately after sending the calldisconnect message. A YES response to the S S command, the default configuration for Release 2 (and later) boards, configures the LEI to operate in this way. See Figure 54: Set Simple (S S) yes screen on page 231.

Figure 53: Set Simple (S S) no screen

Figure 54: Set Simple (S S) yes screen

Set Mode
At the SET MODE (S M) command, the MMI prompts the user with the current signaling mode, either Default (Australian P2) or Table (of bit values.) Entering a <CR> accepts the current value, or the user can type in 1 to revert to the Default, or 2 to edit the table entries. See Figure 55: Set Mode screen on page 232. If the user selects default, then the A/B Bit values is reset to the Default values. Responding to the MMI's Set Mode prompt with "1" also results in the line "Signaling Bits set to Default," as in Figure 55: Set Mode screen on page 232.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

231

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Figure 55: Set Mode screen

However, responding to this prompt with 2 selects "Table" and allows the user to set the A/B Bit Mode to whatever configuration the user chooses. If "Table" is selected, the individual table values are prompted for. See Figure 56: Set Mode (S M): Table screen on page 233 and Figure 57: Set Mode (S M): Table screen on page 234. After each value is displayed, enter <CR> to do the following: accept the current value enter just the AB bits (which is copied to the CD bits) enter a complete ABCD bit pattern in the case of optional states, a 'N' or 'n' can be entered to indicate that the state is not needed Note that in D4 Framing for E1, there are no CD bits, so they are ignored. The user is prompted for ABCD bit values for the following states when the table mode is selected. Send and Receive refer to the LEI sending ABCD bits to the CPE (Customer Provided Equipment) or receiving ABCD bits from the CPE. Incoming and Outgoing refer to E1 digital link from the CPE point of view. Incoming is an external call arriving over the digital link and accepted by the CPE. Outgoing is a call originated by the CPE over the digital link. Configuring the A/B Bit Signaling table is illustrated in Figure 57: Set Mode (S M): Table screen on page 234.

232

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software

Figure 56: Set Mode (S M): Table screen

Idle SEND This is the value that the LEI sends (acting as the CO or PSTN) when the circuit is in the idle state. This value is required. Idle RECEIVE This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE when it is in the idle state. This value is required. Blocking RECEIVE This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE when the customer equipment is in the blocking or fault state and is unable to accept new calls. Set this value to N if this state is not needed. If this value is not set to N, then dip switch #2 position 6 determines whether off-hook or on-hook is sent to the M1/SL100 when this state is entered. See Table 90: LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings on page 210.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

233

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Figure 57: Set Mode (S M): Table screen

Incoming call Ringer ON SEND This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that a call is incoming to the CPE and that ringing voltage should be applied at the CPE. This value is required. Incoming call Ringer OFF SEND This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that a call is incoming to the CPE and that the ring cycle is in the off portion of the cadence. This value is required. Incoming call Offhook RECEIVE This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE when the customer equipment has gone to an off hook state which indicates that the incoming call is answered. This value is required. Incoming call CONNECTED SEND This is the value that the LEI sends to the CPE to indicate that it has seen and recognized the off hook indication sent by the CPE. The call is considered fully connected at this point. This value is required.

234

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software

Incoming call (Far-end) DISCONNECT SEND This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that the far-end has released the call. This value is required. Incoming call (CPE) DISCONNECT RECEIVE This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE when the customer equipment wishes to end the call. This value is required. Outgoing call SEIZE RECEIVE This is the value that the LEI expects to see when the CPE goes to an off hook condition and wishes to initiate a call. This value is required. Outgoing call SEIZE ACK SEND This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that the seized condition is noted and the M-1 is ready for dial digits. This value can be set to N if it is not required such as in a loop start case. Outgoing call DIAL MAKE RECEIVE This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE during the make part of the digit. This value is required. Outgoing call DIAL BREAK RECEIVE This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE during the break part of the digit. This value is required. Outgoing call ANSWERED SEND This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that the far-end has answered the call. This value is required. Outgoing call (CPE) DISCONNECT RECEIVE This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE when the customer equipment wishes to end the call. This value is required. Outgoing call (Far-end) DISCONNECT SEND This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that the far-end has released the call. This value is required. Disconnect Time This is the number of milliseconds that the LEI sends the disconnect signal to the CPE before reverting to the idle state. If the CPE reverts to a connected state during this time, it is ignored. This value is only used when disconnect supervision is available and is needed for the signaling type in use. It is used when the far-end initiates the disconnect. For loop start cases, this value is not used. Intercall (release guard) Time This is the number of milliseconds that the LEI maintains the idle signal to the CPE before initiating a new call. The CPE should not initiate a new call during this time. If it does so, the off-hook indication is ignored until the release guard time has expired. This value defaults to 0 which relies on the M-1 to observe the proper guard time. If a nonzero value is entered, off-hook from the CPE and Ringer-On commands from the M1/SL100 is ignored until this timer has expired.

Display Configuration (D C)
The Display Configuration (D C) command displays the various configuration settings established for the LEI. Entering this command causes a screen similar to Figure 58: Display Configuration (D C) screen on page 236 to appear.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

235

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Figure 58: Display Configuration (D C) screen

Alarm operation and reporting

The MMI monitors the E1 link according to parameters established through the Set Alarm command for the following conditions: Excessive bit error rate Frame slip errors Out of frame condition Loss of signal condition Blue alarm (AIS) condition Descriptions of the excessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions are found in Configuring parameters on page 227. Bit errors activate either a level 1 or level 2 alarm. The remaining conditions, when detected, always cause the system to activate a level 2 alarm. An out-of-frame condition is declared if 3 consecutive frame bits are in error. If this condition occurs, the hardware immediately attempts to reframe. During the reframe time, the E1 link is declared out-of-frame, and silence is sent on all receive timeslots. A loss of signal condition is declared if a full frame (255 bits) of consecutive zeros is detected at the receive inputs. If this condition occurs, the E1 link automatically attempts to resynchronize with the far-end. If this condition lasts for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm is declared, and silence is sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm is cleared if, after two seconds, neither a loss of signal, out-of-frame condition, or blue alarm condition occurs. If a repeating device loses signal, it immediately begins sending an unframed signal of all ones to the far-end to indicate an alarm condition. This condition is called a blue alarm, or an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). If an AIS is detected for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm is declared, and silence is sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm is cleared if, after two seconds, neither a loss of signal, out-of-frame condition, or blue alarm condition occurs.

Alarm Disable
The Alarm Disable (A D) command disables the external alarm contacts. When this command is typed, the MMI displays the message Alarms Disabled and the MAINT LED lights.

236

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software

In this mode, no yellow alarms are sent and the LEI does not enter line processing mode. Alarm messages are sent on the MMI terminal and the LED continues to indicate alarm conditions.

Alarm Enable
The Alarm Enable (A E) command does the reverse of the Alarm Disable (A D) command. It enables the external alarm contacts. When this command is typed in, the MMI displays the message Alarms Enabled. In this mode, yellow alarms can be sent and the LEI can enter line processing mode.

Clear Alarm
The Clear Alarm (C A) command clears all activity initiated by an alarm: the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally open is reopened), the LED goes out, an entry is made in the alarm log of the date and time the alarm was cleared, and line processing ceases (for alarm level 2 only). When this command is typed, MMI displays the message Alarm acknowledged. If the alarm condition still exists, an alarm is declared again.

Display Alarms
A detailed report of the most recent 100 alarms with time and date stamps can be displayed by entering the Display Alarms (D A) command into the MMI, which causes a screen similar to Figure 59: Display Alarm (D A) screen on page 237 to appear.

Figure 59: Display Alarm (D A) screen

The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by entering D A P. If there is more than one screen in the log, the MMI scrolls the log until the screen is full, then stops. When ready to see the next screen, press any key. The display shows another screen and stops again. This continues until the entire log is displayed.

Clear Alarm Log

Clear all entries in the alarm log by typing the Clear Alarm Log (C A L) command.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

237

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Display Status
The Display Status (D S) command displays the current alarm condition of the E1 link as well as the on-hook or off-hook status of each of the 30 ports of the LEI. Entering this command causes a screen similar to Figure 60: Display Status (D S) screen on page 238 to appear. The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by entering D S P. If there is more than one screen, the MMI scrolls until the screen is full, then stops. When ready to see the next screen, press any key. The display shows one more screen, and stops again. This continues until the entire E1 link is reported on.

Figure 60: Display Status (D S) screen

Performance counters and reporting

The MMI monitors the performance of the E1 link according to several performance criteria including errored, bursty, unavailable, loss-of-frame and frame-slip seconds. It registers the performance of these criteria by reading their status every second and counting their results. These counts are accumulated for an hour, then reset to 0. Previous hour count results are maintained for each of the previous 24 hours. The LEI counts CRC-4 errors when CRC-4 is enabled and Bipolar Violations (BPV) when CRC-4 is disabled. The performance criteria for which these counts are maintained as follows: Errored seconds are seconds in which one or more CRC-4 / BPV errors, or one or more out-of-frame errors in one second. Bursty seconds are seconds in which more than one and less than 320 CRC-4 / BPV errors in a second. Severely errored seconds are seconds in which more than 320 CRC-4 / BPV errors, or one or more out-of-frames in a second. Unavailable seconds are seconds in which unavailable state starts with 10 consecutive severely errored seconds and ends with 10 consecutive non-severely errored seconds (excluding the final 10 non-severely errored seconds).

238

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software

Loss-of-frame seconds are seconds in which loss-of-frame or loss-of-signal conditions exist for three consecutive seconds. Frame slip seconds are seconds in which one or more frame slips occur. The MMI also maintains an overall error counter which is the sum of all errors counted for the performance criteria listed above. The error counter can only be cleared by entering the Clear Error (C E) command. It stops counting at 65,000. The error counter provides an easy method to determine if an alarm condition is corrected. Clear the error counter, wait a few minutes, and display the performance to see if any errors occurred because the counter was cleared. The MMI display reports on these performance counters through the Display Performance (D P) or the Display History (D H) commands.

Display Performance
Entering the Display Performance (D P) command displays performance counters for the past hour. A screen similar to Figure 61: Display Performance (D P) screen on page 239 appears.

Figure 61: Display Performance (D P) screen

Each column, except the error counter, indicates the number of errors in the current hour and is reset to zero every hour on the hour. Just before the performance counters are reset to zero, the values are put into the history log. The error counter indicates the number of errors because the error counter was cleared. The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by entering D P P. If more than one screen is to be displayed, the MMI scrolls until the screen is full, then stops. When ready to see the next screen, press any key. The display shows one more screen, and stops again. This continues until the entire display is shown.

Display History
Entering the Display History (D H) command displays performance counters for each hour of the past 24 in reverse chronological order, beginning with the last full hour. A screen similar to Figure 62: Display History (D H) screen on page 240 appears.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

239

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

The Pause command works the same for Display History as it does for the other display commands. Simply enter D H P to see a report on the performance counters, one screen at a time.

Figure 62: Display History (D H) screen

As with all Display commands, the Pause command can be used to display a full screen of the history report at a time, by entering D H P.

Clear Error
Reset the error counter to zero by entering the Clear Error (C E) command. The error counter provides a convenient way to determine if the E1 link is performing without errors because it can be cleared and examined at any time.

Testing
The Test Carrier (T) command allows tests to be run on the LEI, the E1 link, or the CPE device. The three tests are designed to provide the capability to isolate faulty conditions in any of these three sources. See Table 99: MMI Tests on page 241 for additional information about these three test types. Enter the T command, and at the prompt, enter which of these three tests is to be initiated. The prompt is similar to Figure 63: Test Carrier (T) screen on page 240.

Figure 63: Test Carrier (T) screen

Tests can be performed once, for one through 98 minutes, or continuously (selected by entering 99 minutes), until a Stop Test command is entered. Tests continue for the duration specified even if a failure occurs, and terminate at the end of the time period or when a Stop Test command is issued. Only Stop Test stops a test with a duration selection of 99; however,

240

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software

the STOP command terminates a test set to any duration from one to 99. After entering the test number, a prompt similar to Figure 64: Test parameters screen on page 241 appears.

Figure 64: Test parameters screen

Before a test is run, be sure to verify that the card is disabled, as the tests interfere with calls currently in process. During a test, if an invalid word is received, this is recorded by a failure peg counter. The peg counter has a limit of 65,000. At the end of the test, the Test Results message indicates how many failures, if any, occurred during the test. Table 99: MMI Tests on page 241 shows which test to run for the associated equipment. Table 99: MMI Tests
Test number 1 2 3 LEI Equipment Tested Test Description Local loopback

E1 link, LEI, and E1 network External loopback CPE device and E1 network Network loopback

Test 1, local loopback, loops the E1 link signaling toward itself at the backplane connector. Test data is generated and received on all timeslots. If this test fails, it indicates that the LEI is defective. Figure 65: MMI Local loopback test on page 241 illustrates how the signaling is looped back toward itself.

Figure 65: MMI Local loopback test

Test 2, external loopback, applies an external loopback to the E1 link. Test data is generated and received by the LEI on all timeslots. If test 1 passes but test 2 fails, it indicates that the E1 link is defective between the LEI and the external loopback location. If test 1 was not run and test 2 fails, the E1 link or the LEI could be defective. To isolate the failure to the E1 link, tests 1 and 2 must be run in tandem. Figure 66: MMI External loopback test on page 242 demonstrates how an external loopback is applied to the E1 link.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

241

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Figure 66: MMI External loopback test

Test 3, network loopback, loops the LEI's received E1 data back toward the CPE. No test data is generated or received by the LEI. If test 2 passes but test 3 fails, it indicates that the CPE device is defective. If test 2 was not run and test 3 fails, the E1 link or the CPE device could be defective. To isolate the failure to the CPE device, tests 2 and 3 must be run in tandem. Figure 67: MMI Network loopback test on page 242 illustrates how the signaling is looped back toward the CPE.

Figure 67: MMI Network loopback test

Applications
The LEI is an IPE line card that provides cost-effective connection between E1-compatible IPE and a CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1system or off-premise extensions over long distances. Some examples of applications where an LEI can be interfaced to an E1 link are: E1-compatible VRU equipment E1-compatible turret systems E1-compatible wireless systems Remote analog (500/2500-type) telephones through E1 to channel bank Remote Norstar sites behind CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1over E1 The LEI is appropriate for any application where both E1 connectivity and "lineside" functionality are required. This includes connections to E1-compatible voice response units,

242

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Applications

voice messaging and trading turret (used in stock market applications) systems. See Figure 68: LEI connection to IPE on page 243.

Figure 68: LEI connection to IPE

For example, the LEI can be used to connect the system to an E1-compatible Voice Response Unit (VRU). An example of this type of equipment is Avaya Open IVR system. In this way, the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1can send a call to the VRU, and, because the LEI supports analog (500/2500-type) telephone functionality, the VRU can send the call back to the system for further handling. The LEI can also be used to provide off-premise extensions to remote locations, up to 500 miles from the system. In this application, analog telephone functionality is extended over E1 facilities, providing a telephone at a remote site with access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone line functionality. See Figure 69: LEI in off-premise extension application on page 243. Audible Message Waiting Indicator can be provided as well.

Figure 69: LEI in off-premise extension application

Similarly, use the LEI to provide a connection between the system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 70: LEI connection to Norstar system on page 244. In this case, channel banks are not required if the Norstar system is equipped with an E1 interface. Note: Consider LEI audio levels when determining the appropriateness of an application.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

243

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Figure 70: LEI connection to Norstar system

244

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 12: NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC)

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 245 Physical description on page 246 Functional description on page 246 Electrical specifications on page 249 Configuration on page 251

Introduction
The NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card supports the Custom Local Area Signaling Services (CLASS) feature. The CLASS Modem card receives Calling Number and Calling Name Delivery (CND) data and time/date data from the Avaya Communication Server 1000E (Avaya CS 1000E), Avaya CS 1000M, and Meridian 1and transmits it to a line port, such as a port on an Analog Line card, which delivers the CND data to a CLASS telephone when presenting the telephone with a new call. For information about the CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery feature, see Avaya Features and Services (NN43001-106-B). For administration and maintenance commands, see Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) .The NT5D60AA CLASS Modem card supports the Custom Local Area Signaling Services (CLASS) feature. The CLASS Modem card receives Calling Number and Calling Name Delivery (CND) data and time/date data from the system and transmits it to a line port, such as a port on an Analog Line card, which delivers the CND data to a CLASS telephone when presenting the telephone with a new call. For information about the CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery feature, see Avaya Features and Services (NN43001-106-B). For administration and maintenance commands, see Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611).

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

245

NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC)

Physical description
CLASS Modem cards are housed in NT8D37 IPE modules. The CLASS modem card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) double-sided printed circuit board. The card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin edge connector. The faceplate of the CLASS modem card is equipped with a red LED that lights when the card is disabled. When the card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds as a self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card. CLASS Modem cards are housed in NT8D37 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Modules. The CLASS modem card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) double-sided printed circuit board. The card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin edge connector. The faceplate of the CLASS modem card is equipped with a red LED that lights when the card is disabled. When the card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds as a self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

Functional description
The CLASS Modem card is designed to plug into any one of the peripheral card slots of the IPE module. The CLASS modem card supports up to 32 transmit-only modem resources, using a DS30X interface. Up to 255 modems can be configured per system. The CND transmission process begins with the CS 1000 software sending an initiating message to the CLASS Modem card indicating the length of the CND information and the type of the CND information flow to be transmitted. In response, the CLASS Modem card assigns a message buffer to capture the CND information from the CS 1000 software. System software then sends the CND information to the CLASS Modem card, one byte at a time, where it is stored in the message buffer. If the CLASS Modem card receives more bytes than were specified in the initiating message, then the additional bytes are discarded and not included in the CND memory buffer.

246

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Once all of the CND information is stored in the memory buffer, the CLASS Modem card begins transmission when requested by the system software. Data is sent one ASCII character at a time. The CLASS Modem card inserts a start and stop bit to each ASCII character sent. The transmission of the calling party name/number to the terminating telephone is accomplished through asynchronous FSK simplex-mode transmission at 1200 bits/second over a 2-wire loop, in accordance with the Bell 202 standard. The transmission is implemented by the appropriate PCM equivalent of 1200 or 2200 Hz. Upon completion of transmitting the CND data, the CLASS Modem card sends a message to the system software to indicate successful transmission of the CND data. Eight modems can be associated with each module. Table 100: Time slot mapping on page 247 shows time slot mapping for the CLASS modem card. Table 100: Time slot mapping
XCMC mapping of TNs TNs 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 DS30X timeslot 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Modem units on the CLASS Modem card module 0, 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 module 1, 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 module 2, 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 module 3, 00 01 02 03

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

247

NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC)

XCMC mapping of TNs TNs 28 29 30 31 DS30X timeslot 28 29 30 31 Modem units on the CLASS Modem card 04 05 06 07

The CLASS Modem card is designed to plug into any one of the peripheral card slots of the IPE module. The CLASS modem card supports up to 32 transmit-only modem resources, using a DS30X interface. Up to 255 modems can be configured per system. The CND transmission process begins with the system software sending an initiating message to the CLASS Modem card indicating the length of the CND information and the type of the CND information flow to be transmitted. In response, the CLASS Modem card assigns a message buffer to capture the CND information from the system software. System software then sends the CND information to the CLASS Modem card, one byte at a time, where it is stored in the message buffer. If the CLASS Modem card receives more bytes than were specified in the initiating message, then the additional bytes are discarded and not included in the CND memory buffer. Once all of the CND information is stored in the memory buffer, the CLASS Modem card begins transmission when requested by the system software. Data is sent one ASCII character at a time. The CLASS Modem card inserts a start and stop bit to each ASCII character sent. The transmission of the calling party name/number to the terminating telephone is accomplished through asynchronous FSK simplex-mode transmission at 1200 bits/second over a 2-wire loop, in accordance with the Bell 202 standard. The transmission is implemented by the appropriate PCM equivalent of 1200 or 2200 Hz. Upon completion of transmitting the CND data, the CLASS Modem card sends a message to the system software to indicate successful transmission of the CND data. Eight modems can be associated with each module. Table 101: Time slot mapping on page 248 shows time slot mapping for the CLASS modem card. Table 101: Time slot mapping
XCMC mapping of TNs TNs 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 DS30X timeslot 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Modem units on the CLASS Modem card module 0, 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

248

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Electrical specifications

XCMC mapping of TNs TNs 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 DS30X timeslot 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Modem units on the CLASS Modem card module 1, 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 module 2, 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 module 3, 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Electrical specifications
This section lists the electrical characteristic of the CLASS modem card. This section lists the electrical characteristic of the CLASS modem card.

Data transmission specifications

Table 102: CLASS modem card-data transmission electrical characteristics on page 250 provides specifications for the 32 transmit-only modem resources.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

249

NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC)

Table 102: CLASS modem card-data transmission electrical characteristics

Characteristics Units per card Transmission rate Description 32 transmit only modem resources 1200 12 baud

The CLASS modem card has no direct connection to the Public Network. Table 103: CLASS modem card-data transmission electrical characteristics on page 250 provides specifications for the 32 transmit-only modem resources. Table 103: CLASS modem card-data transmission electrical characteristics
Characteristics Units per card Transmission rate Description 32 transmit only modem resources 1200 12 baud

The CLASS modem card has no direct connection to the Public Network.

Power requirements
The CLASS modem card requires less than 1.0 Amps of +5 V dc 1% supply supplied by the power converter in the IPE shelf. The CLASS modem card requires less than 1.0 Amps of +5 V dc 1% supply supplied by the power converter in the IPE shelf.

Environmental specifications
Table 104: CLASS modem card - environmental specifications on page 250 shows the environmental specifications of the card. Table 104: CLASS modem card - environmental specifications
Parameter Operating temperature Operating humidity Storage temperature Specifications 0 C to +65 C (+32 F to +149 F) 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) 50 C to +70 C (58 F to +158 F)

Table 105: CLASS modem card - environmental specifications on page 251 shows the environmental specifications of the card.

250

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

Table 105: CLASS modem card - environmental specifications

Parameter Operating temperature Operating humidity Storage temperature Specifications 0 C to +65 C (+32 F to +149 F) 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) 50 C to +70 C (58 F to +158 F)

Configuration
The NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane and reports that information back to the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1CPU through the Card LAN interface. The NT5D60AA CLASS Modem card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane and reports that information back to the Meridian 1 CPU through the Cardlan interface.

Software service changes

On systems equipped with either CNUMB (package 332) or CNAME (package 333), up to 255 CLASS Modem (CMOD) units can be configured in LD 13, and analog (500/2500-type) telephones can be assigned as CLASS telephones in LD 10 by assigning them CNUS, or CNUA and CNAA class of service. See Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 and LD 13 service change instructions. On systems which are equipped with either CNUMB (package 332) or CNAME (package 333), up to 255 CLASS Modem (CMOD) units can be configured in LD 13, and analog (500/2500type) telephones can be assigned as CLASS telephones in LD 10 by assigning them CNUS, or CNUA and CNAA class of service. See Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 and LD 13 service change instructions.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

251

NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC)

252

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 13: NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Contents
The following are the topics in this section: Introduction on page 253 Physical description on page 254 Functional description on page 270 Architecture on page 280 Operation on page 284

Introduction
This section contains information required to install the NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 (DDP2) card. The NT5D97 is a dual-port 2.0 Mb DTI2/PRI2 card (the DDP2 firmware functions in DTI2 or PRI2 mode, depending on DIP switch settings) that integrates the functionality of two NT8D72BA PRI2 cards, and one QPC414 ENET card into a single CE card. The NT5D97 occupies a single slot in the Network shelf and provides two DTI2/PRI2 network connections: an interface to an external D-Channel Handler (the NT6D11AF) or the NT6D80 Multipurpose Serial Data Link card, and an optional plug-on NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA Downloadable D-Channel daughterboard (DDCH) with two DCH interface ports. The NT5D97 DDP2 card can be mixed in the same machine with PRI2 NT8D72BA cards. The NT5D97 DDP2 card hardware design uses a B57 ASIC framer. The carrier specifications comply with the ANSI TI.403 specification. The NT5D97 provides an interface to the 2.048 Mbps external digital line either directly or through an office repeater, Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE), or Line Terminating Unit (LTU). Danger: DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

253

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

The NT5D97 DDP2 card is not designed to be connected directly to the Public Switched Network, or other exposed plant networks. Such a connection should only be done using an isolating-type networking terminating device that provides voltage surge protection, such as a Line Terminating Unit (LTU), Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE), or Network Termination 1 (NT1), as certified by your local, regional, or national safety agency and telecommunication authority.

Physical description
External D-Channel Interface DCH or MSDL
The connection between the DDP2 card and the external DCH or MSDL is through a 26-pin female D type connector. The data signals conform to the electrical characteristics of the EIA standard RS-422. Two control signals are used to communicate the D-channel link status to the DCH or MSDL. These are: Receiver Ready (RR), originating at the DDP2 card, to indicate to the DCH or MSDL that the D-channel link is operational. Transmitter Ready (TR), originating at the DCH or MSDL, to indicate to the DDP2 card that the DCH are ready to use the D-channel link. Table 106: DCH/MSDL Receiver Ready control signals on page 254 indicates how the RR control signal operates with regard to the DDP2 status. Table 106: DCH/MSDL Receiver Ready control signals
RR State ON Condition D-Channel data rate selected at 64 Kbps. PRI2 loop is enabled. PRI2 link is not in OOS or Local Alarm mode state. PRI2 link is not transmitting a Remote Alarm pattern. PRI2 link is not receiving a Remote Alarm Indication from a remote facility. OFF All other conditions

NT5D97 faceplate
Figure 71: NT5D97 faceplate on page 255 illustrates the faceplate layout for the NT5D97 DDP card. The faceplate contains an enable/disable switch; a DDCH status LED; 6 x 2 trunk port

254

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

status LEDs; and six external connectors. Table 107: External connectors and LEDs on page 255 shows the name of each connector, its designation with respect to the faceplate and the name and description of the card it is connected to. Also shown are the names of the LEDs.

Figure 71: NT5D97 faceplate

Table 107: External connectors and LEDs

Function Switch Faceplate Designator ENB/DIS Type Plastic, ESD protected Description Card Enable/disable switch

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

255

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Function Connector s

Faceplate Designator Unit 0 Clock 0 Unit 0 Clock 1 Unit 1 Clock 0 Unit 1 Clock 1 J5 TRK J6 DCH

Type RJ11 Connector RJ11 Connector RJ11 Connector RJ11 Connector 9 Pin Female D Connector 26 Pin Female D Connector 2 Red LEDs 2 Red LEDs 2 Yellow LEDs 2 Yellow LEDs 2 Yellow LEDs 2 Yellow LEDs Bicolor Red/ Green LED

Description Connects reference clock 0 to Clock Controller card 0 Connects reference clock 0 to Clock Controller card 1 Connects reference clock 1 to Clock Controller card 0 Connects reference clock 1 to Clock Controller card 1 Two external E1 Trunk 0 and Trunk 1 Connects to external DCH or MSDL ENET 0 or ENET 1 is disabled Trunk 0 or Trunk 1 is disabled Trunk is out of service Local (Near End) Alarm Far End Alarm Loop Back test being performed on Trunk 0 or Trunk 1 NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA status

LEDs

ENET DIS OOS NEA FEA LBK DCH

The following sections provide a brief description of each element on the faceplate.

Enable/Disable Switch
This switch is used to disable the card prior to insertion or removal from the network shelf. While this switch is in disable position, the card does not respond to the system CPU.

ENET LEDs
Two red LEDs indicate if the "ENET0" and "ENET1" portions of the card are disabled. These LEDs are lit in the following cases: When the enable/disable switch is in disabled state (lit by hardware). After power-up, before the card is enabled. When the ENET port on the card is disabled by software.

256

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Trunk Disable (DIS) LEDs

Two red LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1" portions of the card are disabled. These LEDs are lit in the following cases: Upon reception of the "disable loop" message from the software. After power-up.

OOS LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" and "trunk port 1" portions of the card are out of service.

NEA LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if the near end detects absence of incoming signal or loss of synchronization in "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1" respectively. The near-end alarm causes a far-end alarm signal to be transmitted to the far end.

FEA LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if a far-end alarm is reported by the far end (usually in response to a near-end alarm condition at the far end) on "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1".

LBK LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if a remote loopback test is being performed on trunk port 0 or trunk port 1. The loopback indication is active when the digital trunk is in remote loopback mode. Normal call processing is inhibited during the remote loopback test.

DCH LED
When the dual colored LED is red, it indicates the on-board DDCH is present but disabled. When the dual colored LED is green, it indicates the on-board DDCH is present and enabled. If a DDCH is not configured on the DDP2 card, this lamp is not lit.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

257

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Unit 0 Clk Connectors

Two RJ11 connectors for connecting: Digital trunk unit 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference source on clock controller card 0. Digital trunk unit 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference source on clock controller card 1.

Unit 1 Clk Connectors

Two RJ11 connectors for connecting: Digital trunk unit 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference source on clock controller card 0. Digital trunk unit 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference source on clock controller card 1.

Connector J5 (TRK)
A 9 pin D-Type connector used to connect: Digital trunk unit 0 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs. Digital trunk unit 1 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs.

Connector J6 (DCH)
A 26 pin D-type connector is used to connect the DDP2 card to the external MSDL or Dchannel handler.

Port definitions
The NT5D97 card is dual-card, it equips two ports; these ports can be defined in the following combinations: Table 108: NT5D97AA/AB loops configuration
Loop 0 not configured Loop 1 not configured V DTI2 V PRI2 V

258

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Loop 0 DTI2 PRI2 V V V V V V

Table 109: NT5D97AD loops configuration

Loop 0 not configured Loop 1 not configured DTI2 PRI2 DDCS V V V V DTI2 V V V V PRI2 V V V X DDCS V V X V

Note: Each loop DPNSS can be defined in Normal or Extended addressing mode.

System capacity and performance

Physical capacity
Each NT5D97 DDP2 card occupies one slot on the network shelf. Each card supports two digital trunk circuits and two network loops. The total number of DDP2 cards per system is limited by the number of network loops, physical capacity of the shelf, number of DTI2/PRI2 interfaces allowed by the software and the range of DCH addresses.

D-Channel capacity
The software configuration for the NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA DDCH is similar to the MSDL and only supports D-channel functionality. The system has a total capacity of 16 addresses (Device Addresses or DNUM) that can be reserved for DCH card, MSDL card or DDCH card. One exception is DNUM 0 which is commonly assigned to the TTY terminal. No two different D-Channel providers can share the same DNUM. Hence, the combined maximum number of DCH, MSDL and DDCH cards in the system is 16. The DCH has one D-Channel unit, the DDCH has two D-Channel units, and the MSDL has a maximum of four units. Therefore, the total number of D-Channel is derived by the following formula:

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

259

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Total_Num_DCH-Units = Num_DCHx1 + Num_DDCHx2 + Num_MSDLx4 Therefore, Total_Num_DCH-Units in any given system is between 0-63.

CPU capacity
Using a NT5D97 DDP2 card instead of DTI2/PRI2 cards does not increase the load on the CPU. The DDP2 replaces an ENET card and two DTI2/PRI2 cards. Emulating the ENET card and the overall CPU capacity is not impacted by using a DDP2 card instead of a DTI2/PRI2 card.

Power requirements
Table 110: NT5D97 DDP2 power requirements on page 260 lists the power requirements for the NT5D97 DDP2 card. Table 110: NT5D97 DDP2 power requirements
Voltage Source Current DDP2 (without NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA) +5 V +12 V -12 V Backplane Backplane Backplane 3A 25mA 25mA 15.6W DDP2 (with NTBK51AA/ NTBK51CA) 3.8A 75mA 75mA 20.8W

Total Power (Maximum)

Cable requirements
This section lists the types of cable used and the lengths required for internal and external NT5D97 DDP2 connections. Note: No additional cabling is required for nB+D configurations. Multiple DDP2 cards and the Dchannel are associated through software in LD 17. DDP2 cable assemblies include: E1 carrier cables - NTCK45AA (A0407956) - NT8D7217 (A0617192) - NTCK78AA (A0618294)

260

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

- NTCK79AA (A0618296) DDP2 to QPC471/QPC775 Clock Controller Cables - NTCG03AA - NTCG03AB - NTCG03AC - NTCG03AD DDP2 to DCH cables - NTCK46AA - NTCK46AB - NTCK46AC - NTCK46AD DDP2 to MSDL cables - NTCK80AA - NTCK80AB - NTCK80AC - NTCK80AD A description of each type of DDP2 cable follows.

E1 carrier cables
NTCK45AA (A0407956)
The NTCK45AA (8 ft.) is an 120W cable for systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the TRK port (P1, D-type 9 pin male) on the DDP2 faceplate to the I/O filter (P2, P3 D-type 9 pin males).

Figure 72: NTCK45AA

Table 111: NTCK45AA cable pins on page 262 which follows lists the pin attributes for the NTCK45AA cable.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

261

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Table 111: NTCK45AA cable pins

Cable 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T-PRI1TX R-PRI1TX T-PRI1RX R-PRI1RX Name T-PRI0TX R-PRI0TX T-PRI0RX R-PRI0RX Description Trunk 0 Transmit Tip Trunk 0 Transmit Ring Trunk 0 Receive Tip Trunk 0 Receive Ring GND Shield Wire GND Shield Wire Standard Wire (3") Standard Wire (3") Trunk 1 Transmit Tip Trunk 1 Transmit Ring Trunk 1 Receive Tip Trunk 1 Receive Ring GND Shield Wire GND Shield Wire Standard Wire (3") Standard Wire (3") Color Black Red Black White Bare Bare Bare Bare Black Red Black White Bare Bare Bare Bare DDP2 pins P1-1 P2-2 P1-3 P1-4 N/C N/C Case P2 Case P2 P1-5 P1-6 P1-7 P1-8 N/C N/C Case P3 Case P3 I/O Pane pins P2-6 P2-7 P2-2 P2-3 Case P2 Case P2 P2-5 P2-9 P3-6 P3-7 P3-2 P3-3 Case P3 Case P3 P3-5 P3-9

NT8D7217 (A0617192)
The NT8D7217 (50 ft.) is an 120W cable for systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the 9 pin I/O filter connector to the 9 pin NCTE connector.

Figure 73: NT8D7217

Table 112: NT8D7217 cable pins on page 263 which follows lists the pin attributes for the NT8D7217 cable.

262

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Table 112: NT8D7217 cable pins

Cable 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 T-PRI1TX R-PRI1TX T-PRI1RX R-PRI1RX Name T-PRI0TX R-PRI0TX T-PRI0RX R-PRI0RX Description Color DDP2 pins P1-6 P1-7 P1-2 P1-3 P1-5 P1-9 P1-6 P1-7 P1-2 P1-3 P1-5 P1-9 I/O Panel pins P2-6 P2-7 P2-2 P2-3 N/C N/C P2-6 P2-7 P2-2 P2-3 N/C N/C

Trunk 0 Transmit Tip Black Trunk 0 Transmit Ring White

Trunk 0 Receive Tip Black Trunk 0 Receive Ring GND Shield Wire GND Shield Wire Red Bare Bare

Trunk 1 Transmit Tip Black Trunk 1 Transmit Ring White

Trunk 1 Receive Tip Black Trunk 1 Receive Ring GND Shield Wire GND Shield Wire Red Bare Bare

NTCK78AA (A0618294)
The NTCK78AA (50 ft.) is an 120W cable for connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin male) to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) (P2, P3 D-type 15 pin males). The NTCK78AA is used for systems not equipped with an I/O filter panel.

Figure 74: NTCK78AA

Table 113: NTCK78AA cable pins on page 263 lists the pin attributes for the NTCK78AA cable. Table 113: NTCK78AA cable pins
Cable 0 Name T-PRI0TX Description Color DDP2 pins P1-1 NCTE pins P2-1

Trunk 0 Transmit Tip Black

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

263

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Cable 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

Name R-PRI0TX T-PRI0RX R-PRI0RX

Description Trunk 0 Transmit Ring

Color Red

DDP2 pins P1-2 P1-3 P1-4 P1 Case P1 Case P1-5 P1-6 P1-7 P1-8 P1 Case P1 Case

NCTE pins P2-9 P2-3 P2-11 P2-2 P2-4 P3-1 P3-9 P3-3 P3-11 P3-2 P3-4

Trunk 0 Receive Tip Black Trunk 0 Receive Ring GND Shield Wire GND Shield Wire White Bare Bare

T-PRI1TX R-PRI1TX T-PRI1RX R-PRI1RX

Trunk 1 Transmit Tip Black Trunk 1 Transmit Ring Red

Trunk 1 Receive Tip Black Trunk 1 Receive Ring GND Shield Wire GND Shield Wire White Bare Bare

NTCK79AA (A0618296)
The NTCK79AA (40 ft) is a 75W coaxial cable for connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin male) to the Line Terminating Unit (LTU) (P2, P3, P4, P5 BNC males).

Figure 75: NTCK79AA

Table 114: NTCK79AA cable pins on page 264 lists the pin attributes for the NTCK79AA cable. Table 114: NTCK79AA cable pins
Cable 0 0 Name T-PRI0TX R-PRI0TX Description Color DDP2 pins P1-1 P1-2 NCTE pins P2 inner conductor P2 shield

Trunk 0 Transmit Tip Red Trunk 0 Transmit Ring Red

264

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Cable 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

Name T-PRI0RX R-PRI0RX T-PRI1TX R-PRI1TX T-PRI1RX R-PRI1RX

Description

Color

DDP2 pins P1-3 P1-4 P1-5 P1-6 P1-7 P1-8 N/C N/C

NCTE pins P3 inner conductor P3 shield P4 inner conductor P4 shield P5 inner conductor P5 shield P1 Case P1 Case

Trunk 0 Receive Tip Green Trunk 0 Receive Ring Green

Trunk 1 Transmit Tip Red Trunk 1 Transmit Ring Red

Trunk 1 Transmit Tip Green Trunk 1 Receive Ring Outer metallized PVC shield 3 stranded wire Green Bare Bare

Reference clock cables

The NTCG03AA (14 ft), NTCG03AB (2.8 ft), NTCG03AC (4.0 ft), or NTCG03AD (7 ft), is a DDP2 card to Clock Controller cable, connecting each of the CLK0 or CLK1 ports on the DDP2 faceplate to the primary or secondary source ports on Clock Controller card 0 or 1.

Figure 76: NTCG03AA/AB/AC/AD

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

265

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

MSDL/DCH cables External DCH cable

The NTCK46 cable connects the DDP2 card to the NT6D11AF/NT5K75AA/NT5K35AA DChannel Handler card. The cable is available in four different sizes: NTCK46AA (6 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable NTCK46AB (18 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable NTCK46AC (35 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable NTCK46AD (50 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable

Figure 77: NTCK46AA/AB/AC/AD

External MSDL cable

The NTCK80 cable connects the DDP2 card to the NT6D80 MSDL card. The cable is available in four different sizes: NTCK80AA (6 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable NTCK80AB (18 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable NTCK80AC (35 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable NTCK80AD (50 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable

Figure 78: NTCK80AA/AB/AC/AD

266

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Cable diagrams
Figure 79: DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel on page 268 and Figure 80: DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel on page 269 provide examples of typical cabling configurations for the DDP2. Figure 79: DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel on page 268 shows a typical DDP2 cabling for a system with an I/O panel, with the connection between the I/O panel and a Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE). Figure 80: DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel on page 269 shows cabling for a system without an I/O panel. Here, the DDP2 faceplate is cabled directly to the NCTE. Note: Because of several clock cabling options exists, none is represented in the diagrams. Refer to Clock configurations on page 282 for a description on each available option.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

267

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Figure 79: DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel

268

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Figure 80: DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

269

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Functional description
NT5D97 circuit card locations
Each NT5D97 card requires one slot on a shelf. NT5D97 cards can be placed in any card slot in the network bus. Note in all cases - If an NT8D72BA/NTCK43 card is being replaced by a DDP2 card, the Dchannel Handler can be reconnected to the DDP2 card, or removed if an onboard NTBK51DDCH card is used. Also, DIP Switches in the NT5D97 must be set properly before insertion. NT5D97 has a different DIP Switch setting from NTCK43AB. Refer to NT5D97AA/ AB DIP switch settings on page 270 for DIP switch setting).

NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings

The NT5D97 DDP2 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for trunk parameters settings for port0 and port1 respectively. Additionally, the DDP2 card is equipped with one set of four DIP switches for the Ring Ground setting. The NT5D97AA/AB has one set of eight DIP switches and NT5D97AD has two sets of ten DIP switches for the D-channel Handler parameters setting. The DIP switches are used for the setting of default values of certain parameters. Firmware reads the general purpose switches, which sets the default values accordingly. Table 115: DIP switch settings for NT5D97AA/AB
Card ENB/DSB mounted on the S1 face plate Ring Ground MSDL TX Mode LBO Setting S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 Receiver Interface S8 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 Trunks 0 and 1 Port 0 Port 1 Trunk 0 Trunk 1

270

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Card General Purpose

Trunks 0 and 1

Port 0

Port 1

Trunk 0 S9

Trunk 1 S15

The following parameters are set by DIP switches. The boldface font shows the factory set-up.

Figure 81: Dip switches for NT5D97AA/AB

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

271

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AA/AB

Impedance level and unit mode
The S9/S15 switch selects the impedance level and loop operation mode on DEI2 OR PRI2. Refer to Table 116: Impedance level and loop mode switch settings on page 272. Table 116: Impedance level and loop mode switch settings
Switch 1 2 3 4 Description Impedance level Spare Spare Unit mode S9/S15 Switch Setting OFF - 120 ohm ON - 75 ohm X X OFF - Loop operates in the DTI2 mode ON - Loop operates in the PRI2 mode

Transmission mode
A per-trunk switch (S4/S10) provides selection of the digital trunk interface type. Refer to Table 117: Impedance level and loop mode switch settings on page 272. Table 117: Impedance level and loop mode switch settings
Description E1 Not used OFF S4/S10 switch settings

Line build out

A per-trunk set of three switches (S5/S11, S6/S12 and S7/S13) provides the dB value for the line build out. Refer to Table 118: Trunk interface line build out switch settings on page 273. Note: Do not change this setup.

272

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Table 118: Trunk interface line build out switch settings

Switch setting Description 0dB S5/S11 OFF S6/S12 OFF S7/S13 OFF

Receiver impedance
A per-trunk set of four DIP switches (S8/S14 provides selection between 75 or 120 ohm values. Refer to Table 119: Trunk interface impedance switch settings on page 273. Table 119: Trunk interface impedance switch settings
Description 75 ohm 120 ohm OFF OFF S8/S14 switch setting OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON

Ring ground switches for NT5D97AA/AB

A set of four Dip switches (S2) selects which Ring lines are connected to ground. Refer to Table 120: Ring ground switch settings on page 273. Table 120: Ring ground switch settings
Switch 1 2 3 4 Description Trunk 0 Transit Trunk 0 Receive Trunk 1 Transmit Trunk 1 Receive S2 switch settingS OFF-Ring line is not grounded ON- Ring line is grounded OFF-Ring line is not grounded ON- Ring line is grounded OFF-Ring line is not grounded ON- Ring line is grounded OFF-Ring line is not grounded ON- Ring line is grounded

DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA daughterboard for NT5D97AA/AB

In case of an on-board NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA D-channel daughterboard, set of four switches (S3) provide the daughterboard address. Refer to Table 128: Trunk 1 switches on page 277.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

273

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Note: Switch 8 of S3 (S3-8) does not require a switch setting to select between the on-board NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA D-channel daughterboard and an external DCHI/MSDL. The NT5D97 detects when the on-board NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA D-channel daughterboard is used. Table 121: DCH mode and address switch settings
Switch 1-4 Description D-channel daughterboard address S3 switch setting See Table 122: NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA daughterboard address select switch settings on page 274 OFF

5-8

For future use

Table 122: NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA daughterboard address select switch settings on page 274 shows the possible selection of the NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA D-channel. Table 122: NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA daughterboard address select switch settings
Device Address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Switch Setting OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

274

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Device Address

Switch Setting

Note: The system contains a maximum number of 16 DCHI, MSDL, and DDCH devices. The Device Addresses are equivalent to the MSDL DNUM designations. Note: Device address 0 is commonly assigned to the System TTYD Monitor.

NT5D97AD DIP switch settings

The NT5D97 DDP2 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for trunk parameters settings for port0 and port1 respectively. Additionally, the DDP2 card is equipped with one set of four DIP switches for the Ring Ground setting. The NT5D97AA/AB has one set of eight DIP switches and NT5D97AD has two sets of ten DIP switches for the D-channel Handler parameters setting. The DIP switches are used for the setting of default values of certain parameters. Firmware reads the general purpose switches, which sets the default values accordingly. Table 123: DIP switch settings for NT5D97AD
Card ENB/DSB mounted on the S1 face plate Ring Ground DPNSS MSDL TX Mode LBO Setting S16 S8 S9 S9 S2 S3 S4 S5 Receiver Interface General Purpose S6 S12 S10 S13 S14 S15 S11 S7 Trunks 0 and 1 Port 0 Port 1 Trunk 0 Trunk 1

Refer to DIP switch locations in Figure 82: Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD on page 276. The following parameters are set by DIP switches. The boldface font shows the factory set-up.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

275

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Figure 82: Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD

Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AD

Trunk 0 switches
Switch S12 gives the MPU information about its environment.

276

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Table 124: General purpose switches for NT5D97AD

Switch S12_1 S12_2 S12_3 S12_4 Description Impedance level Spare Spare Unit mode S9/S15 Switch Setting OFF - 120 ohm ON - 75 ohm X X OFF - Unit operates in the DTI2 mode ON - Unit operates in the PRI2 mode

Switch S2 selects the Transmission mode. Table 125: TX mode switches for NT5D97AD
TX mode E1 Not used OFF ON S2

Switch S3, S4, and S5 select LBO function. Table 126: LBO switches for NT5D97AD
LBO setting 0dB 7.5dB 15dB OFF ON ON S3 OFF ON OFF S4 OFF OFF ON S5

Switch S6 selects the Receiver interface. Table 127: Receiver interface switches for NT5D97AD
Impedance 75 ohm 120 ohm S6-1 OFF OFF OFF OFF S6-2 ON OFF S6-3 OFF ON S6-4

Trunk 1 switches for NT5D97AD

Table 128: Trunk 1 switches
Switch S7 Function General Purpose...See Table 124: General purpose switches for NT5D97AD on page 277

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

277

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Switch S10 S13, S14 & S15 S11

Function TX Mode...See Table 125: TX mode switches for NT5D97AD on page 277 LBO...See Table 126: LBO switches for NT5D97AD on page 277 RX Impedance...See Table 127: Receiver interface switches for NT5D97AD on page 277

Ring ground switches for NT5D97AD

Switch S16 selects which ring lines connect to ground. When set to ON, the ring line is grounded. Table 129: Ring ground switch for NT5D97AD
Switch S16_1 S16_2 S16_3 S16_4 Trunk 0 Transmit Trunk 0 Receive Trunk 1 Transmit Trunk 1 Receive Line

DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA daughterboard for NT5D97AD

Switch S9 selects the NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA DCH daughter card address. Switch S8 is not used when the NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA daughter card is used. S8_1-10 can be set to OFF position. Table 130: NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA DCH switches for NT5D97AD
Switch number S9_1-4 S9_5-8 S9_9 S9_10 Function DCH daughter card address Set to OFF Set to ON (NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA Mode) Set to ON (NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA Mode)

278

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

MSDL external card

Table 131: Switch settings for MSDL external card
Switch number S9_1-10 S8_1-10 X X Function

Use Table 132: Switch setting for MSDL external card on page 279 to set the card address. Table 132: Switch setting for MSDL external card
Switch Setting DNUM (LD 17) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

279

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Architecture
Clock operation
There are two types of clock operation - tracking mode and free-run mode.

Tracking mode
In tracking mode, the DDP2 loop supplies an external clock reference to a clock controller. Two DDP2 loops can operate in tracking mode, with one defined as the primary reference source for clock synchronization, the other defined as the secondary reference source. The secondary reference acts as a backup to the primary reference. As shown in Figure 83: Clock Controller primary and secondary tracking on page 281, a system with dual CPUs can use two clock controllers (CC-0 and CC-1). One clock controller acts as a backup to the other. The clock controllers should be completely locked to the reference clock.

Free run (non-tracking) mode

The clock synchronization of the can operate in free-run mode if: no loop is defined as the primary or secondary clock reference, the primary and secondary references are disabled, or the primary and secondary references are in local (near end) alarm

280

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

Figure 83: Clock Controller primary and secondary tracking

Reference clock errors

Avaya Communication Server 1000 software checks at intervals of 1 to 15 minutes to see if a clock controller or reference-clock error has occurred. (The interval of this check can be configured in LD 73). In tracking mode, at any one time, there is one active clock controller which is tracking on one reference clock. If a clock controller error is detected, the system switches to the backup clock controller, without affecting which reference clock is being tracked. A reference-clock error occurs when there is a problem with the clock driver or with the reference clock at the far end. If the clock controller detects a reference-clock error, the reference clocks are switched.

Automatic clock recovery

A command for automatic clock recovery can be selected in LD 60 with the command EREF.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

281

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

A DDP2 loop is disabled when it enters a local-alarm condition. If the local alarm is cleared, the loop is enabled automatically. When the loop is enabled, clock tracking is restored in the following conditions: If the loop is assigned as the primary reference clock but the clock controller is tracking on the secondary reference or in free-run mode, it is restored to tracking on primary. If the loop is assigned as the secondary reference clock but the clock controller is in freerun mode, it is restored to tracking on secondary. If the clock check indicates the switch is in free-run mode: - Tracking is restored to the primary reference clock if defined. - If the primary reference is disabled or in local alarm, tracking is restored to the secondary reference clock if defined. Note: If the system is put into free-run mode by the craftsperson, it resumes tracking on a reference clock unless the clock-switching option is disabled (LD 60, command MREF), or the reference clock is "undefined" in the database.

Automatic clock switching

If the EREF command is selected in LD 60, tracking on the primary or secondary reference clock is automatically switched in the following manner: If software is unable to track on the assigned primary reference clock, it switches to the secondary reference clock and sends appropriate DTC maintenance messages. If software is unable to track on the assigned secondary reference clock, it switches to free run.

Clock configurations
Clock Controllers can be used in a single or a dual CPU system. A single CPU system has one Clock Controller card. This card can receive reference clocks from two sources referred to as the primary and secondary sources. These two sources can originate from a PRI2, DTI2, etc. PRI2 cards such as the NT8D72BA are capable of supplying two references of the same clock source. These are known as Ref1 (available at J1) and Ref2 (available at J2) on the NT8D72BA. The NT5D97 card is capable of supplying two references from each clock source, for example, four references in total. NT5D97 can supply Clk0 and Clk1 from Unit 0 and Clk0 and Clk1 from Unit 1. Either Unit 0 or Unit 1 can originate primary source, as shown in Figure 84: Clock Controller - Option 1 on page 284 through Figure 87: Clock Controller - Option 4 on page 287.

282

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

There is one Clock Controller cable required for the DDP2 card, which is available in four sizes; this is the NTCG03AA/AB/AC/AD. Refer to Reference clock cables on page 265 for more information. Table 133: Clock Controller options - summary on page 283 summarizes the clocking options. Table 134: Clock Controller options - description on page 283 explains the options in more detail. Table 133: Clock Controller options - summary
CC Option Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Single Dual Dual Dual CPU Type Notes Ref from P0 on Clk0 Ref from P1 on Clk0 Ref from P0 on Clk0 Ref from P0 on Clk1 Ref from P1 on Clk0 Ref from P1 on Clk1 Ref from P0 on Clk0 Ref from P0 on Clk1 Ref from P1 on Clk0 Ref from P1 on Clk1

Table 134: Clock Controller options - description

Clock Option Option 1 Notes This option provides a single CPU system with 2 clock sources derived from the 2 ports of the DDP2. Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 0. Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 1. Refer to Figure 84: Clock Controller - Option 1 on page 284. This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references of a clock source derived from port 0 of the DDP2. Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Unit 0. Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Unit 0. Refer to Figure 85: Clock Controller - Option 2 on page 285. This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references of a clock source derived from port 1 of the DDP2. Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Unit 1. Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Unit 1. Refer to Figure 86: Clock Controller - Option 3 on page 286. This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references from each clock source derived from the DDP2. Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Unit 0. Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Unit 0. Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Unit 1.

Option 2

Option 3

Option 4

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

283

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Clock Option

Notes Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Unit 1. Refer to Figure 87: Clock Controller - Option 4 on page 287.

Figure 84: Clock Controller - Option 1

Operation
The following discussion describes possible scenarios when replacing a digital trunk NT8D72BA PRI2 card or QPC536E DTI2 card or NTCK43 Dual PRI card configuration with a NT5D97 DDP2 card configuration.

284

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Figure 85: Clock Controller - Option 2

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

285

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Figure 86: Clock Controller - Option 3

286

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Figure 87: Clock Controller - Option 4

Case 1 The two ports of a QPC414 network card are connected to two digital trunks. In this case, the QPC414 and the two digital trunks are replaced by a single DDP2 card, which is plugged into the network shelf in the QPC414 slot. Case 2 One port of the QPC414 card is connected to a digital trunk, and the second is connected to a peripheral buffer. Both cards are in network loop location. In this case, the QPC414 should not be removed. The digital trunk is removed and the DDP2 card is plugged into one of the two empty slots. Case 3 The network shelf is full, one port of a QPC414 network card is connected to a digital trunk, and the second is connected to a peripheral buffer. This arrangement is repeated for another QPC414. The digital trunks are located in a shelf that provides only power. In this case, the peripheral buffers must be reassigned, so that each pair of buffers uses both ports of the same QPC414 card. The other QPC414 card can then be replaced by the NT5D97 DDP2. Caution: The static discharge bracelet located inside the cabinet must be worn before handling circuit cards. Failure to wear the bracelet can result in damage to the circuit cards.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

287

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Installing the NT5D97

1. Determine the cabinet and shelf location where the NT5D97 is to be installed. The NT5D97 can be installed in any card slot in the Network bus. 2. Unpack and inspect the NT5D97 and cables. 3. If a DDCH is installed, refer to the section Removing the NT5D97 on page 288. 4. Set the option switches on the NT5D97 card before installation. Refer to NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings on page 270. The ENB/DIS (enable/disable faceplate switch) must be OFF (DIS) when installing the NT5D97, otherwise a system initialize can occur. The ENB/DIS on the NT5D97 corresponds to the faceplate switch on the QPC414 Network card. 5. Install NT5D97 card in the assigned shelf and slot. 6. Set the ENB/DIS faceplate switch to ON. If the DDCH is installed, the DDCH LED should flash three times. 7. If required, install the I/O adapters in the I/O panel. 8. Run and connect the NT5D97 cables Caution: Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller and NT5D97 card must NOT be routed through the center of the cabinet past the power harness. Instead they should be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves. 9. If required, install connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted cross-connect terminal. 10. If required, designate connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted crossconnect terminal. 11. If required, install a Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE). or Line Terminating Unit (LTU). 12. Add related office data into switch memory. 13. Enable faceplate switch S1. This is the "Loop Enable" switch. The faceplate LEDs should go on for 4 seconds then go off and the OOS, DIS and ACT LEDs should go on again and stay on. IF DDCH is installed, the DCH LED should flash 3 times. 14. Run the PRI/DTI Verification Test. 15. Run the PRI status check.

Removing the NT5D97

1. Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the NT5D97 card to be removed. 2. Disable Network Loop using LD 60. The command is DISL "loop number."

288

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

The associated DCHI might need to be disabled first. The faceplate switch ENB/ DIS should not be disabled until both PRI2/DTI2 loops are disabled first. 3. If the NT5D97 card is being completely removed, not replaced, remove data from memory. 4. Remove cross connections at MDF to wall-mounted cross-connect terminal. 5. Tag and disconnect cables from card. 6. Rearrange Clock Controller cables if required. Caution: Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller and DDP2 card must NOT be routed through the center of the cabinet past the power harness. Instead, they should be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves. 7. Remove the DDP2 card only if both loops are disabled. If the other circuit of a DDP2 card is in use, DO NOT remove the card. The faceplate switch ENB/DIS must be in the OFF (DIS) position before the card is removed, otherwise the system initializes. 8. Pack and store the NT5D97 card and circuit card.

Configuring the NT5D97

After the NT5D97 DDP2 is installed, configure the system using the same procedures as the standard NT8D72BA PRI2. Consider the following when configuring the NT5D97 DDP2 card: The Avaya CS 1000 software allows four ports to be defined for the NT6D80 MSDL. The DDCH (NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA) card has only two ports, 0 and 1; therefore, ports 2 and 3 must not be defined when using the NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA. Port 0 of the NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA can only be defined to work with Loop 0 of the NT5D97 DDP2 card, and Port 1 of the NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA can only be defined to work with Loop 1 of the NT5D97. This relationship must be reflected when configuring a new DCH in LD 17 (in response to the DCHL prompt, enter either 0 or 1 when specifying the loop number used by the DCH). You cannot define one of the DDP2 loops for the NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA DDCH, and the other loop for the NT6D11AF/NT5K75AA/NT5K35AA DCH card or the NT6D80 MSDL. When configuring the NT5D97 DDP2 in DTI2 outgoing dial pulse mode, a Digit Outpulsing patch is required.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

289

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Testability and diagnostics

The DDP2 card supports testing and maintenance functions through the following procedures: Self-test upon power up or reset Signalling test performed in the LD 30 Loopback tests, self tests, and continuity tests performed by LD 60 and LD 45 The D-Channel (DCH, MSDL, DDCH) maintenance is supported by LD 96. Note: The MSDL self-test is not applicable to the NTBK51AA/NTBK51CA D-Channel daughterboard.

290

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 14: NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 291 Applications on page 292

Introduction
The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card provides an interface for up to 16 analog (500/2500type) telephones equipped with either ground button recall switches, high-voltage Message Waiting lamps, or low-voltage Message Waiting LEDs. You can install this card in any IPE slot. Note: Up to four NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card are supported in each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card performs several functions, including: flexible transmission ground button operation low-voltage Message Waiting option card self-ID for auto-configuration

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

291

NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card

Applications
The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card can be used for the following applications: NT5K02AA high-voltage Message Waiting analog line card typically used in Australia NT5K02DA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in France NT5K02EA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Germany NT5K02FA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card with 600 termination (A/D 4 dB, D/A1 dB) NT5K02GA same as NT5K02FA with a different loss plan (A/D 4 dB, D/A 3 dB) NT5K02HA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Belgium NT5K02JA low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Denmark NT5K02KA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Netherlands NT5K02LA and NT5K02LB analog line card typically used in New Zealand NT5K02MA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Norway NT5K02NA ground button, low-voltage message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Sweden NT5K02PA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Switzerland NT5K02QA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in the United Kingdom

292

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 15: NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 293 MFC signaling on page 293 MFE signaling on page 295 Sender and receiver mode on page 296 Physical specifications on page 298

Introduction
The XMFC/MFE (Extended Multi-frequency Compelled/Multi-frequency sender-receiver) card is used to set up calls between two trunks. Connections may be between a PBX and a Central Office or between two PBXs. When connection is established, the XMFC/MFE card sends and receives pairs of frequencies and then drops out of the call. The XMFC/MFE card can operate in systems using either A-law or -law companding by changing the setting in software. You can install this card in any IPE slot.

MFC signaling
The MFC feature allows the system to use the CCITT MFC R2 or L1 signaling protocols.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

293

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card

Signaling levels
MFC signaling uses pairs of frequencies to represent digits, and is divided into two levels: Level 1: used when a call is first established and may be used to send the dialed digits. Level 2: used after Level 1 signaling is completed and may contain such information as the status, capabilities, or classifications of both calling parties.

Forward and backward signals

When one NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card sends a pair of frequencies to a receiving XMFC/MFE card (forward signaling), the receiving XMFC/MFE card must respond by sending a different set of frequencies back to the originating XMFC/MFE card (backward signaling). In other words, the receiving card is always "compelled" to respond to the originating card. In summary, the signaling works as follows: The first XMFC/MFE card sends a forward signal to the second card. The second card hears the forward signal and replies with a backward signal. The first card hears the backward signal and "turns off" its forward signal. The second card hears the forward signal being removed and removes its backward signal. The first XMFC/MFE can either send a second signal or drop out of the call. MFC signaling involves two or more levels of forward signals and two or more levels of backward signals. Separate sets of frequencies are used for forward and backward signals: Forward signals. Level I forward signals are dialed address digits that identify the called party. Subsequent levels of forward signals describe the category (Class of Service) of the calling party, and may include the calling party status and identity. Backward signals. Level I backward signals (designated "A") respond to Level I forward signals. Subsequent levels of backward signals (B, C, and so on) describe the status of the called party. Table 135: MFC Frequency values on page 294 lists the frequency values used for forward and backward signals. Table 135: MFC Frequency values
Digit 1 2 Forward direction DOD-Tx, DID- backward direction DOD-Rx, DIDRx Tx 1380 Hz + 1500 Hz 1380 Hz + 1620 Hz 1140 Hz + 1020 Hz 1140 Hz + 900 Hz

294

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

MFE signaling

Digit 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Forward direction DOD-Tx, DID- backward direction DOD-Rx, DIDRx Tx 1500 Hz + 1620 Hz 1380 Hz + 1740 Hz 1500 Hz + 1740 Hz 1620 Hz + 1740 Hz 1380 Hz + 1860 Hz 1500 Hz + 1860 Hz 1620 Hz + 1860 Hz 1740 Hz + 1860 Hz 1380 Hz + 1980 Hz 1500 Hz + 1980 Hz 1620 Hz + 1980 Hz 1740 Hz + 1980 Hz 1860 Hz + 1980 Hz 1020 Hz + 900 Hz 1140 Hz + 780 Hz 1020 Hz + 780 Hz 900 Hz + 780 Hz 1140 Hz + 660 Hz 1020 Hz + 660 Hz 900 Hz + 660 Hz 780 Hz + 660 Hz 1140 Hz + 540 Hz 1020 Hz + 540 Hz 900 Hz + 540 Hz 780 Hz + 540 Hz 660 Hz + 540 Hz

The exact meaning of each MFC signal number (1-15) within each level can be programmed separately for each trunk route using MFC. This programming can be done by the customer and allows users to suit the needs of each MFC-equipped trunk route. Each MFC-equipped trunk route is associated with a data block that contains the MFC signal functions supported for that route.

MFE signaling
The NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card can be programmed for MFE signaling which is used mainly in France. MFE is much the same as MFC except it has its own set of forward and backward signals. Table 136: MFE Frequency values on page 295 lists the forward and backward frequencies for MFE. The one backward signal for MFE is referred to as the "control" frequency. Table 136: MFE Frequency values
Digit 1 2 3 Forward direction OG-Tx, IC-Rx 700 Hz + 900 Hz 700 Hz + 1100 Hz 900 Hz + 1100 Hz Backward direction 1900 Hz (Control Frequency)

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

295

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card

Digit 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Forward direction OG-Tx, IC-Rx 700 Hz + 1300 Hz 900 Hz + 1300 Hz 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz 700 Hz + 1500 Hz 900 Hz + 1500 Hz 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz

Backward direction

Sender and receiver mode

The XMFC/MFE circuit card provides the interface between the system's CPU and the trunk circuit which uses MFC or MFE signaling. The XMFC/MFE circuit card transmits and receives forward and backward signals simultaneously on two channels. Each channel is programmed like a peripheral circuit card unit, with its own sending and receiving timeslots in the network.

Receive mode
When in receive mode, the XMFC/MFE card is linked to the trunk card by a PCM speech path over the network cards. MFC signals coming in over the trunks are relayed to the XMFC/ MFE card as though they were speech. The XMFC/MFC card interprets each tone pair and sends the information to the CPU through the CPU bus.

Send mode
When in send mode, the CPU sends data to the XMFC/MFE card through the CPU bus. The CPU tells the XMFC/MFE card which tone pairs to send and the XMFC/MFE card generates the required tones and sends them to the trunk over the PCM network speech path. The trunk transmits the tones to the far end.

XMFC sender and receiver specifications

Table 137: XMFC sender specifications on page 297 and Table 138: XMFC receiver specifications on page 297 provide the operating requirements for the NT5K21 XMFC/MFE

296

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Sender and receiver mode

card. These specifications conform to CCITT R2 recommendations: Q.441, Q.442, Q.451, Q. 454, and Q.455. Table 137: XMFC sender specifications
Forward frequencies in DOD mode: Backward frequencies in DOD mode: Frequency tolerance: Power level at each frequency: Level difference between frequencies: Harmonic Distortion and Intermodulation Time interval between start of 2 tones: Time interval between stop of 2 tones: 1380, 1500, 1620, 1740, 1860, 1980 Hz 1140, 1020, 900, 780, 660, 540 Hz +/- 0.5 Hz from nominal Selectable: 1 of 16 levels < 0.5 dB 37 dB below level of 1 signaling frequency 125 usec. 125 usec.

Table 138: XMFC receiver specifications

Input sensitivity: accepted: rejected: Bandwidth twist: accepted: rejected: Amplitude twist: accepted: Norwegian requirement rejected: Operating time: Release time: Tone Interrupt no release: Longest Input tone ignored: Noise rejection: difference of 5 dB between adjacent frequencies difference of 7 dB between non-adjacent frequencies difference of 12 dB (for unloaded CO trunks) difference of 20 dB between any two frequencies < 32 msec. < 32 msec. < 8 msec. Receiver on, while tone missing < 8 msec. Combination of valid frequencies S/N > 18 dB No degradation, in band white noise S/N > 13 dB Out-of-band disturbances for CCITT fc +/- 10 Hz fc +/- 60 Hz -5 to -31.5 dBmONew CCITT spec. -38.5 dBmOBlue Book

XMFE sender and receiver specifications

Table 139: XMFE sender specifications on page 298 and Table 140: XMFE receiver specifications on page 298 provide the operating requirements for the XMFC/MFE card when it

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

297

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card

is configured as an XMFE card. These requirements conform to French Socotel specifications ST/PAA/CLC/CER/692. Table 139: XMFE sender specifications
Forward frequencies in OG mode: Forward frequencies in IC mode: Frequency tolerance: Power level at each frequency: Level tolerance: Harmonic Distortion and Intermodulation: Time interval between start of 2 tones: Time interval between stop of 2 tones: 700, 900, 1100, 1300, 1500 Hz 1900 Hz +/- 0.25% from nominal Selectable: 1 of 16 levels +/- 1.0 dB 35 dB below level of 1 signaling frequency 125 usec. 125 usec.

Table 140: XMFE receiver specifications

Input sensitivity: accepted: rejected: rejected: rejected: Bandwidth: accepted: Amplitude twist: accepted: Operating time: Release time: Tone Interrupt causing no release: Longest Input tone ignored: Longest control tone ignored: Noise rejection: -4 dBm to -35 dBm +/- 10 Hz of nominal -42 dBm signals -4 dBm outside 500-1900 Hz -40 dBm single/multiple sine wave in 500-1900 Hz fc +/- 20 Hz difference of 9 dB between frequency pair < 64 msec. < 64 msec. < 8 msec. Receiver on, tone missing < 8 msec. Combination of valid frequencies < 15 msec. Control Frequency only S/N > 18 dB No degradation in-band white noise

Physical specifications
Table 141: Physical specifications on page 298 outlines the physical specifications of the NT5K21 XMFC/MFE circuit card. Table 141: Physical specifications
Dimensions Height: 12.5 in. (320 mm)

298

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical specifications

Depth: 10.0 in. (255 mm) Thickness: 7/8 in. (22.25 mm) Faceplate LED Cabinet Location Power requirements Environmental considerations Lit when the circuit card is disabled Must be placed in the main cabinet (Slots 1-10) 1.1 Amps typical Meets the environment of the system

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

299

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card

300

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 16: NT6D70 SILC Line card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 301 Physical description on page 302 Functional description on page 303

Introduction
The S/T Interface Line card (SILC) (NT6D70AA 48V North America, NT6D70 BA 40 V International) provides eight S/T four-wire full-duplex interfaces to connect ISDN BRIcompatible terminals over Digital Subscriber Loops (DSLs) to the System. A description of the ISDN BRI feature is contained in Avaya ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration (NN43001-318). You can install this card in any IPE slot. Note: A maximum of four NT6D70 SILC cards are supported in a Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. The S/T Interface Line cards (SILC) (NT6D70AA-48V North America, NT6D70 BA -40 V International) provide eight S/T four-wire full duplex interfaces that are used to connect ISDN BRI compatible terminals over DSLs to the Meridian 1 system. A description of the ISDN BRI feature is contained in Avaya ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Maintenance (NN43001-718). The S/T Interface Line card (SILC) (NT6D70AA 48V North America, NT6D70 BA 40 V International) provides eight S/T four-wire full-duplex interfaces to connect ISDN BRIcompatible terminals over Digital Subscriber Loops (DSLs) to the Avaya Communication Server 1000 system. An NT6D70 SILC card can reside in a Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expansion. A maximum of four NT6D70 SILC cards are supported in a Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

301

NT6D70 SILC Line card

ISDN BRI
ISDN BRI consists of two 64Kb/s Bearer (B) channels and one 16Kb/s Data (D) channel. The BRI interface is referred to as a 2B+D connection as well as a Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL). B-channels transmit user voice and data information at high speeds, while D-channels are packet-switched links that carry call set-up, signaling and other user data across the network. One single DSL can carry two simultaneous voice or data conversations to the same or to different locations. In either case, the D-channel can also be used for packet communication to a third location simultaneously. The two B-channels can also be combined to transmit data at uncompressed speeds of up to 128 Kbps. A wide range of devices and telephone numbers can be associated with a single DSL to offer equipment flexibility and reduce line, wiring, and installation costs. Avaya Communication Server (Avaya CS) 1000 Release 1.1 and later supports ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI). ISDN BRI consists of two 64Kb/s Bearer (B) channels and one 16Kb/s Data (D) channel. The BRI interface is referred to as a 2B+D connection as well as a Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL). B-channels transmit user voice and data information at high speeds, while D-channels are packet-switched links that carry call set-up, signaling and other user data across the network. One single DSL can carry two simultaneous voice or data conversations to the same or to different locations. In either case, the D-channel can also be used for packet communications to a third location simultaneously. The two B-channels can also be combined to transmit data at uncompressed speeds of up to 128 Kb/s. A wide range of devices and telephone numbers can be associated with a single DSL to offer equipment flexibility and reduce line, wiring, and installation costs.

Physical description
The NT6D70 SILC card is a standard-size circuit card. Its faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status. The NT6D70 SILC is a standard size circuit card designed to be inserted in peripheral equipment slots in the Meridian 1. Its faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status. The NT6D70 SILC Card is a standard-size circuit card designed to be inserted in slots in the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. Its faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status.

302

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Power consumption
Power consumption is +5 V at 800 mA and 48 V at 480 mA. Power consumption is +5 V at 800 mA and -48V at 480 mA. Power consumption is +5 V at 800 mA and 48 V at 480 mA.

Foreign and surge voltage protections

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on the SILC card. When the SILC card is used in TIE trunk applications in which the cabling is exposed to outside plant conditions, an NT1 module certified for such applications must be used. Check local regulations before providing such service. In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on the SILC card. When the SILC card is used in TIE trunk applications in which the cabling is exposed to outside plant conditions, an NT1 module certified for such applications must be used. Check local regulations before providing such service. In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on the SILC card. When the SILC card is used in TIE trunk applications in which the cabling is exposed to outside plant conditions, an NT1 module certified for such applications must be used. Check local regulations before providing such service.

Functional description
The NT6D70 SILC card provides eight S/T four-wire full-duplex polarity-sensitive interfaces to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over Digital Subscriber Loops (DSL) to the system. Each S/T interface provides two B-channels and one D-channel and supports a maximum of eight physical connections that can link up to 20 logical terminals on one DSL. A logical terminal is any terminal that can communicate with the system over a DSL. It can be directly connected to the DSL through its own physical termination or be indirectly connected through a common physical termination. The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the DSL wire gauge; however, it should not exceed 1 km (3,280 ft). The SILC interface uses a four-conductor cable that provides a differential Transmit and Receive pair for each DSL. The SILC has options to provide a total of two watts of power on the Transmit or Receive leads, or no power at all. When this power is supplied from the S/T interface, the terminal devices must not draw more than the two watts of power. Any power requirements beyond this limit must be locally powered.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

303

NT6D70 SILC Line card

Other functions of the SILC are: support point-to-point and multi-point DSL terminal connections execute instructions received from the MISP to configure and control the S/T interfaces provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and system bus format multiplex 4 D-channels onto one timeslot perform activation and deactivation of DSLs provide loopback control of DSLs provide a reference clock to the clock controller The SILC provides eight S/T four wire full duplex polarity sensitive interfaces that are used to connect ISDN BRI compatible terminals over Digital Subscriber Loops (DSL) to the Meridian 1. Each S/T interface provides two B-channels and one D-channel and supports a maximum of eight physical connections that can link up to 20 logical terminals on one DSL. A logical terminal is any terminal that can communicate with the Meridian 1 over a DSL. It may be directly connected to the DSL through its own physical termination or be indirectly connected through a common physical termination. The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the DSL wire gauge, however, it should not exceed 1 km (3,280 ft). The SILC interface uses a 4 conductor cable that provides a differential Transmit and Receive pair for each DSL. The SILC has options to provide a total of 2 Watts of power on the Transmit or Receive leads, or no power at all. When this power is supplied from the S/T interface, the terminal devices must not draw more than the 2 Watts of power. Any power requirements beyond this limit must be locally powered. Other functions of the SILC are: support point-to-point and multi-point DSL terminal connections execute instructions received from the MISP to configure and control the S/T interfaces provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and Meridian 1 system bus format multiplexes 4 D-channels onto one timeslot perform activation and deactivation of DSLs provide loopback control of DSLs provide a reference clock to the clock controller The NT6D70 SILC Card provides eight S/T four-wire full-duplex polarity-sensitive interfaces to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over DSL to the CS 1000. Each S/T interface provides two B-channels and one D-channel and supports a maximum of eight physical connections that can link up to 20 logical terminals on one DSL. A logical terminal is any terminal that can communicate with the CS 1000over a DSL. It can be directly connected to the DSL through its own physical termination or be indirectly connected through a common physical termination.

304

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the DSL wire gauge; however, it should not exceed 1 km (3,280 ft). The SILC interface uses a four-conductor cable that provides a differential Transmit and Receive pair for each DSL. The SILC has options to provide a total of two watts of power on the Transmit or Receive leads, or no power at all. When this power is supplied from the S/T interface, the terminal devices must not draw more than the two watts of power. Any power requirements beyond this limit must be locally powered. Other functions of the SILC include the following: support point-to-point and multi-point DSL terminal connections execute instructions received from the MISP to configure and control the S/T interfaces provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and CS 1000 system bus format multiplex 4 D-channels onto one timeslot perform activation and deactivation of DSLs provide loopback control of DSLs provide a reference clock to the clock controller

Micro Controller Unit (MCU)

The Micro Controller Unit (MCU) coordinates and controls the operation of the SILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, and a serial control interface. The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM which contains the SILC operating program and 8 K of RAM used to store interface selection and other functions connected with call activities. The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU. The serial control interface is an IPE bus used by the MPU to communicate with the S/T transceivers. The MCU coordinates and controls the operation of the SILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, and a serial control interface. The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM which contains the SILC operating program and 8 K of RAM used to store interface selection and other functions connected with call activities. The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU. The serial control interface is an IPE bus used by the MPU to communicate with the S/T transceivers. The Micro Controller Unit (MCU) coordinates and controls the operation of the SILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, and a serial control interface. The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM which contains the SILC operating program and 8 K of RAM used to store interface selection and other functions connected with call activities.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

305

NT6D70 SILC Line card

The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU. The serial control interface is an Peripheral Equipment (PE) bus used by the MPU to communicate with the S/T transceivers.

IPE interface logic

The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, an IPE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock controller and converter. The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find the card slot where the SILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports the configuration data and firmware version of the card. The IPE bus interface connects an IPE bus loop that has 32 channels operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit. The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface communicates signaling and card identification information from the system CPU to the SILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance instructions. The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This sets transmission levels for the B-channel voice calls. The clock recovery circuit recovers the clock from the local exchange. The clock converter converts the 5.12-MHz clock from the IPE backplane into a 2.56 MHz clock to time the IPE bus channels and an 8 kHz clock to provide PCM framing bits. The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, an IPE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock controller and converter. The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find in which card slot the SILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card, and reports the configuration data and firmware version of the card. The IPE bus interface connects one IPE bus loop that has 32 channels operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit. The maintenance signaling channel (MSC) interface is used to communicate signaling and card identification information from the Meridian 1 CPU to the SILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance instructions. The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This sets transmission levels for the B-channel circuit-switched voice calls. The clock recovery circuit recovers the clock from the local exchange.

306

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

The clock converter converts the 5.12 MHz clock from the IPE backplane into a 2.56 MHz clock to time the IPE bus channels and an 8 kHz clock to provide PCM framing bits. The PE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, a PE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock controller and converter. The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find the card slot where the SILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports the configuration data and firmware version of the card. The PE bus interface connects one PE bus loop that has 32 channels operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit. The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface communicates signaling and card identification information from the CS 1000CPU to the SILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance instructions. The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This sets transmission levels for the B-channel voice calls. The clock recovery circuit recovers the clock from the local exchange. The clock converter converts the 5.12-MHz clock from the PE backplane into a 2.56-MHz clock to time the PE bus channels and an 8-kHz clock to provide PCM framing bits.

S/T interface logic

The S/T interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit and the DSL power source. This interface supports DSLs of different distances and different numbers and types of terminal. The transceiver circuits provide four-wire full-duplex S/T bus interface. This bus supports multiple physical terminations on one DSL where each physical termination supports multiple logical B-channel and D-channel ISDN BRI terminals. Idle circuit-switched B-channels can be allocated for voice or data transmission to terminals making calls on a DSL. When those terminals become idle, the channels are automatically made available to other terminals making calls on the same DSL. The power on the DSL comes from the SILC, which accepts 48 V from the IPE backplane and provides two watts of power to physical terminations on each DSL. It provides -48 V for ANSI-compliant ISDN BRI terminals and 40 V for CCITT (such as ETSI NET-3, INS NET-64) compliant terminals. The total power used by the terminals on each DSL must not exceed two watts.The S/T interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit and the DSL power source. This interface supports DSLs of different distances and different number and types of terminals. The transceiver circuits provide four-wire full duplex S/T bus interface. This bus supports multiple physical terminations on one DSL where each physical termination supports multiple logical B-channel and D-channel ISDN BRI terminals. Idle circuit-switched B-channels can be allocated for voice or data transmission to terminals making calls on a DSL. When those

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

307

NT6D70 SILC Line card

terminals become idle, the channels are automatically made available to other terminals making calls on the same DSL. The power on the DSL comes from the SILC, which accepts -48 V from the IPE backplane and provides 2 watts of power to physical terminations on each DSL. It provides -48 V for ANSI compliant ISDN BRI terminals and -40 V for CCITT (such as ETSI NET-3, INS NET-64) compliant terminals. The total power used by the terminals on each DSL must not exceed 2 watts. The S/T interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit and the DSL power source. This interface supports DSLs of different distances and different numbers and types of terminal. The transceiver circuits provide four-wire full-duplex S/T bus interface. This bus supports multiple physical terminations on one DSL where each physical termination supports multiple logical B-channel and D-channel ISDN BRI terminals. Idle circuit-switched B-channels can be allocated for voice or data transmission to terminals making calls on a DSL. When those terminals become idle, the channels are automatically made available to other terminals making calls on the same DSL. The power on the DSL comes from the SILC, which accepts 48 V from the PE backplane and provides 2 watts of power to physical terminations on each DSL. It provides -48 V for ANSIcompliant ISDN BRI terminals and 40 V for CCITT (such as ETSI NET-3, INS NET-64) compliant terminals. The total power used by the terminals on each DSL must not exceed 2 watts.

308

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 17: NT6D71 UILC line card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 309 Physical description on page 310 Functional description on page 310

Introduction
The NT6D71 U Interface Line card (UILC) supports the OSI physical layer (Layer 1) protocol. The UILC is an ANSI-defined standard interface. The UILC provides eight two-wire fullduplex (not polarity sensitive) U interfaces to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over Digital Subscriber Loops (DSL) to the Avaya Communication Server 1000E (Avaya CS 1000E), Avaya CS 1000M, and Meridian 1. A description of the ISDN BRI feature is contained in Avaya ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration (NN43001-318). You can install this card in any IPE slot. Note: A maximum of four UILCs are supported in an Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. The NT6D71 U Interface Line Card (UILC) supports the OSI physical layer (Layer 1) protocol. The UILC is an ANSI defined standard interface. The UILC provides eight two-wire full duplex (not polarity sensitive) U interfaces that are used to connect ISDN BRI compatible terminals over DSLs to the Meridian 1. A description of the ISDN BRI feature is contained in Avaya ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Maintenance (NN43001-718). The NT6D71 U Interface Line Card (UILC) supports the OSI physical layer (Layer 1) protocol. The UILC is an ANSI-defined standard interface. The UILC provides eight two-wire fullduplex (not polarity sensitive) U interfaces to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over Digital Subscriber Loops (DSL) to the CS 1000. For more information about ISDN BRI, see ISDN BRI on page 302.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

309

NT6D71 UILC line card

A UILC can reside in a Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expansion. A maximum of four UILCs are supported in a Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion.

Physical description
The NT6D71 UILC is a standard-size circuit card. Its faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status. The NT6D71 UILC is a standard size circuit card designed to be inserted in peripheral equipment slots in the Meridian 1. Its faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status. The NT6D71 UILC is a standard-size circuit card that inserts in slots in the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. The NT6D71 UILC can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the Media Gateway Expansion. The faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status.

Power consumption
Power consumption is +5 V at 1900 mA. Power consumption is +5 V at 1900 mA. Power consumption is +5 V at 1900 mA.

Functional description
Each U interface provides two B-channels and one D-channel and supports one physical termination. This termination can be to a Network Termination (NT1) or directly to a single U interface terminal. Usually, this physical termination is to an NT1, which provides an S/T interface that supports up to eight physical terminal connections. The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the DSL wire gauge; however, it should not exceed 5.5 km (3.3 mi). The main functions of the UILC are as follows: provide eight ISDN U interfaces conforming to ANSI standards support point-to-point DSL terminal connections provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and system bus format multiplex four D-channels onto one timeslot perform activation and deactivation of DSLs provide loopback control of DSLs

310

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Each U interface provides two B-channels and one D-Channel and supports one physical termination. This termination may be to a Network Termination (NT1) or directly to a single U interface terminal. Normally this physical termination is to an NT1, which provides an S/T interface that allows up to 8 physical terminals to be connected. The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the DSL wire gauge, however, it should not exceed 5.5 km (3.3 mi). The main functions of the UILC are: provide eight ISDN U interfaces conforming to ANSI standards support point-to-point DSL terminal connections provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and Meridian 1 bus format multiplex 4 D-channels onto one timeslot perform activation and deactivation of DSLs provide loopback control of DSLs Each U interface provides two B-channels and one D-channel and supports one physical termination. This termination can be to a Network Termination (NT1) or directly to a single U interface terminal. Usually, this physical termination is to an NT1, which provides an S/T interface that supports up to eight physical terminal connections. The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the DSL wire gauge; however, it should not exceed 5.5 km (3.3 mi). The main functions of the UILC are as follows: provide eight ISDN U interfaces conforming to ANSI standards support point-to-point DSL terminal connections provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and CS 1000 bus format multiplex four D-channels onto one timeslot perform activation and deactivation of DSLs provide loopback control of DSLs

Micro Controller Unit (MCU)

The Micro Controller Unit (MCU) coordinates and controls the operation of the UILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, a serial control interface, a maintenance signaling channel, and a digital pad. The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM that contains the UILC operating program and 8 K of RAM that stores interface selection and other functions connected with call activities. The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU. The serial control interface is an IPE bus that communicates with the U transceivers.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

311

NT6D71 UILC line card

The MCU coordinates and controls the operation of the UILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, a serial control interface, a maintenance signaling channel, and a digital pad. The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM that contains the UILC operating program and 8 K of RAM used to store interface selection and other functions connected with call activities. The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU. The serial control interface is an IPE bus used to communicate with the U transceivers. The Micro Controller Unit (MCU) coordinates and controls the operation of the UILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, a serial control interface, a maintenance signaling channel, and a digital pad. The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM that contains the UILC operating program and 8 K of RAM that stores interface selection and other functions connected with call activities. The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU. The serial control interface is a PE bus that communicates with U transceivers.

IPE interface logic

The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, a IPE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock converter. The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find in which card slot the UILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports the configuration data and firmware version of the card. The IPE bus interface connects one IPE bus loop that has 32 channels operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit. The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface communicates signaling and card identification information from the system CPU to the UILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance instructions. The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This sets transmission levels for Bchannel voice calls. The clock converter converts the 5.12 MHz clock from the IPE backplane into a 2.56 MHz clock to time the IPE bus channels and an 8-kHz clock to provide PCM framing bits. The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, an IPE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock converter. The CardLAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find in which card slot the UILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card, and reports the configuration data and firmware version of the card.

312

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

The IPE bus interface connects one IPE bus loop that has 32 channels operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit. The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface is used to communicate signaling and card identification information from the Meridian 1 CPU to the UILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance instructions. The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This sets transmission levels for the B-channel circuit-switched voice calls. The clock converter converts the 5.12 MHz clock from the IPE backplane into a 2.56 MHz clock to time the IPE bus channels and an 8 kHz clock to provide PCM framing bits. The PE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, a PE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock converter. The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find in which card slot the UILC is installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports the configuration data and firmware version of the card. The PE bus interface connects one PE bus loop that has 32 channels operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit. The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface communicates signaling and card identification information from the CS 1000CPU to the UILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance instructions. The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This sets transmission levels for Bchannel voice calls. The clock converter converts the 5.12-MHz clock from the PE backplane into a 2.56-MHz clock to time the PE bus channels and an 8-kHz clock to provide PCM framing bits.

U interface logic
The U interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit. It provides loop termination and highvoltage protection to eliminate the external hazards on the DSL. The U interface supports voice and data terminals, D-channel packet data terminals, and NT1s. A UILC has eight transceivers to support eight DSLs for point-to-point operation.The U interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit. It provides loop termination and high voltage protection to eliminate the external hazards on the DSL. The U interface supports circuit-switched voice and data terminals, D-channel packet data terminals, and NT1s. A UILC has eight transceivers to support eight DSLs for point-to-point operation. The U interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit. It provides loop termination and highvoltage protection to eliminate the external hazards on the DSL. The U interface supports voice

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

313

NT6D71 UILC line card

and data terminals, D-channel packet data terminals, and NT1s. A UILC has eight transceivers to support eight DSLs for point-to-point operation.

314

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 18: NT6D80 MSDL card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 315 Physical description on page 316 Functional description on page 317 Engineering guidelines on page 322 Installation on page 327 Maintenance on page 333 Replacing MSDL cards on page 339 Symptoms and actions on page 339 System disabled actions on page 340

Introduction
This document describes the Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card. This card provides multiple interface types with four full-duplex serial I/O ports that can be independently configured for various operations. Peripheral software downloaded to the MSDL controls functionality for each port. Synchronous operation is permitted on all MSDL ports. Port 0 can be configured as an asynchronous Serial Data Interface (SDI). An MSDL card occupies one network card slot in Large SystemNetworks, or Core Network modules and communicates with the CPU over the CPU bus and with I/O equipment over its serial ports. It can coexist with other cards that support the same functions. For example, cards supported with the MSDL (NT6D80) are QPC757 (DCHI), QPC841 (SDI), and NTSD12 (DDP). Though the MSDL is designed to coexist with other cards, the number of ports supported by a system equipped with MSDL cards is potentially four times greater than when using other cards. Because of each MSDL has four ports, representing a single device, a system can support as many as 16 MSDL cards with a maximum of 64 ports.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

315

NT6D80 MSDL card

Physical description
The MSDL card is a standard size circuit card that occupies one network card slot and plugs into the module's backplane connector to interface with the CPU bus and to connect to the module's power supply. On the faceplate, the MSDL provides five connectors, four to connect to I/O operations and one to connect to a monitor device that monitors MSDL functions. Figure 88: MSDL component layout on page 316 illustrates major MSDL components and their locations on the printed circuit card. Note: Switches S9 and S10 are configured to reflect the device number set in LD 17 (DNUM). S10 designates tens, and S9 designates ones. For example, set device number 14 with S10 at 1 and S9 at 4.

Figure 88: MSDL component layout

316

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Functional description
Figure 89: MSDL block diagram on page 318 illustrates the MSDL functional block diagram. The MSDL card is divided into four major functional blocks: CPU bus interface Micro Processing Unit (MPU) Memory Serial interface Two processing units serve as the foundation for the MSDL operation: the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and the MSDL Micro Processing Unit (MPU). Avaya Communication Server 1000 software, MSDL firmware, and peripheral software control MSDL parameters. Peripheral software downloaded to the MSDL controls MSDL operations. The MSDL card's firmware and software do the following: communicate with the CPU to report operation status receive downloaded peripheral software and configuration parameters coordinate data flow in conjunction with the CPU manage data link layer and network layer signaling that controls operations connection and disconnection control operation initialization and addressing send control messages to the operations

CPU bus interface

The CPU bus transmits packetized information between the CPU and the MSDL MPU. This interface has a 16-bit data bus, an 18-bit address bus, and interrupt and read/write control lines. Shared Random Access Memory (RAM) between the CPU and the MSDL MPU provides an exchange medium. Both the CPU and the MSDL MPU can access this memory.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

317

NT6D80 MSDL card

Figure 89: MSDL block diagram

Micro Processing Unit (MPU)

The MPU, which is based on a Motorola 68020 processor, coordinates and controls data transfer and port addressing, communicating via the CPU bus with the system. Prioritized interrupts tell the MPU which tasks to perform.

318

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Memory
The MSDL card contains two megabytes of Random Access Memory (RAM) for storing downloaded peripheral software that controls MSDL port operations. The MSDL card includes the shared RAM that is used as a communication interface buffer between the CPU and the MPU. The MSDL Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (Flash EPROM) also includes the peripheral software to protect it against a power failure or reset. MSDL can copy peripheral software directly from the Flash EPROM after power up or reset instead of requesting that the system CPU download it. The MSDL card also contains Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM) for firmware that includes the bootstrap code.

Serial interface
The MSDL card provides one monitor port and four programmable serial ports that can be configured for the following various interfaces and combinations of interfaces: synchronous ports 03 asynchronous port 0 DCE or DTE equipment emulation mode RS-232 or RS-422 interface Transmission mode All four ports of the MSDL can be configured for synchronous data transmission by software. Port 0 can be configured for asynchronous data transmission for CRT, TTY, and printer applications only. Equipment emulation mode Configure an MSDL port to emulate DCE or DTE by setting switches on the card and downloading LD 17 interface parameters. I/O port electrical interface Each MSDL port can be configured as an RS-232 or RS-422 interface by setting the switches on the MSDL card. MSDL ports use Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) II 26-pin female connectors. Figure 90: MSDL functional block diagram on page 321 shows the system architecture using the MSDL as an operational platform. It illustrates operation routing from the CPU, through the MSDL, to the I/O equipment. It also shows an example in which DCH operation peripheral software in the MSDL controls functions on ports 2 and 3.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

319

NT6D80 MSDL card

MSDL operations
The system automatically performs self-test and data flow activities. Unless a permanent problem exists and the system cannot recover, there is no visual indication that these operations are taking place. The system controls the MSDL card with software that it has downloaded. The MSDL and the system enable the MSDL by following these steps: 1. When the MSDL card is placed in the system, the card starts a self-test. 2. When the MSDL passes the test, it indicates its state and L/W version to the system. The CPU checks to see if downloading is required. 3. After downloading the peripheral software, the system enables the MSDL. 4. MSDL applications (DCH, AML, SDI) may be brought up if appropriately configured.

320

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Figure 90: MSDL functional block diagram

Data flow
The MSDL transmit interface, managed by the MSDL handler, sends data from the system to the MSDL. This interface receives packetized data from the system and stores it in the transmit buffer on the MSDL. The transmit buffer transports these messages to the appropriate buffers, from which the messages travel over the MSDL port to the I/O equipment. The MSDL uses the MSDL receive interface to communicate with the system. The MSDL card receives packetized data from the I/O equipment over the MSDL ports. This data is processed by the MSDL handler and sent to the appropriate function.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

321

NT6D80 MSDL card

The flow control mechanism provides an orderly exchange of transmit and receive messages for each operation. Each operation has a number of outstanding messages stored in buffers waiting to be sent to their destinations. As long as the number of messages does not exceed the threshold specified, the messages queue in the buffer in a first-in-first-out process. If the outstanding number of messages for an operation reaches the threshold, the flow control mechanism informs the sender to wait until the number of messages is below the threshold before sending the next message. If buffer space is not available, the request to send a message to the buffer is rejected and a NO BUFFER fault indication is sent.

Engineering guidelines
Available network card slots
The number of available network slots depends on the system option, the system size, and the number of available network slots in each module for the selected system option. Some of these network card slots are normally occupied by Network cards, Superloop Network cards, Conference/TDS, and others, leaving a limited number of unused slots for MSDL and other cards.

Card mix
A system that exclusively uses MSDL cards can support up to 16 such cards, providing 64 ports. These ports can be used to run various synchronous and asynchronous operations simultaneously. The system also supports a mix of interface cards (MSDL, DCHI, and ESDI for example). However, using multiple card types reduce the number of cards and ports available.

Address decoding
The MSDL card decodes the full address information received from the system. This provides 128 unique addresses. Because of MSDL ports communicate with the CPU using a single card address, the system can support 16 MSDL cards providing 64 ports. The MSDL card addresses are set using decimal switches located on the card. These switches can select 100 unique card addresses from 0 to 99.

322

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Engineering guidelines

An address conflict may occur between the MSDL and other cards because of truncated address decoding by the other cards. For example, if a DCHI port is set to address 5, it's companion port is set to address 4, which means that none of the MSDL cards can have hexadecimal address numbers 05H, 15H, 75H, nor addresses 04H, 14H, 74H. To avoid this conflicts system software limits the MSDL card addresses from 0 to 15.

Port specifications
The MSDL card provides four programmable serial ports configured with software as well as with switches for the following modes of operation: Transmission mode: Configure an MSDL port for synchronous or asynchronous data transmission using LD 17. Synchronous transmission uses an external clock signal fed into the MSDL. Table 142: Synchronous interface specifications on page 323 lists the synchronous interface specifications and the means of configuring the interface parameters. Table 142: Synchronous interface specifications
Parameter Data bits Data rate Transmission Clock Interface Specification In packets-Transparent N/A Configured

1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 48, 56, Software and 64 kbps Full Duplex Internal/External RS-232 RS-422 N/A Software Software Switches Switches

Mode

DTE or DCE

Asynchronous transmission uses an internal clock to generate the appropriate baud rate for serial controllers. Table 143: Asynchronous interface specifications on page 323 lists asynchronous interface specifications and the means of configuring interface parameters. Table 143: Asynchronous interface specifications
Parameter Data bit, parity Specification 7 bits even, odd or no parity, or 8 bits no parity Configured Software

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

323

NT6D80 MSDL card

Parameter Data rate Stop bits Transmission Interface

Specification 0.3, 0.6, (1.2), 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, and 38.4 kbps 1 (default), 1.5, 2 Full Duplex RS-232 RS-422

Configured Software Software N/A Software Switches Switches

Mode

DTE or DCE

Emulation mode: Each port can be configured to emulate a DCE port or a DTE port by setting the appropriate switches on the MSDL. For details on how to set the switches, refer to Installation on page 327 of this document. DCE is a master or controlling device that is usually the source of information to the DTE and may provide the clock in a synchronous transmission linking a DCE to a DTE. DTE is a peripheral or terminal device that can transmit and receive information to and from a DCE and normally provides a user interface to the system or to a DCE device. Interface: Each MSDL port can be configured as an RS-232 or an RS-422 interface by setting the appropriate switches on the card. Table 144: RS-232 interface pin assignments on page 324 lists the RS-232 interface specifications for EIA and CCITT standard circuits. It shows the connector pin number, the associated signal name, and the supported circuit type. It also indicates whether the signal originates at the DTE or the DCE device. This interface uses a 26-pin (SCSI II) female connector for both RS-232 and RS-422 circuits. Table 144: RS-232 interface pin assignments
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Signal name Frame Ground (FG) Transmit Data (TX) Receive Data (RX) Request to Send (RTS) Clear to Send (CTS) Data Set Ready (DSR) Signal Ground (SG) EIA circuit AA BA BB CA CB CC AB CCITT circuit 102 103 104 105 106 107 102 X X X DTE X X DCE

324

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Engineering guidelines

Pin 8 15 17 18 20 21 23 24 25

Signal name Carrier Detect (CD) Serial Clock Transmit (SCT) Serial Clock Receive (SCR) Local Loopback (LL) Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Remote Loopback (RL) Data Rate Selector (DRS) External Transmit Clock (ETC) Test Mode (TM)

EIA circuit CF DB DD LL CD RL CH/CI DA TM

CCITT circuit 109 114 115 141 108.2 140 111/112 113 142

DTE

DCE X X X

X X X X X X

Table 145: RS-422 interface pin assignments on page 325 lists RS-422 interface specifications for EIA circuits. It shows the connector pin number, the associated signal name, and the supported circuit type. It also indicates whether the signal originates at the DTE or DCE device. Table 145: RS-422 interface pin assignments
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 23 24 Signal Name Frame Ground (FG) Transmit Data (TXa) Receive Data (RXa) Request to Send (RTS) Clear to Send (CTS) Signal Ground (SG) Receive Ready (RR) Receive Signal Timing (RST) Transmit Data (TXb) Transmit Signal Timing (TSTb) Transmit Signal Timing (TSTa) Receive Data (RXb) Receive Signal Timing (RSTa) Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Terminal Timing (TTa) Terminal Timing (TTb) EIA Circuit AA BAa BBa CA CB AB CF DDb BAb DBb DBa BBb DDa CD DAb DAa X X X X X X X X X X X X DTE X X DCE

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

325

NT6D80 MSDL card

Implementation guidelines
The following are guidelines for engineering and managing MSDL cards: An MSDL can be installed in any empty network card slot. A maximum of eight MSDL cards can be installed in a fully occupied module because of the module's power supply limitations. The Clock Controller card should not be installed in a module if more than 10 MSDL ports are configured as active RS-232 (rather than RS-422) ports in that module because of the module's power supply limitations. The MSDL address must not overlap other card addresses. Before downloading a peripheral software module for an MSDL, disable all MSDL ports on cards running the same type of operation.

Environmental and power requirements

The MSDL card conforms to the same requirements as other interface cards. The temperature, humidity, and altitude for system equipment, including the MSDL, should not exceed the specifications shown in Table 146: Environmental requirements on page 326. Table 146: Environmental requirements
Condition Operating Temperature Relative Humidity Altitude Storage Temperature Relative Humidity 50 to 70 C (58 to 158 F) 5% to 95% non-condensing 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F) 5% to 95% non-condensing 3,048 meters (10,000 feet) maximum Environmental specifications

A stable ambient operating temperature of approximately 22C (72F) is recommended. The temperature differential in the room should not exceed 3C (5F). The internal power supply in each module provides DC power for the MSDL and other cards. Power consumption and heat dissipation for the MSDL is listed in Table 147: MSDL power consumption on page 327.

326

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation

Table 147: MSDL power consumption

Voltage (VAC) +5 +12 12 Current (Amps) 3.20 0.10 0.10 Power (Watts) 16.00 1.20 1.20 Heat (BTUs) 55.36 4.15 4.15

Installation
Device number
Before installing MSDL cards, determine which of the devices in the system are available. If all 16 devices are assigned, remove one or more installed cards to replace them with MSDL cards. Make sure that the device number assigned to the MSDL card is not used by an installed card, even if one is not configured. Use the MSDL planning form, at the end of this section, to assist in configuring MSDL cards.

MSDL interfaces
Before installing the cards, select the switch settings that apply to your system, the interfaces, and card addresses. Table 148: MSDL interface switch settings on page 327 shows the switch positions for the DCE and the DTE interface configurations on the MSDL card. Figure 91: MSDL switch setting example on page 328 shows the MSDL and the location of configuration switches on the MSDL. The switch settings shown in this figure are an example of the different types of interfaces available. Your system settings may differ. Table 148: MSDL interface switch settings
DCE switch DTE switch OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON RS-232 RS-422 DTE RS-422 DCE N/A Interface Comment DTE/DCE is software configured All switches configured All switches configured Not allowed

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

327

NT6D80 MSDL card

Figure 91: MSDL switch setting example

Installing the MSDL card

Installing the MSDL card
To install an MSDL card follow these steps: 1. Set Device Number S10 and S9. 2. Hold the MSDL by its card-locking devices. Squeeze the tabs to unlatch the card locking devices and lift the locking device out and away from the card. Be careful not to touch connector pins, conductor traces, or integrated circuits. Static discharge may damage integrated circuits. 3. Insert the MSDL card into the selected card slot of the module following the card guides in the module. 4. Slide the MSDL into the module until it engages the backplane connector.

328

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation

5. Push the MSDL firmly into the connector using the locking devices as levers by pushing them toward the card's front panel. 6. Push the card-locking devices firmly against the front panel of the card so they latch to the front lip in the module and to the post on the card. 7. Observe the red LED on the MSDL faceplate. If it turns on, flashes three times, and stays on continuously, the MSDL is operating correctly but is not yet enabled. Go to step 7. 8. If the LED turns on and stays on continuously without flashing three times, the card may be defective. Go to steps 8 and 9. 9. Connect the cables. The installation is complete. 10. Unplug the MSDL card and reinsert it. If the red LED still does not flash three times, leave the card installed for approximately 10 minutes to allow the card to be initialized. 11. After 10 minutes unplug the card and reinsert it. If the card still does not flash three times, the card is defective and must be replaced.

Cable requirements
The MSDL card includes four high-density 26-pin (SCSI II) female connectors for ports and one 8-pin miniature DIN connector for the monitor port. See Figure 92: MSDL cabling on page 330 for a diagram of the MSDL cabling configuration. A D-Channel on the MSDL requires a connection from the appropriate MSDL port connector to the DCH connector located on the ISDN PRI trunk faceplate. Other operations on the MSDL are connected to external devices such as terminals and modems. To complete one of these connections, connect the appropriate I/O connector on the MSDL to a connector on the I/O panel at the back of the module where the MSDL is installed. If a terminal is connected to the regular SDI port, use 8 bit, VT100 terminal emulation. If the terminal is connected to the SDI/STA port with line mode editing, use 8 bit, VT220 terminal emulation. To determine the type and number of cables required to connect to MSDL cards, you must determine the type of operation you wish to run and select the appropriate cable to connect the operation to the MSDL port. Different types of cables, as described in Table 149: Cable types on page 330, connect the MSDL port to a device: NTND26, used to connect the MSDL port to the ISDN PRI trunk connector J5, for DCH QCAD328, when cabling between two different columns, that is, I/O to I/O (when MSDL is in one row and QPC720 is in another row) NTND98AA (J5 of QPC720 to I/O panel) NTND27, used to connect the MSDL port to the I/O panel at the rear of the module, for other interface functions

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

329

NT6D80 MSDL card

Figure 92: MSDL cabling

Note: The choices of cable to use with an MSDL card depend on what type of modem is connected. For example, the NTND27 cable is used when the modem has a DB25 connection. If the modem is v.35, a customized or external vendor cable is required. Table 149: Cable types
Function DCH Cable type NTND26AA NTND26AB NTND26AC NTND26AD NTND27AB Cable length 6 feet 18 feet 35 feet 50 feet 6 feet

AML, ISL, SDI

330

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Installation

Cable installation
When the MSDL card is installed, connect the cables to the equipment required for the selected operation.

PRI trunk connections

D-channel operations require connections between the MSDL and a PRI trunk card. Refer to Avaya ISDN Primary Rate Interface: Features (NN43001-569) for a complete discussion of PRI and D-channels.

Cabling the MSDL card to the PRI card

The following steps explain the procedure for cable connection: 1. Identify the MSDL and the PRI cards to be linked. 2. Select the appropriate length cable for the distance between the MSDL and the PRI card. 3. Plug the 26-pin SCSI II male connector end of a cable into the appropriate MSDL port. 4. Route the cable through cable troughs, if necessary, to the appropriate PRI card. 5. Plug the DB15 male connector end of the cable into the J5 DB15 female connector on the PRI card. 6. Secure the connections in place with their fasteners. 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each connection.

I/O panel connections

Operations aside from PRI require cable connections to the I/O panel.

Cabling the MSDL card to the I/O panel

The following steps explain the procedure for cable connection: 1. Identify the MSDL card and the I/O panel connector to be linked. 2. Using the NTND27AB cable, plug the 26-pin SCSI II male connector end of a cable into the appropriate MSDL port. 3. Route the cable to the rear of the module next to the I/O panel. 4. Plug the DB25 male connector end of a cable into a DB25 female connector at the back of the I/O panel. 5. Secure cable connectors in place with their fasteners. 6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each connection.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

331

NT6D80 MSDL card

MSDL planning form

Use the following planning form to help sort and store information concerning the MSDL cards in your system as shown in the sample. Record switch settings for unequipped ports as well as for equipped ports.
MSDL data form Device no. Date installed Ports Operation 0 1 2 3 Sample Device no. 13 Date installed 2/1/93 Ports 0 1 2 3 Operation TTY DCH AML Spare Shelf 3 Last update 5/5/93 Logical no. 13 25 3 Switch setting RS-232 DCE RS-422 DTE RS-232 DCE RS-232 Cable no. NTND27A B NTND26A B NTND27A B Operation information maint TTY 9600 baud PRI 27 to hdqtrs Slot 5 Card ID NT6D80AA-110046 Boot Code version 004 Shelf Last update Logical no. Switch setting Cable no. Operation information Slot Card ID Boot Code version

332

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Maintenance

Maintenance
Routine maintenance consists of enabling and disabling MSDL cards and downloading new versions of peripheral software. These activities are performed by an authorized person such as a system administrator. Troubleshooting the MSDL consists of determining problem types, isolating problem sources, and solving the problem. A craftsperson normally performs these activities. Avaya CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 systems have self-diagnostic indicators as well as software and hardware tools. These diagnostic facilities simplify MSDL troubleshooting and reduce mean-time-to-repair (MTTR). For complete information concerning system maintenance, refer to Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Maintenance (NN43021-700). For complete information regarding software maintenance programs, refer to Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611).

MSDL states
MSDL states are controlled manually by maintenance programs or automatically by the system. Figure 93: MSDL states on page 334 shows MSDL states and the transitions among them. These are the three states the MSDL may be in: Manually disabled Enabled System disabled The following sections describe the relationships between these states.

Manually disabled
In this state, the MSDL is not active. The system does not attempt to communicate or attempt any automatic maintenance on the MSDL.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

333

NT6D80 MSDL card

Figure 93: MSDL states

A newly configured MSDL automatically enters the manually disabled state. An operating MSDL can be manually disabled by issuing the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 (step 1 in Figure 93: MSDL states on page 334). Entering the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 moves the card to manually disabled status and stops all system communication with the card (step 5 in Figure 93: MSDL states on page 334).

Manually enabled
When the card is manually disabled, re-enable it with the ENL MSDL x command in LD 37 (step 2 in Figure 93: MSDL states on page 334).

System disabled
When the system disables the MSDL card (step 4 in Figure 93: MSDL states on page 334), it continues to communicate and attempt maintenance procedures on the card. To stop all system communication with the card, enter DIS MSDL x to disable it (step 5 in Figure 93: MSDL states on page 334). Otherwise, the system periodically tries to enable the card, attempting recovery during the midnight routines (step 3 in Figure 93: MSDL states on page 334).

334

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Maintenance

The system disables the MSDL if the card: exhibits an overload condition does not respond to system messages is removed resets itself encounters a fatal error is frequently system disabled and recovered When an MSDL is system disabled, a substate indicates why the MSDL is disabled. The substates are: Not Responding The system cannot communicate with the MSDL. Self-Testing The MSDL card is performing self-tests. Self-tests Passed The MSDL card successfully completed self-tests and the system is determining if download is required or the software downloading is complete. Self-tests Failed The MSDL card self-tests failed. Shared RAM Tests Failed The system failed to read/write to the MSDL shared RAM. Overload The system received an excessive number of messages within a specified time period. Reset Threshold The system detected more than four resets within 10 minutes. Fatal Error The MSDL card encountered a fatal condition from which it cannot recover. Recovery Threshold The MSDL card was successfully enabled by the MSDL autorecovery function five times within 30 minutes. Each time it was system disabled because of a problem encountered during operation. Bootloading The MSDL base software is in the process of being downloaded to the MSDL. Detailed information about system disabled substates and the action required for each substate appears in Symptoms and actions on page 339.

Maintaining the MSDL

The system controls automatic MSDL maintenance functions. A craftsperson or system administrator performs manual maintenance by changing the card status, downloading new versions of peripheral software, or invoking self-tests.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

335

NT6D80 MSDL card

System controlled maintenance

Built-in diagnostic functions constantly monitor and analyze the system and individual card, performing the following operations: using autorecovery to automatically correct a temporarily faulty condition and maintain the system and its components printing information and error messages to indicate abnormal conditions that caused a temporary or an unrecoverable error During system initialization, the system examines the MSDL base code. If the base code needs to be downloaded, the CPU resets the MSDL card and starts downloading immediately following initialization. At the same time, all other MSDL peripheral software programs are checked and, if they do not correspond to the system disk versions, the correct ones are downloaded to the card. If manual intervention is required during initialization or operation, information and error messages appear on the console or the system TTY to suggest the appropriate action. For a complete discussion of the information and error messages, refer to Avaya Software Input/ Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611). Detailed information of system disabled substates and the action required for each substate is found at the end of this document.

Manually controlled maintenance

Use manual maintenance commands found in the following programs to enable, disable, reset, get the status of, and perform self-tests on the MSDL card: Input/Output Diagnostic Program LD 37 Program LD 42 Link Diagnostic Program LD 48 PRI D-channel Diagnostic Program LD 96 For a complete discussion of these programs, refer to Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611). Note: Enter commands after the dot (.) prompt. Note: The "x" in the commands below represents the DNUM value of the card number.

336

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Maintenance

Enabling the MSDL

Enter ENL MSDL x to enable the MSDL manually. If the MSDL base code has not been previously downloaded or if the card version is different from the one on the system disk, the software is downloaded and the card is enabled. To force software download and enable the card, enter ENL MSDL x FDL. This command forces the download of the MSDL base code and the configured peripheral software even if it is already resident on the card. The card is then enabled. To enable a disabled MSDL and its ports, enter ENL MSDL x ALL. This command downloads all peripheral software (if required) and enables any configured ports on the card. This command can be issued to enable some manually disabled ports on an already enabled MSDL.

Disabling the MSDL

To disable an MSDL card, enter DIS MSDL x. To disable the MSDL and all its ports, enter DIS MSDL x ALL.

Resetting the MSDL

To reset an MSDL and initiate a limited self-test, the MSDL must be in a manually disabled state. To perform the reset, enter RST MSDL x.

Displaying MSDL status

To display the status of all MSDL cards, enter STAT MSDL. To display the status of a specific MSDL, enter STAT MSDL x. The status of the MSDL, its ports, and the operation of each port appears. The command STAT MSDL x FULL displays all information about an MSDL (card ID, bootload firmware version, base code version, base code state, operation state, date of base code activation) as well as the version, state, and activation date for each card operation.

Self-testing the MSDL

To perform extensive self-testing of an MSDL, enter SLFT MSDL x. This test can be activated if the card is in the manually disabled state. If the test passes, the system outputs the card ID and a pass message. If it fails, the system displays a message indicating which test failed.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

337

NT6D80 MSDL card

Manually isolating and correcting faults

Problems are due to configuration errors that occur during installation or hardware faults resulting from component failure during operation. See Symptoms and actions on page 339 for more information about problem symptoms and required responses. Isolate MSDL faults using the diagnostic tools described below: 1. Observe and list the problem symptoms; for example, a typical symptom is a permanently lit LED. 2. If the LED flashes three times but the card does not enable, verify that the card is installed in a proper slot. 3. Check that the address is unique; no other card in the system can be physically set to the same device number as the MSDL. 4. If installation is correct and no address conflict exists, refer to Newly installed MSDL cards on page 338 or Previously operating MSDL cards on page 338. 5. If the MSDL still does not operate correctly, contact your Avaya representative.

Newly installed MSDL cards

Problems that occur during MSDL card installation usually result from improperly installed, incorrectly addressed, or faulty cards. If the LED on a newly installed MSDL does not flash three times after insertion, wait 5 minutes, then remove and reinsert. If the LED still does not flash three times, the card is faulty.

Previously operating MSDL cards

Problems that occur during normal operation usually result from faulty cards. Follow these steps to evaluate the situation: 1. Use the STAT MSDL x command to check MSDL card status. See Displaying MSDL status on page 337. 2. If the card is manually disabled, try to enable it using ENL MSDL x. Enabling the MSDL on page 337 If this fails, perform self-testing as described in step 4. 3. If the card is disabled by the system, disable it manually with DIS MSDL x. See Disabling the MSDL on page 337 4. Invoke self-testing with the SLFT MSDL x command. Self-testing the MSDL on page 337 If self-tests fail, replace the card. If self-tests pass, try to enable the card again, as in step 2. If the card does not enable, note the message output to the TTY and follow the recommended action.

338

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Replacing MSDL cards

Replacing MSDL cards

After completing MSDL troubleshooting you may determine that one or more MSDL cards are defective. Remove the defective cards and replace them with new ones.

Replacing an MSDL card

An MSDL card can be removed from and inserted into a system module without turning off the power to the module. Follow these steps: 1. Log in on the maintenance terminal. 2. At the > prompt, type LD 37 (you can also use LD 42, LD 48, or LD 96) and press Enter. 3. Type DIS MSDL x ALL and press Enter to disable the MSDL and any active operations running on one or more of its ports. The MSDL card is now disabled. 4. Disconnect the cables from the MSDL faceplate connectors. 5. Unlatch the card-locking devices, and remove the card from the module. 6. Set the switches on the replacement card to match those on the defective card. 7. Insert the replacement card into the same card slot. 8. Observe the red LED on the front panel during self-test. If it flashes three times and stays on, it has passed the test. Go to step 8. 9. If it does not flash three times and then stay on, it has failed the test. Pull the MSDL partially out of the module and reinsert it firmly into the module. If the problem persists, troubleshoot or replace the MSDL. 10. Connect the cables to the MSDL faceplate connectors. 11. At the . prompt in the LD 37 program, type ENL MSDL x ALL and press Enter to enable the MSDL and its operations. If the red LED on the MSDL turns off, the MSDL is functioning correctly. Because of self-tests were not invoked, no result message appears. 12. Tag the defective card(s) with a description of the problem and return them to your Avaya representative.

Symptoms and actions

Explained here are some of the symptoms, diagnoses, and actions required to resolve MSDL card problems. Contact your Avaya representative for further assistance. These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the card to an enabled state following installation or operational problems.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

339

NT6D80 MSDL card

Symptom: Diagnosis: Action: OR Diagnosis: Action:

The LED on the MSDL card is steadily lit. The MSDL card is disabled or faulty. Refer to Trunk cards on page 56.

Peripheral software download failed because of MSDL card or system disk failure. If only one MSDL card has its LED lit, replace it.

Symptom: Diagnosis: Action: OR Diagnosis: Action:

Autorecovery is activated every 30 seconds to enable the MSDL. MSDL300 messages appear on the console or TTY. The MSDL card is system disabled because of an incorrect address. Verify the switch settings.

The MSDL card is system disabled because of peripheral software or configuration errors. Refer to System disabled actions on page 340.

System disabled actions

These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the card to an enabled state following system disabling. SYSTEM DISABLEDNOT RESPONDING: Table 150:
Cause: The MSDL card is not installed or is unable to respond to the messages from the system. Action: Check the MSDL messages on the console and take the action recommended. Refer to Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611). Verify that the address switches on the MSDL are set correctly. Verify that the card is properly installed in the shelf for at least 5 minutes.

340

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

System disabled actions

If the problem persists, manually disable the card by entering the DIS MSDL x. Follow the steps described in Previously operating MSDL cards on page 338.

SYSTEM DISABLEDSELF-TESTING: Table 151:

Cause: The MSDL card has reset itself or the system has reset the card to perform self-tests. Self-tests are in progress. Action: Wait until self-tests are completed. Under some circumstances, the self-tests may take up to 6 minutes to complete. Take the action described in the appropriate section below ("SYSTEM DISABLED SELF-TESTS PASSED" or "SYSTEM DISABLEDSELF-TESTS FAILED").

SYSTEM DISABLEDSELF-TESTS PASSED Table 152:

Cause: The MSDL card passed self-tests. The system automatically downloads the MSDL base code, if needed, and attempts to enable the card using autorecovery. If a diagnostic program (overlay) is active, the downloading of the MSDL base code occurs later. Action: Wait to see if the system enables the card immediately. If the MSDL is enabled, no further action is necessary. If the MSDL base code download fails five times, autorecovery stops. The following appears in response to the STAT MSDL x command;
MSDL 10: SYS DSBLSELFTEST PASSED NO RECOVERY UNTIL MIDNIGHT: FAILED BASE DNLD 5 TIMES SDI 10 DIS PORT 0 AML 11 DIS PORT 1 DCH 12 DIS PORT 2 AML 13 DIS PORT 3

Error messages usually indicate the problem in this case. See Maintaining the MSDL on page 335.

SYSTEM DISABLEDSELF-TESTS FAILED:

Cause: The card did not pass self-tests. These tests repeat five times. If unsuccessful, autorecovery stops until midnight unless you take action.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

341

NT6D80 MSDL card

Action: Allow the system to repeat the self-tests. If self-tests fail repeatedly, disable the card using the DIS MSDL x command and replace the card.

SYSTEM DISABLEDSRAM TESTS FAILED: Table 153:

Cause: After self-tests pass, the system attempts to perform read/write tests on the shared RAM on the MSDL and detects a fault. The shared RAM test repeats five times, and, if unsuccessful, autorecovery does not resume until midnight unless you take action. Action: Allow the system to repeat the self-tests. If self-tests fail repeatedly, disable the card using the DIS MSDL x command and replace the card.

SYSTEM DISABLEDOVERLOAD: Table 154:

Cause: The system received an excessive number of messages from the MSDL card in a certain time. If the card invokes overload four times in 30 minutes, it exceeds the recovery threshold as described in "SYSTEM DISABLEDRECOVERY THRESHOLD." The system resets the card, invokes self-tests, and attempts to enable the card. The problem may be due to excessive traffic on one or more MSDL ports. Traffic load redistribution may resolve this condition. Action: Check the traffic report, which may indicate that one or more MSDL ports are handling excessive traffic. By disabling each port, identify the port with too much traffic and allow the remaining ports to operate normally. Refer to Maintaining the MSDL on page 335. If the problem persists, place the card in the manually disabled state by the DIS MSDL x command and follow the steps in Previously operating MSDL cards on page 338.

SYSTEM DISABLEDRESET THRESHOLD: Table 155:

Cause:

342

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

System disabled actions

The system detected more than four MSDL card resets within 10 minutes. The system attempts to enable the card again at midnight unless you intervene. Action: Place the card in the manually disabled state with the DIS MSDL x command and follow the steps in Previously operating MSDL cards on page 338.

SYSTEM DISABLEDFATAL ERROR:

Cause: The MSDL card encountered a fatal error and cannot recover. The exact reason for the fatal error is shown in the MSDL300 error message output to the console of TTY when the error occurred. Action: Check the MSDL300 message to find out the reason. Alternatively, display the status of the MSDL, which also indicates the cause of the problem, with the STAT MSDL x command and check the information to find the cause of the fatal error. Allow the system to attempt recovery. If this fails, either by reaching a threshold or detecting self-test failure, place the MSDL in the manually disabled state with the DIS MSDL x command and follow the steps in Previously operating MSDL cards on page 338.

SYSTEM DISABLEDRECOVERY THRESHOLD: Table 156:

Cause: The system attempted autorecovery of the MSDL card more than five times within 30 minutes and each time the card was disabled again. The system attempts to enable the card again at midnight unless you intervene. Action: Place the MSDL card in a manually disabled state with the DIS MSDL x command and follow the steps in Previously operating MSDL cards on page 338.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

343

NT6D80 MSDL card

344

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 19: NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 345 Physical description on page 346 Functional description on page 347 Electrical specifications on page 355 Connector pin assignments on page 356 Configuration on page 357

Introduction
Important: The NT8D02 Digital Line card is supported in Avaya Communication Server 1000E (Avaya CS 1000E), Avaya CS 1000M, and Meridian 1. The NTDK16 digital line card is supported ONLY in the Chassis system. The Digital Line card is a voice and data communication link between the system and Digital Telephones. It supports voice only or simultaneous voice and data service over a single twisted pair of standard telephone wiring. When a digital telephone is equipped with the data option, an asynchronous or synchronous terminal or personal computer can be connected to the system through the digital telephone. The Digital Line card provides 16 voice and 16 data communication links.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

345

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

NT8D02 Digital Line card

The 32 port NT8D02 Digital Line card is supported in the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. You can install this card in any IPE slot.

NTDK16 Digital Line card

The NTDK16 is a 48 port card supported only in the Chassis system. It is based on the NT8D02 Digital Line card and is functionally equivalent to three NT8D02s, and configured as cards 4, 5, and 6 in the main chassis. It uses A94 Digital Line Interface chips (DLIC) to provide the interface between the Digital sets and the system. The NTDK16 Digital Line card can only be installed in slot 4 of the main chassis which is slotted to prevent accidental insertion of other cards.The Digital Line Card is a voice and data communication link between the system and Meridian Digital Telephones. It supports voice only or simultaneous voice and data service over a single twisted pair of standard telephone wiring. When a digital telephone is equipped with the data option, an asynchronous or synchronous terminal or personal computer can be connected to the system through the digital telephone.

Physical description
The Digital Line card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The NT8D02 is a double-sided PCB, whereas the NTDK16 is 4 layers, but standard thickness. Both cards connect to the backplane through a 120-pin or 160-pin edge connector. The faceplate of the NT8D02 Digital Line card is equipped with a red LED that lights when the card is disabled. See Figure 94: Digital line card - faceplate on page 347. When the card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds as a self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card. Note: The NTDK16AA has one LED. This LED shows the status of Card 4. The NTDK16BA has three LEDs. These LEDs show the status of Cards 4, 5, and 6 configured on the NTDK16.

346

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Figure 94: Digital line card - faceplate

Functional description
NT8D02 Digital Line card
The NT8D02 Digital Line card is equipped with 16 identical units. Each unit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed (TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

347

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

associated data terminal is assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total of 32 addressable ports per card. The digital line card contains a microprocessor that provides the following functions: self-identification self-test control of card operation status report to the controller maintenance diagnostics Figure 95: Digital line card - block diagram on page 349 shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the NT8D02 Digital Line card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages.

348

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Figure 95: Digital line card - block diagram

NTDK16 Digital Line card

The NTDK16 digital line card is equipped with 48 identical units. Each unit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed (TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total of 96 addressable ports per card. Refer to Figure 96: NTDK16 DLC on page 351.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

349

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

The NTDK16 digital line card contains a microprocessor that provides the following functions: self-identification self-test control of card operation status report to the controller maintenance diagnostics The card also provides: Ability to support Digital sets and the Digital Console M2250 Provides a serial link (Card LAN) for status report and maintenance. Supports loop lengths up to 3500 ft. (1.0 km) using 24 AWG wire. Interface between three DS30X loops and 48 TCM lines. Figure 97: Digital line card - block diagram on page 351 shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the digital line card. Each of these functions are described on the following pages.

350

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Figure 96: NTDK16 DLC

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

351

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Figure 97: Digital line card - block diagram

Card interfaces
The digital line card passes voice, data, and signaling over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces are discussed in detail in the section Intelligent Peripheral Equipment on page 35.

352

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Digital line interfaces

The digital line interface contains two Digital Line Interface Circuits (DLIC). Each digital line interface circuit provides eight identical, individually configurable voice and data interfaces to eight digital telephone lines. These lines carry multiplexed PCM voice, data, and signaling information as TCM loops. The purpose of each digital line interface circuit is to de-multiplex data from the DS-30X Tx channel into eight integrated voice and data bitstreams. The circuits then transmit those bitstreams as Bi-Polar Return to Zero, Alternate Mark Inversion (BPRZ-AMI) data to the eight TCM loops. They also perform the opposite action: they receive eight BPRZ-AMI bitstreams from the TCM loops and multiplex them onto the DS-30X Rx channel. The two digital line interface circuits perform the multiplexing and de-multiplexing functions for the 16 digital telephone lines. The digital line interface circuits also contain signaling and control circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the on-card microcontroller to operate the digital line interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the Call Server and return incoming call status information to the Call Server over the DS-30X network loop.

TCM loop interface circuit

Each digital telephone line terminates on the NT8D02 Digital Line card at a TCM loop interface circuit. The circuit provides transformer coupling and foreign voltage protection between the TCM loop and the digital line interface circuit. It also provides battery voltage for the digital telephone. To prevent undesirable side effects from occurring when the TCM loop interface cannot provide the proper signals on the digital phone line, the card microcontroller can remove the 15 V dc power supply from the TCM loop interfaces. This happens when either the microcontroller gets a command from the NT8D01 controller card to shut down the channel, or the digital line card detects a loss of the 1 KHz frame synchronization signal. The 15 V dc power supply signal is removed from all 16 TCM loop interface units at the same time. Each TCM loop interface circuit can service loops up to 3500 ft. in length when using 24gauge wire. They support a maximum ac signal loss of 15.5 dB at 256 KHz and a maximum dc loop resistance of 210 ohms.

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on the digital line card. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the card if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

353

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Microcontroller
The NT8D02 Digital Line card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller controls the following: reporting to the Call Server through the card LAN link: - card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number) - firmware version - self-test status - programmed configuration status receipt and implementation of card configuration: - programming of the digital line interfaces - enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card - programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of line interface unit operation - maintenance diagnostics The microcontroller also controls the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card.

Card LAN interface

Maintenance data is exchanged with the common equipment Call Server over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link.

Sanity timer
The NT8D02 Digital Line card also contains a sanity timer that resets the microcontroller if program control is lost. The microcontroller must service the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly serviced, it times out and causes the microcontroller to be hardware reset.

Circuit power
The +15 V DC input is regulated down to +10 V DC for use by the digital line interface circuits. The 15.0 V DC inputs to the card are used to power the loop interface circuits.

354

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Electrical specifications

Electrical specifications
This section lists the electrical characteristics of the NT8D02 and NTDK16 digital line cards.

Digital line interface specifications

Table 157: NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line card technical summary on page 355 provides a technical summary of the digital line cards. Table 157: NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line card technical summary
Characteristics Units per card Impedance NT8D02 DLC description 16 voice, 16 data 100 Ohm j/b ohm NTDK16BA DLC description 48 voice, 48 data 100 Ohm j/b ohm NTDK16AA DLC description 48 voice, 48 data 100 Ohm j/b ohm

Loop limits

30 m (100 ft) to 915 m 30 m (100 ft) to 915 m 30 m (100 ft) to 915 m (3000 ft) with 24 (3000 ft) with 24 (3000 ft) with 24 AWG PVC cable AWG PVC cable AWG PVC cable (+15 V DC at 80 mA) (15 V DC at 80 mA) (15 V DC at 80 mA) 0 to 1070 m (3500 ft) 0 to 1070 m (3500 ft) 0 to 1070 m (3500 ft) with 24 AWG PVC with 24 AWG PVC with 24 AWG PVC cable (15 V DC at cable (15 V DC at cable (15 V DC at 80 mA) 80 mA) 80 mA)

Line rate

512 kbps 100 ppm + 5 V DC 15 V DC +10 V DC

512 kbps 100 ppm + 5 V DC 15 V DC

512 kbps 100 ppm + 5 V DC 15 V DC +8 V DC

Power supply

Transmitter output voltage: successive "1" bits "0" bits +1.5 0.15 V and -1.5 0.15 V 0 50 mV Not applicable Additional circuitry Not applicable Power Failure Transfer Control Ring Sync.

Power requirements
The digital line card needs +15 V DC over each loop at a maximum current of 80 mA. It requires +15 V, -15 V, and +5 V from the backplane. The line feed interface can supply power to one

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

355

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

loop of varying length up to 1070 m (3500 ft) using 24 AWG wire with a maximum allowable AC signal loss of 15.5 dB at 256 kHz, and a maximum DC loop resistance of 210 ohms; 26 AWG wire is limited to 745 m (2450 ft). Table 158: Digital line card-power required
Voltage 5.0 V dc +15.0 V dc 15.0 V dc 150 mA 1.6 Amp 1.3 Amp Current (max.)

Foreign and surge voltage protections

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on the NT8D02 Digital Line card. The NT8D02 Digital Line card does, however, have protection against accidental shorts to 52 V DC analog lines. When the card is used to service off-premise telephones, primary and secondary Main Distribution Frame (MDF) protection must be installed. Off-premise telephones served by cable pairs routed through the central office, or crossing a public right-of-way, can be subject to a requirement for on-card protection, and MDF protectors may not be acceptable. Check local regulations before providing such service.

Environmental specifications
Table 159: Digital line card - environmental specifications on page 356 shows the environmental specifications of the card. Table 159: Digital line card - environmental specifications
Parameter Operating temperature Operating humidity Storage temperature Specifications 0 to +60C (+32 to +140F), ambient 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) 40 to +70 C (40 to +158 F)

Connector pin assignments

Table 160: NT8D02 Digital Line card - backplane pinouts on page 357 shows the I/O pin designations at the backplane connector, which is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array

356

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

of pins. Normally, these pin positions are cabled to 50-pin connectors at the I/O panel in the rear of each module for connection with 25-pair cables to the MDF. The information in Table 160: NT8D02 Digital Line card - backplane pinouts on page 357 is provided as a reference and diagnostic aid at the backplane, because the cabling arrangement can vary at the I/O panel. See Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for cable pinout information for the I/O panel. Table 160: NT8D02 Digital Line card - backplane pinouts
Backplane Pinout* 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 18A 19A 62A 63A 64A 65A 66A 67A 68A 69A Lead Designations Line 0, Ring Line 1, Ring Line 2, Ring Line 3, Ring Line 4, Ring Line 5, Ring Line 6, Ring Line 7, Ring Line 8, Ring Line 9, Ring Line 10, Ring Line 11, Ring Line 12, Ring Line 13, Ring Line 14, Ring Line 15, Ring Backplane Pinout* 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B 19B 62B 63B 64B 65B 66B 67B 68B 69B Lead Designations Line 0, Tip Line 1, Tip Line 2, Tip Line 3, Tip Line 4, Tip Line 5, Tip Line 6, Tip Line 7, Tip Line 8, Tip Line 9, Tip Line 10, Tip Line 11, Tip Line 12, Tip Line 13, Tip Line 14, Tip Line 15, Tip

*These pinouts apply to both the NT8D37 and NT8D11 backplanes

Configuration
This section outlines the procedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D02 Digital Line card and configuring the system software to properly recognize the card. Figure 98: Digital line card - jumper block and switch locations on page 359 shows where the switches and jumper blocks are located on this board.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

357

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Jumper and switch settings

The NT8D02GA, NT8D02HA, and NT8D02HAE5 Digital Line Cards are based on a different architecture than previous releases and have a jumper (J1) to activate/deactivate the unterminated line detection (ULD) feature. This feature is intended for debugging and should not be enabled except under the direction of Avaya Technical Support. It is recommended to leave the jumper in the default factory installed state.

Software service changes

Voice and data ports are configured using LD 11. See Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 11 service change instructions. Voice and data ports are configured using the Meridian Digital Telephone Administration program LD 11. See Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 11 service change instructions.

358

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

Figure 98: Digital line card - jumper block and switch locations

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

359

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

360

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 20: NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 361 Physical description on page 362 Functional description on page 364 Connector pin assignments on page 371 Configuration on page 373

Introduction
The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is an IPE line card that can be installed in the NT8D37 IPE module. The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card (-Law) provides talk battery and signaling for up to 16 regular 2-wire common battery analog (500/2500-type) telephones and key telephone equipment, with the Message Waiting lamp feature. The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is functionally identical to the NT8D03 Analog Line card, except it can also connect a high-voltage, low-current feed to each line to light the message waiting lamp on telephones equipped with the Message Waiting feature. The analog message waiting line card mounts in any IPE slot. Note: A maximum of four NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line cards for each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion are supported. The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9 and 10 of the Media Gateway Expansion.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

361

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Cards later than vintage NT8D09AK support -Law and A-Law companding, and provide a 2 dB transmission profile change. The transmission change improves performance on long lines, particularly for lines used outside of a single-building environment. The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card supports 56K modem operation. Caution: Damage to Equipment If a modem is connected to a port on the message waiting line card, do not define that port in software (LD 10) as having message waiting capabilities. Otherwise, the modem gets damaged. The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card interfaces to and is compatible with the equipment listed in Table 161: NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card application and compatibility on page 362. Table 161: NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card application and compatibility
Equipment 500-type rotary dial sets (or equivalent): dial speed percent break interdigital time 2500-type Digitone sets (or equivalent): frequency accuracy pulse duration interdigital time speed 1.5% 40 ms 40 ms 12.5 digits/s 8.0 to 12.5 pps 58 to 70% 150 ms Specifications

Physical description
The circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm. by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card circuits connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector. The backplane is cabled to a connector in the bottom of the cabinet which is cabled to the cross-connect terminal (Main Distribution Frame) through 25-pair cables. Station apparatus then connects to the card at the cross-connect terminal. The faceplate of the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is equipped with a red LED which lights when the card is disabled (see Figure 99: Analog message waiting line card faceplate on page 363. At power-up, the LED flashes as the analog line card runs a self-

362

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

test. If the test completes successfully, the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured in software) and the LED goes out.

Figure 99: Analog message waiting line card - faceplate

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

363

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Functional description
The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card contains a microprocessor that provides the following functions: self-identification self-test control of card operation status report to the controller maintenance diagnostics The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card also provides: 600 ohms balanced terminating impedance analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission and reception signals for 16 audio phone lines transmission and reception of Scan and Signaling Device (SSD) signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling channel in A10 format on-hook/off-hook status and switchhook flash detection 20 Hz ringing signal connection and automatic disconnection when the station goes offhook synchronization for connecting and disconnecting the ringing signal to zero crossing of ringing voltage loopback of SSD messages and Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) signals for diagnostic purposes correct initialization of all features at power-up direct reporting of digit dialed (500-type telephones) by collecting dial pulses connection of 150 V DC at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps lamp status detection disabling and enabling of selected units for maintenance Figure 100: Analog message waiting line card - block diagram on page 365 shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the analog message waiting line card. Each of these functions are described in the following sections.

364

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Figure 100: Analog message waiting line card - block diagram

Card interfaces
The analog message waiting line card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces are discussed in Intelligent Peripheral Equipment on page 35.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

365

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Line interface units

The analog message waiting line card contains 16 identical and independently configurable line interface units (also referred to as circuits). Each unit provides 600-ohm impedance matching and a balance network in a signal transformer/analog hybrid circuit. Circuits are also provided in each unit to apply the ringing voltage onto the line synchronized to the ringing current zero crossing. Signal detection circuits monitor on-hook/off-hook status and switchhook flash detection. Four codecs are provided to perform A/D and D/A conversion of line analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals. Each codec supports four line interface units. The following features are common to all units on the card: Transmission and reception of Scan and Signaling Device (SSD) signaling messages over a DS30X signaling channel in A10 format. Loopback of SSD messages and pulse code modulation (PCM) signals for diagnostic purposes. Correct initialization of all features, as configured in software, at power-up. Direct reporting of digits dialed (500 telephones) by collecting dial pulses. Connection of 150 V DC at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps in two telephones in parallel. The two telephones must be the same type or the neon series resistor in each telephone must be 54 K ohms or greater. Lamp status detection (does not detect a failure of either lamp when operating in parallel). Disabling and enabling of selected units for maintenance. 40 mA to telephones with short circuit protection.

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by the following: a microcontroller a card LAN interface signaling and control circuits on the analog message waiting line card

366

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Microcontroller
The analog message waiting line card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller controls the following: reporting to the CE CP through the card LAN link: - card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number) - firmware version - self-test status - programmed configuration status receipt and implementation of card configuration: - programming of the codecs - enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card - programming of input/output interface control circuits for administration of line interface unit operation - enabling/disabling of an interrupted dial tone to indicate call waiting - maintenance diagnostics - transmission loss levels

Signaling and control

The signaling and control portion of the card provides circuits that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the system CP to operate the line interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CP and return incoming call status information over the DS-30X network loop.

Circuit power
The +8.5 V DC input is regulated down to +5 V DC for use by the digital logic circuits. All other power to the card is used by the line interface circuits. The +15.0 V DC input is regulated down to +12 V DC to power the analog circuits. The 48.0 V DC input is for the telephone battery. Ringing power for telephones is 86 Vrms ac at 20 Hz on 48 V DC. The Rsync signal is used to switch 20 Hz ringing on and off at the zero current cross-over point to lengthen the life of the switching circuits.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

367

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Power for lighting the message waiting lights is provided by either the peripheral equipment power supply or the ringing generator. Logic on the message waiting line card interrupts the 150 V DC signal at 1 Hz intervals to provide a flashing message waiting light.

Technical summary or electrical specifications

Analog line interface
The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card meets the EIA/TA464 standard for ONS Type II line cards. Table 162: Analog message waiting line card - line interface unit electrical characteristics on page 368 shows a summary of the analog line interface unit electrical characteristics. Table 162: Analog message waiting line card - line interface unit electrical characteristics
Characteristics Impedance Loop limit (excluding telephone) Leakage resistance Ring trip Ringing voltage Signaling Supervision 600 ohms 1000 ohms at nominal 48 V (excluding telephone) 30,000 ohms During silent or ringing intervals 86 V ac Loop start Normal battery conditions are continuously applied (approximately 44.5 V on ring and 2.5 V on tip at nominal 48 V battery) 48 (can be as low as 42 for DC-powered systems), +15, +8.5, 150 V and ringing voltage 4 dB 1 dB at 1020 Hz 3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM 0.5 dB loss for PCM to analog Description

Power input from backplane Insertion loss

Input impedance The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a return loss of: 20 dB for 200-500 Hz 26 dB for 500-3400 Hz

368

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Insertion loss On a station line-to-line connection, the total insertion loss at 1 kHz is 6 dB + 1 dB. This is arranged as 3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM, and 2.5 dB loss for PCM to analog. Frequency response The loss values in Table 163: Analog message waiting line card - frequency response on page 369 are measured relative to the loss at 1 kHz. Table 163: Analog message waiting line card - frequency response
Frequency (Hz) 60 200 300 3000 3200 3400 Minimum (dB) 20.0 0.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.0 Maximum (dB) 5.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 3.0

Message channel noise The message channel noise C-weighted (dBrnC) on 95 percent of the connections (line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not exceed 20 dBrnC. Table 164: NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card technical summary on page 369 provides a technical summary of the analog message waiting line card. Table 164: NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card technical summary
Impedance Loop limit (excluding telephone) Leakage resistance Ring trip Ringing voltage Signaling Supervision 600 ohms 1000 ohms at nominal -48 V (excluding telephone) 30,000 ohms During silent or ringing intervals 86 V AC Loop start Normal battery conditions are continuously applied (approximately -44.5 V on ring and -2.5 V on tip at nominal -48 V battery) -48 (can be as low as -42 for DC-powered systems), +15, -15, +8.5 V and ringing voltage; also -150 V on analog message waiting line card. 6 dB + 1 dB at 1020 Hz 3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM

Power input from backplane

Insertion loss

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

369

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

2.5 dB loss for PCM to analog

Power requirements
Table 165: Power requirements on page 370 provides the power requirements for the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card. Table 165: Power requirements
Voltage (+/-) + 12.0 V DC + 8.0 V DC 48.0 V DC 48.0 V DC 86.0 V AC 150.0 V DC Tolerance 0.36 V DC 0.40 V DC 2.00 V DC 5.00 V DC 5.00 V AC 3.00 V DC Idle current 48 mA 150 mA 48 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA Active current 0 mA 8 mA 40 mA 10 mA (Note 1) 10 mA (Note 2) 2 mA Max 48 mA 280 mA 688 mA 320 mA 160 mA 32 mA

Note: 1. Each active ringing relay requires 10 mA of battery voltage. Note: 2. Reflects the current for ringing a single station set (or DN telephone). There may be as many as five ringers on each line.

Foreign and surge voltage protections

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on the Analog Message Waiting line card. When the Analog line card is used to service off-premise telephones, the NTAK92 Off-premise protection module must be used. Check local regulations before providing such service.

370

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Connector pin assignments

Overload level
Signal levels exceeding +7 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion in speech transmission.

Environmental specifications
Table 166: Analog message waiting line card - environmental specifications on page 371 lists the environmental specifications for the analog message waiting line card. Table 166: Analog message waiting line card - environmental specifications
Parameter Operating temperature Operating humidity Storage temperature Specifications 0 to +60 C (+32 to +140 F), ambient 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) 40 to +70 C (40 to +158 F)

Connector pin assignments

The analog message waiting line card brings the 16 phone lines to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the MDF by 25-pair cables. Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the analog message waiting line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for trunk cards. A typical connection example is shown in Figure 101: Analog message waiting line card - typical cross connection example on page 373 and Table 167: Analog message waiting line card - backplane pinouts on page 372shows the I/O pin designations at the backplane connector. This connector is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of pins. Normally, these pin positions are cabled to 50-pin connectors at the I/O panel in the rear of each module for connection with 25-pair cables to the cross-connect terminal. The information in Table 167: Analog message waiting line card - backplane pinouts on page 372is provided as a reference and diagnostic aid at the backplane, because the cabling arrangement may vary at the I/O panel. See Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for cable pinout information at the I/O panel.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

371

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Table 167: Analog message waiting line card - backplane pinouts

Backplane pinout* 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 18A 19A 62A 63A 64A 65A 66A 67A 68A 69A Lead designations Line 0, Ring Line 1, Ring Line 2, Ring Line 3, Ring Line 4, Ring Line 5, Ring Line 6, Ring Line 7, Ring Line 8, Ring Line 9, Ring Line 10, Ring Line 11, Ring Line 12, Ring Line 13, Ring Line 14, Ring Line 15, Ring Backplane pinout* 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B 18B 62B 63B 64B 65B 66B 67B 68B 69B Lead designations Line 0, Tip Line 1, Tip Line 2, Tip Line 3, Tip Line 4, Tip Line 5, Tip Line 6, Tip Line 7, Tip Line 8, Tip Line 9, Tip Line 10, Tip Line 11, Tip Line 12, Tip Line 13, Tip Line 14, Tip Line 15, Tip

* These pinouts apply to both NT8D37 and NT8D11 backplanes.

372

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

Figure 101: Analog message waiting line card - typical cross connection example

Configuration
This section outlines the procedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card and configuring the system software to properly recognize the card. Figure 102: Analog message waiting line card - jumper block and switch locations on page 375 shows where the switches and jumper blocks are located on this board.

Jumper and switch settings

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane and reports that information back to the CPU through the LAN Link interface.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

373

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Software service changes

Individual line interface units on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card are configured using the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. The message waiting feature is enabled by entering data into the customer data block using LD 15. See Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 and LD 15 service change instructions. Analog message waiting line cards with a vintage later than NT8D09AK provide a fixed +2 dB transmission profile change in the gain of the D/A convertor. See Table 168: Transmission Profile Changes on page 374. This transmission profile change is used for control of end-to-end connection loss. Control of such loss is a major element in controlling transmission parameters such as received volume, echo, noise, and crosstalk. The loss plan for the analog message waiting line card determines port-to-port loss between an analog line card unit (port) and other IPE ports. LD 97 is used to configure the system for port-to-port loss. See Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 97 service change instructions. Table 168: Transmission Profile Changes
Vintage Previous to AK AK and later A/D convertor gain 3.5 dB 3.5 dB D/A convertor gain 2.5 dB 0.5 dB

374

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

Figure 102: Analog message waiting line card - jumper block and switch locations

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

375

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

376

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 21: NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 377 Physical description on page 379 Functional description on page 380 Operation on page 383 Electrical specifications on page 413 Connector pin assignments on page 417 Configuration on page 418 Applications on page 426

Introduction
Avaya is pleased to introduce the NT8D14CA Universal Trunk (XUT) card as a replacement for the NT8D14BB card. The NT8D14CA is modified to add a longer loop capability for CAMA trunk applications. The NT8D14CA comes equipped with a set of 2 jumpers for each hybrid that should be set to the longer loop length (LL) when the trunk is used in a CAMA application. The jumpers are numbered P35 to P50 and are set to the shorter loop length (SL) position when it comes from the factory. For each hybrid, both jumpers should be changed to the LL position only if used as a CAMA trunk. Otherwise the jumpers should be left to the SL position. The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card interfaces eight analog trunk lines to the system. Each trunk interface is independently configured by software control using the Trunk Administration program LD 14. You can install this card in any IPE slot.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

377

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Note: Each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion can contain up to four analog trunk cards. The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card supports the following trunk types: Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks Central Office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FEX), and Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) trunks Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks Tie trunks: two-way Loop Dial Repeating (LDR) and two-way loop Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID) Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunks Paging trunks The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card also supports Music, Automatic Wake Up, and Direct Inward System Access (DISA) features. Table 169: Trunk and signaling matrix on page 378 lists the signaling and trunk types supported by the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Table 169: Trunk and signaling matrix
Trunk types Signaling type Loop start Ground start Loop DR Loop OAID Continuous operation mode Start modes (pulse and level) CO/FX/ WATS Yes Yes No No No No DID No (see note) No Yes No No No Tie No No Yes Yes No No RAN N/A N/A N/A N/A Yes Yes Paging N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A CAMA Yes No No No No No

Note: For incoming and outgoing service, DID trunks must be programmed as loop dial repeating.

378

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Physical description
The trunk and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel, which is cabled to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables. External equipment, such as recorded announcement machines, paging equipment, and Central Office facilities, connect to the card at the MDF. See Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for termination and cross-connect information. The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red Light Emitting Diode (LED). When an NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the selftest runs. If the self-test is successful, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED flashes continuously or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

379

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 103: Universal trunk card - faceplate

Functional description
Figure 104: NT8D14 Universal trunk card - block diagram on page 381 shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages.

380

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Figure 104: NT8D14 Universal trunk card - block diagram

Card interfaces
The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops, and maintenance data over the card LAN link.

Trunk interface units

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card contains eight identical and independently configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits). Each unit provides impedance matching and a balanced network in a signal transformer/analog hybrid circuit. Also provided are relays for placing outgoing call signaling onto the trunk. Signal detection circuits monitor incoming call signaling. Two codecs are provided for performing A/D and D/

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

381

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

A conversion of trunk analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals. Each codec supports four trunk interface units. The following features are common to all units on the card: trunk type configurable on a per unit basis terminating impedance (600 or 900 ohms) selectable on a per-unit basis (minimum vintage BA) balance impedance (600 or 900 ohms or complex impedance network) selectable on a per-unit basis (minimum vintage BA) control signals provided for RAN and paging equipment loopback of PCM signals received from trunk facility over DS-30X network loop for diagnostic purposes switchable pads for transmission loss control

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface, and signaling and control circuits on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card.

Microcontroller
The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller controls the following: reporting to the CE CPU through the card LAN link: - card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number) - firmware version - self-test status - programmed configuration status receipt and implementation of card configuration through the card LAN link: - programming of the codecs - enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card - programming of input/output interface control circuits for administration of trunk interface unit operation - maintenance diagnostics - transmission pad settings

382

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Card LAN interface

Maintenance data is exchanged with the common equipment CPU over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link.

Signaling and control

The signaling and control portion of the Universal Trunk card works with the CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receives messages from the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and returns status information to the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and control portion of the card provides the means for analog loop terminations to establish, supervise, and take down call connections.

Signaling interface
All trunk signaling messages are three bytes long. The messages are transmitted in channel zero of the DS-30X in A10 format. Configuration information for the Universal Trunk card is downloaded from the CPU at powerup or by command from maintenance programs. Eleven configuration messages are sent. Three messages are sent to the card to configure the make/break ratio and A-Law or -Law operation. One message is sent to each unit to configure the trunk characteristics.

Operation
Administrators can assign optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each unit on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card through the Trunk Administration LD 14 and Trunk Route Administration LD 16 programs or jumper strap settings on the card.

Loop start operation

Loop start operation is configured in software and implemented in the card through software download messages. When the card is idle, it provides a high impedance toward the CO for isolation and AC (ringing) detection.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

383

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Incoming calls
The alerting signal into the System is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing sent by the CO. When an incoming call is answered, ringing is tripped when the System places a low-resistance dc loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO. See Figure 105: Loop start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS on page 384 and Figure 106: Loop start call connection sequence incoming call from CO/FX/WATS on page 385.

Figure 105: Loop start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

384

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Figure 106: Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

Outgoing calls
For outgoing calls, the software sends an outgoing seizure message to place a lowresistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO. See Figure 107: Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS on page 386 and Figure 108: Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS on page 387. When the CO detects the low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits. When the CO is ready to receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the system in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

385

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 107: Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

386

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Figure 108: Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

Polarity-sensitive/-insensitive packs feature

The Avaya Communication Server 1000 (Avaya CS1000) software provides the polaritysensitive/polarity-insensitive (PSP and PIP) packs feature for the accurate recording of outgoing call duration for loop start and ground start operation. On trunks equipped with far-end answer supervision, the PSP class of service is enabled in software and causes call-duration recording in CDR records to begin only upon receipt of answer supervision from the far-end. For trunks not equipped with answer supervision, the PIP class of service is enabled and callduration recording begins immediately upon near-end trunk seizure. The PSP and PIP classes of service are enabled in the Trunk Administration program LD 14.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

387

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Ground start operation

Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented through software download messages. In the idle state, the tip conductor from the CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring lead.

Incoming calls
In an incoming call, after ground is detected on the tip, the universal trunk card scans for a ringing detection signal before presenting the call to an attendant and tripping the ringing. When the attendant answers, a low resistance is placed across the tip and ring conductors, which trips CO ringing and establishes a speech path. See Figure 109: Ground start call states incoming call from CO/FX/WATS on page 388 and Figure 110: Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS on page 389.

Figure 109: Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

388

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Figure 110: Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

Reverse-wiring compensation
The Avaya CS 1000 software includes a feature for detecting reverse wiring (connection of the near-end tip and ring leads to the far-end ring and tip leads) on ground start trunks with farend answer supervision. Ordinarily, an incoming call on a reverse-wired trunk without reverse-wiring compensation presents ringing on the tip lead rather than on the ring lead. Because of the software expects to see a ground on the tip lead, it interprets the end of the first ringing signal as a switchhook flash. As the interval between ringing signals exceeds the switchhook flash time of 512 milliseconds, the software assumes a far-end disconnect. This causes the call to be presented to a console loop key and then immediately removed.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

389

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

The reverse-wiring compensation feature operates as follows. If an apparent disconnect takes place immediately after the first ringing signal, the software time stamps the event and temporarily remove the call from the console loop key. If another such ringing/disconnect event occurs during the No Ringing Detector (NRD) time, the trunk is considered "possibly reverse-wired" and a threshold counter starts. Calls on trunks identified as possibly reverse-wired are presented to the attendant during the initial ring, removed, and then continuously presented after the second ring. If a call on a possibly reversewired trunk is abandoned before the attendant answers, it is disconnected after the NRD timer expires. A trunk identified as possibly reverse-wired is switched by the software to loop start processing after the second ring. This switching takes place on a call-by-call basis. So if a previously correctly wired trunk becomes reverse-wired, the next incoming call is marked as possibly reverse-wired and the threshold count begins. If the threshold count exceeds its limit, an error message is printed and the trunk is registered as "positively reverse wired." Once identified as positively reverse wired, the call is presented continuously from the first ring. When a reverse-wired trunk becomes correctly wired, the first subsequent call clears the threshold counter and normal ground start processing is implemented. Note: The far-end can reverse battery and ground upon receipt of attendant answer. Note: The near-end provides a high-impedance (>150k ohms) disconnect signal of at least 50 ms before reconnecting the ground detector.

Outgoing calls
For outgoing calls, the trunk provides a ground to the ring lead. The CO responds by grounding the tip and returning dial tone. After the tip ground is detected by the card, a low-resistance path is placed between the tip and ring leads and the ground is removed from the ring. Addressing is then applied from the system in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones. See Figure 111: Ground start call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS on page 391 and Figure 112: Ground start call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/ WATS on page 392. The Polarity-Sensitive/Polarity-Insensitive Packs (PSP and PIP) feature must be set to provide for proper outgoing call-duration recording with ground start operation. Refer to the description of loop start operation in this section for a more complete discussion of PSP and PIP.

390

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Figure 111: Ground start call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

391

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 112: Ground start call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS

Direct inward dial operation

Incoming calls
An incoming call from the CO places a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 113: DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call from CO on page 394 and Figure 114: DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call from CO on page 395.

392

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Dial pulses or DTMF tones are then presented from the CO. When the called party answers, the universal trunk card reverses battery and ground on the tip and ring leads to the CO. The trunk is arranged for first party release. The CO releases the trunk by removing the lowresistance loop, at which time normal battery and ground are restored at the near-end. This also applies to incoming tie trunk calls from a far-end PBX. Note: The near-end can be configured for immediate start, delay dial, or wink start.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

393

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 113: DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call from CO

394

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Figure 114: DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call from CO

Two-way, loop dial repeating, TIE trunk operation

Incoming calls
In an incoming call configuration, the far-end initiates a call by placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 115: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states incoming call from far-end PBX on page 396 and Figure 116: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX on page 397.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

395

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

This causes a current to flow through the battery feed resistors in the trunk circuit. Address signaling is then applied by the far-end in the form of DTMF tones or dial pulses. When the called party answers, an answer supervision signal is sent by the software, causing the System to reverse battery and ground on the tip and ringleads to the far-end. Far-end disconnect is initiated by opening the loop while the near-end disconnect is initiated by restoring normal battery and ground. The operation represented in Figure 115: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX on page 396 and Figure 116: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX on page 397 also applies to incoming DID trunk calls from a CO. Note: Where no near-end answer supervision is provided, the party at the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination.

Figure 115: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX

396

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Figure 116: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX

Note: Where no near-end answer supervision is provided, the party at the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination.

Outgoing calls
In an outgoing call configuration, the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is connected to an existing PBX by a tie trunk. See Figure 117: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

397

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

far-end PBX on page 398 and Figure 118: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX on page 399. An outgoing call from the near-end seizes the trunk facility by placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. Outward addressing is then applied from the System in the form of DTMF tones or dial pulses. If answer supervision is provided by the far-end, reverse battery and ground on the tip and ring leads are returned. The operation represented in Figure 119: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX on page 400 and Figure 120: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX on page 401 also applies to outgoing calls on a DID trunk. Note: Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, the party at the near-end hangs up, after recognizing far-end call termination.

Figure 117: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX

398

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Figure 118: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

399

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 119: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX

400

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Figure 120: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Senderized operation for DID and two-way loop DR trunks

Incoming calls
If the far-end is senderized, the near-end can operate in any mode: Immediate Start (IMM), Delay Dial (DDL) or Wink (WNK) start, as assigned at the STRI prompt in the Trunk Administration program LD 14. See Figure 121: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk on page 403.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

401

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Note: If a ground start trunk, the outpulse towards office occurs after ground detection. If a loop start trunk, the outpulse towards office occurs one second later. For immediate start, following the seizure signal, the far-end starts pulsing after the standard delay (normally 65 ms, minimum). For delay dial or wink start modes, stop/go signaling (off hook/on hook or battery/ground reversal) is returned by the System after receipt of the seizure signal. The delay dial (stop) signal begins immediately upon seizure and ends (go signal) 384 ms later. The wink start (stop) signal begins 384 ms after seizure and ends (go signal) 256 ms later. The far-end detecting the go signal starts pulsing after the standard delay (normally 55 ms, minimum). Stop/go signaling, in addition to the signaling function, serves as an integrity check to help identify a malfunctioning trunk. If required, the near-end can be configured to provide pseudo-answer supervision at the expiration of the end-of-dial timer. End-of-dial timer settings are made at the EOD (nonDTMF) or ODT (DTMF) prompts in the Trunk Route Administration program LD 16.

402

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Figure 121: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk

Outgoing calls
When DDL or WNK mode is used, outgoing calls require a stop/go signal from the far-end so that the near-end cannot outpulse until the far-end is ready to receive digits. See Figure 122: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO/FX/ WATS on page 404.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

403

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Note: Pseudo-answer supervision is provided by near-end at expiration of end-of-dial timer. Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, the party at the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination.

Figure 122: Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO/FX/WATS

Outgoing automatic, incoming dial operation

Incoming calls
When the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is seized by the far-end on an incoming call, a lowresistance loop is placed across the tip and ring leads. Addressing is then sent by the farend in the form of battery-ground or loop pulses, or DTMF tones. The trunk is released at the

404

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

far-end when the loop is opened. When the near-end detects an open loop, it returns to a normal state. See Figure 123: Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX on page 405 and Figure 124: Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX on page 406.

Outgoing calls
When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the near-end places the battery on the tip and ground on the ring. This alerts the far-end of the seizure. The far-end responds with a low resistance across the tip and ring leads.

Figure 123: Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

405

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 124: Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX

406

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Figure 125: Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

407

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 126: Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX

Recorded announcement trunk operation

Note: Refer to Multi-Channel RAN modes on page 411 for information about Multi-Channel RAN modes, which are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk. When configured for Recorded Announcement (RAN) operation, a trunk unit is connected to a customer-provided recorded announcement machine. Announcement machines must be

408

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

compatible with RAN trunks. Use the manufacturer's instructions to set up the Announcement machines. Each trunk unit provides the following for operation with RAN equipment: pulse start, level start, or continuous operation modes selectable termination of tip and ring leads into 600 or 900 ohms for interface with a lowimpedance (2 or 4 ohms) source connection of up to 24 trunk units to a single announcement machine channel

Recorded announcement machines

Recorded announcement machines store prerecorded voice messages that are played back to the trunk units to which they are connected. Most commercially available announcement machines store recordings digitally, although some drum and tape units are still in service. An announcement machine can provide one or more channels and each channel may be prerecorded with a different message. Some announcement machines also provide a Special Information Tone (SIT) capability. These tones are inserted at the beginning of intercept messages such as "Your call cannot be completed as dialed. Please check the number and try again." Figure 127: Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical) on page 410 shows a typical connection from a single announcement machine channel to unit 0 on a universal trunk card.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

409

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 127: Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical)

RAN modes of operation

Figure 128: RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE) on page 411 shows the relationship of control signals to message playback for the operating modes available in announcement machines. The signal names shown in Figure 128: RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE) on page 411 are typical. Note: For continuous operation mode, connect the trunk unit MB line to the announcer B line only, and ground the announcer ST+ line. For pulse start or level start modes, connect the trunk unit MB line to the announcer ST+ line only, and leave the announcer B line unconnected. Note: A maximum of 24 universal trunk card units can be paralleled to a single announcer channel.

410

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Figure 128: RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)

Multi-Channel RAN modes

In Multi-Channel RAN, multiple RAN channels can be configured within one RAN trunk route. In a Multi-Channel RAN route, each trunk has its own dedicated RAN channel on a physical RAN machine. Multi-Channel RAN routes do not support the cross connecting (daisy chains) of multiple trunk ports together so that several callers hear the same RAN message. Multi-channel machine types - Continuous Mode Multi-Channel (MCON), Pulse Start/Stop Multi-Channel (MPUL) and Level Start/Stop Multi-Channel (MLVL) are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk. All trunks belonging to the RAN route are considered independent.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

411

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

RAN trunks and RAN machine channels are connected one-to-one. If one RAN trunk is detected as faulty, then all other trunks are not impacted. For the RAN machine types, the maximum length of the recorded announcement is two hours. The meaning of a ground signal received from the RAN machine (play or idle) is configured in LD 16.

Multi-Channel Level Start/Control Mode (minimum vintage BA)

A RAN mode of operation is available called "Multi-Channel Level Start/Control Mode." This mode enables provisioning of multiple RAN channels for a RAN route (playing the same message independently on demand) cross-connected one-to-one to each RAN trunk in a multichannel level start RAN route. Do not bridge RAN trunks in a multi-channel RAN route. The Route Data Block LD 16 is used to configure a RAN route in Multi-Channel Level Start/ Control mode, using the following response: RTYP = MLSS Trunk members are provisioned in the Trunk Data Block LD 14. Refer to Programming RAN trunks on page 413 and to Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for instructions on service change programs.

Continuous operation mode

In the continuous operation mode (sometimes called the Audichron mode), a message is constantly played, over and over again. Callers "barge in" on a playing message or receive a ringback tone until the message plays again. The start line (ST+) is hardwired as always active. See Figure 128: RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE) on page 411. At the end of each message, a pulse is issued on the "C" line that is used by the trunk unit to cut through to the waiting call. Note: The "B" (busy) signal line indicates availability of an announcement machine message to the trunk unit when configured for the continuous operation mode. This signal is made active (ground) by the announcement machine if the channel contains a recorded message and is in an online condition. The "B" line is not connected to a trunk unit when configured for start mode operation.

Start modes (minimum vintage BA)

In a start mode (sometimes called the Code-a-Phone or start-stop mode), playback of a message does not begin until a start pulse is received by the announcement machine. Two subcategories of the start mode exist: pulse start and level start. In the pulse start mode, a start pulse activates playback of a message that continues until completion. The announcement machine ignores all other start pulses that might occur until the message is complete. In the level start mode, the start signal is a "level" rather than a pulse. The leading edge of the start signal initiates message playback that continues until either the trailing edge of the start signal occurs or the end of the message is reached. A message that is terminated by the trailing edge of a level start signal is immediately reset and ready for playback again.

412

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Electrical specifications

Call routing to RAN trunks

The CS 1000 software controls recorded announcement machines. These programs detect the calls to be intercepted, determine the type of intercept treatment required (for example, overflow, attendant, announcement), queue the intercept, and provide ringback tone to the calling party. At the proper time, an intercepted call is connected to the appropriate RAN trunk.

Programming RAN trunks

The type of intercept and the RAN trunk parameters are defined in the Trunk Data Block LD 14, Customer Data Block LD 15, and Route Data Block LD 16 programs. The Trunk Data Block and Route Data Block programs specify the following: the RAN trunk the type of announcement machine the number of repetitions of announcements before a forced disconnect (all calls) or an attendant intercept is initiated (CCSA/DID calls only) the point at which the trunk may be connected to the announcement The Customer Data Block program defines the type of intercept and the trunk route to which the intercept is to be connected. Refer to Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for instructions on service change programs.

Electrical specifications
Table 170: Universal trunk card - trunk interface electrical characteristics on page 413 gives the electrical characteristics of the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Table 170: Universal trunk card - trunk interface electrical characteristics
Trunk Types Characteristic CO / FX / WATS DID / TIE RAN Paging 600 ohms N/A Terminal impedance 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1) Balance impedance 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1), 3COM, or 3CM2 (Note 2) 600 or 900 ohms 600/900 ohms (Note 1) (Note 1) 600 or 900 ohms N/A (Note 1), 3COM, or 3CM2 (Note 2)

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

413

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Trunk Types Characteristic Supervision type CO / FX / WATS Ground or loop start (Note 3) 1700-ohm loop with near-end battery of 42.75 V 42 to 52.5 V (Note 4) 20 mA 3 V <300 ohms DID / TIE Loop start (with ans sup) (Note 3) 2450-ohm loop with near-end battery of 44 V 42 to 52.5 V 10 mA 3 V N/A RAN Continuous, level, or pulse 600/900-ohm loop Paging N/A

DC signaling loop length (max)

600 ohm loop

Far-end battery Minimum detected loop current Ground potential difference Low DC loop resistance during outpulsing High DC loop resistance

42 to 52 V 10 mA 1 V N/A

N/A N/A 1 V N/A

Ground start 30k ohms; loop start 5M ohms 17 to 33 Hz 40 to 120 V rms 30k ohms, tipto-ring, tip-toground, ring-toground 10 V rms, tip-toring, tip-toground, ring-toground

N/A

N/A

N/A

Ring detection Line leakage

N/A 30k ohms, tipto-ring, tip-toground, ring-toground 10 V rms, tip-toring, tip-toground, ring-toground

N/A N/A

N/A N/A

AC induction rejection

N/A

N/A

Note: Selected in software. Note: Selected by jumper strap settings on card. Refer to Table 175: Jumper strap settings factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) on page 418, Table 176: Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB) on page 419, and Table 177: Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) on page 420 for details.

414

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Electrical specifications

Trunk Types Characteristic CO / FX / WATS DID / TIE RAN Paging

Note: For loop extender application, the maximum voltage applied between tip and ring is 105 V 5%. The minimum dc loop resistance for this type of application is 1800 ohms.

Power requirements
Power to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is provided by the module power supply (ac or dc). Table 171: Power requirements for universal trunk card
Voltage +15.0 V dc 15.0 V dc +5.0 V dc +8.5 V dc 48.0 V dc 5% 5% 5% 2% 5% Tolerance Current (max.) 306 mA 306 mA 750 mA 450 mA 415 mA

Foreign and surge voltage protection

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage (power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements.

Environmental specifications
Table 172: Environmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card on page 415 lists the environmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Table 172: Environmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card
Parameter Operating temperature Specifications 0 to +60 C (+32 to +140 F), ambient 0 to 50 degrees C, ambient (Small Systems and CS 1000E) 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) 40 to +70 C (40 to +158 F)

Operating humidity Storage temperature

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

415

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Release control
Release control establishes which end of a call (near, far, either, joint, or originating) disconnects the call. Only incoming trunks in idle ground start configuration can provide disconnect supervision. You configure release control for each trunk independently in the Route Data Block (LD 16).

PAD switching
The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class-of-service (COS) you assign in the Trunk Data Block (LD 14). Transmission properties may be via net loss (VNL) or non via net loss (non-VNL). Non-VNL trunks are assigned either a Transmission Compensated (TRC) or NonTransmission Compensated (NTC) class-of-service to ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as Tie trunks. The class-of-service determines the operation of the switchable PADs contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows: Transmission Compensated - used for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB for which impedance compensation is provided - or used for a four-wire non-VNL facility Non-Transmission Compensated - used for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB - or used when impedance compensation is not provided The insertion loss from IPE ports to IPE ports is as follows:

416

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Connector pin assignments

Table 173: Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB)

Connector pin assignments

The universal trunk card connects the eight analog trunks to the backplane through a 160pin connector shroud. Telephone trunks connect to the universal trunk card at the back of the Media Gateway using a 25-pin connector. A list of the connections to the universal trunk card is shown in Table 174: Universal trunk card backplane pinouts on page 417. See Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for I/O panel connector information and wire assignments for each tip/ring pair. Table 174: Universal trunk card - backplane pinouts
Trunk Number 0 Backplane Pin 12A 13A 1 14A 15A 2 16A 17A Signal RAN mode Tip CP Tip CP Tip CP Paging mode Tip A Tip A Tip A Other modes Tip N/A Tip N/A Tip N/A Backplane Pin 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B Signal RAN mode Ring MB Ring MB Ring MB Paging mode Ring RG Ring RG Ring RG Other modes Ring N/A Ring N/A Ring N/A

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

417

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Trunk Number 3

Backplane Pin 18A 19A

Signal RAN mode Tip CP Tip CP Tip CP Tip CP Tip CP Paging mode Tip A Tip A Tip A Tip A Tip A Other modes Tip N/A Tip N/A Tip N/A Tip N/A Tip N/A

Backplane Pin 18B 19B 62B 63B 64B 65B 66B 67B 68B 69B

Signal RAN mode Ring MB Ring MB Ring MB Ring MB Ring MB Paging mode Ring RG Ring RG Ring RG Ring RG Ring RG Other modes Ring N/A Ring N/A Ring N/A Ring N/A Ring N/A

62A 63A

64A 65A

66A 67A

68A 69A

Configuration
The trunk type for each unit on the card as well as its terminating impedance and balance network configuration is selected by software service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card. NT8D14 has a reduced jumper strap setting on the card. There are only three jumpers, J1.X, J2.X, and J3.X on each channel. Table 175: Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) on page 418, Table 176: Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB) on page 419, and Table 177: Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) on page 420 show the functionality of these three jumpers. Table 175: Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)
Trunk types Loop length Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X CO/FX/WATS 2-way TIE (LDR) 2-way TIE (OAID) DID RAN: continuous operation mode 0600 ohms Not applicable: RAN and paging trunks Off Off Off Off 12 12 12 12 01524 m (5000 ft.) Off J2.X Off J3.X 12 J4.X (Note 2) 12

418

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

Trunk types

Loop length

Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2)

Paging

should not leave the building.

Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the unit number, 07. "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block. Store unused straps on the universal trunk card by installing them on a single jumper pin as shown below. Note: For the NT8D14BB card, J4.X is not provided on the card. The J4.X jumper setting specified in Table 175: Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) on page 418 does not apply.

Table 176: Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB)
Trunk types Loop length Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X CO/FX/WATS 2-way TIE (LDR) 2-way TIE (OAID) DID RAN: pulse start or level start modes > 600 ohms Not applicable: RAN trunks should not leave the building. On Off On Off 12 23 23 12 > 1524 m (5000 ft.) Off J2.X Off J3.X 12 J4.X (Note 2) 23

Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the unit number, 07. "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

419

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Trunk types

Loop length

Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2)

Note: For the NT8D14BB card, J4.X is not provided on the board. The J4.X jumper setting specified in Table 176: Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB) on page 419 does not apply.

Table 177: Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)
Trunk types Terminating impedance (Note 1) 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) 0915 m (0 3000 ft) 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 9151524 m (30005000 ft) 3COM 3COM 3COM 3COM N/A N/A N/A > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) 3CM2 3CM2 3CM2 3CM2 3CM2 N/A N/A

CO/FX/WATS 2-way TIE (LDR) 2-way TIE (OAID) DID (loop length < 600 ohms) DID (loop length 600 ohms)

RAN: continuous 600 or 900 operation mode ohms Paging 600 ohms

Note: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment. Note: The balance network of each trunk unit is software selectable between resistive 600 or 900 ohms or 3COM and jumper selectable between 3COM and 3CM2. Jumper selection for 3COM/3CM2 restriction does not apply to NT8D14BB.

420

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

Jumper strap settings

For most applications, the jumper strap settings remain set to the standard configuration as shipped from the factory. See Table 175: Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) on page 418. The jumper strap settings must be changed, as shown in Table 176: Jumper strap settings extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB) on page 419, for the following: For CO/FX/WATS or TIE trunk loops exceeding 1524 meters (5000 ft.) DID trunks exceeding a loop resistance of 600 ohms RAN trunks operating in pulse start or level start modes Figure 129: Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and NT8D14BB Release 9 and below on page 422 shows jumper locations on the universal trunk card (vintage BA). Note: Refer to Avaya Circuit Card Reference (NN43001-311) for vintage AA jumper strap settings.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

421

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 129: Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and NT8D14BB Release 9 and below

Service change entries

The trunk type, terminating impedance, and balance network are selected by making service change entries in the Trunk Administration program LD 14. See Table 178: Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) on page 423 for the proper values for the trunk type and loop length. Refer to Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 14 service change instructions. Before the appropriate balance network can be selected, the loop length between the nearend and the far-end (a Central Office, for example) must be known. To assist in determining

422

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

loop length, some typical resistance and loss values for the most common cable lengths are given in Table 179: Cable loop resistance and loss on page 423 for comparison with values obtained from actual measurements. Table 178: Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)
Trunk types Terminating impedance (Note 1) 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) 0915 m (0 3000 ft) 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 9151524 m (30005000 ft) 3COM 3COM 3COM 3COM N/A N/A N/A > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) 3CM2 3CM2 3CM2 3CM2 3CM2 N/A N/A

CO/FX/WATS 2-way TIE (LDR)

2-way TIE (OAID) 600 or 900 ohms DID (loop length < 600 ohms) DID (loop length 600 ohms) RAN: continuous operation mode Paging 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 hms 600 ohms

Note: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment. Note: The balance network of each trunk unit is software selectable between resistive 600 or 900 ohms or 3COM and jumper selectable between 3COM and 3CM2. Jumper selection for 3COM/3CM2 restriction does not apply to NT8D14BB.

Table 179: Cable loop resistance and loss

Cable length Cable loop resistance (ohms) 22 AWG 915 m (3000 ft.) 1524 m (5000 ft.) 2225 m (7300 ft.) 3566 m (11700 ft.) 5639 m (18500 ft.) 97 162 236 379 600 24 AWG 155 260 378 607 960 26 AWG 251 417 609 977 1544 Cable loop loss (dB) (nonloaded at 1kHz) 22 AWG 0.9 1.6 2.3 3.7 5.9 24 AWG 1.2 2.0 3.0 4.8 7.6 26 AWG 1.5 2.5 3.7 6.0 9.4

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

423

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 130: Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BB Release 10 and higher

Port-to-port loss configuration

Loss parameters are selected on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card by a switchable pad controlled by codec emulation software. For convenience, the pads settings are called "in" and

424

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

"out." Pad settings are determined by the two factors listed below (the first is under direct user control; the second is controlled indirectly): Class of Service is assigned in LD 14 (under direct user control). Port-to-port connection loss is automatically set by software on the basis of the port type selected in LD 16; only the port type is set by the user (controlled indirectly). The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class of service assigned in LD 14. Transmission properties can be Via Net Loss (VNL) or non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL). The VNL class of service is assigned at the prompt CLS with the response VNL. The nonVNL class of service is assigned at prompt CLS by selecting either the Transmission Compensated (TRC) or Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) response. Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as Tie trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows: TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire non-VNL facility. NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or when impedance compensation is not provided. See Table 180: Pad switching algorithm on page 425 for the pad switching control for the various through connections and the actual port-to-port loss introduced for connections between the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card and any other port designated as Port B. Table 180: Pad switching algorithm
Port B Port B pads Transmit D to A Receive A to D Universal Trunk Pads Transmit D to A Receive A to D Port-to-port loss (dB) Port B to Universal Universal trunk trunk card to card Port B 0.5 1 0 0.5 1 0

IPE line Universal trunk (TRC) IPE TIE (VNL)

N/A In In

N/A Out In

Out In Out

Out Out Out

Note: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the system. Transmit is from the system to the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the Universal trunk card). Receive is to the system from the external facility (analog-to-digital direction in the Universal trunk card).

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

425

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Port B

Port B pads Transmit D to A Receive A to D

Universal Trunk Pads Transmit D to A Receive A to D

Port-to-port loss (dB) Port B to Universal Universal trunk trunk card to card Port B

Note: When Port B is the call originating port. If the Universal trunk card is the originating port, the UTC pads are out, the Port B (PE CO/FX/WATS) pads are in.

Applications
The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks.

Paging trunk operation

A universal trunk card unit can be configured as a paging trunk. Configure units as paging trunks in the Trunk Data Block program LD 14 and assign routes in the Route Data Block program LD 16. Figure 131: Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical) on page 427 shows a typical connection from customer-provided equipment to unit 0 on a universal trunk card that can be installed in slots 1, 2, and 3 in a Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 in a Media Gateway Expansion. See Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for trunk wiring information.

426

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Applications

Figure 131: Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical)

Music operation
A trunk unit can be connected to a music source. The audio source should provide an adjustable power output at 600 ohms. Configure units for music at the MUS or AWR prompts in the Trunk Administration program LD 14 and assign routes at the MRT prompt in the Route Data Block program LD 16. Music operation is similar to that of RAN in the continuous operation mode. Connect the unit tip and ring leads to the audio source and ground the CP line at the MDF. If the music source is equipped with contacts that close when music is online, use these contacts to provide a ground to the MB line; otherwise, ground the MB line at the MDF.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

427

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

428

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 22: NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 429 Physical description on page 430 Functional description on page 432 Operation on page 439 Electrical specifications on page 448 Connector pin assignments on page 450 Configuration on page 453 Applications on page 457

Introduction
The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card interfaces four analog telephone trunks to the switch. Each trunk interface connects to a trunk facility using tip and ring leads that carry voice, ringing, and tone signaling, and to signaling interfaces by E and M leads. Each unit can be configured independently by software control in the Trunk Data Block (or Trunk Administration) program LD 14. You can install this card in any IPE slot. Note: Up to four analog trunk cards are supported in each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card supports the following types of trunks: 2-wire E and M Type I signaling trunks two-wire dial repeating trunks

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

429

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

two or four wire tie trunks 4-wire E and M Trunks: - Type I or Type II signaling - duplex (DX) signaling paging (PAG) trunks Type I signaling uses two signaling wires plus ground. Type II and DX signaling uses two pairs of signaling wires. Most electronic switching systems use Type II signaling. Table 181: Trunk and signaling matrix on page 430 lists the signaling and trunk types supported by the NT8D15 E and M Trunk card. Table 181: Trunk and signaling matrix
Trunk types Signaling 2-wire E and M 4-wire E and M RLM/RLR Yes Yes Yes Yes TIE PAG Yes No CSA/CAA/CAM Yes Yes

Legend: RLM Release Link Main RLR Release Link Remote CSA Common Control Switching Arrangement CAA Common Control Switching Arrangement with Automatic Number Identification (ANI) CAM Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunk

Physical description
The line interface and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The E and M Trunk card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. External equipment connects to the card at the back of the Media Gateway using a 25-pin connector. Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for line cards. See Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for termination and cross connect information. Each card provides four circuits. Each circuit connects with the switching system and with the external apparatus by an 80-pin connector at the rear of the pack. Each trunk circuit on the card connects to trunk facilities by tip and ring leads which carry voice, ringing, tone signaling and battery. Trunk option selection is determined by software control in LD 14.

430

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Figure 132: E and M Trunk card - faceplate on page 431 illustrates the faceplate of the E and M Trunk card. The words "Dict Trk" appear on the faceplate label because earlier versions of this card provided dictation trunk connections for third-party equipment. The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red LED. When an E and M trunk card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED continues to flash or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

Figure 132: E and M Trunk card - faceplate

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

431

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Functional description
The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card serves various transmission requirements. The trunk circuits on the card can operate in either A-Law or -Law companding modes. The mode of operation is set by service change entries. Figure 133: E and M Trunk card - block diagram on page 432 shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the E and M Trunk card. Each of these functions is discussed on the following pages.

Figure 133: E and M Trunk card - block diagram

432

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Common features
The following features are common to all circuits on the NT8D15 E and M Trunk card: Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission signals. Interfaces each of the four PCM signals to one DS30X timeslot in A10 format. Transmit and receive SSD signaling messages over a DS30X signaling channel in A10 format. Ability to enable and disable individual ports or the entire card under software control. Provides outpulsing on the card. Make break ratios are defined in software and down loaded at power up and by software commands. Provides indication of card status from self-test diagnostics on faceplate Light Emitting Diode (LED). Supports loopback of PCM signals to DS30X for diagnostic purposes. Card ID provided for auto configuration and determining serial number and firmware level of card. Software controlled terminating impedance (600, 900, or 1200 ohm) two and four-wire modes. Allows trunk type to be configured on a per port basis in software. Software controlled 600 ohm balance impedance is provided. Isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling circuit. Software control of A/-Law mode. Software control of digit collection.

Card interfaces
The E and M Trunk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. The E and M Trunk card contains four identical and independently configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits). Each unit provides impedance matching and a balance network in a signal transformer/analog hybrid circuit. Also provided are relays for placing outgoing call signaling onto the trunk. Signal detection circuits monitor incoming call signaling. A CODEC performs A/D and D/A conversion of trunk analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals. The four units on the card can operate in the A-Law or the -Law companding mode. The mode is selected by making service change entries. Each unit can be independently configured for 2-wire E and M, 4-wire E and M, and paging trunk types. The trunk type is selected by service

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

433

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

change entries and jumper strap settings. All units on the card can perform the following features: convert transmission signals from analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog provide outpulsing on the card: make/break ratios are defined in software and downloaded at power-up and by software command provide 600-ohms balance and termination impedance (2-wire configuration) provide 600-ohms termination impedance (4-wire configuration) provide pad control for 2-wire and 4-wire facility connections enable trunk type and function to be configured on a per-port basis in software provide isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling circuit provide software control of A-Law and -Law modes support loopback of pulse code modulation (PCM) signals to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes

Trunk circuit features

Trunk unit functions
The functions provided by each unit on the E and M Trunk card include 2-wire signaling, 4wire signaling, and paging operation as follows: 2-wire, E and M Type I signaling (see Figure 134: E and M Type I signaling on page 435) with: - near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead - ground detection with E lead - voice transmission through tip and ring for transmit and receive 4-wire, E and M Type I and II signaling (see Figure 135: E and M Type II signaling on page 435), 2-way dial repeating with: - echo suppression for Type I signaling - switchable 7 dB and 16 dB pads for carrier interface - voice transmission and reception through two separate paths - Type I signaling through E and M leads - Type II signaling with near-end seizure by SB/M leads and far-end detection by E/ SG lead

434

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

4-wire, DX signaling (see Figure 136: 4-wire DX signaling on page 436) paging trunk operation (see Figure 137: Paging trunk operation on page 437) with support access by low-resistance path at the PG/A1 leads Note: Paging end-to-end signaling is not supported.

Figure 134: E and M Type I signaling

Figure 135: E and M Type II signaling

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

435

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 136: 4-wire DX signaling

436

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Figure 137: Paging trunk operation

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and signaling and control circuits on the E and M Trunk card.

Microcontroller
The E and M Trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card. The microcontroller provides the following functions: card-identification self-test control of card operation maintenance diagnostics

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

437

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Card LAN
The card LAN provides a serial communication link for transferring maintenance data and control signals between the trunk card and the SSC card. The card LAN controls the microcontroller. The following functions are supported: providing card ID/RLS reporting self-test status polling from the controller card enabling/disabling of the DS-30X link

Signaling interface
All signaling messages for the trunk are three bytes long. The messages are transmitted in channel zero of the DS30X in A10 format. Configuration information for the E and M trunk is downloaded from the CPU at power up and by command from maintenance programs. Seven configuration messages are sent. One message is sent to each unit (4) to configure trunk type, signaling type, balance impedance etc. Three messages are sent per card to configure the make/break ratio, A/-Law operation.

Signaling and control

The signaling and control portion of the E and M Trunk card works with the system CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receives messages from the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and returns status information to the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and control portion of the card provides analog loop terminations that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. Configuration information for the E and M Trunk card is downloaded from the CPU at powerup and by command from maintenance programs. Configuration messages are sent. One message is sent to configure trunk and signaling type. The other messages are sent to each card to select the make/break ratio and the A-Law and -Law modes. The signaling and control circuits on the card perform the following functions: provide an interface between the card and the system CPU - transmit PCM signals from each of the four units to one DS-30X timeslot in A10 format (ready to send/clear to sendflow control, handshake format)

438

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

- transmit and receive signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling channel in A10 format decode received messages to set configuration and activate/deactivate interface relays for PCM loopback diagnostic purposes decode outpulsing messages (one per digit) from the CPU to drive outpulsing relays at 20 pps, 10 pps1 (primary), or 10 pps2 (secondary) monitor signals from the trunk interface and generate a message when required for each state change control disabling and enabling of unit or card control A-Law and -Law operation modes control transmission pad settings

Maintenance features
The following features are provided for maintenance of the E and M trunk: indication of card status from self-test software enable and disable capability for individual units or entire card loopback of PCM signals to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes card ID for autoconfiguration and determination of serial number and firmware level

Operation
The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each unit on the E and M Trunk card are assigned through the Trunk Administration LD 14 and Trunk Route LD 16 programs.

Signaling and call control

The information in this section describes the signaling and call control of E and M Type I and II trunks. The call is terminated and the trunk released by a disconnect message sent to the associated unit. Figure 138: Signaling orientation for tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks on page 440 shows the trunk signaling orientation for a tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

439

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 138: Signaling orientation for tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks

E and M Type I signaling

Figure 139: E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release on page 441 shows E and M Type I signaling patterns for incoming and outgoing calls. Figure 140: E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection on page 442 shows Type I signaling patterns on a tandem connection where the originating end is senderized and the route is over a CO trunk (not applicable to CCSA).

Idle state
For E and M signaling, in the idle state the M lead is ground and the E lead is an open circuit.

440

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Outgoing calls
Outgoing calls are processed as follows: The M lead changes from ground to battery. If answer supervision is provided by the far end, there is a change from open to ground on the E lead (ground detection).

Figure 139: E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

441

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 140: E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection

Incoming calls
The far-end initiates calls as follows: The ground is placed on the E lead in E and M signaling. Dial pulses are subsequently applied from the far-end as ground open on the E lead. If the far-end is equipped for sending, the system can operate in any mode (immediate start, delay dial, or wink start), as assigned on a start arrangement basis. See Table 182: Operation Mode on page 443. - In immediate start mode, there is no start signal from the called office. The seizure signal (off hook supervisory state) from the far-end should be at least 150 ms. At the

442

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

end of the seizure signal, the far-end can start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 70 ms minimum). - In delay dial mode, a 256-384 ms off hook/on hook signal is returned to the farend immediately after receipt of the seizure signal. When the far-end detects the on hook signal (start signal), the far-end can start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 70 ms minimum). - In wink start mode, within a 128256 ms period after receipt of the seizure signal from the far-end, the called office transmits a 250 ms, wink start, off hook/on hook signal to the calling office. Table 182: Operation Mode
Operation mode Immediate start Delay dial Wink start IMM DDL WNK Start arrangement

E and M Type II signaling

Figure 141: E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release on page 444 shows E and M Type II signaling patterns for incoming and outgoing calls.Figure 142: E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection on page 445 shows Type II signaling patterns for a tandem connection where the originating end is senderized and the route is over a CO trunk (CCSA not applicable). Type II signaling uses four leads: M, SB, E, and SG. Instead of changes of state between battery and ground (M signals) or open and ground (E signals), the trunk signals by closing the contacts between the lead pairs M and SB. Signals are received by detecting current flow between lead pairs E and SG. On incoming calls, the far end seizes the trunk by shorting the E and SG leads together. This transmits the ground from the SG lead to the E lead (in Type I signaling the ground to the E lead comes from the far-end). Dialing is done by opening and closing the E/SG contacts. Because of the SB and M leads are also used as the ESCG and ESC leads, respectively, for echo suppression, echo suppressor control cannot be used with Type II signaling. Note: M, SB, E, and SG designations are Electronic Industries Association and Telecommunications Industries Association (EIA/TIA) conventions. These leads are also known as MB, MA, EA, and EB, respectively.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

443

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 141: E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release

444

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Figure 142: E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection

Release control
Release control of a call made over a trunk is specified in LD 16. Disconnect supervision is specified for each trunk group independently. The two options available are EITHER or ORIGINATING party control. These can be specified for the end (near-end), or for the central office or other PBX end (far-end). Joint party control can also be specified for the far-end.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

445

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Duplex signaling
Duplex (DX) signaling makes use of the voice transmission leads for signaling as well as for voice transmission. For descriptive purposes, the lead pair Tip B/Ring B is designated the signaling pair. The other pair Tip A/Ring A conducts current in the opposite direction to balance the overall current flow between the near and far ends. During signaling, current flows through both Tip B and Ring B leads in the same direction. Table 183: DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release on page 446 and Table 184: DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release on page 446 show callconnection and take-down sequencing for DX signaling. Table 185: DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release on tandem connections on page 447 and Table 186: DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections on page 448 show sequencing where the E and M Trunk card is used in a tandem PBX. Table 183: DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release
Condition Idle Current in signaling lead No current flow State of trunk detector High High High

Seizure (dial tone from far-end: far-end ready Current flow for digits) Digits Current flow interrupted for each pulse No current flow Current flow No current flow

Far-end answers Far-end on hook first Network taken down and trunk idled when near-end goes on hook

Low High High Low High

Near-end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Far-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow

Table 184: DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release

Condition Idle Current in signaling lead No current flow State of trunk detector High Low

Seizure (dial tone to far-end: near-end ready Current flow for digits)

446

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Operation

Condition Digits

Current in signaling lead Current flow interrupted for each pulse No current flow Current flow No current flow

State of trunk detector Low-high-low for each pulse Low High High Low High

Near-end answers Far-end on hook first Network taken down and trunk idled

Near-end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Far-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow

Table 185: DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release on tandem connections
Condition Idle Seizure (far-end ready for digits) Dial CO/FX/WATS Current in signaling lead No current flow Current flow Current flow interrupted for each pulse No current flow State of trunk detector High High High

Stop sender

Low High

Go sender (universal service provided by far- Current flow end PBX if originating end is senderized) CO/FX/WATS offices ready for digits Stored Office DN digits Current flow interrupted for each pulse No current flow No current flow Current flow No current flow

High

Outpulsed Far end answers Far end on hook first Near end on hook, network taken down, trunk idled

Low Low High High Low High

Near end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Far end on hook, trunk idled No current flow

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

447

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Table 186: DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections
Condition Idle Current in signaling lead No current flow State of trunk detector High Low Low-high-low for each pulse

Seizure (Can be arranged for IS, DD, or WS) Current flow (near-end ready for digits) Dial CO/FX/WATS and office DN Current flow interrupted for each pulse

Stored digits outpulsed on CO/FX/WATS trunk after ground detection if a ground start, but after 3 seconds if a loop start If answer supervision: pseudo-answer supervision is sent approximately 13 seconds after last dial pulse received No current flow Low

If no answer supervision: CO end Current flow disconnects (if a CO ground start the trunk is idled and network taken down, but the incoming TIE trunk is held under control of the originating end) Originating end disconnects network taken No current flow down and trunk idled

Low

High

Note: * CO ground start: the trunk is idled and the network taken down, but the incoming tie trunk is controlled by the originating end.

Electrical specifications
Table 187: Electrical characteristics of E and M Trunk cards on page 448 lists the electrical characteristics of the trunk interface on the E and M Trunk card. Table 187: Electrical characteristics of E and M Trunk cards
Characteristic Signaling range Signaling type 4-wire trunk Type I 150 ohms Type II 300 ohms loop Type I, Type II 2-wire trunk Type I 150 ohms Type I

448

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Electrical specifications

Characteristic Far-end battery Near-end battery Ground potential difference

4-wire trunk 42 to 52.5 V dc 42.75 to 52.5 V dc 10 V dc

2-wire trunk 42 to 52.5 V dc 42.75 to 52.5 V dc 10 V dc 20K See pad table (Table 194: Pad switching algorithm on page 456) 600 ohms 600 ohms

Line leakage between E lead 20K and ground Effective loss See pad table (Table 194: Pad switching algorithm on page 456) 600 ohms N/A

Terminating impedance Balance impedance

Table 188: Electrical characteristics of trunk cards

Characteristic Nominal impedance Signaling range Signaling type Far-end battery Near-end battery Minimum loop current Ground potential difference Low DC loop resistance during outpulsing High DC loop resistance DID Trunk 600 or 900 ohms, (selected by software) 2450 ohms Loop -42 to -52.5 V N/A N/A + 10 V N/A N/A CO trunk 600 or 900 ohms, (selected by software) 1700 ohms Ground or loop start -42 to -52.5 V -42.75 to -52.5 V 20 mA +3V 300 ohms Ground start equal to or greater than 30 kS. Loop start equal to or greater than 5 MS

Line leakage

Equal to or greater than 30 Equal to or greater than 30 kS kS (Tip to Ring, Tip to GND, (Tip to Ring, Tip to GND, Ring Ring to GND). to GND) See pad table See pad table

Effective loss

Power requirements
Table 189: Power requirements on page 450 lists the power requirements for the E and M Trunk card.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

449

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Table 189: Power requirements

Voltage +15.0 V dc 15.0 V dc +8.5 V dc 48.0 V dc 5% 5% 2% 5 % Tolerance Max current 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 415 mA

Environmental specifications
Table 190: Environmental specifications on page 450 provides the environmental specifications for the E and M Trunk card. Table 190: Environmental specifications
Parameter Operating temperature Operating humidity Storage temperature Specifications 0 to +60 degrees C (32 to +140 degrees F), ambient 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) 40 to +70 degrees C (40 to +158 degrees F)

Foreign and surge voltage protection

The E and M Trunk card meets CS03 over-voltage (power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements.

Connector pin assignments

The E and M Trunk card brings the four analog trunks to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables. Telephone trunks connect to the E and M Trunk card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for line cards. A typical connection example is shown in Figure 143: E and M Trunk card - typical cross connection example on page 452. A list of the connections to the E and M Trunk card in the various 2-wire modes is shown in Table 191: E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-

450

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Connector pin assignments

wire modes on page 451. A list of the connections to the E and M Trunk card in the various 4-wire modes is shown in Table 192: E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 4-wire modes on page 451. See Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for complete I/O connector information and wire assignments for each tip/ring pair. Table 191: E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes
Trunk Number 0 2-wire Paging Mode Pin 12B 15B 1 16B 19B 2 62B 65B 3 66B 69B Signal Tip A Tip A Tip A Tip A Pin 12A 15A 16A 19A 62A 65A 66A 69A Signal Ring PG Ring PG Ring PG Ring PG Pin 12B 14B 16B 18B 62B 64B 66B 48B 2-wire Type I Mode Signal Tip E Tip E Tip E Tip E Pin 12A 14A 16A 18A 62A 64A 66A 68A Signal Ring M Ring M Ring M Ring M

Table 192: E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 4-wire modes
Trunk Number 0 4-wire Type I Mode Pin 12B 13B 14B 15B 1 16B 17B 18B 19B 2 62B 63B 64B 65B Signal TA RA E ECG TA RA E ECG TA RA E ECG Pin 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 18A 19A 62A 63A 64A 65A Signal TB RB M ESCG TB RB M ESCG TB RB M ESCG Pin 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B 19B 62B 63B 64B 65B 4-wire Type II Mode Signal TA RA EA MA TA RA EA MA TA RA EA MA Pin 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 18A 19A 62A 63A 64A 65A Signal TB RB EB MB TB RB EB MB TB RB EB MB

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

451

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Trunk Number 3

4-wire Type I Mode Pin 66B 67B 68B 69B Signal TA RA E ECG Pin 66A 67A 68A 69A Signal TB RB M ESCG Pin 66B 67B 68B 69B

4-wire Type II Mode Signal TA RA EA MA Pin 66A 67A 68A 69A Signal TB RB EB MB

Figure 143: E and M Trunk card - typical cross connection example

452

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

Configuration
Each of the four trunk circuits on the E and M Trunk card can be individually configured for trunk type, companding mode, and port-to-port loss compensation. Configuring the card requires both jumper changes and configuration software service entries. The locations of the jumpers are shown in Figure 144: E and M Trunk card - jumper locations on page 454.

Jumper settings
The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card serves various transmission requirements. The four units on the card can operate in A-Law or -Law companding modes, which are selected by service change entries. Each unit can be independently configured for 2-wire E and M, 4-wire E and M, and paging trunk types. The trunk type is selected by service change entries and jumper strap settings. See Table 193: E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings on page 454.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

453

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 144: E and M Trunk card - jumper locations

Table 193: E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings

Jumper (Note 1) Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk Type I Paging Type I 4-wire trunk Type II DX tip & ring pair Mrcv E xmt J1.X J2.X Off On Off On (Note 3) Off On Off On Pins 12 Off Ercv M xmt Pins 23 Off

454

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

Jumper (Note 1)

Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk Type I Paging Type I 4-wire trunk Type II DX tip & ring pair Mrcv E xmt Ercv M xmt (Note 4) Pins 12 (Note 4) On On On Pins 12

J3.X J4.X J5.X J6.X J7.X J8.X J9.X

Off Off Off Off Off Off Pins 23

Off Off Off Off Off Off Pins 23

Off Off Off Off Off Off Pins 23

Off Off Off Off Off Off Pins 23

(Note 4) Pins 23 (Note 4) On On On Pins 12

Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X through J9.X apply to all four units; "X" indicates the unit number, 03. Note: "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block. Note: Paging trunk mode is not zone selectable. Note: Jumper strap installed in this location only if external loop resistance is greater than 2500 ohms.

Software service entries

The trunk type is selected by making service change entries in Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance (LD 16). The companding mode is selected by making service change entries in Trunk Data Block (LD 14). Refer toTable 193: E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings on page 454 to select the proper values for the trunk type being employed.

Port-to-port loss configuration

Loss parameters are selected on the E and M Trunk card by a switchable pad controlled by CODEC emulation software. The pads settings are called "in" and "out." Pad settings are

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

455

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

determined by the three factors listed below (the first two are under direct user control; the third is controlled indirectly): Class of Service is assigned in LD 14. Facility termination is selected (2-wire or 4-wire) in LD 14 (the 2-wire setting provides 0.5 dB more loss in each direction of transmission for echo control). Note: Facilities associated with the Avaya Electronic Switched Network (ESN) are recommended to be 4-wire for optimum transmission; so, the 4-wire setting is generally referred to as the ESN setting. However, the 4-wire setting is not restricted to networks using the ESN feature. Conversely, the 2-wire setting, often called non-ESN, can be used on certain trunks in an ESN environment. Port-to-port connection loss is automatically set by software on the basis of the port type selected in LD 16; only the port type is set by the user. The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class of service assigned in LD 14. Transmission properties can be Via Net Loss (VNL) or non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL). The VNL class of service is assigned at the CLS prompt by typing VNL. The non-VNL class of service is assigned at the CLS prompt by typing TRC (Transmission Compensated) or NTC (Non-Transmission Compensated). Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as tie trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows: TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire non-VNL facility. NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or when impedance compensation is not provided. SeeTable 194: Pad switching algorithm on page 456 for the pad switching control for the various through connections and the actual port-to-port loss introduced for connections between the E and M Trunk card and any other IPE port designated as Port B. Figure 145: Pad orientation on page 457 shows the pad switching orientation. Table 194: Pad switching algorithm
Port B Port B pads Transmit D to A IPE line Universal trunk (TRC) N/A Out Receive A to D N/A Out E and M Trunk Pads Transmit D to A Out In Port-to-port loss (dB)

Receive A Port B to E E and M to to D and M Port B In In 2.5 0 3.5 0

456

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Applications

Port B

Port B pads Transmit D to A Receive A to D Out

E and M Trunk Pads Transmit D to A In

Port-to-port loss (dB)

Receive A Port B to E E and M to to D and M Port B Out 0 0

IPE TIE (VNL)

In

Note: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the system. Transmit is from the system to the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the E and M Trunk card). Receive is to the system from the external facility (analog-to-digital direction in the E and M Trunk card).

Figure 145: Pad orientation

Applications
The optional applications, features and signaling arrangements for each trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks. Refer to Avaya Features and Services (NN43001-106-B) for information about assigning features and services to trunks.

PAD switching
The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by class-of-service (COS) assignments in the trunk data block (LD 14). The assignment may be non-Via Net Loss (nonVNL) or via Net Loss (VNL). To ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to longhaul VNL (Tie) trunks, non-VNL trunks are assigned either Transmission Compensated (TRC) or Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) class-of-service.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

457

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

The TRC and NTC COS options determine the operation of the switchable pads contained in the trunk circuits. They are assigned as follows: TRC for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a four-wire non-VNL facility. NTC for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB or when impedance compensation is not provided. Table 195: Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB) on page 458 shows the insertion loss from IPE port to IPE port. Table 195: Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB)

Paging trunk operation

When used in the paging mode, a trunk is connected to a customer-provided paging amplifier system (not zone selectable). When the trunk is accessed by dial-up or attendant-key operation, it provides a loop closure across control leads PG and A. See Figure 146: Paging trunk operation on page 459. In a typical application, this transfers the input of the paging amplifier system to the transmission path of the trunk.

458

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Applications

Figure 146: Paging trunk operation

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

459

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

460

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 23: NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 461 Physical description on page 462 Functional description on page 462 Connector pin assignments on page 464 Configuring the QSDI paddle board on page 465 Applications on page 469

Introduction
The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) paddle board provides four RS-232-C serial ports. These ports allow communication between the system and four external devices, either DTE or DCE. The QSDI paddle board is normally used to connect the system to the system administration and maintenance terminal. It can also be used to connect the system to a background terminal (used in the hotel/motel environment), a modem, or to the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) or Call Detail Recording (CDR) features. The QSDI paddle board mounts to a special socket on the rear of the backplane of the following modules: NT5D21 Core/Network module NT6D39 CPU/Network module NT9D11 Core/Network module The QSDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the system options listed above. It does not support the 110 baud rate or the 20 mA current loop interface.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

461

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Physical description
The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit board measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.). See Figure 147: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board on page 463. The QSDI paddle board can be used in a system backplane for a total of four serial ports. Up to 12 other serial ports can be added by plugging standard serial cards into standard system slots. The serial ports on the card are addressed as a pair of consecutive addresses (0 and 1, 2 and 3, up to 14 and 15), using switches SW15 and SW16. The front edge of the card has four serial port connectors, an Enable/Disable switch (ENB DIS), and a red LED. The LED indicates the card status. It is lit when the following occurs: the ENB DIS switch is set to disable all four ports are disabled in software all four ports are not configured in the configuration record

Functional description
The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board has four asynchronous serial ports. These serial ports are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the system to a terminal, a printer, a modem, or to an other system processor. The QSDI paddle board design contains four Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to connect the UARTs to the system processor bus. See Figure 148: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board block diagram on page 464.

462

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Figure 147: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board

Other logic on the card includes baud rate generators, RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the switches and logic needed to configure each UART.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

463

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Figure 148: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board block diagram

System considerations
For Avaya Communication Server 1000 4.5 and 5.0, in dual-processor systems, the 2 card slots on the back of a CoreNet shelf supporting CP PII and CP PIV function regardless of which CPU is active. On Release 5.0 only the CP PII and CP PIV are supported. In Options 61C and 81C, CS 1000SG, and CS 1000MG, four NT8D41BB can be provisioned for a total of 16 SDI ports. One port is used for power monitoring, leaving 15 for customer use.

Connector pin assignments

The RS-232-C signals for port 1 through port 4 are brought out on connector J1 through J4 respectively. The pinouts for each port are identical to those for each of the other three ports. Table 196: Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 pin assignments on page 465 shows the pin assignment that applies to each connector.

464

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuring the QSDI paddle board

Table 196: Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 pin assignments

Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal DCD RD TD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS Purpose in DTE mode Data Carrier detect (Note 1) Transmitted data Received data Data terminal ready Signal Ground Data set ready (Note 1) Request to send (Not Used) Clear to send (Note 1) Purpose in DCE mode Data Carrier detect (Not used) Received data Transmitted data Data terminal ready (Note 2) Signal Ground Data set ready Request to send (Note 2) Clear to send

Note: In DTE mode the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the QSDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect to a terminal device (DTE). Note: In DCE mode the signals DTR and RTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the QSDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect to a modem device (DCE).

Configuring the QSDI paddle board

Configuring the QSDI paddle board to work in a system consists of setting these option switches for each serial port: Baud rate Port address DTE/DCE mode The QSDI paddle board has fourteen option switches, SW213, SW15-16. Figure 147: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board on page 463 identifies the location of option switches on the QSDI paddle board. Learn how to set these switches in the following sections. Once the board is installed, the system software must be configured to recognize it. Instructions for doing this are found in the section titled Software service changes on page 468.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

465

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Option switch settings

Baud rate
Switches SW13, SW10, SW11, and SW12 determine the baud rate for ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See the settings for these switches in Table 197: NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings on page 466. Table 197: NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings
Baud rate Baud Clock (kHz) 2.40 4.80 9.60 19.20 38.40 76.80 153.60 307.20 SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2), SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4) 1 150 300 600 1,200 2,400 4,800 9,600 19,200* * For future use. on on on on on on on on 2 off on off on off on off on 3 on off off on on off off on 4 on on on off off off off on

Table 198: NT8D41BA address switch settings

SW15 SW16 Device Port 1 Port 3 0 2 4 pair 6 8 addresses 10 12 14 Port 2 Port 4 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1* E E E E E E E E 2+ X X X X X X X X 3 off off off off off off off off Switch settings 4 off off off off off off off off 5 off off off off off off off off 6 off off off off on on on on 7 off off on on off off on on 8 off on off on off on off on

466

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuring the QSDI paddle board

SW15 SW16

Port 1 Port 3

Port 2 Port 4 1* 2+ 3

Switch settings 4 5 6 7 8

* To enable ports 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. To enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON. + For each X, the setting for this switch makes no difference, because it is not used.

Address
Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the card always address the four UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 14 and 15. The settings for both switches are shown in Table 199: NT8D41BA address switch settings on page 467. To avoid system problems, switches SW15 and SW16 must not be configured identically. Figure 147: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board on page 463 displays SW15 and SW16. Table 199: NT8D41BA address switch settings
SW15 SW16 Device Port 1 Port 3 0 2 4 pair 6 8 addresses 10 12 14 Port 2 Port 4 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1* E E E E E E E E 2+ X X X X X X X X 3 off off off off off off off off Switch settings 4 off off off off off off off off 5 off off off off off off off off 6 off off off off on on on on 7 off off on on off off on on 8 off on off on off on off on

* To enable ports 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. To enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON. For each X, the setting for this switch makes no difference, because it is not used.

DTE/DCE/Fiber mode
Each serial port can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card. Instructions for setting the switches SW2, SW3, SW4, SW5, SW6, SW7, SW8, and SW9 are shown in Table 200: NT8D41BA DTE/DCE/ Fiber switch settings on page 468. Figure 147: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board on page 463 shows the location of these switches on the paddleboard.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

467

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Table 200: NT8D41BA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings

Mode 1 DTE (terminal) DCE (modem) NT1P61 (Fiber) Port 1 SW 3 2 3 4 5 6 1 Port 1 SW 2 2 3 4 5 6

on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off Port 2 SW 5 Port 2 SW4

DTE (terminal) DCE (modem) NT1P61 (Fiber)

on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off Port 3 SW 7 Port 3 SW 6

DTE (terminal) DCE (modem) NT1P61 (Fiber)

on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off Port 4 SW 9 Port 4 SW 8

DTE (terminal) DCE (modem) NT1P61 (Fiber)

on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off

Software service changes

Once the NT8D841BA QSDI paddle board is installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it, using the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for running this program are found in Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611). Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the Configuration Record program LD 17 are shown in Table 201: LD 17 - Prompts to configure the NT8D841Ba paddle board. on page 468 These parameters must be set for each port if both ports are being used. Table 201: LD 17 - Prompts to configure the NT8D841Ba paddle board.
Prompt REQ: TYPE: Response CHG ADAN Change configuration Configuration type Description

468

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Applications

Prompt ADAN CTYPE DES USER

Response NEW TTY x NEW PRT x SDI4 XQSDI xxx

Description Define a new system terminal (printer) port as device x, where x = 0 to 15. Quad port card Quad density QSDI paddle board. Enter the user of port x. The values that can be entered depend on the software being used. See the Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611) for details. Port is used for the system monitor.

XSM

(NO) YES

Applications
The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is used to connect the switch to a variety of communication devices, printers, and peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to either of the card's two serial ports. The standard application for the paddle board is to connect the switch to the system console. This can be either a direct connection if the console is located near the switch, or through a modem for remote maintenance. Bell 103/212 compatible dumb modems are recommended to connect a remote data terminal. If a smart modem (such as a Hayes modem) is used, configure the modem for the dumb mode of operation (Command Recognition OFF, Command Echo OFF) before connecting the modem to the asynchronous port. The serial data interface connectors on the paddle board are not RS-232-C standard DB-25 connectors. The NT8D84AA interface cable is used to adapt the paddle board to a nonstandard pinout DB-9 connector (normally located on the I/O panel). The NT8D93 cable is then used to connect the non-standard DB-9 connector to a peripheral that uses a RS-232-C standard DB-25 connector. See Figure 149: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling on page 470. The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) paddle board provides four RS-232-C serial ports. These ports allow communication between the Meridian 1 system and four external devices, either DTE or DCE. The QSDI paddle board is normally used to connect the Meridian 1 system to the system administration and maintenance terminal. It can also be used to connect the system to a background terminal (used in the hotel/motel environment), a modem, or to the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) or Call Detail Recording (CDR) features.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

469

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

The QSDI paddle board mounts to a special socket on the rear of the backplane of the following modules: NT5D21 Core/Network Module for system Options 51C, 61C, and 81C NT6D39 CPU/Network Module for system Options 51 and 61 NT9D11 Core/Network Module for system Option 61C

Figure 149: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling

The QSDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the Meridian 1 system options listed above. It does not support the 110 baud rate or the 20 mA current loop interface.

470

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Physical description
The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit board measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.). See Figure 150: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board on page 472. The QSDI paddle board can be used in a system backplane for a total of four serial ports. Up to 12 other serial ports can be added by plugging standard serial cards into standard system slots. The serial ports on the card are addressed as a pair of consecutive addresses (0 and 1, 2 and 3, up to 14 and 15), using switches SW15 and SW16. The front edge of the card has four serial port connectors, an Enable/Disable switch (ENB/ DIS), and a red LED. The LED indicates the card status. It is lit when the following occurs: the ENB/DIS switch is set to disable all four ports are disabled in software all four ports are not configured in the configuration record

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

471

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Figure 150: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board

Functional description
The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board has four asynchronous serial ports. These serial ports are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the Meridian 1 system to a terminal, a printer, a modem, or to an other system processor. The QSDI paddle board design contains four Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to connect the UARTs to the system processor bus. See Figure 151: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board block diagram on page 473. Other logic on the

472

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

card includes baud rate generators, RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the switches and logic needed to configure each UART.

Figure 151: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board block diagram

System considerations
In dual-processor Meridian 1 systems, the QSDI paddle board behaves differently depending on which backplane socket it is installed. Installing the paddle board into a socket in the network area of the backplane allows it to work when either of the system processors is active. Installing the paddle board into a socket in the CPU area of the backplane allows it to work only when that CPU is active. The QSDI paddle board is normally installed into a socket in the network area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the system processors. This is necessary because the active CPU switches automatically each night at midnight and whenever a fault occurs on the active CPU card. The QSDI paddle board can also be installed into a socket in the CPU area of the backplane (supported in NT6D39AA shelves only). This is done when performing maintenance or an upgrade on the Meridian 1 system. The QSDI paddle board is plugged into the CPU that is not the active system CPU. One of the serial ports on the QSDI paddle board is then connected to a maintenance terminal and the CPU board is put into maintenance mode. Diagnostics can then be run from the maintenance

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

473

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

terminal without having to stop the system. This is also used to perform a parallel reload of the system software without affecting the operation of the switch.

Connector pin assignments

The RS-232-C signals for port 1 through port 4 are brought out on connector J1 through J4 respectively. The pinouts for each port are identical to those for each of the other three ports. Table 202: Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 pin assignments on page 474 shows the pin assignment that applies to each connector. Table 202: Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 pin assignments
Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode Data Carrier detect (Not used) Received data Transmitted data Data terminal ready (Note 2) Signal Ground Data set ready Request to send (Note 2) Clear to send

DCD Data Carrier detect (Note 1) RD Transmitted data TD Received data DTR Data terminal ready GND Signal Ground DSR Data set ready (Note 1) RTS Request to send (Not Used) CTS Clear to send (Note 1)

Note: In DTE mode the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the QSDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect to a terminal device (DTE). Note: In DCE mode the signals DTR and RTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the QSDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect to a modem device (DCE).

474

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuring the QSDI paddle board

Configuring the QSDI paddle board

Configuring the QSDI paddle board to work in a Meridian 1 system consists of setting these option switches for each serial port: Baud rate Port address DTE/DCE mode The QSDI paddle board has fourteen option switches, SW213, SW15-16. Figure 150: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board on page 472 identifies the location of option switches on the QSDI paddle board. Learn how to set these switches in the following sections. Once the board is installed, the system software must be configured to recognize it. Instructions for doing this are found in the section titled Software service changes on page 468.

Option switch settings

Baud rate
Switches SW13, SW10, SW11, and SW12 determine the baud rate for ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See the settings for these switches in Table 203: NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings on page 475. Table 203: NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings
Baud rate Baud Clock (kHz) SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2), SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4) 1 150 300 600 1,200 2,400 4,800 9,600 19,200* * For future use. 2.40 4.80 9.60 19.20 38.40 76.80 153.60 307.20 on on on on on on on on 2 off on off on off on off on 3 on off off on on off off on 4 on on on off off off off on

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

475

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Address
Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the card always address the four UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 14 and 15. The settings for both switches are shown in Table 204: NT8D41BA address switch settings on page 476. To avoid system problems, switches SW15 and SW16 must not be configured identically. Figure 150: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board on page 472 displays SW15 and SW16. Table 204: NT8D41BA address switch settings
SW15 SW16 Device pair Port 1 Port 3 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 Port 2 Port 4 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1* E E E E E E E E 2+ X X X X X X X X Switch settings 3 4 5 6 7 8 off off off off off off off off off off off on off off off off on off off off off off on on off off off on off off off off off on off on off off off on on off off off off on on on

addresses

* To enable ports 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. To enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON. For each X, the setting for this switch makes no difference, because it is not used.

DTE/DCE/Fiber mode
Each serial port can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card. Instructions for setting the switches SW2, SW3, SW4, SW5, SW6, SW7, SW8, and SW9 are shown in Table 205: NT8D41BA DTE/DCE/ Fiber switch settings on page 476. Figure 150: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board on page 472 shows the location of these switches on the paddleboard. Table 205: NT8D41BA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings
Mode 1 DTE (terminal) DCE (modem) NT1P61 (Fiber) Port 1 SW 3 2 3 4 5 6 1 Port 1 SW 2 2 3 4 5 6

on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off

476

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Applications

Mode 1

Port 1 SW 3 2 3 4 5 6 1 Port 2 SW 5

Port 1 SW 2 2 3 4 5 6 Port 2 SW4

DTE (terminal) DCE (modem) NT1P61 (Fiber)

on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off Port 3 SW 7 Port 3 SW 6

DTE (terminal) DCE (modem) NT1P61 (Fiber)

on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off Port 4 SW 9 Port 4 SW 8

DTE (terminal) DCE (modem) NT1P61 (Fiber)

on on on off on off off on off on off on off off off on off on on off on off on off on on on on on off on on on off on off

Software service changes

Once the NT8D841BA QSDI paddle board is installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it, using the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for running this program are found in Software Input/Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611). Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the Configuration Record program LD 17 are shown in Table 13: TDS tone tests on page 85. These parameters must be set for each port if both ports are being used.

Applications
The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is used to connect the Meridian 1 switch to a variety of communications devices, printers, and peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to either of the card's two serial ports. The standard application for the paddle board is to connect the Meridian 1 switch to the system console. This can be either a direct connection if the console is located near the switch, or through a modem for remote maintenance. Bell 103/212 compatible dumb modems are recommended to connect a remote data terminal. If a smart modem (such as a Hayes modem) is used, configure the modem for the dumb mode

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

477

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

of operation (Command Recognition OFF, Command Echo OFF) before connecting the modem to the asynchronous port. The serial data interface connectors on the paddle board are not RS-232-C standard DB-25 connectors. The NT8D84AA interface cable is used to adapt the paddle board to a nonstandard pinout DB-9 connector (normally located on the I/O panel). The NT8D93 cable is then used to connect the non-standard DB-9 connector to a peripheral that uses a RS-232-C standard DB-25 connector. See Figure 149: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling on page 470.

Figure 152: NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling

478

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 24: NTAG26 XMFR card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 479 MF signaling on page 479

Introduction
The XMFR (Extended Multi-frequency receiver) card is used to receive MF digit information. Connections are made between a PBX and a central office. The XMFR card can only operate in systems using -law companding. You can install this card in any IPE slot.

MF signaling
The MF feature allows the system to receive digits for 911 or feature group D applications.

Signaling levels
MF signaling uses pairs of frequencies to represent digits. Table 206: MF frequency values on page 479 lists the frequency values used for received signals. Table 206: MF frequency values
Digit 1 Backward direction DOD-Tx, DID-Rx 700 Hz + 900 Hz

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

479

NTAG26 XMFR card

Digit 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 KP ST STP(ST') ST2P(ST") ST3P(ST")

Backward direction DOD-Tx, DID-Rx 700 HZ + 1100 Hz 900 Hz + 1100 Hz 700 Hz + 1300 Hz 900 Hz + 1300 Hz 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz 700 Hz + 1500 Hz 900 Hz +1500 Hz 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz 1100 Hz + 1700 Hz 1500 Hz + 1700 Hz 900 Hz + 1700 Hz 1300 Hz + 1700 Hz 700 Hz + 1700 Hz

XMFR receiver specifications

Table 207: XMFR receiver specifications on page 480 provides the operating requirements for the NTAG26 circuit card. Table 207: XMFR receiver specifications
Coding: Input sensitivity: Frequency sensitivity: Amplitude Twist: Signal Duration: KP Signal Duration: Signal Interruption Bridge: Mu-Law must accept: 0 to -25 dBmO must reject: -35 to dBmO must accept: f +/- (1.5% + 5Hz) must accept: difference of 6dB between frequencies must accept: > 30 ms must reject: < 10 ms must accept: > 55 ms may accept: > 30 ms must reject: < 10 ms must ignore: < 10 ms

Time Shift between 2 frequencies: must accept: < 4 ms (Envelop for start/stop) Coincidence between 2 frequencies: must reject: < 10 ms

480

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

MF signaling

Intersignal Pause: Maximum Dialling Speed: Noise Rejection: Error Rate in White Noise Immunity to Impulse Noise

must accept: > 25 ms must accept: 10 signals per second Better than: < 1/2500 calls Test: 10 digit calls nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms KP duration 100 ms SNR = -20 dB all digits Better than: < 1/2500 calls Test: 10 digit calls nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO ON/OFF = 50ms/50ms KP duration 100 ms SNR = -12 dBs all digits ATT Digit Simulation Test, Tape #201 from PUB 56201 Better than: < 1/2500 calls Test: 10 digit calls nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms KP duration 100 ms 60 Hz signal @ 81 dBrnc0 (-9dBm) or 180 Hz signal @ 68 dBrnco (-22dBm) all digits Must tolerate @A-B and @B-A modulation products with a power sum 28 dB below each frequency component level of the signals. The receiver must not respond to signals prior to KP. Remain unlocked until ST, STP, ST2P, or ST3P is received. After the initial KP, subsequent KP's are ignored while in unlocked mode. If more than two valid frequencies are detected, no digit is reported to the CPU.

Error Rate from Power Lines

Tolerate Intermodulation:

KP: KP activation

Multiple KP's Excessive Components:

The XMFR receiver specifications conform to the following: TR-NPL-000258, Compatibility Information for F.G.D. switched access service, Bell Communication Research Technical Reference, Issue 1.0, October 1985. TR-NPL-000275, Notes on the BOC Intra-LATA Networks, Bell Communication Research Technical Reference, Chapter 6, 1986.

Physical specifications
The physical specifications required by the NTAG26 XMFR circuit card are shown in the following table. Table 208: Physical specifications
Dimensions Faceplate LED Power requirements Height: 12.5 in. (320 mm) Depth: 10.0 in. (255 mm) Thickness: 7/8 in. (22.25 mm) Lit when the circuit card is disabled 1.1 Amps typical

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

481

NTAG26 XMFR card

Environmental considerations

Meets the environment of Meridian 1 systems

482

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 25: NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 483 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card on page 483

Introduction
The NTAK02 Serial Data Interface/D-channel (SDI/DCH) digital trunk card is supported in the Media Gateway only for the ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) D-channel. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. It is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four NTAK02 SDI/DCH cards are supported in a Media Gateway.

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

The optional SDI/DCH card provides up to four serial I/O ports, which are grouped into two pairs: port 0 and port 1 port 2 and port 3 Ports 1 and 3 are configured as DCH. Ports 0 and 2 are configured as SDI (not supported). See Table 209: Port configurations on page 483. Each pair is controlled by a switch, as shown in Table 210: Switch settings on page 484. Table 209: Port configurations
Port 0 Port 1 SDI (not supported) DCH

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

483

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

Port 2 Port 3

SDI (not supported) DCH

Table 210: Switch settings

Port 0 SDI (not supported) SDI (not supported) Port 2 SDI (not supported) SDI (not supported) DCH DCH ESDI DCH DCH ESDI Port 3 Port 1 SW 1-1 OFF OFF ON SW 1-3 OFF OFF ON SW 1-2 OFF ON ON SW 1-4 OFF ON ON

Note: Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS can replace the DCH function in the U.K. Two ports offer the option for DTE/DCE configuration. This option is selected from a jumper on the card. Table 211: Jumper settings on page 484 shows the jumper settings. Table 211: Jumper settings
Port 0 1 2 3 Jumper location J10 J7J6 J5 J4 J3 Strap for Strap for DTE DCE C-B C - BC B C-B C - BC B B-A B - AB - A B-A B - AB - A J2 J1 C - BC B B - AB - A J9 J8 C - BC B B - AB - A Jumper location RS422 RS232

Connecting to the ports

External devices are connected to the SDI/DCH card by the following: the NTAK19FB four-port SDI cable. This cable does not have to be terminated at the cross connect terminal because it is equipped with connectors. the NE-A25-B cable. Terminate the NE-A25-B cable at the cross connect terminal. Tables Table 212: NTAK02 pinouts - Port 0 at the cross-connect terminal on page 485 through

484

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

Table 215: NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 3 on page 486 give the pinouts for the SDI/DCH card. Table 212: NTAK02 pinouts - Port 0 at the cross-connect terminal
RS232 Cable Pair 1T1R 2T2R 3T3R 4T4R 5T5R Color W-BLBL-W W-OO-W W-GG-W W-BRBRW W-SS-W DTE 0DTR DSRDCD RTSCTS RXTX SG Signal DCE 0DCD CH/CIDTR CTSRTS TXRX SG Designations I=Input O=Output DTE O II OI IO DCE I OO IO OI

Table 213: NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 1

RS422 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output DTE O OO II OI II DCE I II OO IO OO RS232 Designations I=Input O=Output DTE O II OI II DCE I OO IO OO Signal

Pair 5T5 R 6T6 R 7T7 R 8T8 R 9T9 R

Color W-SSW RBLBL-R R-OOR R-GGR RBRBRR

DTE SCTEA SCTEB DTR DSRDC D

DCE SCTA SCTBD CD CH/ CIDTR

DTE

DCE

SCT SCT CH/ DCD CIDTR DSRD CD RTSC TS SCRS CT RXDT XD CH/ CIDTR CTSR TS SCT

RTSCT CTSRTS S SCRAS CTA SCRBS CTB RXDAT XDA SCTEA RXCA SCTEB RXCB TXDAR XDA TXDBR XDB

10T1 R-SS-R 0R 11T1 1R BKBLBLBK

II IO

OO OI

IO

OI

TXDR XD

12T1 BK-OO- RXDBT 2R BK XDB

IO

OI

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

485

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

RS422 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output DTE DCE

RS232 Designations I=Input O=Output DTE DCE Signal

Pair 25T2 5R

Color V-SS-V

DTE SG

DCE SG

DTE SG

DCE SG

Table 214: NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 2

RS422 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output DTE DCE RS232 Designations I=Input O=Output DTE O II DCE I OO Signal

Pair

Color

DTE

DCE

DTE

DCE

13T1 BK-G G3R BK 14T1 4R 15T1 5R 16T1 6R 17T1 7R BKBRBRBK BK-SSBK Y-BLBLY Y-OO-Y

DTR DCD DSRD CD RTSC TS RXTX SG CH/ CIDTR CTSR TS TXDR XD SG

OI IO O

IO OI I

Table 215: NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 3

RS422 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output DTE O OO II OI DCE I II OO IO RS232 Designations I=Input O=Output DTE O II OI DCE I OO IO Signal

Pair 17T1 7R 18T1 8R

Color Y-OO-Y Y-GG-Y

DTE SCTE A SCTE BDTR DSRD CD RTSC TS

DCE SCTA SCTBDC D CH/ CIDTR CTSRTS

DTE SCT

DCE SCT

CH/ DCD CIDTR DSRD CD RTSC TS CH/ CIDTR CTSR TS

19T1 Y-BRBR9R Y 20T2 0R Y-SS-Y

486

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

RS422 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output DTE II II IO IO DCE OO OO OI OI

RS232 Designations I=Input O=Output DTE II IO DCE OO OI Signal

Pair 21T2 1R 22T2 2R 23T2 3R 24T2 4R 25T2 5R

Color V-BLBLV V-OO-V V-GG-V VBRBR-V V-SS-V

DTE SCRA SCTA SCRB SCTB RXDA TXDA RXDB TXDB SG

DCE SCTEAR XCA SCTEBR XCB TXDARX DA TXDBRX DB SG

DTE SCRS CT RXDT XD SG

DCE SCT TXDR XD SG

Characteristics of the low speed port

Ports 0 and 2 are asynchronous, low speed ports. They transfer data to and from the line one bit at a time. The characteristics of the low speed port are as follows: Baud rate: 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19,200 Default = 1200 Parity: Odd, even, none Default = none Stop bits: 1, 1.5, 2 Default = 1 Flow control: XON/XOFF, CTS, non. Default = none Duplex: Full Interface: RS-232-D Data bits: 5, 6, 7, 8 Default = 8

Characteristics of the high speed port

Ports 1 and 3 are synchronous, high speed ports with the following characteristics: Baud rate: 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19,200; 56,000; 64,000 Data bit: Transparent (1) Duplex: Full

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

487

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

Clock: Internal or external Interface: RS-232-D, RS-422-A

488

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 26: NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 489 Physical description on page 490 Functional description on page 493 Architecture on page 493

Introduction
The NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI digital trunk card is a standard-size IPE circuit card. The NTAK09 provides 1.5Mb ISDN primary rate interface and digital trunk interface capability. The NTAK09 can be equipped with two daughterboards: the NTAK20 clock controller and the NTAK93/NTBK51 D-channel handler interface. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four digital trunk cards are supported in each Media Gateway. In North America, the NTAK09 can be replaced by the NTRB21 TMDI (DTI/PRI/DCH) card, which is described in NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card on page 649. Contact your system supplier or your Avaya representative to verify that this card is supported in your area. Important: Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

489

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

Physical description
The DTI/PRI card uses a 9:5" by 12.5" multilayer printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. The clock controller and D-channel daughterboards are fastened by standoffs and connectors. See Figure 153: NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card on page 490.

Figure 153: NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card

The NTAK09 DTI/PRI card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are associated with the NTAK09 card. The remaining two LEDs are associated with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards. The first five LEDs operate as follows: During system power up, the LEDs are on. When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash three times and then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 216: NTAK09 LED states on page 490. Table 216: NTAK09 LED states
LED DIS State On (Red) Off Definition The NTAK09 circuit card is disabled. The NTAK09 is not in a disabled state.

490

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

LED ACT

State On (Green) Off

Definition The NTAK09 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states exist, the card is not disabled, nor is it in a loopback state. An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card is disabled. See the other faceplate LEDs for more information. A red-alarm state is detected. No red alarm. A yellow alarm state is detected. No yellow alarm. NTAK09 is in loop-back mode. NTAK09 is not in loop-back mode.

RED

On (Red) Off

YEL

On (Yellow) Off

LBK

On (Green) Off

NTAK09 DTI/PRI power on self-test

When power is applied to the NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card, the card performs a self-test. The LEDs directly associated with the NTAK09 circuit card are DIS, ACT, RED, YEL, and LBK. The clock controller LED is also included in the power on self-test. Table 217: NTAK09 LED states during self-test on page 491 provides the state of the NTAK09 LEDs during the self-test procedure. Table 217: NTAK09 LED states during self-test
Action Power up system Self-test in progress LED State Top five LEDs light for eleven seconds. Top five LEDs go out for one second. If the self-test passes, the top five LEDs flash on and off three times. If the self-test detects a partial failure, the top five LEDs flash on and off five times. When the self-test is completed, the LEDs are set to their appropriate states.

NTAK20 power on self-test

The clock controller daughterboard LED is the second LED from the bottom on the faceplate of the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card. When power is applied to the NTAK20 clock controller, the LED is initially off for two seconds. If the self-test passes, the LED turns red and flashes on and off twice.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

491

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

When the self-test is completed, the LED remains red until the clock controller is enabled. When enabled, the clock controller LED either turns green or flashes green.

NTAK93 self-test
The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard LED is the bottom LED on the faceplate of the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card. The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard does not perform a self-test when power is applied to it. When power is applied, it turns red and remain steadily lit, indicating the DCH is disabled. When the DCH is enabled, the LED turns green and remains steadily lit. Self-tests of the NTAK93 daughterboard are invoked manually by commands in LD 96.

DTI/PRI local self-test

The local self-test, also called a local loopback test, checks speech path continuity, zero code suppression, remote alarm detection, and A & B bit signalling. This test is performed manually on a per-loop or per-channel basis. The local loopback test performs a local logical loopback and does not require any external loopback of the T1 signal.

Restrictions and limitations

The DCHI and DTI/PRI must be disabled before performing the self-test on the entire DTI/ PRI card. Individual channels must be disabled before performing a self test on a particular channel.

Power requirements
The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2 amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V and 50 mA on 12 V.

Foreign and surge voltage protection

Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T1 carrier facility and the system. For public T1 facilities, this protection is provided by the local operating company. In a private T1 facility environment (a campus, for example), the NTAK92 protection assembly can be used. The NTAK09 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.

492

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Functional description
NTAK09 provides the following features and functions: configurable parameters, including A-Law and -Law operation, digital pads on a per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe formats AMI or B8ZS line coding 1.5 Mb Clock recovery and distribution of reference clocks DG2 or FDL yellow alarm methods card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LEDs automatic alarm monitoring and handling Card-LAN for maintenance communication loopback capabilities for both near-end and far-end echo canceler interface integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can be mixed on the same PRI) faceplate monitor jacks for T1 interface configurable D-channel data rate with 64 Kbps, 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps inverted. self-test

Architecture
Signaling interface
The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages in both directions of transmission are three bytes long.

Interconnection
The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04 1.5 Mb carrier cable. The NTBK04 is twenty feet long. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension, is also available.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

493

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

Microprocessor
The NTAK09 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the following major tasks: Task handler: also referred to as an executive, the task handler provides orderly perchannel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering constraints. Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call. Receive voice: inserts digital pads and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is originating the call. T-Link data: a set of transmit and receive vectored subroutines which provides T-Link protocol conversion to/from the DM-DM protocol. Receive ABCD filtering: filters and debounces the receive ABCD bits and provides change of state information to the system. Diagnostics Self-test

Digital pad
The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad accommodates both 255-law and ALaw coding. There are 32 combinations each for 255 to 255, 255 to A-Law, A-Law to 255, and A-Law to A-Law. These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level plan. See Table 218: Digital pad values and offset allocations on page 494. Table 218: Digital pad values and offset allocations
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PAD set 0 0dB 2dB 3dB 4dB 5dB 6.1dB 8dB 1dB PAD set 1 7db 8db 9db 10db 0.6db 7db 9db 10db

494

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

Offset 8 9 A B C D E F

PAD set 0 3dB 4dB idle code, 7F unassigned code, FF 1dB 2dB 5db 6db

PAD set 1 11db 12db 3db 14db spare spare spare spare

D-channel interface
The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps maximum, full-duplex, serial bit-stream configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output, transmit data input, receive clock output, and transmit clock output. The receive and transmit clocks can vary slightly from each other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks. Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes: 56 Kbps 64 Kbps clear 64 Kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted) DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as the PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot be established however, unless the PRI loop is enabled. On the NTAK09 use switch 1 and position 1 to select either the D-channel feature or the DPNSS feature, as follows: OFF = D-channel ON = DPNSS (U.K.)

DS-1 Carrier interface

Transmitter
The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external digital facility. The DS1 transmit equalizer enables the cabling distance to extend from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

495

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

switch selectable through dip-switches. The settings are shown in Table 219: NTAK09 switch settings on page 496. Table 219: NTAK09 switch settings
Switch Setting Distance to Digital CrossConnect 0 - 133 feet 133 - 266 feet 266 - 399 feet 399 - 533 feet 533 - 655 feet 1 DCH F/W Off Off Off Off Off 2 (LEN 0) Off On Off On Off 3 (LEN 1) Off On On Off Off 4 (LEN 2) On Off Off Off Off

Receiver
The receiver extracts data and clock from an incoming data stream and outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst case DSX-1 signal levels, the line receiver operates correctly with up to 655 feet of ABAM cable between the card and the external DS1 signal source.

Connector pinout
The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15-position male D-type connector. See Table 220: DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable on page 496. Table 220: DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable
From 50-pin MDF connector pin 48 pin 23 pin 25 pin 49 pin 24 To DB-15 pin 1 pin 9 pin 2 pin 3 pin 11 Signal name T R FGND T1 R1 Description transmit tip to network transmit ring to network frame ground receive tip from network receive ring from network

Clock controller interface

The clock controller interface provides the recovered clock from the external digital facility to the clock controller daughterboard through the backplane. Depending on the equipped state

496

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

of the clock controller, the clock controller interface enables or disables the appropriate reference clock source, in conjunction with software. Important: Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality.

Clock rate converter

The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL synchronizes the 1.5 Mb DS1 clock to the 2.56 Mb system clock through the common multiple of 8 kHz by using the main frame synchronization signal.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

497

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

498

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 27: NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 499 Physical description on page 500 Functional description on page 501 Architecture on page 502

Introduction
The NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card is a digital trunk card that provides an IPE-compatible 2.0 Mb DTI interface. This circuit card includes an on-board clock controller that can be manually switched in or out of service. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four digital trunk cards are supported in each Media Gateway. Important: Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

499

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

Physical description
The 2 Mb DTI pack uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5", multi-layer printed circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8" wide and contains six LEDs. The LEDs operate as follows: After the card is plugged in, the LEDs (a-e) are turned on by the power-up circuit. The clock controller LED is independently controlled by its own microprocessor. After initialization, the LEDs (a-e) flash three times (0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off) and then individual LEDs go into appropriate states, as shown in Table 221: NTAK10 LED states on page 500. Table 221: NTAK10 LED states
LED DIS State On (Red) Off OOS On (Yellow) Off NEA On (Yellow) Off FEA On (Yellow) Off LBK On (Yellow) Off CC On (Red) On (Green) Flashing (Green) Off Definition The NTAK10 circuit card is disabled. The NTAK10 is not in a disabled state. The NTAK10 is in an out-of-service state. The NTAK10 is not in an out-of-service state. A near end alarm state is detected. No near end alarm. A far end alarm state is detected. No far end alarm. NTAK10 is in loop-back mode. NTAK10 is not in loop-back mode. The clock controller is switched on and disabled. The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a reference or is in free-run mode. The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the primary reference. The clock controller is switched off. Note: See Clock controller interface on page 506 in this chapter for more on tracking and free-run operation.

500

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Power requirements
The 2MB DTI obtains its power from the backplane. It draws less than 2 A on +5 V, 50 mA on +15 V and 50 mA on 15 V.

Environment
The NTAK10 card meets all applicable Avaya operating specifications.

Functional description
The NTAK10 provides the following features and functions: a clock controller that can be switched in as an option software-selectable A/law operation software-selectable digital pads on a per channel basis frame alignment and multiframe alignment detection frame and multiframe pattern generation CRC-4 transmission and reception (software selectable) card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LEDs Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) counting outpulsing of digits on any of the ABCD bits Card-LAN for maintenance communication per-channel and all-channel loopback capabilities for near-end and far-end self-test download of incoming ABCD validation times from software warm SYSLOAD (TS16 AS16 transmitted)

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

501

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

Applicability to France
Features specific to DTI requirements for France are implemented in firmware, and are switchaccessed. These are: transmission and reception of alarm indication signaling (AIS) in TS16 such as card disabled and warm SYSLOAD France-specific PPM counting decadic dialing France-specific alarm report and error handling

Architecture
The main functional blocks of the NTAK10 card architecture include: DS-30X interface signaling interface three microprocessors digital pad Card-LAN interface carrier interface clock controller interface

DS-30X interface
The NTAK10 card interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32 byte-interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in a 10 message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps).

Transmit data
To transmit data on the carrier, the incoming serial bit stream from the NTAK02 circuit card is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes. The signaling bits are extracted by the signaling interface circuitry. Digital Pad: The parallel data is presented to the pad PROM. The PROM contains pad values, idle code, and A/-law conversion. They can be set independently for incoming and outgoing

502

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

voice on a per channel basis. Four conversion formats are provided: A-law to A-law, A-law to -law, -law to A-law, -law to -law. Each of these four formats has up to 32 unique pad values. The NTAK10 card provides the pad values of -10, -9, -8, -7, -6,-5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 0.6, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 dB (also idle and unassigned code). A negative pad is a positive gain. The pad PROM output is converted from parallel to serial format and passed on to a multiplexer, which passes PCM/data, TS0, and TS16 information. The FAS pattern is sent in even TS0s, while in odd TS0s alarm information is sent. The multiplexer output is fed to the carrier interface which can forward it to the carrier or perform per channel loopback.

Receive data
To receive data, PCM/Data from the carrier interface is converted from serial to parallel, is buffered, and is fed to the pad prom. It then sent onto the DS-30X interface, where signaling information from the signaling interface circuitry is multiplexed.

DS-30X microprocessor
The DS-30X is a utility processor, responsible for the following tasks: controlling the DS-30X interface receiving and decoding of messages and taking appropriate action transmitting TS16 messages to the TS16 microprocessor receiving TS16 messages from the TS16 microprocessor and passing these messages to the A07 providing the 19.2 Kbps serial interface to the Card-LAN controlling LEDs downloading Local Calling Areas (LCAs) monitoring errors and alarms detecting the change of state in TS0, and outputting TS0 data counting bipolar violations, slips, PLL alarms, frame-alignment errors, and CRC-4 errors monitoring the status of frame alignment and multiframe alignment detecting and reporting of alarm indication signals (AIS) updating of per channel loopback registers controlling the far-end loopback and digroup loopback functions

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

503

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

Signaling interface
Interconnections
The external connection is through a 50-pin MDF connector with the NTBK05 carrier cable A0394217.

CEPT interface
For the Conference of European Postal Communications (CEPT) interface, the connection to the external digital carrier is through the NT5K85 DTI cable assembly. It converts the 120 ohms D-connector to 75 ohms coaxial cable. The impedance is switch set. The switch-settings table at the end of this chapter describes the options. See Table 222: 2 MB DTI switch options on page 504. If a coaxial interface is required, use NT5K85 in conjunction with the NTBK05. Table 222: 2 MB DTI switch options
Switch S1-1 S1-2 S2-1 S2-2 S3-1 S3-2 CC Enabled 120 ohms 75 ohms non-French Firmware Off (Switch Open) CC Disabled 75 ohms 120 ohms French Firmware On (Switch Closed)

Channel associated signaling

Channel associated signaling means that each traffic carrying channel has its own signaling channel permanently associated with it. Timeslot 16 is used to transmit two types of signaling: supervisory and address.

504

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

Incoming signal
Functions of the NTAK10 with regard to incoming signaling include: recognizing valid changes determining which channels made the changes collecting PPM reporting changes to software

Outgoing supervisory signals

The desired ABCD bit pattern for a channel is output by the NTAK10, under the control of the system controller card. The bit pattern to be transmitted is held on the line for a minimum period of time. This time is specified in the same message and ensures that the signal is detected correctly at the far end. With the exception of the outpulsing signals and special signals, such as Denmark's Flash signal and Sweden's Parking signal, the minimum duration of any signal state is 100 ms. Some signal states can have a minimum duration time that is longer than 100 ms.

Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM)

Periodic Pulse Monitoring (PPM) is used to collect toll charges on outgoing CO trunk calls.

TS16 microprocessor
The functions of this microprocessor include: receiving signaling messages supplied by the DS-30X microprocessor, decoding these messages, and taking subsequent actions transmitting messages to the DS-30X microprocessor handling PPM updating the TS16 select RAM and TS16 data RAM providing outpulsing receive data from the change-of-state microprocessor transmitting AIS for CNET (France) application

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

505

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

Change-of-state microprocessor
The functions of this processor are: detecting valid change of state in TS16 when a valid change is found, passing the new abcd bits to the TS16 microprocessor, along with five bits to indicate the associated channel

Clock controller interface

The recovered clock from the external digital facility is provided to the clock controller through the backplane-to-clock controller interface. Depending upon the state of the clock controller (switched on or off), the clock controller interface, in conjunction with software, enables or disables the appropriate reference clock source. The clock-controller circuitry on NTAK10 is identical to that of the NTAK20. While several DTI/ PRI packs can exist in one system, only one clock controller can be activated. All other DTI/ PRI clock controllers must be switched off. Important: Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality.

Clocking modes
The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or non-tracking (also known as free-run).

Tracking mode
There are two stages to clock controller tracking: tracking a reference, and locked onto a reference. When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked onto the reference. The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond. If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks it, locks onto it, and matches frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however, environmental circumstances cause the external or internal clocks to drift. When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters

506

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

the tracking stage. The green LED flashes momentarily until the clock controller is locked onto the reference once again. If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller remains continuously in the tracking stage with the LED flashing green all the time. This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller or the incoming line.

Free-run (non-tracking)
In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any source, it provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when the , Cabinet system are used as a master clock source for other systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the Avaya CS 1000E, Cabinet systemare intended to be a slave. It can occur, however, when both the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due to hardware faults or when invoked by using software commands.

Clock controller functions and features

The NTAK10 2MB DTI clock controller functions and features include: phase-locking to a reference, generating the 10.24 Mhz system clock, and distributing it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two references at a time can be accepted. providing primary to secondary switchover and auto-recovery preventing chatter providing error burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running capabilities complying with 2.0 Mb CCITT specifications communicating with software filtering jitter making use of an algorithm to aid in detecting crystal aging and to qualify clocking information

Reference switchover
Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference failure. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference is said to be out of specification. If the reference being used is out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention. If both references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

507

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

Autorecovery and chatter

If the software command "track to primary" is given, the clock controller tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the primary becomes out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to secondary provided that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary, but switches over to the primary whenever the primary recovers. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the primary. If the software command "track to secondary" is given, the clock controller tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the secondary becomes out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the primary, but switches over to the secondary whenever the secondary recovers. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary. A time-out mechanism prevents chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources.

Reference clock selection through software

The 2MB DTI card has the necessary hardware for routing its reference to the appropriate line on the backplane. Software is responsible for the distribution of the secondary references and ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1 backplane line. Software designates the 2MB DTI card as a primary reference source to the clock controller. The secondary reference is obtained from another 2 Mbps DTI card, which is designated by a craft person. No other clocks originating from other 2MB DTI packs are used. The clock controller provides an external timing interface and is capable of accepting two signals as timing references. In this case, an external reference refers to an auxiliary timing source which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal. This is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic bearing timing signal. The clock controller uses either the two external/auxiliary references or the 2MB DTI references.

Reference clock interface

The recovered clock derived from the facility is available on the MDF connector. The signals at these connectors conform to the electrical characteristics of the EIA RS-422 standard.

508

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

Switch settings
Various 2MB DTI switch options exist on the NTAK10. These are shown in Table 223: 2 MB DTI switch options on page 509. Table 223: 2 MB DTI switch options
Switch S1-1 S1-2 S2-1 S2-2 S3-1 S3-2 CC Enabled 120 ohms 75 ohms non-French Firmware Off (Switch Open) CC Disabled 75 ohms 120 ohms French Firmware On (Switch Closed)

Note: The ON position for all the switches is toward the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the bottom left corner of each individual switch.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

509

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

510

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 28: NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 511 Physical description on page 513 Functional description on page 514

Introduction
Digital trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock source results in an equivalent shift in all parts of the network. Synchronization is accomplished with an NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard in each Media Gateway that contains a digital trunk card. The NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard mounts directly on the following cards: NTAK09 1.5Mb DTI/PRI NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI NTBK22 MISP NT6D70 SILC NT6D71 UILC Note: The card is restricted to slots 1 through 3 in EMC- type cabinets (such as NAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx cabinets). It does not work in slots 4 through 10 in these cabinets. The NTAK20 clock controller card supports 1.5 Mb, 2.0 Mb, and 2.56 Mb clock recovery rates.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

511

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

Important: Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk cards, it is mandatory that at least one trunk card is placed in the Main cabinet. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. The clock controller circuitry synchronizes the system to an external reference clock and generates and distributes the clock to the system. The system can function either as a slave to an external clock or as a clocking master. The NTAK20AD version of the clock controller meets the AT&T Stratum 3 and Bell Canada Node Category D specifications. The NTAK20BD version meets CCITT Stratum 4 specifications. The NTAK20 card performs the following functions: phase lock to a reference, generation of the 10.24 Mhz system clock, and distribution of the clock to the CPU through the backplane accept one primary and one secondary reference primary-to-secondary switchover and auto-recovery chatter prevention due to repeated switching error-burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running capabilities communication with software jitter filtering use of an algorithm to detect crystal aging and qualify clocking information

Clocking modes
The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or non-tracking (also known as free-run).

Tracking mode
In tracking mode, one or more DTI/PRI cards supply a clock reference to the NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard. When operating in tracking mode, one DTI/PRI card is defined as the Primary Reference Source (PREF) for clock synchronization. The other DTI/PRI card is defined as the Secondary Reference Source (SREF). PREF and SREF are defined in LD 73.

512

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

There are two stages to clock controller tracking: tracking a reference locking on to a reference When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are almost matched, the clock controller locks on to the reference. The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond. If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks it, locks on to it, and matches frequencies exactly. Occasionally, environmental circumstances cause the external or internal clocks to vary. When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters the tracking stage. The green LED flashes until the clock controller is locked on to the reference again. If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller continuously tracks, and the LED continuously flashes green. This condition does not present a problem. It shows that the clock controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips occur, there is a problem with the clock controller or the incoming line.

Free-run (non-tracking)
In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any outside source. Instead, it provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when the system acts as a master clock source for other systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the system is intended to be a slave to an external network clock. Free-run mode can occur when both the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due to hardware faults or invoked using software commands.

Physical description
Faceplate LEDs
Each motherboard has five DTI/PRI LEDs and one clock controller LED. The clock controller LED is dual-color (red and green). The clock controller LED states are described in Table 224: Faceplate LEDs on page 514.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

513

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

Table 224: Faceplate LEDs

State On (Red) On (Green) Flashing (Green) Definition NTAK20 is equipped and disabled. NTAK20 is equipped, enabled, and is either locked to a reference or is in free run mode. NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to a reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period of time, check the CC STAT in LD 60. If the CC is tracking this may be an acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock controller error conditions. If none exist, then this state is acceptable, and the flashing is identifying jitter on the reference. NTAK20 is not equipped.

Off

Functional description
The main functional blocks of the NTAK20 architecture include: phase difference detector circuit digital Phase Locked Loop (PLL) clock detection circuit digital-to-analog converter CPU MUX bus interface signal conditioning drivers and buffers sanity timer microprocessor CPU interface external timing interface

Phase difference detector circuit

This circuit, under firmware control, enables a phase difference measurement to be taken between the reference entering the PLL and the system clock. The phase difference is used for making frequency measurements and evaluating input jitter and PLL performance.

514

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Digital phase lock loops

The main digital PLL enables the clock controller to provide a system clock to the CPU. This clock is both phase and frequency locked to a known incoming reference. The hardware has a locking range of + 4.6 ppm for Stratum 3 and + 50 ppm for Stratum 4 (CCITT). A second PLL on the clock controller provides the means for monitoring another reference. Note that the error signal of this PLL is routed to the phase difference detector circuit so the microprocessor can process it.

System clock specification and characteristics

As the accuracy requirements for CCITT and EIA Stratum 3 are different, it is necessary to have two TCVCXOs which feature different values of frequency tuning sensitivity. See Table 225: System clock specification and characteristics on page 515. Table 225: System clock specification and characteristics
Specifications Base Frequency Accuracy Operating Temperature Drift Rate (Aging) Tuning Range (minimum) 20.48 MHz 3 ppm 0 to 70 C 1 ppm 1 ppm per year 60 ppm min. 90 ppm max. Input Voltage Range 0 to 10 volts, 5 V center CCITT 20.48 MHz 1 ppm 0 to 70 C 1 ppm 4 ppm in 20 years 10 ppm min. 15 ppm max. 0 to 10 volts, 5 V center EIA

EIA/CCITT compliance
The clock controller complies with 1.5 Mb EIA Stratum 3ND, 2.0 Mb CCITT or 2.56 Mb basic rate. The differences between these requirements mainly affect PLL pull in range. Stratum 4 conforms to international markets (2.0 Mb) while Stratum 3 conforms to North American markets (1.5 Mb).

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

515

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

Monitoring references
The primary and secondary synchronization references are continuously monitored to provide autorecovery.

Reference switchover
Switchover occurs in the case of reference degradation or loss of signal. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference is out of specification. If the reference is out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention. If both references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover.

Autorecovery and chatter

If the command "track to primary" is given, the clock controller tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the primary goes out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to secondary when the secondary is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary, then switches over to the primary when the primary recovers. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary and continues to do so even if the secondary recovers. If the command "track to secondary" is given, the clock controller tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the secondary goes out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided that is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary, but switches over to the secondary when the secondary recovers. If the secondary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the secondary even if the primary recovers. To prevent chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources, a time-out mechanism of at least 10 seconds is implemented.

Digital to analog converter

The Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) enables the microprocessor to track, hold, and modify the error signal generated in the digital PLL.

516

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

The firmware uses the available memory on the clock controller to provide error-burst detection and correction. Temporary holdover occurs in the momentary absence of the reference clock.

Holdover and free-run

In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the clock controller provides a stable holdover. Free-run mode is initiated when the clock controller has no record of the quality of the incoming reference clock. If the command "free run" is given, the clock controller enters the free-run mode and remains there until a new command is received. Free-run automatically initiates after the clock controller is enabled.

CPU-MUX bus interface

A parallel I/O port on the clock controller provides a communication channel between the clock controller and the CPU.

Signal conditioning
Drivers and buffers are provided for all outgoing and incoming lines.

Sanity timer
The sanity timer resets the microprocessor in the event of system hang-up.

Microprocessor
The microprocessor does the following: communicates with software monitors two references provides a self-test during initialization minimizes the propagation of impairments on the system clock due to errors on the primary or secondary reference clocks

Reference Clock Selection

The DTI/PRI card routes its reference to the appropriate line on the backplane. The clock controller distributes the primary and secondary references and ensures that no contention is

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

517

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

present on the REFCLK1 backplane line. It designates the DTI/PRI motherboard as a primary reference source. The secondary reference is obtained from another DTI/PRI card, which is designated by a technician. No other clock sources are used.

External timing interface

The clock controller provides an external timing interface and accepts two signals as timing references. An external reference is an auxiliary timing clock which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal and is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic-bearing timing signal. The clock controller uses either the external/auxiliary references or the DTI/PRI references.

Hardware integrity and regulatory environment

The clock controller complies with the following hardware integrity and regulatory specifications:
Item EMI Specification FCC part 15 sub- part J CSA C108.8 CISPR publication 22 IEC 801-2 IEC 68-2-1 IEC 68-2-2 IEC 68-2-14 IEC 68-2-3 IEC 68-2-6 IEC 68-2-7 IEC 68-2-29 IEC 68-2-31 IEC 68-2-32

ESD Temperature

Humidity Vibration/Shock

518

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 29: NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 519 Physical description on page 520 Functional description on page 523 Architecture on page 524

Introduction
The NTAK79 2.0 Mb Primary Rate Interface (PRI) card provides a 2.0 Mb interface and an onboard D-channel handler (DCH). The NTAK79 card also includes an onboard clock controller (equivalent to the NTAK20 Clock Controller) that can be manually switched into or out of service. The NTAK79 card does not support the NTBK51 downloadable D-channel handler daughterboard. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Note: Up to three four trunk cards are supported in each Media Gateway. Important: Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

519

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality.

Physical description
The NTAK79 uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer printed circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8" wide. The NTAK79 circuit card has a total of seven faceplate LEDs. Five of the LEDs are directly associated with the operation of the Primary Rate interface (PRI). The remaining two LEDs are associated with the on-board Clock Controller and the on-board D-channel interface (DCHI). The LEDs are described in Table 226: NTAK79 LEDs on page 520. Table 226: NTAK79 LEDs
LED OOS State On (Red) Off ACT On (Green) Off RED On (Red) Definition The NTAK79 2 MB PRI circuit card is disabled or outof-service. The NTAK79 2 MB PRI is not in a disabled state. The NTAK79 2 MB PRI circuit card is in an active state. The NTAK79 2 MB PRI is in a disabled state. The OOS LED turns red. A red alarm state is detected. This represents a local alarm state of: Loss of Carrier (LOS) Loss of Frame (LFAS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). No red (local) alarm. A yellow alarm state is detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the far end. The alarm can be either Alarm Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm (RAI). No yellow (remote) alarm. 2 MB PRI is in loop-back mode. 2 MB PRI is not in loop-back mode. The clock controller is switched on and is disabled by the software. The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a reference or in free run mode. The clock controller is switched on and attempting to lock on to a reference (tracking mode). If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period of time,

Off YEL On (Yellow)

Off LBK On (Green) Off CC On (Red) On (Green) Flashing (Green)

520

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

LED

State

Definition check the CC STAT in LD 60. If the CC is tracking this can be an acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock controller error conditions. If none exist, then this state is acceptable, and the flashing is identifying jitter on the reference.

DCH

On (Red) On (Green) Off

DCH is switched on and disabled. DCH is switched on and enabled, but not necessarily established. DCH is switched off.

NTAK79 switches
The NTAK79 card incorporates four on-board dip switches. The tables that follow provide information about the various settings and related functions of these switches. Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to the bottom left corner of each individual switch.

Figure 154: NTAK79 card with switch locations

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

521

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

Switch SW1 - DCHI Configuration

This switch enables/disables the on-board DCHI and sets the operating mode of the DCHI. DPNSS1 mode is supported on an NTAK79BC. For all other countries that do not use DPNSS, use Q.931 mode. Table 227: Switch SW1
Switch SW 1-1 SW 1-2 Down (On) enable DCHI DPNSS1/DASS2 Up (Off) disable DCHI Q.931

Switch SW2 - Carrier Impedance Configuration

This switch sets the carrier impedance to either 120 ohms or 75 ohms. Twisted pair cable is usually associated with 120 ohms. Coaxial cable is usually associated with the 75 ohms setting. Table 228: Switch SW2
Cable Type 75 ohms 120 ohms Up (Off) Down (On) SW 2-1 SW 2-2 Down (On) Up (Off)

Switch SW3 - Clock Controller Configuration

This switch enables/disables (H/W) the on-board Clock Controller. Disable the SW 3-2 if the on-board clock controller is not in use. Table 229: Switch SW3
Switch SW 3-1 SW 3-2 Disabled Down (On) Enabled Up (Off) Spare Note

Switch SW4 - Carrier Shield Grounding

This switch enables for the selective grounding of the Tx / Rx pairs of the carrier cable. Closing the switch (down position) applies Frame Ground (FGND) to the coaxial carrier cable shield, creating a 75 ohms unbalanced configuration. This applies only to the NTBK05CA cable.

522

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Table 230: Switch SW4

Switch SW 4-1 SW 4-2 Down (On) Rx FGND Tx FGND Up (Off) Rx OPEN Tx OPEN

The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive coaxial signal.

Power requirements
The NTAK79 obtains its power from the backplane, drawing maximums of 2 A on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V and 50 mA on 12 V.

Environment
The NTAK79 meets all applicable Avaya's operating specifications.

Functional description
The NTAK79 card provides the following features and functions: recovery of the 2.048 kbps data by the CEPT receiver, at signal levels which are attenuated by up 10 dB control of CEPT line density using HDB3 which provides 64 kbps clear channel performance monitoring of the receive carrier by means of Bipolar Violations (BPV), Slips, CRC-4 (CRC), and Frame Bit Errors (FBER) monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI transmission of remote alarm when instructed slip-buffering receive messages supporting National and International bits in time slot 0 on-board clock controller onboard D-channel interface 32 software-selectable Tx & Rx Pad values conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A) Card-LAN for maintenance communication

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

523

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

Architecture
The main functional blocks of the NTAK79 architecture include: DS-30X interface A07 signaling interface digital pad carrier interface CEPT transceiver SLIP control D-channel support interface 8031 microcontroller Card-LAN / echo / test port interface

DS-30X interface
The NTAK79 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32 byte-interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in A10 message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 kbps), one to signaling (8 kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 kbps). The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface circuitry. The DS-30X timeslot number is mapped to the PCM-30 channel number. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently unused for PCM.

Digital PAD
Software selects A-Law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the data is routed. The idle code for A-Law is 54H and for Mu-Law is 7FH. The unequipped code is FFH for both A-Law and Mu-Law. As the idle code and unequipped code can be country dependent, the software instructs the NTAK79 to use different codes for each direction. The 32 digital pads available are listed in Table 231: Digital pad values and offset allocations on page 525. The values shown are attenuation levels; 1.0 dB is 1 dB of loss and 1.0 dB is 1 dB of gain.

524

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

Table 231: Digital pad values and offset allocations

PAD SET 0 Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PAD 0.6 dB 1.0 dB 2.0 dB 3.0 dB 4.0 dB 5.0 dB 6.1 dB 7.0 dB 8.0 dB 9.0 dB 10.0 dB 11.0 dB 12.0 dB 13.0 dB 14.0 dB spare Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PAD SET 1 PAD 0.0 dB 1.0 dB 2.0 dB 3.0 dB 4.0 dB 5.0 dB 6.0 dB 7.0 dB 8.0 dB 9.0 dB 10.0 dB spare spare spare Idle Code Unassigned Code

Signaling interface
The signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link through the DS-30X timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length.

Carrier interface
The E1 interface connection to the external digital carrier is provided by the line interface chip. This chip provides accurate pulse shaping to meet the CCITT pulse mask requirements. It provides clock recovery functions on the receive side as well as tolerance to jitter and wander in the received bit stream.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

525

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

Impedance matching
The line interface provides for the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by a switch, as shown in Table 232: Impedance matching switch selection on page 526. Table 232: Impedance matching switch selection
Cable 75 ohms 120 ohms On S2 S1 Off S1 S2

Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the bottom left corner of each individual switch.

Carrier grounding
The NTAK79 card provides the capability of selectively grounding the shield of the Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier. Closing (down) the on-board switch applies FGND to the appropriate carrier cable shield. The switch settings are shown in Table 233: Carrier shield grounding switch settings on page 526. Table 233: Carrier shield grounding switch settings
Switch S4-1 S4-2 Carrier Pair Rx shield Tx shield On Open Open Off GND GND

Receiver functions
The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires no equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the jitter specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823, and the jitter attenuation requirements of the CCITT recommendation G.742. This provides jitter attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequency range from about 6 Hz to 6 KHz.

526

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

Transmitter functions
The transmitter takes the binary (dual unipolar) data from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses which conform to the CCITT recommendation G.703 pulse shape.

Loopbacks
The remote loopback function causes the device to transmit the same data that it receives, using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data is also available at the receive data outputs. Local loopback causes the transmit data and clock to appear at the receive clock and data outputs. This data is also transmitted on the line unless transmit AIS is selected.

CEPT transceiver
The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization, channel, and signal extraction. The functions meet applicable specifications of the CCITT recommendation G. 703 and G.732. The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock derived from the DS-30X system clock and 1 KHz framing pulse.

Slip control
Slip control provides organized recovery of PCM when the clock recovered from the external facility is at a different frequency than the local clock.

D-channel support interface

The D-channel support interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream configured as a DCE device. The data signals include: Receive data output transmit data input receive clock output transmit clock output The receive and transmit clocks have slightly different bit rates from each other, as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

527

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

The NTAK79 has an onboard D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI). It is the equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH pack. This enables for a completely operational ISDN PRA link with clock synchronization and D-channel on a single circuit card. The onboard D-channel has one status LED on the NTAK79 faceplate to indicate enabled/ disabled states. See Table 226: NTAK79 LEDs on page 520. The on-board DCHI can be operated in two separate modes as defined by an on-board dip switch. It can operate in a standard DCHI mode common to most ISDN standard countries. The U.K. specific mode that uses the DPNSS format is not supported at this time. Table 234: Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)
Switch S1-1 S1-2 Function En/Dis F/W Mode On Enabled DPNSS (not supported at this time) Off Disabled DCHI

DCHI special applications connection

The connection between the PRI2 and the on-board D-channel Handler Interface card is also available at the MDF connector. Connections are made to these pins for normal on-board DCHI operation. They can also be used for future or special applications. The signals conform to the EIA RS-422 standard.

Card-LAN interface
A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN serial link and the echo canceller/test port interface. The echo/test interface is an asynchronous 4800 bps 8-bit connected to port A of the UART. The Card-LAN interface is an asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected to port B of the UART. The connection to the echo canceler/test port is available at the backplane/MDF connector. The signals at this port conform to the EIA RS-232C standard.

Clock controller interface

The clock controller circuitry on the NTAK79 is identical to that of the NTAK20 clock controller. Though several DTI/PRI packs can exist in one system, only one clock controller may be activated. All other DTI/PRI clock controllers must be switched off.

528

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

Clocking modes
The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking non-tracking (also known as free-run)

Tracking mode
There are two stages to clock controller tracking: tracking a reference, and locked onto a reference. When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked onto the reference. The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond. If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks it, locks onto it, and matches frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however, environmental circumstances cause the external or internal clocks to drift. When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters the tracking stage. The green LED flashes momentarily until the clock controller is locked onto the reference once again. If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller remains continuously in the tracking stage, with the LED flashing green all the time. This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller or the incoming line.

Free-run (non-tracking)
In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any source, it provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when the CS 1000E, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinetare used as a master clock source for other systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the CS 1000E, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinetare intended to be a slave. It can occur, however, when both the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due to hardware faults or when invoked by using software commands.

Clock controller functions and features

The NTAK79 clock controller functions and features include: phase lock to a reference, generate the 10.24 MHz system clock, and distribute it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two references at a time are accepted primary to secondary switchover (auto-recovery is provided) prevent chatter

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

529

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

error burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running capabilities compliance with 2.0Mb CCITT specifications software communication jitter filtering use of an algorithm to detect crystal aging and to qualify clocking information

Reference switchover
Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference failure. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference is said to be out of specification. If the reference being used is out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention. If both references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover.

Autorecovery and chatter

If the software command "track to primary" is given, the clock controller tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the primary becomes out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to secondary provided that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary, but switches over to the primary when the primary recovers. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary. If the software command "track to secondary" is given, the clock controller tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the secondary becomes out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of spec.), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the primary, but switches over to the secondary whenever the secondary recovers. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary. A time-out mechanism prevents chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources.

Holdover and free-run

In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the clock controller provides a stable

530

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

holdover. The free-run mode is initiated when the clock controller has no record of the quality of the incoming reference clock. If the software command "free run" is given, the clock controller enters the free-run mode and remains there until a new command is received. Note that the free-run mode of operation is automatically initiated after the clock controller is enabled.

Reference clock selection through software

The NTAK79 has the necessary hardware for routing its reference to the appropriate line on the backplane. The software is responsible for the distribution of the secondary references and ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1 backplane line. The software designates the NTAK79 as the primary reference source to the clock controller. The secondary reference is obtained from another NTAK79 card, which is designated by a technician. No other clocks originating from other NTAK79 circuit cards are used. The clock controller provides an external timing interface and is capable of accepting two signals as timing references. In this case, an external reference refers to an auxiliary timing source which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal. This is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic bearing timing signal. The clock controller uses either the two external/auxiliary references or the NTAK79 references.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

531

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

532

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 30: NTDW79AAE5 Universal Digital Trunk card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 533 Physical description on page 537 Functional description on page 539

Introduction
The NTDW79AAE5 Universal Digital Trunk (UDT) card is a single slot size TDM card. The NTDW12AAE5 Universal Clock Controller (UDT CC) daughter board may be mounted on the UDT card. The UDT card and daughterboard replace NTAK79, NTAK10, NTBK50, NTRB21, NTAK20, NTAK93, NTAK09 and include onboard DDCH/DCHI functionality. You can use the UDT card in Avaya Communication Server 1000 (Avaya CS 1000) small systems as well as in Avaya CS 1000E systems, positioned on CE-MUX slots. Figure 155: UDT card positioning in Avaya CS 1000M Cabinet/ Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet on page 534 shows UDT card positioning in the Communication Server 1000M cabinet / Meridian1 PBX 11C cabinet.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

533

NTDW79AAE5 Universal Digital Trunk card

Figure 155: UDT card positioning in Avaya CS 1000M Cabinet/ Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet

Figure 156: UDT card positioning in CS 1000M Chassis/ Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis on page 535 shows the UDT card positioning in the CS 1000M chassis / Meridian1 PBX 11C chassis.

534

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Introduction

Figure 156: UDT card positioning in CS 1000M Chassis/ Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis

Figure 157: UDT card positioning in a CS 1000E system on page 536 shows the UDT card positioning in a CS 1000E system.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

535

NTDW79AAE5 Universal Digital Trunk card

Figure 157: UDT card positioning in a CS 1000E system

Figure 158: UDT card positioning in a CS 1000B system on page 537 shows the UDT card positioning in a CS 1000B system.

536

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Figure 158: UDT card positioning in a CS 1000B system

The UDT card is based on the technology of the MG 1000E PRI Gateway, with the following main features: DTI, DTI2, PRI, PRI2, DPNSS, DASS2 Optional UDT CC daughter board On board DDCH/DCHI functionality F/W download

Physical description
The UDT card consists of the following hardware features: A Motorola MPC880 PowerQUICC Main Processing Unit (MPU) . The MPU block includes a 32 Megabyte (MB) Flash memory device that stores and executes the Boot code, and a 32 MB SDRAM main memory. The MPU core operates internally at 100 Megahertz (MHz), but only operates externally at a capacity of 50 MHz. PCM interfaces based on Infineon FALC E1/T1 transceivers Digital PLL for synchronizing on external clock One DIP switch for E1/T1 mode setting One 10/100BaseT Ethernet port connected to the faceplate

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

537

NTDW79AAE5 Universal Digital Trunk card

Seven LEDs on the faceplate for diagnostic information display An FPGA circuit

Power requirements
The current card consumption is 1 Amper (A) at 5 volts (V) and 0.1A at 15 V.

Connectors
The UDT card includes the following connectors: RJ45 Ethernet connector on the faceplate RS232 connector on the faceplate Bantam jacks E1/T1 trunk connector (the existing connector in CS 1000 small systems/ CS 1000E cabinets)

LED indicators
Figure 159: UDT card faceplate LEDs on page 538 and Table 235: UDT card LED functionality on page 538 demonstrate the UDT card LEDs functionality.

Figure 159: UDT card faceplate LEDs

Table 235: UDT card LED functionality

Group LED name Color green red RED off red YEL off Functionality E1/T1 link is enabled E1/T1 link is disabled No Alarm/Loop disabled E1/T1 Link has Near End Alarm No Alarm/Loop disabled

E1/T1 span (3 LEDs) EN/DIS

538

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Group

LED name

Color yellow

Functionality E1/T1 Link has Far End Alarm DCH is not configured in UDT MSDL/DDSL is disabled MSDL/DDSL is enabled UDT CC is not equipped Clock Controller disabled/not configured Enabled and locked to a reference or in free run mode Tracking mode Flashing when Ethernet Link is receiving data Speed is 10Mbps Speed is 100Mbps

D-Channel (1 LED)

DCH

off red green

Clock Sync (1 LED)

CC

off red green green flashing

Ethernet (2 LEDs)

LNK/ACT SPEED

green off yellow

Functional description
The NTDW79AAE5 - UDT card provides the following features and functionality: DTI/DTI2, PRI/PRI2, DPNSS1/DASS2 and B-channels functionality Software transparency that allows you to use it in the installed base for repairs and upgrades Enhanced trouble shooting by way of a Command Line (CLI) interface On board DDCH/DCHI functionality Secure and simplified UDT card firmware upgrade process from Call Server (PSDL) Highly secured with no Telnet, HTTP and FTP servers Uses a universal CC DB (NTDW12AAE5)

UDT card alarms

The UDT card meets the standard alarms currently implemented by Avaya Enterprise trunk cards, receiving frame bit errors, loss of signal and more. The alarms status appears in LD 60, CLI status commands and on the product LEDs.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

539

NTDW79AAE5 Universal Digital Trunk card

Clock reference
The UDT card must synchronize its E1/T1 TDM stream with the Central Office or another PBX clock. The UDT card can work as a Master clock for other PBXs. The card uses an internal timing source and generates the timing signal on E1/T1. The Clock Controller functionality is X11/ X21 Software transparent.

Feature interactions
The UDT CC daughter board can only be mounted on the UDT card. The NTAK20 CC daughter board can not be mounted on the UDT card. 75ohm impedance can be used by converting the UDT card 120ohm impedance using a proper converter. The RS232 port is not to be used during normal operation and is for maintenance and configuration only. The UDT card does not simulate the TMDI card (NTRB21). Do not configure the UDT card as a TMDI card. The UDT card can be used starting with software release X21 Release 5.0 for CS 1000E systems. The UDT card can coexist with other digital trunk cards within the same CS 1000E cabinet. The UDT CC daughter board mounted on the UDT card can be used as the CC card serving other digital trunk cards within the same CS 1000E cabinet. The NTAK20 CC daughterboard mounted on another digital trunk card can be used as the CC card serving the UDT card within the same CS 1000E cabinet. The UDT card can be used as the Secondary clock reference for the NTAK20 CC daughter board. Other digital trunk cards can be used as the Secondary clock reference for the UDT CC daughter board. The UDT CC daughter board and the NTAK20 CC daughter board can be used in different cabinets within the same system.

540

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 31: NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard

Contents
This section contains information about the following topics: Introduction on page 541 Physical description on page 542 Functional description on page 542

Introduction
The NTAK93 provides the D-channel handler interfaces required by the ISDN PRI trunk. The DCHI performs D-channel Layer 2 message processing and transfers Layer 3 signaling information between two adjacent network switches. It is mounted on the NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/ PRI card or the NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card (installed in the Media Gateway) using standoff reference pins and connectors. The NTAK93 daughterboard, when mounted on the NTBK50 PRI digital trunk card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTBK50. The NTAK93 daughterboard can use SDI I/O addresses 1 to 15 and port 1. The NTAK93 provides the following features and functions: D-channel interface or DPNSS interface Special features included for LAPD implementation at DCH: - system parameters are service changeable (system parameters are downloaded from software) - incoming Layer 3 message validation procedures are implemented in the D-PORT firmware - supported message units and information elements can be service changed - translation of the CCITT message types information elements into a proprietary coding scheme for faster CPU operation

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

541

NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard

- convention of IA5-encoded digits to BCD-encoded digits for incoming Layer 3 messages for faster CPU operation - self-test - loopback

Physical description
The DCH function can be installed in the main and IP expansion cabinets. The DTI/PRI card which carries a DCH daughterboard resides in the main and IP expansion cabinets.

Faceplate LEDs
NTAK09 1.5 Mb PRI and NTBK50 2.0 MB PRI cards
LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09 and NTBK50 cards. The DCHI LED is dualcolor (red and green). The LEDs are described in Table 236: Faceplate LEDs on page 542. Table 236: Faceplate LEDs
State On (Red) On (Green) Off Definition NTAK93 is equipped and disabled. NTAK93 is equipped and enabled, but not necessarily established. NTAK93 is not equipped.

Power consumption
Power consumption is +5 V at 750 mA; +12 V at 5 mA; and 12 V at 5 mA.

Functional description
The main functional blocks of the NTAK93 architecture include the following.

542

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Microprocessors
One microprocessor does the following: handles data transfer between each pair of serial ports and software reports the status of each port takes commands from software to control the activities of the ports The microprocessors also handle some D-channel data processing in DCHI mode.

DMA controller
A Z80A-DMA chip controls the data transfer between local RAM memory and communication ports. The DMA channels are only used in the receive direction (from line to SSC), not in the transmit direction.

Random Access Memory (RAM)

A total of 32 KBytes of RAM space for each pair of ports is used as the communication buffer and for firmware data storage.

Read Only Memory (ROM)

A total of 32K bytes of ROM space for each pair of ports is reserved as a code section of the DCH-PORT firmware.

LAPD data link/asynchronous controller

One chip controls each pair of independent communication ports. It performs the functions of serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial conversions, error detection, and frame recognition (in HDLC). The parameters of these functions are supplied by the DCH-PORT firmware.

Counter/timer controller
Two chips are used as real-time timers and baud-rate generators for each pair of communication ports.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

543

NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard

Software interface circuit

This portion of the circuit handles address/data bus multiplexing, the interchange of data, commands, and status between the on board processors and software. It includes transmit buffer, receive buffer, command register, and status register for each communication channel.

DPNSS/DCHI Port
The mode of operation of the DCH-PORT is controlled by a switch setting on the NTAK09/ NTBK50. For DPNSS the switch is ON; for DCHI it is OFF. The port operates at:
Data Rate Duplex Clock Interface 56kbps, 64kbps Full Internal / External RS422

The address of ports is selected by hardwired backplane card address. Port characteristics and LAPD parameters are downloaded from software. The address of a port is determined by the hardwired backplane card address. Port characteristics and LAPD parameters are downloaded from software.

D-Port - SDTI/PRI interface

Below is a brief description of signals. When connected to SDTI/PRI, DCHI-PORT is considered Data Terminal Equipment (DTE): SDA, SDB: Transmit Clock provided by SDTI/PRI RTA, RTB: Receive Clock provided by SDTI/PRI RR, CS: SPDC ready signal provided by DCHI-PORT TR: D-PORT ready signal provided by DCHI-PORT RDA, RDB: Incoming serial data bit stream, driven by SDTI/PRI SDA, SDB: Transmit serial data bit stream driven by DCHI-PORT

544

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 32: NTBK22 MISP card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 545 Physical description on page 545 Functional description on page 546

Introduction
The NTBK22 Multi-Purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) card is a microprocessorcontrolled signaling processor that performs Data Link (Layer 2) and Network (Layer 3) processing associated with ISDN BRI and the OSI protocol.

Physical description
The MISP occupies one slot in the Media Gateway. It uses one of the network loops to interface with SILCs and UILCs and to provide 32 timeslots for D-channel signaling and packet data transmission. The other loop address is used to communicate with the Call Server. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Note: When configuring BRI trunks, the MISP (NTBK22) card must be co-located in the same Media Gateway as the SILC (NT6D70) and UILC (NT6D71) cards the MISP is supporting. Refer to Avaya ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration (NN43001-318) and Avaya ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Features (NN43001-580) for additional information.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

545

NTBK22 MISP card

Functional description
Each MISP can support 4 line cards (UILC or SILC or any combination of the two). Each line card supports 8 DSLs, therefore each MISP supports 32 DSLs. As each DSL uses two Bchannels and one D-channel the MISP supports 64 B-channels and 32 D-channels. If the MISP is carrying packet data, it must dedicate one of its D-channels to communicate with the external packet handler. In this case the MISP supports only 31 DSLs. The main functions of the MISP are: communicate with the Call Server CPU to report ISDN BRI status and receive downloaded application software and configuration parameters manage Layer 2 and Layer 3 signaling that controls call connection and terminal identification control terminal initialization and addressing assign B-channels for switched voice and data transmission by communicating with the BRI terminal over the D-channel and allocating to it an idle B-channel with appropriate bearer capabilities separate D-channel data from signaling information and route the data to the packet handler send call control messages to ISDN BRI terminals over the D-channel

Micro Processing Unit (MPU)

The MPU coordinates and controls data transfer and addressing of the peripheral devices and communicates with the CPU using a message channel on the CPU bus. The tasks that the MPU performs depend on the interrupts it receives. The interrupts are prioritized by the importance of the tasks they control.

High-Level Data Link Controller (HDLC)

The HDLC is a format converter that supports up to 32 serial channels that communicate at speeds up to 64 kbps. The HDLC converts messages into the following two message formats: a serially transmitted, zero-inserted, CRC protected message that has a starting and an ending flag a data structure

546

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

CPU to MISP bus interface

Information exchange between the CPU and the MISP is performed with packetized messages transmitted over the CPU bus. This interface has a 16-bit data bus, an 18-bit address bus, and interrupt and read/write control lines. This interface uses shared Static Random Access Memory (SRAM) as a communication exchange center between the CPU and the MPU. Both the CPU and the MPU can access this memory over the transmit and receive channels on the bus.

MISP network bus interface

The network bus interface: converts bit interleaved serial data received from the network bus into byte interleaved data for transmission over the 32 time slots used by the HDLC controller accepts byte interleaved data transmitted from the HDLC controller and converts it into a bit interleaved data stream for transmission over the network bus

Power consumption
Power consumption is +5 V at 2 A; +15 V at 50 mA; and -15 V at 50 mA.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

547

NTBK22 MISP card

548

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 33: NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 549 Physical description on page 550 Functional description on page 552 Architecture on page 552

Introduction
The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card provides a 2.0 Mb PRI interface. It supports the NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard and either the NTAK93 D-channel interface or the NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel handler. The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard provides identical performance to the on-board NTAK79 DCHI. The NTBK51 DDCH daughterboard provides support for protocols based on the MSDL platform. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Important: Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must clock the clock controller to an external reference clock. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

549

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

Physical description
The NTBK50 uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer printed circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8" wide and contains seven LEDs. See Figure 160: NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards on page 550.

Figure 160: NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards

The LEDs are described in Table 237: NTBK50 faceplate LEDs on page 550. Table 237: NTBK50 faceplate LEDs
LED OOS State On (Red) Definition The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is disabled or out-ofservice. Also, the state of the card after power-up, completion of self test, and exiting remote loopback. The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is not in a disabled state.

Off

550

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

LED ACT

State On (Green) Off

Definition The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is in an active state. The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is in a disabled state. The OOS LED is red. A red alarm state is detected. This represents a local alarm state of Loss of Carrier (LOS), Loss of Frame (LFAS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). No red (local) alarm.

RED

On (Red)

Off YEL

On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state is detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the far end. The alarm may be either Alarm Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm (RAI). Off No yellow (remote) alarm. 2.0 Mb PRI is in loop-back mode. 2.0 Mb PRI is not in loop-back mode. The clock controller is software disabled. The clock controller is enabled and is either locked to a reference or is in free run mode. NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to a reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period of time, check the CC STAT in LD 60. If the CC is tracking this can be an acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock controller error conditions. If none exist, then this state is acceptable, and the flashing is identifying jitter on the reference. The clock controller is not equipped. DCH is disabled. DCH is enabled, but not necessarily established. DCH is not equipped.

LBK

On (Green) Off

CC

On (Red) On (Green) Flashing (Green)

Off DCH On (Red) On (Green) Off

Power requirements
The NTBK50 obtains its power from the backplane, drawing up to 2 A on +5 V, 35 mA on +15 V and 20 mA on 15 V.

Environment
The NTBK50 meets all applicable Avaya operating specifications.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

551

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

Functional description
NTBK50 provides the following features and components: recovery of the 2.048 kbps data by the CEPT receiver, at signal levels which are attenuated by up to 10 dB control of CEPT line density using HDB3 which provides 64 kbps clear channel performance monitoring of the receive carrier by means of Bipolar Violations (BPV), Slips, CRC-4 (CRC), and Frame Bit Errors (FBER) monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI transmission of remote alarm when instructed slip-buffering receive messages support of National and International bits in timeslot 0 clock controller daughterboard D-channel interface daughterboard downloadable D-channel handler daughterboard 32 software-selectable Tx and Rx Pad values conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A) Card-LAN for maintenance communication

Architecture
The main functional blocks of the NTBK50 architecture are: DS-30X interface A07 signaling interface digital pad carrier interface CEPT transceiver SLIP control D-channel support interface clock controller interface

552

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

Card-LAN / echo / test port interface 80C51FA Microcontroller

DS-30X interface
NTBK50 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32-byte interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in A10 message format; eight are assigned to voice/ data (64 Kbps), one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps). The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface circuitry. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently unused for PCM.

Digital PAD
The software selects A-Law or -Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the data is routed. The idle code for ALaw is 54H and for -Law is 7FH. The unequipped code is FFH for both A-Law and -Law. As the idle code and unequipped code can be country dependent, the software instructs the NTBK50 to use different codes for each direction. The 32 digital pads available are illustrated in Table 238: Digital Pad - values and offset allocations on page 553. The values shown are attenuation levels (1.0dB is 1 dB of loss and 1.0 dB is 1 dB of gain. Table 238: Digital Pad - values and offset allocations
PAD SET 0 Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 PAD 0.6 dB 1.0 dB 2.0 dB 3.0 dB 4.0 dB 5.0 dB 6.1 dB 7.0 dB 8.0 dB 9.0 dB 10.0 dB 11.0 dB Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 PAD SET 1 PAD 0.0 dB -1.0 dB -2.0 dB -3.0 dB -4.0 dB -5.0 dB -6.0 dB -7.0 dB -8.0 dB -9.0 dB -10.0 dB spare

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

553

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

PAD SET 0 Offset 12 13 14 15 PAD 12.0 dB 13.0 dB 14.0 dB spare Offset 12 13 14 15

PAD SET 1 PAD spare spare Idle Code Unassigned Code

Signaling interface
The signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link via the DS-30X timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length.

Carrier interface
For the E1 interface, the connection to the external digital carrier is provided by the line interface chip. This device provides accurate pulse shaping to meet the CCITT pulse mask requirements. It provides clock recovery functions on the receive side, as well as tolerance to jitter and wander in the received bit stream.

Impedance matching (Switch SW2)

The line interface provides for the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by SW2, as shown in Table 239: Impedance matching switch settings on page 554. Table 239: Impedance matching switch settings
Cable Type 75 ohms 120 ohms SW 2-1 Down (On) Up (Off)

Note: The ON position for all the switches is toward the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the bottom left corner of each individual switch.

Carrier grounding
NTBK50 enables the shield of the Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier to be selectively grounded. Closing (down position) the on-board switch applies FGND to the appropriate carrier cable

554

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

shield. The switch settings are shown in Table 240: Carrier Shield grounding switch settings on page 555. Table 240: Carrier Shield grounding switch settings
Switch SW 4 1 SW 4 2 Down (On) Rx FGND Tx FGND Up (Off) Rx OPEN Tx OPEN

Receiver functions
The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires no equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the jitter specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823 and the jitter attenuation requirements of the CCITT recommendation G.742. This provides jitter attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequency range from about 6 Hz to 6 KHz.

Transmitter functions
The transmitter takes the binary (dual unipolar) data from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses. This conforms to CCITT recommendation G.703 pulse shape.

Loopbacks
The remote loopback function causes the far-end device to transmit the same data that it receives, using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data is additionally available at the farend receive data outputs. Local loopback causes the transmit data and clock to appear at the near-end clock and receive data outputs. This data is also transmitted on the line unless an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is transmitted instead.

CEPT transceiver
The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization, channel, and signal extraction. The functions meet applicable specifications of the CCITT recommendation G. 703 and G.732. The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock derived from the DS-30X system clock and 1 KHz framing pulse.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

555

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

Slip control
Slip control provides organized recovery of PCM when the clock recovered from the external facility is at a different frequency with respect to the local clock.

D-channel support interface

The D-channel support interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream configured as a DCE device. The data signals include: receive data output transmit data input receive clock output transmit clock output The receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rates from each other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks. The NTBK50 supports a D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) daughterboard. It is equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH card. The NTBK50 also supports a Downloadable DChannel Handler interface (DDCH) daughterboard. The DDCH brings MSDL D-channel capability to the system.

DCHI Configuration for NTAK93 only (SW1)

The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard can be operated in two separate modes defined by an onboard dip switch. It can operate in a standard DCHI mode common to most ISDN standard countries. It can also operate in a DPNSS mode, which is not supported at this time. The DDCH supports only a single port which directly interfaces to the PRI motherboard. See Table 241: Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1) on page 556. Table 241: Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)
Switch S1-1 S1-2 Function F/W Mode On DPNSS Off DCHI

Card-LAN interface
A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN serial link test port interface. The test interface is an asynchronous 4800 bps 8 bit connected to port A of the

556

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

UART. The card-LAN interface is an asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected to port B of the UART. The connection to the test port is available at the backplane/MDF connector. The signals at this port conform to the EIA RS-232C standard.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

557

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

558

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 34: NTBK51 Downloadable Dchannel Handler daughterboard

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Functional description on page 567 Physical description on page 560 Functional description on page 560 Download operation on page 562

Introduction
The NTBK51 daughterboard provides Downloadable D-channel Handler (DDCH) interfaces based on the Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL). The DDCH provides a single purpose full-duplex serial port capable of downloading the D-channel application and base software into the card. The NTBK51 provides the following features and functions: ISDN D-channel related protocol Selftest Loopback D-channel loadware including: - management and maintenance - LAPD- software for data link layer processing - DCH interface - Layer 3 preprocessor - traffic reporting including link capacity

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

559

NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard

Physical description
The NTBK51 daughterboard interfaces with the system CPU and is mounted on either the NTAK09 1.5 DTI/PRI card or the NTBK50 2 Mb PRI digital trunk card. You can install this card in: slots 1 through 9 in the main cabinet or slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, or 41-49 in the expansion cabinets slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. The NTBK51 daughterboard, when installed on the NTAK09 digital trunk card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTAK09. One NTBK51 daughterboard is required for each PRI link. LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09/NTBK50 card. The DCHI LED is a dualcolor (red/green). The LED is described in Table 242: Faceplate LED on page 560. Table 242: Faceplate LED
State On (Red) On (Green) Off NTBK51 is disabled. NTBK51 is enabled, but not necessarily established. NTBK51 is not equipped. Definition

Functional description
The main functional blocks of the NTBK51 architecture include the following: Microprocessors Main memory Shared memory EPROM memory Flash EPROM memory EEPROM memory Serial communication controller

560

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Sanity timer Bus timer

Microprocessors
One microprocessor handles data transfer between each serial interface and software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from the software to control the activities of the ports. A high performance MPU supports the D-channel from the PRI card and other software applications running simultaneously on other ports of the DDCH card. The microprocessor performs the following functions: sanity check and self tests message handling between the CS 1000E, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinetand the card four port serial communication controller handling with Direct Memory Access (DMA) program download from the Small System Controller

Main memory
The main 68EC020 system memory is comprised of 1 Mbyte of SRAM and is accessible in 8 or 16 bits. The software, base code and application reside in main RAM and is downloaded from the software through the shared memory.

Shared memory
The shared memory is the interface between the CPU and the 68EC020 MPU. This memory is a 16 Kbyte RAM, expandable to 64 kbytes and accessible in 8 or 16 bits.

EPROM memory
The Bootstrap code resides in this 27C1000 EPROM and is executed on power up or reset.

Flash EPROM memory

Flash EPROM provides non-volatile storage for the DDCH loadware which minimizes the impact to sysload. The Flash EPROM provides an increase in system service with a reduced delay after a brown-out, and faster testing of a hardware pack after it is plugged in.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

561

NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard

EEPROM memory
The DDCH uses a 1024 bit serial EEPROM for storing the Avaya product code and a revision level. This information can be queried by the software.

Serial communication controller

The serial controller is the Zilog Z16C35 and is referenced as the Integrated Controller (ISCC). The ISCC includes a flexible Bus Interface Unit (BIU) and four Direct Memory Access (DMA) channels, one for each receive and transmit. The DMA core of the ISCC controls the data transfer between local RAM and the communication ports.

Sanity timer
A sanity timer is incorporated on the DDCH to prevent the MPU from getting tied-up as the result of a hardware or software fault. If the MPU encounters a hardware or software fault and enters a continuous loop, the sanity timer enables the DDCH to reset itself.

Bus timer
The bus timer presents an error signal to the MPU if an attempt to access a device did not receive acknowledgment within the bus time-out period of 120 ms.

Download operation
Downloading is performed in either of two modes: background mode or maintenance mode. Before a download takes place, a D-channel link must be configured. The following situations lead to software downloading: during initialization when new software is installed when enabling the card or application during card reset (due to loss of software or corruption) during a background audit

562

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Download operation

System initialization
When new base or application software is installed on a CS 1000E, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet, the download decision is made during system initialization. The actual MSDL base software download is done in background mode and can take several minutes to complete, depending on switch traffic and the size of the MSDL base software.

Card enabling or application enabling

If a normal download enable command is executed, the MSDL base code and application is conditionally downloaded to the DDCH card. This conditional download depends on the result of the check made by the CPU on the MSDL base code and application software. If a forced download enable command is executed in LD 96, the MSDL base code and application are forced down to the DDCH card, even if the base and application software is already resident on the DDCH card. To complete a forced download, the following conditions must be met: the DDCH card must be enabled the D-channel port must be disabled

Card reset
After a card reset, the MSDL base code and the D-channel application software are validated by the CPU. The software is stored in flash EPROM on the DDCH card and need not be downloaded. But if the software is missing due to new installation, corruption, or loadware version mismatch, the CPU automatically downloads the base/application into the DDCH card.

Background audit
If a background audit of the card and associated applications finds that a download is required, the card is queued in the PSDL tree. Downloading is performed in background mode based on the entries in the PSDL tree.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

563

NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard

564

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 35: NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 565 Physical description on page 566 Functional description on page 567 Operation on page 568 Electrical specifications on page 569 Connector pin assignments on page 570 Introduction on page 519 Applications on page 578

Introduction
The NTCK16 generic Central Office trunk cards support up to eight analog Central Office trunks. They can be installed in any IPE slot. The cards are available with or without the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) feature. The cards are also available in numerous countries. Country specific information is provided in this chapter. The cards are identified by a two-letter suffix to the product code called the vintage. The card vintage is based on whether PPM is equipped or not, and the individual countries where the card is being installed.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

565

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

The cards listed below are minimum vintage required to support the following countries: NTCK16AA generic Central Office trunk card with PPM Ireland NTCK16BC generic Central Office trunk card without PPM. - Brazil - Ireland - Mexico - Tortolla - Singapore NTCK16AD generic Central Office trunk card with PPM Turkey NTCK16BD generic Central Office trunk card without PPM. - Argentina - Turkey - Brazil - Chile - Indonesia - Korea - Venezuela Throughout this chapter, cards with PPM are identified by the vintage AX. Cards without PPM are referenced by the vintage BX.

Physical description
The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards uses eight units. Each unit connects to the shelf backplane through an 80-pin connector. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel which is then cabled to the cross-connect terminal. At the cross-connect terminal, each unit connects to external apparatus by Tip and Ring leads.

Switch settings
There are no option switches on the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards. All settings are configured in software.

566

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Self-test
When the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX trunk cards are installed and power is applied to them, a self-test is performed on each card. The red LED on the faceplate flashes three times, then remains continuously lit until the card is enabled in software. If the self-test fails, the LED remains lit.

Functional description
The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards support up to eight analog Central Office trunks. They can be installed in any IPE slot. Both cards are exactly the same except for the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) feature. The NTCK16AX card supports internal 12/16 kHz PPM but the NTCK16BX card does not.

Common features
The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards: support the North American loss plan support loop start signalling support busy tone detection and supervision on a per unit basis. support battery reversal detection provide 4 dB dynamic attenuation pads on a per call basis allow individual units or the entire board to be disabled by software provide software selectable A-law or -law companding indicate self-test status during an automatic or manual self-test provide card-identification for auto configuration, and for determining the serial number and firmware level of the card convert transmission signals from analog-to-digital and from digital-to-analog provide termination and trans-hybrid balance impedance to match 600 .

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

567

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

Operation
Each NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk card supports the following: Loop start operation Battery reversal detection Busy tone detection and supervision Loss Switching Trunk-to-Trunk connections Call Disconnect In addition, the NTCK16AX circuit card supports internal 12/16 kHz PPM detection.

Loop start operation

Loop start operation is configured in software and is implemented in the card through software download messages.

Idle state
In the idle state, the ringing detector is connected across the tip and ring wires, providing a high impedance loop toward the Central Office.

Call placed by Central Office

The Central Office initiates a call by applying ringing between the tip and ring wires. If the call is answered, the ringing detector on the trunk card is switched out and a low resistance dc loop is placed between the tip and ring leads. On trunks configured for battery supervision, the battery detector records the polarity of the tip and ring wires and sends an answer acknowledge signal to software.

Call placed by CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1

To initiate a call, the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1switches out the ringing detector and places a low resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. On trunks configured for battery supervision, the trunk card sends a seize acknowledge signal to software.

568

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Electrical specifications

The system sends digits in the form of Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) tones or pulse digits. When the far-end answers, the Central Office reverses polarity. If the trunk is configured for battery supervision, it sends a polarity reversal message to software.

Central Office disconnect

There are two ways the Central Office can disconnect the call: by applying busy tone toward the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1. If the trunk card is configured to detect busy tone, it sends a disconnect message to software. by reversing battery. If the trunk card is configured to detect battery reversal, it sends a disconnect message to software. When the unit on the trunk card is idled, the trunk card sends a release confirm message to software.

CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1disconnect

The CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1disconnects the call by removing the loop between the tip and ring leads and replacing the ringing detector. Trunks configured for battery supervision send a release confirm message to software.

Electrical specifications
Power requirements
Table 243: NTCK16 circuit card power requirements on page 569 shows the power requirements for the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards. Table 243: NTCK16 circuit card power requirements
Voltage +15.0 V dc1
1

Idle Current 170 ma 170 ma 101 ma 160 ma

Active current 330 ma 249 ma 100 ma 322 ma

-15.0 V dc1 +8.5 V dc2 +5.0 V dc

1

Analog circuitry is powered with +/-12 V generated from +/-15 V. The maximum current imbalance between the +/-15 V rails is 100 ma per circuit pack. 8.5 V is regulated to give 5 V.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

569

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

Environmental specifications
Table 244: NTCK16 circuit card environmental specifications on page 570 lists the environmental specifications of the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards. Table 244: NTCK16 circuit card environmental specifications
Parameter Operating temperature Operating humidity Storage temperature Storage humidity Specifications 10 to 45 degrees C 20 to 80% RH (non-condensing) 20 to +60 degrees C 5 to 95% Relative Humidity

Pad switching
The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards support the North American loss plan. Software configuration allows the selection of 4 dB loss pads on a per unit basis. Table 245: NTCK16 pad switching
Loss PAD out PAD in Analog-to-Digital 0 dB +4 dB Digital-to-Analog 3 dB +1 dB

Note: The tolerance for the above nominal values is +0.3 dB, -0.7 dB.

Connector pin assignments

Cross connections
Figure 161: NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors A, E, K, R on page 572, Figure 162: NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/ O panel connectors B, F, L, S on page 573, and Figure 163: NTCK16 Central Office trunk

570

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors C, G, M, T on page 574 provide cross connect information for the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards.

Configuration
The trunk type for each unit on the card is selected by software service change entries at the system terminal.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

571

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

Figure 161: NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors A, E, K, R

572

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

Figure 162: NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors B, F, L, S

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

573

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

Figure 163: NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors C, G, M, T

NTCK16AX Central Office trunk card

Route Data Block
Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown.

574

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

Table 246: LD 16 - Route Data Block for NTCK16AX.

Prompt REQ: TYPE: CUST ROUT 0-511 0-127 COT xx Response NEW Description Define a new unit Define a new Route Data Block Customer number as defined in LD 15. Route number Range for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media Gateway 1000E Range for Small System, CS 1000E system, Media Gateway 1000B, and Media Gateway 1000T Define trunk type as Central Office Incoming and Outgoing trunk Change a trunk timer Set Ring Validation Timer to 128 ms. PPM is off, buffered, or unbuffered on this route.

TKTP ICOG CNTL TIMER MR

COT IAO YES RGV 256 (NO) PPM XLD

Trunk Data Block

Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown: Table 247: LD 14 - Trunk Data Block for NTCK16AX.
Prompt REQ: TYPE: TN lscu NEW COT Response Description Define a new trunk unit Central Office Trunk Terminal Number Format for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media Gateway 1000E, where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit Type is IPE COT Card density is 8D (default) Loop start signaling

XTRK3 CDEN SIGL

XCOT (8D) LOP

These prompts are required only for the first unit defined on each NTCK16AX card.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

575

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

Prompt PPID4 BTID5 Xx Xx

Response

Description 04 Ireland/Turkey 12 KHz 03 Turkey 16 KHz Enter the country busy tone ID: Tortola, Brazil = 10 Mexico = 10 or 08 (depending on CO)Singapore = 11 Ireland = 3 or 9 (depending on CO)Chile, Venezuela, Thailand, Korea = 06Argentina = 12 or 07Turkey = 14 Supervision yes (no) Busy tone supervision enabled Loop break supervision enabled Attenuation Pads In, (Out) Digitone signaling, (digipulse) Make-break ratio for pulse dialing speed.

SUPN STYP

(NO) YES BTS BAT

CLS

(LOL) SHL DTN, (DIP) P20, P12, (P10)

NTCK16BX Central Office trunk card

Route Data Block
Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown: Table 248: LD 16 - Route Data Block for NTCK16BX.
Prompt REQ: TYPE: CUST ROUT 0-511 COT xx Response NEW Description Define a new unit Define a new Route Data Block Customer number as defined in LD 15. Route number Range for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media Gateway 1000E

4 5

PPIDFreqMin pulse detection 0316Kz>70ms 0412Kz>70ms CountryBTIDCadence Brazil, Tortola10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off Mexico10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off Mexico 8375 ms on/off Singapore11750 ms on/off Ireland 3500 +/- 50 ms on/off Ireland 9375 - 750 ms on/off Kuwait, Chile 6500 +/- 50 ms on/ off Venezuela, Indonesia12300 ms on, 200 ms off Thailand, Korea12300 ms on, 200 ms off Argentina12300 ms on, 200 ms off Argentina07250 - 500 ms on/off Turkey1410 seconds of Tone 1: 200 ms off, 200 ms on; 200 ms off, 200 ms on; 200 ms off, 200 ms on; 200 ms off, 600 ms on; followed by Tone 2: 200 ms off, 200 ms on.

576

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuration

Prompt

Response 0-127

Description Range for Small System, CS 1000E system, Media Gateway 1000B, and Media Gateway 1000T Define trunk type as Central Office Incoming and Outgoing trunk Change a trunk timer Set Ring Validation Timer to 128 ms. PPM is off on this route.

TKTP ICOG CNTL TIMER MR

COT IAO YES RGV 256 (NO)

Trunk Data Block

Respond to the prompts in LD 14. Table 249: LD 14 - Trunk Data Block for NTCK16BX
Prompt REQ: TYPE: TN lscu COT Response NEW Description Define a new trunk unit. Central Office Trunk Terminal Number Format for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media Gateway 1000E, where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit Type is IPE COT Card density is 8D (default). Loop start signaling Enter the country busy tone ID: Tortola, Brazil = 10 Mexico = 10 or 08 (depending on CO) Singapore = 11 Ireland = 3 or 9 (depending on CO) Kuwait, Chile, Venezuela, Indonesia, Thailand,Korea = 06 Argentina = 12 or 07Turkey = 14 Supervision yes (no) Busy tone supervision enabled Loop break supervision enabled Attenuation Pads In, (Out)

XTRK6 CDEN SIGL BTID (See Periodic Pulse Metering on page 578.)

XCOT (8D) LOP Xx

SUPN STYP

(NO) YES BTS BAT

CLS

(LOL) SHL

These prompts are required only for the first unit defined on each NTCK16BX card.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

577

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

Prompt

Response (DIP) DTN (P10) P12 P20

Description Digitone signaling, (digipulse) Make-break ratio for pulse dialing speed.

BTID values by country

Country BTIDCadence Brazil Tortola 10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off Mexico 10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/offMexico 8375 ms on/off Singapore11750 ms on/off Ireland 3500 +/- 50 ms on/off Ireland 9375 - 750 ms on/off Kuwait, Chile 6500 +/- 50 ms on/off Venezuela, Indonesia1 2300 ms on, 200 ms off Thailand, Korea1 2300 ms on, 200 ms off Argentina1 2300 ms on, 200 ms off Argentina 07250 - 500 ms on/off Turkey 1410 seconds of Tone 1: 200 ms off, 200 ms on; 200 ms off, 200 ms on; 200 ms off, 200 ms on; 200 ms off, 600 ms on; followed by Tone 2: 200 ms off, 200 ms on.

Applications
Periodic Pulse Metering
All trunk units on the NTCK16AX trunk card can be individually configured to support the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) feature. Note: PPM is available on the NTCK16AX trunk card. It is not supported on the NTCK16BX trunk card. PPM allows the user of a telephone to keep an accurate record of Central Office calls for billing or administration purposes.

Detection limits
Pulses detected by the NTCK16AX circuit card must be within the following limits:
Frequency Level 11 880 to 12 120 Hz 105 to 1100 mVrms

578

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Applications

Note: The pack should not be used to detect levels of 1100 mVrms or greater a Tip and Ring, as this may result in noise. Pulse length Dependent on PPID see LD 14

Busy tone detect

Busy tone is sent by the Central Office to indicate the release of an established call.

Detection limits
The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards can detect busy tone within the following limits:
Frequency Level Cadence 30 to 0 dBm See on Trunk Data Block on page 575. 400 to 620 Hz

Loss switching
The Generic XFCOT is based on the XFCOT design, which is using a static pad download algorithm by default for its loss plan. The generic XFCOT has to be set explicitly to a Dynamic Pad Switching mode to make it compliant with the standard North American Dynamic Pad Switching mode. Therefore the following steps must be followed when the Generic XFCOT is installed: 1. Define Loss Switching mode. Respond to the prompts in LD 97 as shown. Table 250: LD 97 - Defining Loss Switching mode.
Prompt REQ: TYPE: ... NATP YES Select North American transmission plan. Response CHG SYSP IPE system parameters configuration Description

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

579

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

Prompt

Response

Description Note: The default to the NATP prompt is NO, and therefore this prompt must always be checked during installation.

2. Define Loss Switching Class Of Service. Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown. Table 251: LD 14 - Defining Loss Switching Class Of Service.
Prompt REQ: TYPE: XTRK SIGL ... CLS LOL LOL= Long Line Note: The XFCOT uses the CLS Long Line (LOL) and Short Line (SHL) for Loss Switching purposes and that the card and trunk type is different from the XUT. Response CHG COT XCOT LOP Description

Equivalencies
The following equivalencies do apply: XFCOT COT SHL is equivalent with XUT COT TRC XFCOT COT LOL is equivalent with XUT COT NTC. The entries TRC and NTC are no longer allowed for the Generic XFCOT.

Trunk to Trunk connection

When any disconnect supervision is configured (CLS = BAT, BTS), the Loop Start Trunk of the Generic XFCOT is marked as having disconnect supervision and therefore follows the same rules as a Ground Start Trunk. There is no configuration involved for this operation.

580

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Applications

Call disconnect
If any disconnect supervision is configured (CLS = BAT, BTS), the Loop Start Trunk is released when the disconnect signal is received. This applies also in call states such as ringing, campon, and DISA. There is no configuration involved for this operation.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

581

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

582

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 36: NTDW12AAE5 Universal Clock Controller daughter board

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 583 Physical description on page 586 Functional description on page 586

Introduction
Digital trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock source results in an equivalent shift in all parts of the network. In an Avaya Communication Server 1000 (Avaya CS 1000) system synchronization is accomplished with a clock controller daughterboard in each Media Gateway that contains a digital trunk card. The NTDW12AAE5 Universal clock controller card supports 1.5 Mb and 2.0 Mb clock recovery rates. The NTDW12AAE5 Universal clock controller daughterboard mounts directly on the NTDW79AAE5 Universal Digital Trunk card. For more information about mounting the Universal clock controller daughterboard on the Universal Digital Trunk card, see Avaya New in this Release (NN43001-115). Important: Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. Note: NTDW12AAE5 Universal Clock Controller daughter board can be mounted only on the NTDW79AAE5 UDT E1/T1 card. It cannot be mounted on any other Avaya digital trunk card, e.g. NTBK50, NTAK09.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

583

NTDW12AAE5 Universal Clock Controller daughter board

Note: NTDW12AAE5 Universal Clock Controller daughter board and the NTAK20 Clock Controller daughter board can be used in different cabinets within the same Avaya CS 1000 Small system/ Avaya CS 1000E cabinet. Note: The NTDW12AAE5 Universal Clock Controller daughter board mounted on the NTDW79AAE5 UDT E1/T1 card can be used as the clock controller card serving other Avaya digital trunk cards (e.g. NTBK50, NTAK09) within the same CS 1000 Small system/ CS 1000E cabinet. Note: Existing Avaya digital trunk cards (e.g. NTBK50, NTAK09) can be used as the Secondary clock reference for the NTDW12AAE5 Universal Clock Controller daughter board. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. The clock controller circuitry synchronizes the CS 1000 system to an external reference clock and generates and distributes the clock to the system. The CS 1000 system can function either as a slave to an external clock or as a clocking master. The Universal clock controller meets the AT&T Stratum 3 and Bell Canada Node Category D specifications and CCITT Stratum 4 specifications. The Universal clock controller performs the following functions: phase lock to a reference, generation of the 160 Khz system clock, and distribution of the clock to the CPU through the backplane accept one primary and one secondary reference primary-to-secondary switchover and auto-recovery chatter prevention due to repeated switching error-burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running capabilities communication with software jitter filtering use of an algorithm to detect crystal aging and qualify clocking information

Clocking modes
The CS 1000 supports a single clock controller that can operate in one of two modes: tracking or non-tracking (also known as free-run).

584

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Introduction

Tracking mode
In tracking mode, one or more DTI/PRI cards supply a clock reference to the clock controller daughterboard. When operating in tracking mode, one DTI/PRI card is defined as the Primary Reference Source (PREF) for clock synchronization. The other DTI/PRI card is defined as the Secondary Reference Source (SREF). PREF and SREF are defined in LD 73. There are two stages to clock controller tracking: tracking a reference locking on to a reference When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are almost matched, the clock controller locks on to the reference. The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond. If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks it, locks on to it, and matches frequencies exactly. Occasionally, environmental circumstances cause the external or internal clocks to vary. When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters the tracking stage. The green LED flashes until the clock controller is locked on to the reference again. If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller continuously tracks, and the LED continuously flashes green. This condition does not present a problem. It shows that the clock controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips occur, there is a problem with the clock controller or the incoming line.

Free-run (non-tracking)
In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any outside source. Instead, it provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when the CS 1000 acts as a master clock source for other systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the CS 1000 is intended to be a slave to an external network clock. Free-run mode can occur when both the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due to hardware faults or invoked using software commands.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

585

NTDW12AAE5 Universal Clock Controller daughter board

Physical description
Faceplate LEDs
Each motherboard (NTDW79AAE5 UDT E1/T1 card) has four DTI/PRI LEDs and one clock controller LED. The clock controller LED is dual-color (red and green). The clock controller LED states are described in Table 252: Faceplate LEDs on page 586. Table 252: Faceplate LEDs
State On (Red) On (Green) Definition The clock controller is equipped and disabled/not configured. The clock controller is equipped, enabled, and is either locked to a reference or is in free run mode. The clock controller is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to a reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period of time, check the CC STAT in LD 60. If the CC is tracking this may be an acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock controller error conditions. If none exist, then this state is acceptable, and the flashing is identifying jitter on the reference The clock controller is not equipped.

Flashing (Green)

Off

Functional description
The main functional blocks of the Universal clock controller daughterboard include: phase difference detector circuit digital phase lock loops (PLL) digital-to-analog converter signal conditioning drivers and buffers

586

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

sanity timer microprocessor CPU interface Oven Controlled Voltage Controlled Oscillator (OCVCXO)

Phase difference detector circuit

This circuit, under firmware control, enables a phase difference measurement to be taken between the reference entering the PLL and the system clock. The phase difference is used for making frequency measurements and evaluating input jitter and PLL performance.

Digital phase lock loops

The main digital PLL enables the clock controller to provide a system clock to the CPU. This clock is both phase and frequency locked to a known incoming reference. The hardware has a locking range of + 4.6 ppm for Stratum 3 and + 50 ppm for Stratum 4 (CCITT). A second PLL on the clock controller provides the means for monitoring another reference. Note that the error signal of this PLL is routed to the phase difference detector circuit so the microprocessor can process it.

System clock specification and characteristics

As the accuracy requirements for CCITT and EIA Stratum 3 are different, it is necessary to have two TCVCXOs which feature different values of frequency tuning sensitivity. See Table 253: System clock specification and characteristics on page 587. Table 253: System clock specification and characteristics
Specifications Base Frequency Accuracy Operating Temperature Drift Rate (Aging) Tuning Range (minimum) CCITT 20.48 MHz 3 ppm 0 to 70 C 1 ppm 1 ppm per year 60 ppm min. 90 ppm max. Input Voltage Range 0 to 10 volts, 5 V center EIA 20.48 MHz 1 ppm 0 to 70 C 1 ppm 4 ppm in 20 years 10 ppm min. 15 ppm max. 0 to 10 volts, 5 V center

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

587

NTDW12AAE5 Universal Clock Controller daughter board

EIA/CCITT compliance
The clock controller complies with 1.5 Mb EIA Stratum 3ND, 2.0 Mb CCITT or 2.56 Mb basic rate. The differences between these requirements mainly affect PLL pull in range. Stratum 4 conforms to international markets (2.0 Mb) while Stratum 3 conforms to North American markets (1.5 Mb).

Monitoring references
The primary and secondary synchronization references are continuously monitored to provide autorecovery.

Reference switchover
Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or loss of signal. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference is out of specification. If the reference being used is out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention. If both references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover.

Autorecovery and chatter

If the command "track to primary" is given, the clock controller tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the primary goes out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to secondary when the secondary is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary, then switches over to the primary when the primary recovers. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary and continues to do so even if the secondary recovers. If the command "track to secondary" is given, the clock controller tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references. If the secondary goes out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided that is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary, but switches over to the secondary when the secondary recovers. If the secondary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the secondary even if the primary recovers.

588

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

To prevent chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources, a time-out mechanism of at least 10 seconds is implemented.

Digital to analog converter

The Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) enables the microprocessor to track, hold, and modify the error signal generated in the digital PLL. The firmware uses the available memory on the clock controller to provide error-burst detection and correction. Temporary holdover occurs in the momentary absence of the reference clock.

Holdover and free-run

In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the clock controller provides a stable holdover. Free-run mode is initiated when the clock controller has no record of the quality of the incoming reference clock. If the command "free run" is given, the clock controller enters the free-run mode and remains there until a new command is received. Free-run automatically initiates after the clock controller is enabled.

Signal conditioning
Drivers and buffers are provided for all outgoing and incoming lines.

Sanity timer
The sanity timer resets the microprocessor in the event of system hang-up.

Microprocessor
The microprocessor does the following: communicates with software monitors two references provides a self-test during initialization minimizes the propagation of impairments on the system clock due to errors on the primary or secondary reference clocks

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

589

NTDW12AAE5 Universal Clock Controller daughter board

Reference Clock Selection

The DTI/PRI card routes its reference to the appropriate line on the backplane. The clock controller distributes the primary and secondary references and ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1 backplane line. It designates the DTI/PRI motherboard as a primary reference source. The secondary reference is obtained from another DTI/PRI card, which is designated by a technician. No other clock sources are used.

External timing interface

The clock controller provides an external timing interface and accepts two signals as timing references. An external reference is an auxiliary timing clock which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal and is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic-bearing timing signal. The clock controller uses either the external/auxiliary references or the DTI/PRI references.

Hardware integrity and regulatory environment

The clock controller complies with the following hardware integrity and regulatory specifications:
Item EMI Specification FCC part 15 sub- part J CSA C108.8 CISPR publication 22 IEC 801-2 IEC 68-2-1 IEC 68-2-2 IEC 68-2-14 IEC 68-2-3 IEC 68-2-6 IEC 68-2-7 IEC 68-2-29 IEC 68-2-31 IEC 68-2-32

ESD Temperature

Humidity Vibration/Shock

590

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 37: NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 591 Processor on page 594 Ethernet ports on page 594 Expansion daughterboards on page 594 Backplane interface on page 595 Serial data interface ports on page 595 Faceplate LED display on page 596

Introduction
The NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card provides a gateway controller for MG 1000E IP Media Gateways in an Avaya Communication Server 1000E (Avaya CS 1000E) system. The MGC only functions as a gateway controller under control of an Avaya CS 1000E Call Server. The NTDW98 MGC card is functionally identical to the NTDW60, but contains a metal faceplate for enhanced EMC containment. Avaya recommends you use a NTDW98 MGC card in the Media Gateway 1010 (MG 1010). The MGC card has two expansion sites to accommodate Digital Signal Processor (DSP) daughterboards (DBs). The daughterboards are described in NTDW62, NTDW64, and NTDW78 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards on page 641. The MGC card occupies the system controller slot 0 in the Media Gateway chassis.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

591

NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card

The MGC card, without expansion daughterboards, includes the following components and features: Arm processor. 128 MB RAM. 4MB boot flash. Internal CompactFlash (CF) card mounted on the card. It appears to the software as a standard ATA hard drive. Embedded Ethernet switch. Six 100 BaseT Ethernet ports for connection to external networking equipment. Four character LED display on the faceplate. Two PCI Telephony Mezzanine Card form factor sites for system expansion. Real time clock (RTC). Backplane interface. Three serial data interface ports.

592

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Introduction

Figure 164: MGC block diagram

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

593

NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card

Processor
The processor combines RISC processors, DSP resources, SDRAM controller, and UARTs. The processor runs the application as well as providing tone and conference functions. It interfaces to the rest of the system using Ethernet.

Ethernet ports
External connections
Of the six external Ethernet ports, three are reserved for ELAN subnet connections and three for TLAN subnet connections. Two ELAN ports and two TLAN ports are accessed via RJ-45 connectors on the faceplate. The third ELAN and the third TLAN port are connected to the backplane. The two ports connected to the backplane are available if an Option 11C cabinet or a CS 1000M Cabinet is used. The Option 11C cabinet requires a backplane adapter. The CS 1000M Cabinet does not require a backplane adapter.

Internal connections
Four Ethernet ports provide internal connections: one to each of the expansion daughterboards, and a TLAN subnet and an ELAN subnet connection to the processor.

Expansion daughterboards
Both expansion sites use the same PMC form factor and pin-out. However, one site is intended for a VoIP daughterboard only and provides Ethernet and TDM connectivity. It is not accessible from the faceplate and a PCI bus is not available. The other site provides a full PCI bus and faceplate accessibility in addition to Ethernet and TDM.

594

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Backplane interface

Backplane interface
The FPGA features include: Serial data interface port Time slot interchanger (TSIC) SSD X12/A10 signaling interface CE-Mux bus interface CardLan interface DS30x interface TDM bus for tones and conference System clock generation and system clock reference

Serial data interface ports

The MGC has three serial data interface (SDI) ports. The ports can be used locally for debugging, or they can be configured in the CS 1000E Call Sever as system terminals. Only ports SDI 0 and SDI 1 can be used to access the installation menu during initial configuration of the MGC. SDI 2 is not available during bootup. Due to a limitation of the three port cable used, SDI 1 and SDI 2 do not use hardware flow control. Only SDI 0 has full modem support.

TTY default settings

The default tty settings for the SDI ports are: Baud rate: 9600. Data bit length: 8. Stop bit: 1. Parity: none. Flow control: none.

MGC serial port configuration change

If the serial ports are configured as SL1 terminals on the Call Server, the tty default settings can be changed in LD 17. Any values configured in LD 17 are downloaded to the MGC and

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

595

NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card

override default values. The downloaded values persist over restarts and power outages. A system message is output when the serial port baud rate is changed.

Faceplate LED display

The faceplate on the MGC card has a four character LED display. The diagnostic messages summarized in the following table are displayed on the faceplate. Table 254: Faceplate display
Message BOOT POST PASS EXXX LOAD LLL:S Description This is the first message displayed when the system becomes active. Power on self test. This message is displayed when the MGC is carrying out system tests during power up. Power on self test pass. Error code. XXX is a numeric value. An error code is displayed if a serious system error is detected. Application software is loading. IPMG super loop and MGC shelf number. LLL is the superloop number. S is the shelf number. For example, 032:0, 120:1

Faceplate LED display

In a normal boot process the diagnostic messages would be displayed in the following order: 1. BOOT 2. POST 3. PASS 4. LOAD If there is a fatal self test error during bootup, an error code appears and the PASS and LOAD messages are not displayed. During normal operations the LED displays the IP Media Gateway (IPMG) superloop and MGC shelf number. If an error occurs the display cycles between the shelf number and the error code. Each item is displayed for 20 seconds.

596

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 38: NTDW20 Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 597 Processors on page 600 Ethernet interfaces on page 601 Backplane interface on page 601 LED indicators on page 602 Network connections and dual homing on page 602

Introduction
The NTDW20 Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC) is a dual card assembly based on Media Gateway Controller (MGC) hardware. It provides control over line cards in an IPE shelf. The MG XPEC consists of a mother board (MB) and a daughter board (DB), which operate independently of one another. Each board provides the same hardware functionality as that of an MGC. Each card (MB/DB) of the dual-card assembly contains the following features: MindSpeed Chagall-2 Processor M82515 to run Avaya proprietary software Two on-board M82710 processors, as two High Density DSP DB (on-board), provide 192 DSP Channels with media security Ten port Embedded Fast Ethernet Switch Two faceplate 100 BaseT E-LAN ports

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

597

NTDW20 Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller card

Two faceplate 100 BaseT T-LAN ports SDRAM Local Flash Boot-ROM Compact Flash Card (ATA) Program Store and file system FPGA for Avaya proprietary connection for A31, TSIC, CardLan, UART Two Remote TTY ports Faceplate Four-Character Hex Display RTC with charge capacitor hold-up In-rush power controller to support hot-plug In addition to the previously listed features, the MB consists of the following: Clock circuitry of Stratum 4 quality; allow clock daisy chain to form among several MG XPEC shelves, see Avaya Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning (NN43041-310) One Remote TTY for XSM MG XPEC MB also provides a relay to replace the PFTU relay in the XSM module loaded in the base of the column

598

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Introduction

Figure 165: MG XPEC block diagram

The MGC and MG XPEC run the same MGC loadware. A run-time check exists to identify which hardware platform the MGC loadware is running on. Therefore, each half of the dual card assembly functions identically to the MGC, except for the following differences: Each board of the dual assembly controls 8 slots of the IPE shelf for a total of 16. The MGC controls 10 slots. The motherboard controls the 8 IPE slots to the left of the MG XPEC and the daughter board controls the 8 IPE slots to the right of the MG XPEC. Card slots are numbered from 0 to 7 for the mother board and 0 to 7 for the daughter board, whereas the MGC card slots are numbered from 1 to 10. IPE shelves do not support CEMUX cards. CEMUX cards are supported in a CS 1000E shelf populated with an MGC card. The mother board and daughter board share the Card LAN bus between each other. The third TTY on the MG XPEC motherboard is dedicated for support of the XSM card (NT8D22). The third TTY is not available on the daughter board for the MG XPEC. Boot messages only display on TTY port 0 (needed for PMS support). MG XPEC cards slots 8, 9 and 10 are dedicated for DSP resources.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

599

NTDW20 Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller card

The MG XPEC registers to the call server as an IPMG type of MGX. Overlays accept, as input and print, an IPMG type of MGX for the MG XPEC in all instances where it uses an IPMG type of MGC for the MGC. There are no removable DSP daughter boards on the MG XPEC. One-hundred and ninetytwo DSP resources populate each board of the dual assembly. The software treats the DSP resources as MGC DSP daughter boards. Therefore, from a software perspective, each board of the dual assembly possesses two high density MGC DSP daughter boards. When replacing the Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (XPEC) card with the MG XPEC, all equipment in the common equipment and network shelves are not used. The MG XPEC communicates with the Call Server through the ELAN instead of the DS30Y TDM loops used by the previous XPEC card. To the Call Server, the MG XPEC appears as two separate IPMG loops. Important: The IPMG package must be enabled so that the Call Server can accept the IP media gateway connections.

Processors
Chagall-2 Core
The MG XPEC utilizes a MindSpeed Chagall-2 Processor M82515 to execute Avaya software. The Chagall-2 processor combines an ARM9 RISC processor (CSP) for user applications, a second ARM9 RISC processor (MSP), and DSP resources for packet and media processing. The Chagall-2 processor also provides a shared memory interface, an SDRAM controller, UARTs and Ethernet interfaces.

DSP processors
Two on-board M82710 processors, as two High Density DSP DB (on-board), provide 192 DSP Channels with media security. The MindSpeed Picasso processor (M82710) voice solution is used.

600

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Ethernet interfaces

Ethernet interfaces
The Chagall-2 processor contains two external Ethernet interfaces as well as internal virtual Ethernet ports. The MSP controls both external Ethernet interfaces and the CSP accesses them through a virtual Ethernet port as part of the internal shared memory bus. One interface, the standard Chagall-2 Ethernet port, provides the media path and slave control interface (TLAN) and the other provides the ELAN interface. Another virtual Ethernet port provides the CSP to MSP communication path.

Backplane interface
The following interfaces are provided on Communication Server 1000 MG XPEC (IP XPEC) backplane connector for both MB and DB: DS-30X voice/signalling Card LAN TTY ports

DS-30X voice/signalling
The DS30X bus contains 32 timeslots for each IPE slot. Each timeslot consists of 8 bits of TDM data and 2 bits of signalling data. The FPGA performs the transformation between 10 bits DS30X timeslot and 8 bits TDM timeslot of the MindSpeed processors.

Card LAN
Like the MGC, the FPGA implements the local back plane 19200 baud CardLan UART functionality. The MB and DB must share control of the Card LAN bus through hardware negotiation. The hardware negotiation takes place in the FPGA of MB and DB.

TTY ports
Two TTY ports (TTY0, 1) from the Master Chagall-2 are routed to backplane for general usage.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

601

NTDW20 Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller card

The MB contains a third TTY port (TTY2), which is reserved for XSM connection. The DB TTY2 is not used.

LED indicators
The faceplate Ethernet port contains LED indicators incorporated into and RJ45 connector. The Embedded Ethernet Switch directly controls the faceplate Ethernet port. The backplane TLAN/ELAN ports' RJ45 connectors are installed on Backplane . The LED indicators contain the same signal assignment as faceplate RJ45 connectors. Table 255: Ethernet LED indicator functions on page 602 summarizes the Ethernet LED indicator functions. Table 255: Ethernet LED indicator functions
TLAN/ELAN LED color yellow green Function speed link/activity

When a link is establish, the green LED illuminates and flashes when activity exists on the link. When the link is established at a 100 BaseT speed, the yellow LED illuminates, otherwise it does not illuminate.

Network connections and dual homing

Each of the dual assembly boards of the MG XPEC contains 4 physical network connections. The MG XPEC contains no physical network back plane connection as does the MGC. The dual homing feature on the MGX works identically to the MGC, except all 4 network connection are on the faceplate. Faceplate connections must be routed to the rear I/O using the new NTDW25AAE6 cable kit. See Figure 166: MG XPEC faceplate on page 603 for the MG XPEC faceplate.

602

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Network connections and dual homing

Figure 166: MG XPEC faceplate

Dual homing works independently for each half of the dual assembly board. Network traffic sent and received on one board is not seen by the other. To connect an MG XPEC for dual homing, each half requires the following: 2 ELAN physical connections 2 TLAN physical connections 1 ELAN IP address 3 TLAN IP addresses Therefore a total of following exists for each MG XPEC card: 4 ELAN physical connections 4 TLAN physical connections 2 ELAN IP address 6 TLAN IP addresses

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

603

NTDW20 Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller card

If you do not require dual homing then only one physical ELAN connection and one physical TLAN connection is required for each board in the dual assembly. You do not have to connect both halves of the board to get the other working, since each half of the dual assembly is stand alone.

604

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 39: NTDW56 and NTDW59 Common Processor Media Gateway card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 605 Cabinet and chassis support on page 607 Faceplate on page 608 Status LED on page 608 LED display on page 609 Serial data interface ports on page 610 Ethernet connections on page 610 Media storage on page 611 Security Device (Dongle) on page 613

Introduction
The hardware for the Common Processor Media Gateway (CP MG) card consists of integrating a Common Processor, a Gateway Controller, and non-removable Digital Signal Processor (DSP) resources into a single card for use in an Avaya Communication Server 1000E (Avaya CS 1000E) system. The CP MG card design is based on the CP PM card and MGC card with DSP daughterboards. The CP MG card is available in two versions: NTDW56BAE6 - CP MG card with 32 DSP ports NTDW59BAE6 - CP MG card with 128 DSP ports The CP MG card provides improvements in port density and cost reductions by functioning as a Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server (Co-res CS and SS) and a Gateway Controller with DSP ports while only occupying slot 0 in a Media Gateway cabinet or chassis.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

605

NTDW56 and NTDW59 Common Processor Media Gateway card

The CP MG card includes the following components and features: Intel EP80579 integrated processor, 1200 Mhz (Common Processor) 2 GB DDR2 RAM (expandable to 4 GB) 160 GB SATA hard drive USB to 1-wire bridge chip from Intel processor to security device One faceplate USB 2.0 port for software installations and upgrades Two faceplate Common Processor TTY serial ports Mindspeed Chagall-2 processor M82515 to run Avaya proprietary software (MGC, tone and conference) SPI flash for BIOS storage Compact Flash card (ATA) for Chagall-2 file system Onboard flash boot-ROM Three backplane TTY ports, two from Chagall-2, one from Intel Common Processor Mindspeed Picasso M82710 or Matisse M82910 for VoIP or DSP resources Ten port embedded fast Ethernet switch One faceplate 100 BaseT T-LAN port One faceplate 100 BaseT E-LAN port One backplane 100 BaseT T-LAN port One backplane 100 BaseT E-LAN port Faceplate status LED and card reset buttons In-rush power controller to support hot-plug The CP MG hardware block diagram is a schematic of the CP MG hardware.

606

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Cabinet and chassis support

Figure 167: CP MG hardware block diagram

The Gateway Controller component of the CP MG card is based on the same architecture as the MGC card. For more information about the Gateway Controller architecture, see NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card on page 591. The Gateway Controller component of the CP MG card registers with the Call Server with an Internet Protocol Media Gateway (IPMG) type of MGS. The Avaya CS 1000E system uses a common Gateway Controller loadware for the MGC, MG XPEC, and MGS. Important: The IPMG package must be enabled so that the Call Server can accept the IP Media Gateway connections.

Cabinet and chassis support

The CP MG card is supported in the following Media Gateway chassis: Option 11C cabinet. Option 11C expansion cabinet Option 11C Mini chassis Option 11C Mini expander chassis

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

607

NTDW56 and NTDW59 Common Processor Media Gateway card

MG 1000E main chassis MG 1000E expander chassis MG 1010 chassis The CP MG card occupies the system controller slot 0 in a Media Gateway chassis.

Faceplate
The CP MG card faceplate provides reset buttons, status LEDs, a four character LED display, a USB 2.0 port, two serial connections, and two Ethernet connections. A labelled CP MG card faceplate is shown in Figure 168: CP MG faceplate on page 608.

Figure 168: CP MG faceplate

The Common Processor (CP) and Gateway Controller (MGS) reset buttons provide a hardware reset for each component. The reset buttons are recessed to prevent accidental resets. You must use a small blunt object to press the reset buttons. You can perform a CP hardware reset with a press of the CP reset button. You can perform a MGS reset with a press of the MG reset button. You can also perform a MGS password reset, see Resetting the CP MG card MGS password on page 608.

Resetting the CP MG card MGS password

1. At the LDB shell login prompt, type resetPWD and follow the instructions. 2. Press the MG reset button on the CP MG faceplate. The CP MG faceplate USB 2.0 port allows you to use a USB 2.0 storage device to install, upgrade, or patch the Linux base software on the CP MG card.

Status LED
The CP and MG status LEDs are tri-color status indicators for each component, see Table 256: CP MG faceplate LED status on page 609. The HD status LED flashes to indicate SATA hard drive activity.

608

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

LED display

Table 256: CP MG faceplate LED status

LED color Green Orange Red Flashing Red Off Common Processor status All applications running Linux running, applications booting Gateway Controller status Not used Self test error

BIOS and Linux Base initializing Booting Not used No power Self test passed Running, or no power

LED display
The four character LED display provides information on the CP MG card status during poweron self test and during boot. The four character LED display provides super-loop and shelf information when the Media Gateway registers with the Call Server. The four character LED display also provides the IP link status between the MGS and the Call Server. The diagnostic messages display on the CP MG faceplate, see Table 257: CP MG LED display on page 609 Table 257: CP MG LED display
Message BOOT POST PASS EXXX LOAD LLL:S Description This is the first message displayed when the system becomes active. Power on self test. This message is displayed when the MGS is carrying out system tests during power up. Power on self test pass. Error code. XXX is a numeric value. An error code is displayed if a serious system error is detected. Application software is loading. IPMG super loop and MGS shelf number. LLL is the superloop number. S is the shelf number. For example, 032:0, 120:1

In a normal boot process the diagnostic messages display in the following order: 1. BOOT 2. POST 3. PASS 4. LOAD

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

609

NTDW56 and NTDW59 Common Processor Media Gateway card

If a fatal self test error occurs during bootup, an error code appears and the PASS and LOAD messages do not display. During normal operations the LED displays the IP Media Gateway (IPMG) superloop and MGS shelf number. If an error occurs the display cycles between the shelf number and the error code. Each item is displayed for 20 seconds.

Serial data interface ports

The two RJ45 serial ports (TTY1, TTY2) provide serial connections to the Common Processor. The CP MG card serial ports are factory configured to 9600 bps 8-N-1. You require an NTC325AAE6 CP MG serial port adapter kit, a customer provided straight through Cat-5 Ethernet cable, a 9 pin and a 25 pin serial cable, and a maintenance terminal to establish serial connections. The NTC325AAE6 CP MG serial port adapter kit includes a 9 pin and a 25 pin adapter. The 9 pin adapter provides TX, RX, and ground for null modem. The 25 pin adapter provides a full set of signals without null modem for DCE. The CP MG serial port adapter kit is required to connect to a 9 pin or 25 pin serial cable. The adapter kit pin mapping is shown in Table 258: CP MG serial port adapter kit pin mapping on page 610. Table 258: CP MG serial port adapter kit pin mapping
RJ45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 1 4 5 2 3 8 7 DB-9 pin DB-25 pin 6 8 20 7 3 2 5 1 I O I O I I O I/O Description DCE Data Set Ready (DSR) Received Line Signal Detector (DCD) DTE Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Signal Ground (SG) Received Data (RXD) Transmitted Data (TXD) Clear to Send (CTS) Request to Send (RTS)

Ethernet connections
The CP MG card provides four external Ethernet LAN connections. Two connections are on the faceplate, and two connections are on the backplane. Dual homing is supported on each pair of LAN connections. The CP MG card does not support a High Speed Pipe (HSP) connection.

610

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Media storage

The two faceplate Ethernet ports (1E, 2T) provide TLAN and ELAN connections. The Ethernet ports contain integrated LEDs to provide link, activity, and speed indicators, see Table 259: CP MG faceplate TLAN and ELAN LED status on page 611. Table 259: CP MG faceplate TLAN and ELAN LED status
Ethernet port LED color Yellow Green Speed Link and activity Status Description ON - 100 BaseT OFF - 10 BaseT ON - Link established OFF No link Flashing - Activity on link

The Server and Gateway Controller components of the CP MG card are networked internally through the embedded Ethernet switch on the CP MG card. The Common Processor and Gateway Controller are co-located on the motherboard of the CP MG card, therefore the IP data links between the Server and Gateway Controller do not require external cabling. You require an NTDW63BAE5 backplane adapter to provide DECT clock reference synchronization connections. The NTDW63BAE5 adapter is the same adapter you use with MGC cards.

Media storage
A Compact Flash card provides the Gateway Controller program and file system storage which is used to store downloaded program images and applications. The PCI to CF bridge device is TI PCI1510. The Compact Flash card presents a standard ATA (disk drive type) interface. The CP MG card requires a SATA hard drive running the Linux Base Operating System. For new installations, you must install the 160 GB pre-loaded SATA hard drive onto the CP MG card. The 160 GB hard drive contains a pre-installed Linux Base Operating System. If the hard drive fails, you can replace the hard drive by performing the following procedure. You need a small Phillips screw driver to install the hard drive.

Replacing the CP MG hard drive

Electrostatic alert: Observe proper ESD precautions while handling the hard drive and CP MG card. To install a hard drive on a new CP MG card, perform steps 4 and 5 only. 1. Power off and remove the CP MG card from the Media Gateway cabinet or chassis. 2. Remove the four Phillips screws on the bottom of the CP MG card to unsecure the hard drive, see Figure 169: CP MG card hard drive screws on page 612.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

611

NTDW56 and NTDW59 Common Processor Media Gateway card

Figure 169: CP MG card hard drive screws

3. Slide the defective hard drive off the SATA connector J7. and remove the defective hard drive from the CP MG card. 4. Place the replacement hard drive on the CP MG card and slide the replacement hard drive into SATA connector J7. See Figure 170: CP MG card hard drive connector on page 612.

Figure 170: CP MG card hard drive connector

5. Secure the replacement hard drive from the bottom of the CP MG card with the four Phillips screws. You can reinstall the CP MG card into the Media Gateway cabinet or chassis. If the replacement hard drive does not have Linux Base pre-installed, install the Linux Base software from a bootable USB 2.0 flash drive. For more information, see Avaya Communication Server 1000 New in this Release, NN43001-115.

612

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Security Device (Dongle)

Security Device (Dongle)

The installation of the CP MG Security Device is the same procedure as a CP PM card, however the device is in a different location on the CP MG. Figure 171: CP MG Security Device (Dongle) on page 613 shows the location of the dongle on the CP MG.

Figure 171: CP MG Security Device (Dongle)

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

613

NTDW56 and NTDW59 Common Processor Media Gateway card

614

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 40: NTDW53 and NTDW54 Common Processor Dual Core card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 615 Cabinet and chassis support on page 616 Faceplate on page 617 Status LED on page 617 Serial data interface ports on page 618 Media storage on page 619 Security Device (Dongle) on page 620

Introduction
The Common Processor Dual Core (CP DC) card is a Server card for use in an Avaya Communication Server 1000E (Avaya CS 1000E) system. The CP DC card is designed to replace the Common Processor Pentium Mobile (CP PM) card. The CP DC card contains a dual core AMD processor and upgraded components which can provide improvements in processing power and speed over the CP PM card. The CP DC card requires the Linux Base Operating System, and supports Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server, or standalone Signaling Server configurations. The CP DC card does not support the standard or high availability Call Server configuration. The CP DC card is available in two versions: NTDW53AAE6 - single slot metal faceplate CP DC card. NTDW54AAE6 - double slot metal faceplate CP DC card. The CP DC card provides performance improvements in MIPS, maximum memory capacity, and network transfer rate, and occupies only one IPE slot in a Media Gateway.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

615

NTDW53 and NTDW54 Common Processor Dual Core card

The CP DC card includes the following components and features: AMD Athlon 64 X2 1.8 Ghz dual core processor 2 GB DDR2 RAM 160 GB SATA hard drive Three faceplate USB 2.0 ports for software installations, upgrades, patching, and USB keyboard and mouse support One faceplate VGA port for monitor support Two faceplate Gigabit Ethernet ports Faceplate status LED and card reset buttons You can use a USB 2.0 storage device to install or upgrade the Linux Base Operating System. The CP DC card does not support Compact Flash (CF) cards. An NTDW5309E6 2 GB memory upgrade kit is available for Media Application Server (MAS) deployments. This upgrades a CP DC card to a total of 4 GB DDR2 RAM. Important: The IPMG package must be enabled so that the Call Server can accept IP Media Gateway connections.

Cabinet and chassis support

The NTDW53 single-slot CP DC card is supported in the following chassis: Option 11C cabinet (except for slot 0). Option 11C expansion cabinet (except for slot 0). Option 11C Mini chassis (except for slot 0 and slot 4). Option 11C Mini expander chassis. MG 1000E main chassis (except for slot 0). MG 1000E expander chassis. MG 1010 chassis (except for slot 0). The NTDW54 double-slot CP DC card is supported in the CS 1000M IPE Universal Equipment Module (UEM). Slot 0 in the Option 11C , Option 11C expansion, Option 11C Mini and MG 1000E main chassis are reserved for the Gateway Controller. Slot 4 in the Option 11C Mini is reserved for the 48 DLC.

616

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Faceplate

Faceplate
The CP DC card is available in two sizes: NTDW53 single slot, and NTDW54 double slot. The CP DC card faceplate provides a reset button, status LEDs, three USB 2.0 ports, one VGA port, and two Gigabit Ethernet ports. The NTDW53 CP DC card faceplate is shown in Figure 172: NTDW53 CP DC faceplate on page 617.

Figure 172: NTDW53 CP DC faceplate

The VGA port provides monitor support. The three USB 2.0 ports provide USB keyboard, USB mouse, and USB 2.0 storage device support. You can use the USB 2.0 ports for software installations, upgrades, and patches. The reset button provides a CP DC hardware reset. The reset button is recessed to prevent accidental resets. You must use a small blunt object to access the reset button. During a reset the status LED will flash red until the reset is complete. The CP DC card does not provide a faceplate INI button. To re-initialize a CP DC card, use the Command Line Interface (CLI) appstart cs restart command.

Status LED
The CP DC faceplate STS LED is a tri-color system status indicator. To determine the CP DC system status, see Table 260: CP DC faceplate status LED on page 617. Table 260: CP DC faceplate status LED
LED color Green Flashing Green Orange Flashing Orange Red Flashing Red Off Link is up Link is down Linux applications loading Linux applications load successful BIOS self test Bootrom and Linux base loading No power CP DC system status

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

617

NTDW53 and NTDW54 Common Processor Dual Core card

The CP DC faceplate RED LED is not active and is intended for future use The RED LED is a tri-color redundancy status indicator. The HD ACT LED flashes during SATA hard drive activity.

Ethernet connections
The two RJ45 Ethernet ports provide TLAN and ELAN connections. The CP DC card does not contain a High Speed Pipe (HSP) port because Linux base Servers do not use the HSP mechanism. The CP DC Ethernet ports contain two integrated LEDs to provide link, activity, and speed indicators, see Figure 173: CP MG Ethernet port LED indicators on page 618.

Figure 173: CP MG Ethernet port LED indicators

Important: If your cabinet or chassis does not require specific Avaya supplied cables for CP DC cards, you must use shielded twisted pair Ethernet cables for CP DC faceplate ELAN and TLAN connections.

Serial data interface ports

The CP DC has two serial data interface (SDI) ports: Port 0 and Port 1. Both ports are standard RS232 DTE ports. They are routed through the backplane of the shelf to a 50-pin main distribution frame (MDF) connector on the back of the shelf. You require a NTAK19ECE6 cable to adapt the 50-pin MDF to a pair of 25-pin DB connectors. A 25-pin null modem is required to adapt an SDI port to a typical PC serial port. Port 0 is used for maintenance access. Port 1 is for an external modem connection. You can change the baud rate of the CP DC card from the BIOS menu. The default serial connection baud rate of the CP DC card is 9600 bps, no parity, 1 stop bit. The CP DC card serial port connection procedure remains the same as the CP PM card . For more information, see Linux Platform Base and Applications installation and commissioning, NN43001-315 .

618

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Media storage

Media storage
The CP DC card contains a 160 GB SATA hard drive. The hard drive stores the Linux Base Operating System. If the hard drive fails, you can replace it by performing the following procedure. You need a small Phillips screw driver to install the hard drive.

Replacing the CP DC hard drive

Electrostatic alert: Observe proper ESD precautions while handling the hard drive and CP DC card. To install a hard drive on a new CP DC card, perform steps 4 and 5 only. 1. Power off and remove the CP DC card from the Media Gateway cabinet or chassis. 2. Remove the four Phillips screws on the bottom of the CP DC card to unsecure the hard drive, see Figure 174: CP DC card hard drive screws on page 619.

Figure 174: CP DC card hard drive screws

3. Slide the defective hard drive off the SATA connector J8. and remove the defective hard drive from the CP DC card. 4. Place the replacement hard drive on the CP DC card and slide the replacement hard drive into SATA connector J8. 5. Secure the replacement hard drive from the bottom of the CP DC card with the four Phillips screws. You can reinstall the CP DC card into the Media Gateway cabinet or chassis. If the replacement hard drive does not have Linux Base pre-installed, install the Linux Base software from a bootable USB 2.0 flash drive. For more information, see Avaya Communication Server 1000 New in this Release, NN43001-115.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

619

NTDW53 and NTDW54 Common Processor Dual Core card

Security Device (Dongle)

The installation of the CP DC Security Device remains the same as the CP PM, however the device is in a different location on the board.Figure 175: CP DC security dongle on page 620 shows the location of the dongle on the CP DC card.

Figure 175: CP DC security dongle

620

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 41: NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 621 Cabinet/chassis support on page 624 Media storage on page 624 Memory on page 628 Ethernet interfaces on page 633 Serial data interface ports on page 634 USB 2.0 port on page 635 Security device on page 635 Faceplate on page 635 LED indicators on page 637

Introduction
The system hardware for the Common Processor Pentium Mobile (CP PM) consists of one new pack design with multiple variants: CP PM NTDW61 (single slot), NTDW99 (metal faceplate single slot), and CP PM NTDW66 IPE (double slot). The NTDW99 CP PM card is functionally identical to the NTDW61, but contains a metal faceplate for enhanced EMC containment. Avaya recommends you use a NTDW99 CP PM card in the Media Gateway 1010. The CP PM cards provide a platform for applications including Call Server and Signaling Server, storage of system and customer data and they provide various 10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet network interfaces. Gateway functionality and shelf container functionality are

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

621

NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

delivered by the Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card and its Digital Signal Processor (DSP) daughterboard. The CP PM hardware includes the following components and features: Intel Pentium processor. Integrated Intel 855GME GMCH/Intel ICH-4 controller chipset. Two CompactFlash sockets: (1) a fixed media disk (FMD) on the card and (2) a hot swappable removable media disk (RMD) accessible on the faceplate. DDR RAM expandable up to 2 GB. Three Ethernet ports. Two serial data interface ports. One USB port. Security device. When populated with different memory and disk drive options, the CP PM hardware can be used for other purposes. For example, the CP PM hardware can be used as a Call Server or as a platform for the Avaya Communication Server 1000 (Avaya CS 1000) Signaling Server. The CP PM high level hardware block diagram is a schematic of the CP PM hardware.

622

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Introduction

Figure 176: CP PM high level hardware block diagram

Figure 177: CP PM card

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

623

NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

Cabinet/chassis support
The CP PM NTDW61 and NTDW99 single-slot card is supported in the following chassis: Option 11C cabinet (except for slot 0). Option 11C expansion cabinet (except for slot 0). Option 11C Mini chassis (except for slot 0 and slot 4). Option 11C Mini expander chassis. MG 1000E main chassis (except for slot 0). MG 1000E expander chassis. MG 1010 chassis (except for slot 0). The CP PM NTDW66 double-slot card is supported in the CS 1000M IPE Universal Equipment Module (UEM). Slot 0 in the Option 11C , Option 11C expansion, Option 11C Mini and MG 1000E main chassis are reserved for the MGC card. Slot 4 in the Option 11C Mini is reserved for the 48 DLC.

Media storage
Fixed media drive
The fixed media drive (FMD) is a CompactFlash (CF) card that is internal to the CP PM card. It is accessible only when the CP PM card is removed from the system. The FMD serves as a hard drive. The Fixed Media Drive is used when CP PM is a Call Server. It is connected directly to the ATA controller in the chipset, which is also known as the hard drive controller.

Removable media drive

The removable media drive (RMD) is a hot swappable CF card accessible from the CP PM faceplate. The CS 1000 software is shipped on a CF card and is loaded onto the CP PM through the RMD. This drive is also used for data backups.

624

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Media storage

Hard disk drive

The CP PM hardware can be used as a platform for the CS 1000 Signaling Server. When deployed as a signaling server, the CP PM platform is equipped with a hard disk drive. Note: The hard drive must have its jumper set for CSEL operation before installation.

Install a hard drive on a CP PM Signaling Server

This section describes the procedure for installing a hard drive on both models of the CP PM Signaling Server (NTDW61BAE5 and NTDW66AAE5). A CP PM Signaling Server Hard Drive kit (NTDW6102E5) ships with the servers, and if required, can also be ordered from Avaya. The hard drive kit contains a hard drive with a jumper, 4 screws, and installation instructions (document N0120776). You need only a small Phillips screw driver to install the hard drive. Important: IMPORTANT! Observe proper ESD precautions while handling the hard drive and CP PM server. Use the following procedure to replace the hard drive on a CP PM server.

Replacing the hard drive on a CP PM Signaling Server

1. Ensure jumper is located in the cable select (CS) position according to the labeling on the hard drive.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

625

NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

Figure 178: CP PM hard drive jumper

2. Place hard drive on printed circuit board and slide to mate with connector J32.

Figure 179: CP PM hard drive and connector J32

3. Secure hard drive from the bottom side with the included screws.

626

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Media storage

Figure 180: Securing CP PM hard drive to circuit board

4. Place Dip Switch S5 in position 2 to select HD Master option.

Figure 181: CP PM Signaling Server FMD dip switch

Important: A CP PM circuit card has an on-board switch (S5) for designating the internal hard drive (HD) or internal Compact Flash (CF) drive as the Fixed Media Device (FMD) for the Signaling Server. You must configure the on-board FMD switch (S5) to position 2 to designate the HD as the FMD for the Signaling Server. 5. Remove on-board compact flash retainer clip if populated.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

627

NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

Figure 182: CP PM Signaling Server internal CF card retainer clip

Memory
The memory controller in the Intel 855 GME graphics memory controller hub (GMCH) supports one channel of DDR 200/266/333 (PC1600/2100/2700) with error correcting code (ECC). The maximum capacity of the controller is 2GB. The main memory is comprised of two 200-pin SO-DIMM modules. This facilitates future upgrades.

Memory upgrade
This section details the procedure to upgrade the CP PM memory. Ensure that the memory upgrade kit contains a DDR memory module as seen in Figure 183: DDR memory module on page 629

628

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Memory

Figure 183: DDR memory module

Upgrading the CP PM memory

1. Locate an empty memory slot on the CP PM card, as shown in Figure 184: CP PM card with empty memory slot on page 629

Figure 184: CP PM card with empty memory slot

2. Grip the memory module by its sides and insert it into the slot at an approximately 30 degree angle. Align the notch in the memory module with the protruding pin in the slot, as shown in Figure 185: Inserting a memory module in CP PM card on page 630.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

629

NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

Figure 185: Inserting a memory module in CP PM card

Ensure that you have pushed the module in as far as it can go. 3. While holding the memory module in place, push it down until the two clips on either side snap into place, as shown inFigure 186: Fastening memory module in CP PM card on page 631

630

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Memory

Figure 186: Fastening memory module in CP PM card

Note: If the memory module is not aligned properly, the clips will not snap in place, as shown in Figure 187: Incorrectly aligned memory module on page 632. Remove the memory module and align it correctly.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

631

NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

Figure 187: Incorrectly aligned memory module

4. Ensure that the pins of the memory module are just visible and parallel with the edge of the slot. The module pins must make proper contact with the slot pins, as shown in Figure 188: Correctly aligned memory module on page 633

632

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Ethernet interfaces

Figure 188: Correctly aligned memory module

Note: If the module pins do not make proper contact with the slot pins, the system may not recognize the presence of the module.

Ethernet interfaces
There are three Ethernet network interfaces on a CP PM card: HSP, TLAN and ELAN. The network interfaces are application specific. Important: If your cabinet or chassis does not require specific Avaya supplied cables for CP PM cards, you must use shielded twisted pair Ethernet cables for CP PM faceplate ELAN and TLAN connections.

ELAN
The ELAN network interface is a 10/100 BaseT port. By default this port is set to autonegotiate. This network interface is used for both Call Server and Signaling Server applications.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

633

NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

HSP
The HSP is a 10/100/1000 BaseT network interface that provides standby Call Server redundancy. By default this network interface is set to autonegotiate.

TLAN
The TLAN network interface is a 10/100 BaseT port. By default this network interface is set to autonegotiate. This network interface is used for Signaling Server applications.

Serial data interface ports

The CP PM has two serial data interface (SDI) ports: Port 0 and Port 1. Both ports are standard RS232 DTE ports. They are routed through the backplane of the shelf to a 50-pin main distribution frame (MDF) connector on the back of the shelf. A cable (NTAK19ECE6) that adapts the 50-pin MDF to a pair of 25-pin DB connectors is shipped with the CP PM. A 25pin null modem is required to adapt an SDI port to a typical PC serial port. Port 0 is used for maintenance access. Port 1 is for an external modem connection.

TTY parameters
The TTY parameters are configured through the BIOS features configuration menu. The BIOS can be accessed only through TTY Port 0. On the Call Server, TTY parameters can be modified using LD 17. On the Signaling Server, these parameters can be modified using the maintenance shell. Supported parameters: Baud rate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200. Data bit length: 5-8. Stp bit: 1, 1.5, and 2. Parity: odd, even, and none. Default parameters for both ports: Baud rate: 9600. Data bit length: 8. Stop bit: 1.

634

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

USB 2.0 port

Parity: none. Flow control: none.

USB 2.0 port

The USB port is not currently used by the Call Server or Signaling Server applications.

Security device
The CS 1000 provides an on-board interface for the existing security device (dongle) using a Maxim/Dallas 1-wire to USB interface device. This is used for the Call Server application.

Faceplate
The CP PM faceplate is available in two sizes: NTDW61 single slot, and NTDW66 double slot. The NTDW99 is a single slot metal faceplate CP PM card. The CP PM card faceplate is equipped with Status, Active CPU, CF, and Ethernet LED indicators.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

635

NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

Figure 189: CP PM NTDW61 and NTDW66 faceplates

636

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

LED indicators

Faceplate buttons
Reset
Reset (RST) generates a hard reset of the card.

Init
Init (INI) generates a manual initialization of the software.

DIP switch
The DIP switch selects the media drive. CF MASTER/POSITION1 selects the Compact Flash (CF) FMD and HD MASTER/POSITION2 selects the Hard Drive FMD.

LED indicators
Status LED
The functionality of the Status LED is summarized in the following table. Table 261: Status LED functionality
LED Status Color Green Flashing Green Yellow Orange Red Flashing Red Off CP PM Status After sysload Not implemented Not implemented Selftest error During sysload phase 2 During sysload phase 1 No power

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

637

NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

Active CPU LED

The CP PM can operate in single CPU mode or dual CPU mode. A tri-color LED indicates the Call Server redundancy status. This LED is not used by the Signaling Server and is OFF if it is a Signaling Server. The functionality of the active CPU LED is summarized in the following table. Table 262: Call server redundancy status
LED Call server redundancy Color Green Yellow Red Off Status Redundant mode, active Redundant mode, standby Redundant mode, fault (HSP down) Standard mode

Ethernet LEDs
ELAN and TLAN LEDs
The functionality of the ELAN and TLAN network interface LED indicators is depicted in the following figure.

Figure 190: ELAN and TLAN port LED indicators

HSP LEDs
The functionality of the HSP port LED indicators is depicted in the following figure.

638

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

LED indicators

Figure 191: HSP port LED indicators

Removable and fixed media drive LEDs

LEDs are provided to indicate the access/activity of the removable and fixed media drives.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

639

NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

640

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 42: NTDW62, NTDW64, and NTDW78 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 641 Media Gateway Controller card on page 641 Daughterboard configurations on page 643

Introduction
The NTDW60 or NTDW98 Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card has two PCI Telephony Mezzanine Card form factor expansion sites. Daughterboards (DB) in the expansion sites provide Digital Signal Processor (DSP) resources for VoIP. The DBs are slave devices controlled by the MGC processor.

Media Gateway Controller card

The MGC has two DB expansion sites. They are Expansion Daughterboard #1 and Expansion Daughterboard #2.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

641

NTDW62, NTDW64, and NTDW78 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards

Figure 192: Media Gateway Controller with daughterboards

642

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Daughterboard configurations

Figure 193: Daughterboard

Daughterboard configurations
The DBs are available in three sizes: An NTDW62 32-port daughterboard (DB-32), an NTDW64 96-port daughterboard (DB-96), and an NTDW78 128-port daughterboard (DB-128).

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

643

NTDW62, NTDW64, and NTDW78 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards

There are four possible Media Gateway configurations: A pure TDM single Media Gateway with no DSP daughterboards or Media Cards. A system with only Voice Gateway Media Cards. A system with only DSP daughterboards. A system with both DSP daughterboards and Media Cards. The DB-32, DB-96, and DB-128 are supported in both expansion sites on the MGC card. The Avaya Communication Server 1000E (Avaya CS 1000E) Peripheral Rate Interface (PRI) Media Gateway is required to support an MGC card populated with greater than 192 DSP ports. The MGC card can support a maximum of 256 DSP ports. The following table summarizes the supported placement of the DBs in the MGC expansion sites and the card slots represented by each DB. Table 263: DSP daughterboard placement
DB size DB-32 DB-32 DB-96 DB-96 DB-128 DB-128 1 2 1 2 1 2 DB expansion site 11 0 11,12,13 0, 9, 10 11,12,13,14 0,9,10,15 Card slot

Note: The Extended Media Gateway PRI (MGP) package 418 is required to support MGC cards populated with two DB-96 or two DB-128. Card slots are not dedicated. For example, you can configure card 9 and 10 for other card types when card 0 is configured as DB-128. Similarly, you can configure card 14 or card 15 for DTR/XTD when card 11,12, and 13 is configured as DB-128.

644

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 43: NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 645 Ethernet ports on page 646 Backplane interfaces on page 647 Serial data interface ports on page 647 Faceplate LED display on page 647

Introduction
The NTDW65 MC32S Media Card provides 32 IP-TDM gateway ports between an IP device and a TDM device in an Avaya Communication Server 1000 (Avaya CS 1000) network. The MC32S replaces the previous media card or ITG card. The Media Card comes in an IPE form factor. The card can be used in the MG 1000E, MG 1000B, Avaya CS 1000E, and Avaya CS 1000M systems. The card includes a processor and a DSP. Secure Real Time Protocol (SRTP) is used to secure the IP media path to and from the DSP channels on the card. The Media Card includes the following components and features: Processor. DSP. Memory for processor and DSP. 4MB boot CompactFlash. CompactFlash firmware storage.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

645

NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card

Six-port Ethernet Layer 2 switch. 10/100 BaseT ELAN network interface for management and signalling messages. 10/100BaseT TLAN network interface for telephony voice traffic. FPGA for backplane interfaces. Two TTY ports on the processor for debugging. 100BaseT faceplate port for debugging.

Figure 194: Voice Gateway Media card block diagram

Ethernet ports

External connections
There are TLAN and ELAN network interfaces for connection to external networks, and a faceplate debug port.

Internal connections
There is a TLAN connection to the DSP, and ELAN and TLAN connections to the processor.

646

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Backplane interfaces

Backplane interfaces
The FPGA features include: DS30X interfaces. A10 signalling. CardLan interface. Hardware watchdog. Time-switch for flexible TDM timeslot mapping.

Serial data interface ports

The Media Card has two serial data interface ports on the master MSP. The installation menu can by accessed through either port.

TTY settings
The default tty settings for both ports are: Baud rate: 9600. Data bit length: 8. Stop bit: 1. Parity: none. Flow control: none.

Faceplate LED display

The faceplate on the Media Card has a four character LED display. The diagnostic messages summarized in the following table are displayed on the faceplate during system bootup. Table 264: Faceplate display
Message Description

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

647

NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card

BOOT POST PASS EXXX LOAD

This is the first message displayed when the system becomes active. Power on self test. This message is displayed when the Voice Gateway Media card is carrying out system tests during power up. Power on self test pass. Error code. XXX is a numeric value. An error code is displayed if a serious system error is detected. Application software is loading.

In a normal boot process the diagnostic messages would be displayed in the following order: 1. BOOT 2. POST 3. PASS 4. LOAD If there is a fatal self-test error during bootup, an error code appears and the PASS and LOAD message are not displayed. During normal operation after bootup, the faceplate displays Leader (L) or Follower (F) and the number of registered sets. For example, 'L027' means Leader of 27 sets

648

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 44: NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 649 Physical description on page 650 Functional description on page 653 Software description on page 654 Hardware description on page 654 Architecture on page 654

Introduction
The NTRB21 (DTI/PRI/DCH) TMDI digital trunk card is a 1.5 Mb DTI or PRI interface to the Avaya Communication Sever 1000E (Avaya CS 1000E), Avaya CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet. The NTRB21 card has a built-in downloadable D-channel. The TMDI feature supports the software changes required for CS 1000E, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinetto use the TDMI pack. The software includes: a prompt to replace a function that was handled by a dip switch on the NTAK09 an extra loadware application to handle Layer 1 a change to the existing loadware files into 32 bit format from the original 16 bit format To provide CEMUX communication with the card, changes are also required to create an I/O entry for the card. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four digital trunks are supported in each Media Gateway.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

649

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Note: For CISPR B group cabinets, the active Clock Controller (NTAK20) can only occupy slots 1-3. For FCC and/or CISPR A group cabinets, this limitation does not exist - the Clock Controller can occupy any available slot 1-9. Note: On non-ECM system cabinets, the NTAK20 can be placed in slots 1-9. On cabinets NTAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx, the active NTAK20 must be placed in slots 1-3 (slots 4-10 cannot be used). Important: Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must use a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock.

Physical description
The NTRB21 card uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. The clock controller daughterboard is fastened by standoffs and connectors. The NTRB21 card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are associated with the NTRB21 card. The remaining two LEDs are associated with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards. See Figure 195: NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller on page 651.

650

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Physical description

Figure 195: NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller

In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows: During system power up, the LEDs are on. When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times, then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 265: NTRB21 LED states on page 651. Table 265: NTRB21 LED states
LED DIS State On (Red) Off ACT On (Green) Definition The NTRB21 circuit card is disabled. The NTRB21 is not in a disabled state. The NTRB21 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states exist, the card is not disabled, nor is it in a loopback state. An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card is disabled. See the other faceplate LEDs for more information. A red-alarm state is detected. No red alarm. A yellow alarm state is detected.

Off

RED

On (Red) Off

YEL

On (Yellow)

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

651

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

LED Off LBK

State No yellow alarm.

Definition

On (Green) Off

NTRB21 is in loop-back mode. NTRB21 is not in loop-back mode.

Figure 196: NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate on page 652 shows the faceplate of the NTRB21 TMDI card.

Figure 196: NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate

652

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Power requirements
The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2 amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V, and 50 mA on 12 V.

Foreign and surge voltage protection

Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T1 carrier facility and the system. For public T1 facilities, this protection is provided by the local operating company. In a private T1 facility environment (a campus, for example), the NTAK92 protection assembly can be used. The NTRB21 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.

Functional description
NTRB21 provides the following features and functions: configurable parameters, including A-Law and -Law operation, digital pads on a per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe formats AMI or B8ZS line coding 1.5 Mb Digital Trunk Interface and 1.5 Mb Primary Rate Interface 1.5 Mb Clock recovery and distribution of reference clocks DG2 or FDL yellow alarm methods card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LED automatic alarm monitoring and handling Card-LAN for maintenance communication loopback capabilities for both near-end and far-end echo canceler interface integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can be mixed on the same PRI) faceplate monitor jacks for T1 interface configurable D-channel data rate with 64 kbps, 56 kbps or 64 kbps inverted self-test

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

653

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Software description
Changes from the NTAK09 are required for the new trunk card and License parameters are n service change and maintenance overlays. There is a change to CardLAN to introduce a new CardLAN ID. The download of PSDL data is also changed to handle a 32 bit download as well as existing 16 bit.

Hardware description
NTRB21 TMDI card
The NTRB21 TMDI card provides 1.5 MBits Digital Trunk Interface or Primary Rate Interface functionality. It also has a built-in downloadable D-channel. The NTRB21 can be used with the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card (with the NTBK51 downloadable Dchannel daughterboard).

Architecture
Signaling interface
The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages transmitted in both directions are three bytes long.

Interconnection
The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04, a 1.5 Mb 20 ft. carrier cable. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension cable, is also available.

654

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

Microprocessor
The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the following major tasks: Task handler: also referred to as an executive. The task handler provides orderly perchannel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering constraints. Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call. Receive voice: inserts digital pads and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is originating the call. T-Link data: a set of transmit and receive vectored subroutines which provides T-Link protocol conversion to and from the DM-DM protocol. Receive ABCD filtering: filters and debounces the receive ABCD bits and provides change of state information to the system. Diagnostics Self-test

Digital pad
The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad accommodates both 255-Law and ALaw coding. There are 32 combinations each for 255 to 255, 255 to A-Law, A-Law to 255, and A-Law to A-Law. These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level plan. Table 266: Digital pad values and offset allocations
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PAD set 0 0dB 2dB 3dB 4dB 5dB 6.1dB 8dB 1dB 3dB PAD set 1 7db 8db 9db 10db 0.6db 7db 9db 10db 11db

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

655

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Offset 9 A B C D E F

PAD set 0 4dB idle code, 7F unassigned code, FF 1dB 2dB 5db 6db

PAD set 1 12db 3db 14db spare spare spare spare

D-channel interface
The D-channel interface is a 64 kbps, full-duplex, serial bit-stream configured as a Data Circuitterminating Equipment (DCE) device. The data signals include: receive data output transmit data input receive clock output transmit clock output The bit rate of the receive and transmit clocks can vary slightly from each other. This is determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks. Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes: 56 kbps 64 kbps clear 64 kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted) DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as the PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot be established unless the PRI loop is enabled. On the NTRB21 use switch 1, position 1 to select either the D-channel feature or the DPNSS feature, as follows: OFF = D-channel The ON setting for DPNSS (U.K.) is not supported at this time. OFF = D-channel ON = DPNSS (U.K.). OFF = D-channel

656

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

The ON setting for DPNSS (U.K.) is not supported at this time.

DS-1 Carrier interface

Transmitter
The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external digital facility. The Digital Signal Level 1 (DS-1) transmit equalizer enables the cabling distance to be extended from the card to the Digital Signal Cross-connect Level 1 (DSX-1), or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable through dip-switches. The settings are shown in Table 267: NTRB21 switch settings on page 657. Table 267: NTRB21 switch settings
Distance to Digital CrossConnect 0 - 133 feet 133 - 266 feet 266 - 399 feet 399 - 533 feet 533 - 655 feet Switch Setting 1 DCH F/W Off Off Off Off Off 2 (LEN 0) Off On Off On Off 3 (LEN 1) Off On On Off Off 4 (LEN 2) On Off Off Off Off

Receiver
The receiver extracts data and clock from an incoming data stream and outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst case DSX-1 signal levels, the line receiver operates correctly with up to 655 feet of ABAM cable between the card and the external DS-1 signal source.

Connector pinout
The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15 position Male D-type connector. Table 268: DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable
From 50-pin MDF connector pin 48 pin 1 To DB-15 T Signal name Description transmit tip to network

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

657

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

From 50-pin MDF connector pin 23 pin 25 pin 49 pin 24 pin 9 pin 2 pin 3

To DB-15 R

Signal name

Description transmit ring to network frame ground receive tip from network receive ring from network

FGND T1 R1

pin 11

NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard

Digital Trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock source results in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all parts of the network. The NTAK20 clock controller circuitry synchronizes the CS 1000E, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet to an external reference clock and generates and distributes the clock to the system. The CS 1000E, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet can function either as a slave to an external clock or as a clocking master to the network. The NTAK20AD and NTAK20AA versions of the clock controller meet AT&T Stratum 3 and Bell Canada Node Category D specifications. The NTAK20BD and NTAK20BA versions meet CCITT stratum 4 specifications. NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard on page 511 Important: Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must use a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk cards, it is mandatory that at least one trunk card is placed in the Main Option 11C cabinet. A cabinet that has a digital trunk must use a clock controller. Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. On CS 1000 systems, synchronization is accomplished with the NTAK20 clock controller circuit card. The clock controller circuitry synchronizes the CS 1000 to an external reference clock and generates and distributes the clock to the system. The CS 1000 can function either as a slave to an external clock or as a clocking master to the network.

658

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Architecture

Clock rate converter

The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL synchronizes the 1.5 Mb DS1 clock to the 2.56 Mb system clock through the common multiple of 8 kHz by using the main frame synchronization signal.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

659

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

660

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 45: NTVQ01xx Media Card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Physical description on page 661 Hardware architecture on page 662 Functional description on page 665

Physical description
The Media Card replaces the ITG Pentium card and is available as an 8-port or 32-port card. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway or slots 7 through 10 in the Media Gateway Expansion. Note: Up to four Media Cards can be installed in each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. An NTVQ01xx Media Card is shown in Figure 197: NTVQ01xx Media Card on page 662.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

661

NTVQ01xx Media Card

Figure 197: NTVQ01xx Media Card

The NTVQ01xx Media Card provides faceplate and backplane interfaces, which are used to connect external LANs. This section provides information about the faceplate connectors and indicators.

Hardware architecture
The Media Card comes in two versions: 8-port and 32-port.

Faceplate connectors and indicators

Figure 198: NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate on page 664 shows the NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate.

662

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Hardware architecture

Reset switch
The reset switch on the faceplate manually resets the Media Card.

Status LED
The NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate red LED indicates the following: the enabled/disabled status of the card the self-testing result during power up or card insertion into an operational system

PC card slot
This slot accepts standard PC card flash cards, including ATA Flash cards (3 Mbit/s to 170 Mbit/s). Avaya supply PCM card adaptors which enable CompactFlash cards to be used in this slot. This slot is used for NTVQ01xx Media Card software upgrades, backing up announcements, and additional storage.

Ethernet activity LEDs

The NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate contains Ethernet activity LEDs for each network.

Maintenance hex display

This is a four-digit LED-based hexadecimal display that provides the status of the NTVQ01xx Media Card at all times. The hex display provides an indication of fault conditions and the progress of PC card-based software upgrades or backups. It also indicates the progress of the internal self-test in the form of T:xx.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

663

NTVQ01xx Media Card

Figure 198: NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate

RS-232 Asynchronous Maintenance Port

An 8-pin mini-DIN socket on the NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate provides access to the RS-232 port. This faceplate port can provide access to the Media Card for OA&M purposes. The maintenance port is also available through a female DB9 connector on the 50-pin I/O Adaptor. This should be used to make a permanent terminal connection.

664

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Functional description
Media Cards use different types of firmware pre-installed, depending on the application being supported. The Voice Gateway application enables Digital Signal Processors (DSPs) for either line or trunk applications. When the Voice Gateway application is installed on the Media Card, the card is called the Voice Gateway Media card. Other examples of applications on a Media Card include IP Line 3.0 and Integrated Recorded Announcer. The NTVQ01xx Media Card connects an IP and circuit-switched device. The DSPs perform media transcoding between IP voice packets and circuit-switched devices. The Media Card also provides echo cancellation and compression/decompression of voice streams.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

665

NTVQ01xx Media Card

666

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 46: NTC314AAE6 Media Gateway utility card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Physical description on page 667 Functional description on page 667

Physical description
The NTC314AAE6 MG1010 utility card is a standard card size with a two inch metal faceplate. The Utility card is inverted to accommodate power connections on the backplane. The components are placed to left instead of right.

Functional description
The MGU provides connectivity to the three serial ports of the MGC inserted in slot 0 and to the two serial ports of each call processor card inserted in slots 22 and 23. The blower module assembly contains the blower control ICs but the Interface card contains the LED status. The utility card also contains the ring generator functions and the message waiting voltage supply. The PCB is located on the opposite side of the card, in respect to other cards, to prevent interference with the power supply connector on the backplane. A temperature sensor located at the lower front of the card allows the SM bus to poll for ambient temperature of the air entering the chassis. Faceplate LEDs, for both power supplies, mirror the power supply LED giving the same display on both the front and rear of the chassis. A dip switch for setting ringing requirements, as well as message waiting, exists on the card with settings silk-screened on the PCB for all international settings. The card also contains power fail transfer circuitry and interfaces to the auxiliary connector located on the I/O panel at the rear.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

667

NTC314AAE6 Media Gateway utility card

Important: Removing the utility card for maintenance and then re-inserting it could result in a PFTS for a period of milliseconds. This may cause a power fail transfer box to activate if you have not disabled the card for maintenance service. You can remove the utility card without causing loss of service, however it can cause a loss of ringing and message waiting. Removing the utility card does not prevent an outgoing call, but prevents an incoming analog call.

Figure 199: NTC314AAE6 utility card

The utility card supports all international requirements for message waiting voltages as well as ringing requirements. A dip switch is required on this card for various country requirements. The utility card is also hot-pluggable, thus you can connect it with the system turned on.

668

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Chapter 47: QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction on page 669 Physical description on page 670 Functional description on page 671 Connector pin assignments on page 672 Configuring the QSDI card on page 674 Applications on page 678

Introduction
The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) card provides four RS-232-C serial ports between the system and external devices. The QSDI card plugs into a slot in the common equipment area of any system. The Quad Serial Data Interface card is normally used to connect the system to its administration and maintenance terminal. It is also used to connect the system to a background terminal (used in the Hotel/Motel environment), a modem, or the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Call Detail Recording (CDR) features. The QSDI card is compatible with all existing system software. It does not support 20 mA current loop interface. QSDI cards are housed in the following modules: NT5D21 Core/Network module (slots 0 through 7) NT6D39 CPU/Network module (slots 1 through 9, and 13) NT6D60 Core module (slots 0 through 5)

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

669

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

NT8D35 Network module (slots 5 through 13) NT9D11 Core/Network module (slots 0 through 8) Note: When a QSDI card is installed in an NT6D60 Core module, an NT8D34 CPU module, or slot 13 of an NT6D39 CPU/Network module in a dual-CPU system, any input/output I/O device connected to the card does not function when the CPU in that module is inactive.

Physical description
The QPC841 QSDI card is a printed circuit board measuring 31.75 cm by 25.4 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.). The front panel is 2.54 cm (1 in.) thick. See Figure 200: QPC841 QSDI card front panel on page 671. Up to four QSDI boards can be used in a system, allowing a total of sixteen asynchronous serial ports. The four serial ports on each card are addressed as two pairs of consecutive addresses (0 and 1, 2 and 3, and so on up to 14 and 15). The pairs need not be consecutive. For example: pairs 0 and 1, and 4 and 5 could be used. The card front panel has two connectors, J1 and J2. Connector J1 is used for port 1 while connector J2 is used for ports 2, 3, and 4. It also has an Enable/Disable (ENB/DIS) switch and a red LED. The LED indicates that the card is disabled. It is lit when the following occurs: the ENB/DIS switch is set to DIS all of the ports on the card are disabled in software none of the card ports are configured in software

670

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Functional description

Figure 200: QPC841 QSDI card front panel

Functional description
The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains all the logic for four asynchronous serial ports, including the baud rate generators. These serial ports are directly accessed by the system processor using memory reads and writes. The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains four universal asynchronous receiver/ transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to connect the UARTs to the system processor bus. See Figure 201: QPC841 QSDI card block diagram on page 672. The other logic on the

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

671

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

card consists of four baud rate generators, four RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the jumpers and logic needed to configure the UARTs. The address select switches and logic on the card always address the UARTs using two pairs of addresses: 0 and 1, and 2 and 3 through 15 and 16. The pairs do not need to be consecutive. Other switches on the board determine the baud rate for each individual port and whether the port is configured to talk to a terminal (DTE equipment) or a modem (DCE equipment). Instructions for setting the jumpers are given later in this section.

Figure 201: QPC841 QSDI card block diagram

Connector pin assignments

Connector J1 is connected to port one, and uses the RS-232-C standard DB-25-pinout. Connector J2 is connected to ports two, three, and four, and is a non-standard pinout that requires an adapter cable. An adapter cable (NT8D96) splits the J2 signals out to three standard RS-232-C connectors. Port 2 is connected to connector A, Port 3 is connected to connector B, and Port 4 is connected to connector C. Table 269: Connector J1 pin assignments on page 673 shows the pinouts for connector J1, and Table 270: Connector J2 pin assignments on page 673 shows the pinouts for connector J2.

672

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Connector pin assignments

Table 269: Connector J1 pin assignments

Pin number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 Signal FGD TD RD RTS CTS DSR GND CD DTR Purpose in DTE mode Frame ground Received data Transmitted data Request to send (not used) Clear to send (Note 1) Data set ready (Note 1) Ground Carrier detect (Note 1) Data terminal ready Purpose in DCE mode Frame ground Transmitted data Received data Request to send (Note 2) Clear to send Data set ready Ground Carrier detect (not used) Data terminal ready (Note 2)

Note: In DTE mode, the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data. Note: In DCE mode, the signals DTR, and RTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data.

Table 270: Connector J2 pin assignments

Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 9 10 2 Port Signal Purpose in DTE mode FGD TD RD RTS CTS DSR GND CD DTR TD RD Frame ground Transmitted data Received data Request to send (not used) Clear to send (Note 1) Purpose in DCE mode Frame ground Transmitted data Received data Request to send (Note 2) Clear to send

Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready Ground Carrier detect (Note 1) Data terminal ready Transmitted data Received data Ground Carrier detect (not Used) Data terminal ready (Note 2) Transmitted data Received data

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

673

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

Pin Number 11 12 13 25 24 23 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 22

Port

Signal Purpose in DTE mode RTS Request to send (not used) Clear to send (Note 1)

Purpose in DCE mode Request to send (Note 2) Clear to send

CTS DSR GND CD DTR TD RD RTS

Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready Ground Carrier detect (Note 1) Data terminal ready Transmitted data Received data Request to send (not used) Clear to send (Note 1) Ground Carrier detect (not used) Data terminal ready (Note 2) Transmitted data Received data Request to send (Note 2) Clear to send

CTS DSR GND CD DTR

Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready Ground Carrier detect (Note 1 Data terminal ready Ground Carrier detect (not used) Data terminal ready (Note 2)

Note: In DTE mode, the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data. Note: In DCE mode, the signals DTR and RTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data.

Configuring the QSDI card

Configuring the QSDI card consists of setting these option switches for each serial port: Port address Baud rate DTE/DCE mode Figure 202: QSDI card option switch locations on page 677 shows the location of the option switches on the QSDI card. Instructions for setting these switches are in the section that follows.

674

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuring the QSDI card

Address switch settings

Table 271: QSDI card address switch settings on page 675 lists the address switch settings for the QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card. The address select jumpers and logic on the card address the UARTs using two pairs of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3, through 15 and 16. The pairs do not need to be consecutive. Switch SW14 is used to select the addresses for ports 1 and 2. Switch SW15 is used to select the addresses for ports 3 and 4. Table 271: QSDI card address switch settings
SW14 SW15 Device pair addresses Port 1 Port 3 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 Port 2 Port 4 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 off off off off off off off off 2 off off off off off off off off 3 off off off off off off off off Switch settings 4 off off off off off off off off 5 off off off off off off off off 6 on on on on off off off off 7 on on off off on on off off 8 on off on off on off on off

Note: On SW16, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 must be OFF. Note: To avoid address conflicts, SW14 and SW15 can never use identical settings. Note: To disable ports 1 and 2, set SW14 position 1 to ON. To disable ports 3 and 4, set SW15 position 1 to ON.

Baud rate switch settings

Table 272: QSDI card baud rate switch settings on page 676 lists the switch settings necessary to set the baud rate.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

675

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

Table 272: QSDI card baud rate switch settings

Baud rate 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 Port 1 SW10 1 2 3 4 Port 2 SW11 1 2 3 4 Port 3 SW12 1 2 3 4 Port 4 SW13 1 2 3 4

off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off

DTE/DCE mode switch settings

Table 273: QSDI card DTE/DCE mode switch settings on page 676 shows the DTE/DCE mode selection switches for the four serial ports. Table 273: QSDI card DTE/DCE mode switch settings
Port 1 SW8 Mode DTE (Terminal) DCE (Modem) 1 on off 2 on off 3 on off 4 on off 5 on off 6 on off 1 off on 2 off on Port1 SW9 3 off on 4 off on 5 off on 6 off on

Port 2 SW6 Mode DTE (Terminal) DCE (Modem) 1 on off 2 on off 3 on off 4 on off 5 on off 6 on off 1 off on 2 off on

Port 2 SW7 3 off on 4 off on 5 off on 6 off on

Port 3 SW4 Mode DTE (Terminal) DCE (Modem) 1 on off 2 on off 3 on off 4 on off 5 on off 6 on off 1 off on 2 off on

Port 3 SW5 3 off on 4 off on 5 off on 6 off on

Port 4 SW2 Mode DTE (Terminal) DCE (Modem) 1 on off 2 on off 3 on off 4 on off 5 on off 6 on off 1 off on 2 off on

Port 4 SW3 3 off on 4 off on 5 off on 6 off on

676

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Configuring the QSDI card

Test switch setting

Switch SW16 is only used for factory testing; all of its switches must be set to OFF for proper operation.

Figure 202: QSDI card option switch locations

Software service changes

Once the QPC841 QSDI card is installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration Record program LD 17.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

677

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

Instructions for running the Configuration Record program are found in Avaya Software Input/ Output Reference Administration (NN43001-611). Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the Configuration Record program LD 17 are shown in Table 274: LD 17 - Serial port configuration parameters on page 678 These parameters must be configured for each port that is being used. Table 274: LD 17 - Serial port configuration parameters
Prompt REQ: TYPE: IOTB ADAN CDNO DENS USER Response CHG CFN YES NEW TTY x NEW PRT x 1-16 DDEN xxx Change configuration. Configuration type. Change input/output devices. Define a new system terminal (printer) port as device x, where x = 0 to 15. Use the QSDI card number to keep track of all ports. Double density SDI paddle board. Enter the user of port x. The values that can be entered depend on the software being used. See Avaya Software Input/Output Reference Administration(NN43001-611) for details. Port is used for the system monitor. Description

XSM

NO YES

Applications
The QPD841 Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) card is used to connect the switch to a variety of communication devices and peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to any of the four serial ports. The standard application for the QSDI card is to connect the switch to the system console. This can be either a direct connection if the console is located near the switch, or through a modem for remote maintenance. Bell 103/212 compatible dumb modems are recommended to connect a remote data terminal. If a smart modem (such as a Hayes modem) is used, select the dumb mode of operation (Command Recognition OFF, Command Echo OFF) before connecting the modem to the asynchronous port. Serial data interface connector J1 is a standard RS-232-C DB-25 connector that connects port 1 of the QSDI card to outside peripherals. Connector J2 is non-standard in that it contains the connections for the three remaining serial ports (ports 2, 3, and 4), on a single DB-25 connector.

678

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Applications

An adapter cable must be used to connect to standard RS-232-C peripherals. Cables that are applicable to the QSDI card are: SDI male-to-female flat cables (internal module use only) - NT8D82 - QCAD290 Note: This cable is available in different lengths. Refer to Avaya Equipment Identification (NN43001-254) for more information - QCAD42 SDI male-to-male round cables (external use only) NT8D95 SDI to I/O cables (system options use only) NT8D82 Note: This cable is available in different lengths. Refer to Avaya Equipment Identification (NN43001-254) for more information SDI multiple-port cable (internal system options use only) NT8D90 SDI I/O to DTE/DCE cables (system options use only) NT8D95 Note: This cable is available in different lengths. Refer to Avaya Equipment Identification (NN43001-254) for more information SID Multiple-port cable (system options use only) NT8D96 Figure 203: QPC841 QSDI card cabling on page 680 shows the QPC841 card and the cables listed above in a standard configuration.

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

679

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

Figure 203: QPC841 QSDI card cabling

680

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

Index A
A-Law companding support ................................39, 361 ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) ........66, 461, 469, 669 link to NT8D41BA paddleboard ..................461, 469 address switch settings ......................108, 467, 476, 675 NT8D41BA QSDI ................................108, 467, 476 addresses ..................................................318, 322, 338 altitude limitations .....................................................326 altitude ranges ............................................................67 analog line call operation ............................................42 analog line cards interface units .......................................................38 antistatic precautions ..................................................74 architecture .......................................................317, 662 hardware ............................................................662 asynchronous device compatibility .......................65, 66 asynchronous ports ...................................319, 322, 323 autorecovery ..............................................336, 339, 340 available network card slots .....................................322 AWU (Automatic Wake-Up) IPE trunk card support .........................................57

C
cable installation ..........................................................331 requirements ......................................................329 cabling for line cards ........................................................33 length considerations ...........................................65 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card ......................................................124 NT8D02 Digital Line Card ..................................356 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board ..................469, 477 QPC841 QSDI (Quad Serial Data Interface) ......678 call signaling bits ........................................................35 campus installations (off-premise applications) .... 32, 54 capacitors precautions for discharge prior to circuit card maintenance ...........................................74 Card LAN link ..........35, 119, 123, 347, 349, 354, 364, 367 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card ...............................................119, 123 NT8D02 Digital Line Card ...................347, 349, 354 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card ....364,
367

B
backplane slots ...........................................................67 backplane slots on NT8D41BA .........................464, 473 balancing networks .....................................................40 base code ..........................................................336, 340 baud rate generators ................................................671 baud rates .................................................................323 baud rates (data rates in bps) .............................66, 675 baud rates on NT8D41BA QSDI ................107, 466, 475 block diagrams .........................................................317 Bootloading substates ..............................................334 bootstrap code ..........................................................319 BPRZ-AMI (Bi-Polar Return to Zero-Alternate Mark Inversion) data .......................................40, 353 buffers .......................................................................321 Bus interface CPU to MISP ......................................................547 MISP network .....................................................547 buses ..........................................................................59 busses card LAN link ........................................................35 for DS-30X network loops ....................................35 IPE compared to PE ............................................35

Card LAN links .............................................59, 383, 438 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...........................383 NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card ............................438 card locking devices .................................................328 card slots, available ..................................................322 cardlocking devices ................................................328 CardLAN ...................................................................654 CDR (Call Detail Recording) ................66, 461, 469, 669 link to NT8D41BA paddleboard ..................461, 469 circuit cards caution on replacing and handling .......................74 grid .......................................................................87 installing ...............................................................76 testing ..................................................................79 Clock Controller Cards .............................................326 clock signals .............................................................323 CO (central office) trunks IPE trunk card support ..................................57, 377 codecs (Coder/Decoder) .........38, 39, 119, 122, 364, 365 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card ......................................................122

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

681

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card ....364,

365

codecs (coder/decoders) ....................................64, 381 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...........................381 columns, cables for ...................................................329 compatibility with Meridian 1 options (table) ...............65 component layout .....................................................316 conference cards testing ..................................................................79 Configuration Record program ..........................468, 477 configuring NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board ..................465, 475 QPC841 QSDI (Quad Serial Data Interface) ......674 system software for SDI cards .............................68 conflicts, address ..............................................322, 338 connector pin assignments NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card ......................................................130 NT8D02 Digital Line Card ..................................356 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card .... 371 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...........................417 NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card ............................450 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board ..................464, 474 QPC841 QSDI (Quad Serial Data Interface) ......672 connectors .........................................................316, 319 console connection ...................................................678 continuous operation mode for recorded messages ....
411

digital line call operation .............................................45 digital line cards interface units .......................................................40 digitone receiver cards testing ..................................................................81 DIS MSDL x command ..............................333, 338340 DIS MSDL x command] ............................................337 DISA (Direct Inward System Access) trunks IPE trunk card support .........................................57 disabled MSDL states .......................................333, 340 displaying MSDL status .....................................337, 338 DLIC (digital line interface circuit) .......................40, 353 Downloadable D-channel handler ............................559 downloading ...............................................320, 336, 337 DPNSS/DCHI Port ....................................................544 DS-30X loops . . .35, 59, 119, 120, 347, 349, 352, 364, 366,
367

control signals ............................................................64 CPU (Central Processing Unit) .................................317 CPU area of the NT8D41BA backplane ............464, 473

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card ...............................................119, 120 NT8D02 Digital Line Card ...................347, 349, 352 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card ....364, 366, 367 DS-30Y network loops ................................................35 DTE (data terminal equipment) emulation pin assignments and functions ............464, 474, 672 DTE equipment emulation .........................319, 323, 327 DTE/DCE mode on NT8D41BA, table .......109, 467, 476 DX (Duplex) signaling IPE trunk card support .........................................57 NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card .....................434, 446 PE card support ...................................................57

D
D-channel operations ...............................................331 data bits ....................................................................323 data flow ....................................................318, 320, 321 data rate ...................................................................323 data rates ...................................................................35 data service simultaneous with voice .........................33 data valid bits .............................................................35 DCE (data communication equipment) emulation pin assignments and functions ............464, 474, 672 DCE equipment emulation .........................319, 323, 327 DCH connectors .......................................................329 DCHI cards ...............................................................315 decoding addresses .................................................322 device numbers .................................................316, 327 diagnostic functions ..................................................336 DID (direct inward dial) trunks IPE trunk card support .........................................57 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ............377, 392, 401

E
E and M signaling support ..........................................57 electrical interfaces ...........................................319, 323 electrical specifications NT5D60AA CLASS Modem card .......................249 NT8D02 Digital Line Card ..................................355 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card .... 368 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...........................413 NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card ............................448 electromagnetic interference ......................................68 electrostatic discharge ................................................67 emulation modes ...............................................319, 323 emulation of data equipment ......................................66 enabled MSDL state .................................................334 engineering guidelines address decoding ...............................................322 available network card slots ...............................322 environment and power requirements ................326

682

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

implementation ...................................................326 port specifications ..............................................323 Enhanced Peripheral Equipment Power Supply (NT5K12) .......................................................91 ENL MSDL x command .............................334, 337339 environment for storing cards .....................................74 environment requirements ........................................326 environmental specifications ..67, 127, 250, 356, 371, 415,
450

High-Level Data Link Controller ................................546 humidity limitations ...................................................326 humidity ranges ..........................................................67

I
I/O device selectability ................................................66 I/O panel, cables and connections ....................329, 331 impedance ..........40, 42, 64, 126, 131, 368, 413, 418, 422 matching network .................................................64 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card ...............................................126, 131 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card .... 368 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ............413, 418, 422 impedance and cable loop resistance/loss NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...........................422 implementation .........................................................326 incoming (analog) calls ...............................................42 incoming calls DID operation .....................................................392 DX signaling .......................................................446 E and M Type I signaling ....................................440 E and M Type II signaling ...................................443 ground start operation .................................385, 388 loop start operation ............................................384 OAID operation ...........................................404, 405 senderized operation for DID and LDR trunks ....
401

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card ......................................................127 NT8D02 Digital Line Card ...........................250, 356 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card .... 371 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...........................415 NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card ............................450 equipment emulation modes .............................319, 323 external clock signals ...............................................323

F
faceplate description ..........................................................662 Fatal Error substate ...........................................334, 340 fault isolation .............................................................338 filters variable gain .........................................................64 firmware ............................................................317, 319 Flash EPROM (Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) ..............................................319 flow control ........................................................320, 321 functional block diagrams .........................................317 FX (Foreign Exchange) trunks IPE trunk card support ..................................57, 377

G
gain filters ...................................................................39 ground start operation NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...................377, 388 grounding ..................................................................672 grounding for line protection .......................................55 grounding on the NT8D41BA ............................464, 474

H
handshake signals ......................................................65 hardware ...................................................................316 Hayes modems ..........................................469, 477, 678 heat dissipation .........................................................326 hex codes faceplate display ................................................663

two-way, LDR, TIE trunk operation .............392, 395 initialization ...............................................................336 Input/Output Diagnostic Program .............................336 installation .....................................58, 327329, 331, 332 cable installation .................................................331 cable requirements .............................................329 device numbers ..................................................327 interfaces ............................................................327 MSDL cards .......................................................328 planning forms ....................................................332 internal clock signals ................................................323 interrupts ...................................................................318 IPE (intelligent peripheral equipment) comparison to PE modules ..................................35 DS-30X loops .......................................................35 installing line cards ...............................................33 line cards for ........................................................32 IPE (intelligent peripheral equipment) trunk cards compared to PE equipment .................................59 ISDN PRI trunk ............................................................541 ISDN PRI trunks, cables and connectors ..........329, 331

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

683

J
J1-J4 connectors on NT8D41BA QSDI ...................................464, 474 J1/J2 connectors ........................................670, 672, 678 jumper setting options ................................................87 jumper strap settings NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card ............................453 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ............418, 421, 422 NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card ............................453 jumper strap settings NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ....
421

card LAN link .................................................35 digital line interface units ...............................40 DS-30X loops ................................................35 host interface bus ..........................................35 testing ..................................................................82 Link Diagnostic Program ..........................................336 loop interface support for 20 mA current ....461, 469,
669

jumpers ..................................33, 118, 131, 358, 373, 374 field selectable settings symbol ..........................118 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card ......................................................131 NT8D02 Digital Line Card ..................................358 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card ....373,
374

loop interfaces TCM (time compressed multiplexed) data ...41, 347, 349, 353 loop limits NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card ......................................................126 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card .... 368 loop start operation NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ............377, 383, 384

M
maintenance MSDL .................................................................336 MSDL states .......................................................333 of SDI cards .........................................................68 replacing MSDL cards ........................................339 maintenance data .......................................................59 maintenance of Meridian 1 role of QSDI paddle board in ..................................................................473 manual fault isolation ................................................338 manually controlled maintenance .............................336 manually disabled MSDL state .................................333 MDF (main distribution frame) connecting line cards ...........................................33 Meridian 1 systems ...............................................65, 71 slots for circuit cards by system ...........................71 message waiting handling analog line calls ...................................................44 analog line interface units ...............................38, 40 characteristics of line cards ............................32, 33 message waiting signaling .........................................59 messages ..................................................321, 336, 340 MFC ..........................................................................293 MFE ..........................................................................295 Micro Processing Unit (MPU) ...................................546 microcontroller NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...........................382 microcontrollers ....35, 59, 119, 347, 349, 354, 364, 367,
437

K
key systems line cards for .................................................33, 149

L
LAPD Data Link/Asynchronous Controller ................ 543 LD 10 for configuring interface units ...................33, 374 LD 11 for configuring interface units ............33, 251, 358 LD 15 for configuring interface units .........................374 LD 17 ..........................................................................68 LD 17 program ..................................................316, 323 LD 37 program ...........................................333, 336, 339 LD 42 program ..................................................336, 339 LD 48 program ..................................................336, 339 LD 96 program ..................................................336, 339 LD 97 for configuring interface units .........................374 LDR (loop dial repeating) trunks IPE trunk card support .........................................57 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ............377, 395, 401 LED indicators QPC841 QSDI (Quad Serial Data Interface) ......670 LED purpose on NT8D41BA .............................462, 471 LEDs ..........................................................328, 338, 339 line cards for off-premise applications ............................32, 54 installation ............................................................33 operation ........................................35, 38, 40, 42, 45 analog line call connection sequence ............42 analog line interface units ..............................38

NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card ............................437 on NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card .......................................................119

684

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

on NT8D02 Digital Line Card ..............347, 349, 354 on NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card .... 364, 367 MIRAN faceplate .............................................................662 modem ports ...............................462, 469, 472, 477, 678 modems line cards for ........................................................33 with NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card ...
361

monitor connectors ............................................316, 329 mounting NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board ............65, 461, 469 QPC841 QSDI (Quad Serial Data Interface) ....65,
669

MPU (Micro Processing Unit) ...................................317 MSDL states .............................................................333 MTBF (Mean Time Between Failure) .........................68 multifrequency sender cards testing ..................................................................82 multifrequency signaling cards testing ..................................................................83 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) .....................559 MUS (Music) IPE trunk card support .........................................57 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...........................427

N
network area of NT8D41BA backplane .............464, 473 network card slots, available ....................................322 network cards testing ..................................................................83 NO BUFFER fault indication .....................................321 Not Responding substate ..................................334, 340 NRD (no ringing detector) .........................................388 NT1P61 Fibre Superloop Network card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT1P62 Fibre Peripheral Controller card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT1R20 Off Premise Station (OPS) analog line card ....
117

functions card control ..................................................122 codecs ..................................................119, 122 power requirements ...........................................126 ring limitations ....................................................127 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card ..............................89 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station cards card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 option settings ......................................................89 NT1R52 Remote Carrier Interface card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT4D18 Hybrid Bus Terminator card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT4D19 and NT423 Hybrid Bus Terminator card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT4D20 and NT422 Hybrid Bus Terminator card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Line side T1 Line Cards card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5D11 Line Side T-1 Card description ............................................................33 NT5D11 Line Side T-1 Line Card description ............................................................32 NT5D14 Line Side T-1 card ......................................156 NT5D21 Core/Network Module location of QSDI paddleboard ............................469 NT5D60AA CLASS Modem card configuration software service changes ............................251 electrical characteristics .....................................249 functions .............................................................246 power requirements ...........................................250 NT5K02 Analog Line Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5K07 Universal Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5K12 Enhanced Peripheral Equipment Power Supply
91

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card applications ........................................................135 configuration jumper straps ...............................................131 software service changes ............................131 connector pin assignments ................................130 description ......................................................32, 54 environmental specification ................................127 faceplate .............................................................118 foreign and surge voltage protection ..................126

NT5K17 Direct Dial Inward Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5K18 Central Office Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5K19 E and M Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5K20 Extended Tone Detector card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card .................................293, 298 NT5K36 Direct Inward/Dire ct Outward Dial Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5K70 Central Office Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

685

NT5K71 Central Office Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5K72 E and M Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5K82 Central Office Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5K83 E and M Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5K84 Direct Inward Dial Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5K90 Central Office Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system NT5K90 Central Office Trunk Card ...............71 NT5K93 Central Office Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5K96 Analog Line Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT5K99 Central Office Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT6D39 CPU/Network Module .........................469, 669 location of QSDI paddleboard ............................469 NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC option settings ......................................................95 NT6D65 Core to Network Interface card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT6D66 Call Processor card manual initialization ..............................................76 NT6D70 S/T Interface Line card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT6D70 SILC line card .....................................301, 303 NT6D71 U Interface Line card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT6D71 UILC line card .....................................309, 310 NT6D72 Basic Rate Signal Concentrator card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT6D73 Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT7D03 Ringing Generator DC option settings ......................................................98 NT7D04 CE/PE Power Supply DC option settings ......................................................98 NT7D16 Data Access card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT7R51 Local Carrier Interface card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT8D01 Controller card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT8D01 Controller Card .............................................59 NT8D02 Digital Line card

card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT8D02 Digital Line Card configuration jumper and switch settings ..........................358 software service changes ............................358 connector pin assignments ................................356 description ..................................32, 33, 40, 245, 345 electrical characteristics .....................................355 environmental specifications .......................250, 356 faceplate .....................................................246, 346 foreign and surge voltage protection ..................356 functions .......................................347, 349, 352354 card control ..................................................353 card interfaces .............................................352 Card LAN interface .......................347, 349, 354 digital line interfaces .....................347, 349, 353 microcontroller ..............................347, 349, 354 sanity timer ..................................................354 TCM loop interface circuit ............................353 power requirements ...........................................355 sanity timer ..........................................347, 349, 353 NT8D04 Superloop Network card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 caution on enabling switch ...................................76 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card ....32, 33, 361, 362, 364368, 370, 371, 373, 374 configuration jumper and switch settings ...................373, 374 software service changes ............................374 connector pin assignments ................................371 description ......................................................32, 33 electrical specifications ......................................368 environmental specifications ..............................371 faceplate .............................................................362 foreign and surge voltage protection ..................370 functions card controlCard control functions ...............366 card interfaces .............................................365 circuit power ................................................367 codecs ..................................................364, 365 line interface units ................................364, 366 microcontroller ......................................364, 367 loop limits ...........................................................368 overload level .....................................................371 port-to-port loss ..................................................374 power requirements ...........................................370 NT8D13 PE Modules network connections to ........................................59 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

686

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 option settings ......................................................98 port-to-port loss configurations ...........................424 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card card control functions .........................................383 card interfaces ....................................................381 configuration .......................................................418 connector pin assignments ................................417 description ..................................................379, 380 DID operation ..............................................392, 401 electrical specifications ......................................413 environmental specifications ..............................415 faceplate .............................................................379 ground start operation ........................................388 impedance and cable loop resistance/loss ........422 jumper strap settings ...........................418, 421, 422 loop start operation ............................................383 music operation ..................................................427 paging operation ................................................426 power requirements and protection ....................415 RAN operation ....................................................408 trunk number and types supported ....56, 57, 377, 379383, 397, 404, 415, 424 two-way, LDR, TIE trunk operation .............395, 401 two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk operation ...........404 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card jumper strap settings ....
421

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 option settings ....................................................101 port-to-port loss configurations ...........................455 NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card jumper strap settings ..........................................453 card control functions .........................................437 connector pin assignments ................................450 description ..................................................429, 430 DX (Duplex) signaling .................................434, 446 electrical specifications ......................................448 environmental specifications ..............................450 faceplate .............................................................430 jumper strap settings ..........................................453 maintenance .......................................................439 pad switching algorithms and orientation ....424,
455

Type II signaling and call control .........429, 434, 443 NT8D16 Digitone Receiver card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NT8D17 Conference/TDS card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 option settings ....................................................102 NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC option settings ....................................................103 NT8D22 System Monitor ..........................................103 option settings ....................................................103 NT8D35 Network Module .........................................669 NT8D37 IPE Modules network connections to ........................................59 trunk card installation ...........................................58 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board address switch settings .......................108, 467, 476 applications .................................................469, 477 baud rates (table) ................................107, 466, 475 cabling the NT8D41BA paddle board .........469, 477 configuring ..................................................465, 475 connector pin assignments .........................464, 474 diagram showing option switches ...............462, 471 mounting ...............................................65, 461, 469 physical description ....................................462, 471 ports and port types .............................................65 switch settings ............................................465, 475 UARTS ........................................................462, 472 UARTS, drivers, receivers (diagram) ..........462, 472 NT8D41BA QSDI ports RS-232-C ....................................................469, 477 NT8D46 cables for the QSDI ............................469, 477 NT8D82 cables .........................................................678 NT8D84AA cables for the NT8D41BA QSDI .... 469, 477 NT8D84AA cables for the QSDI ........................469, 477 NT8D90 cables .........................................................678 NT8D93 cables for the NT8D41BA QSDI .........469, 477 NT8D93 cables for the QSDI ............................469, 477 NT8D95 cables .........................................................678 NT8D96 cables .................................................672, 678 NT9D11 Core/Network Module location of QSDI paddleboard ............................469 NT9D11 Core/Network Module for system Option 61 ....
461

paging trunk operation ................................434, 458 power requirements and protection ....................450 software service entries .....................................453 trunk interface units and functions .....................434 trunk number and types supported ....56, 57, 429,
430

Type I signaling and call control ..........429, 434, 439

NTAG03 Central Office Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NTAG04 Central Office/Direct Inward Dial Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 NTAG26 XMFR card .........................................479, 481 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card .............................................483 NTAK09 1.5 DTI/PRI card ..........................489, 541, 560 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card ...................................511

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

687

NTAK10 2.0 DTI card ...............................................499 NTAK20 clock controller ....................................511, 518 NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard .........658 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card ..................................519, 531 NTAK93 DCH interface .....................................541, 544 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card .........................................511 NTBK50 2.0 PRI card .................541, 549, 556, 560, 661 NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel handler .............563 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk Card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 trunk number and types supported ......................56 NTND02 Misc/SDI/Peripheral Signaling card option settings ....................................................109 NTND10 Changeover and Memory Arbitrator card option settings ....................................................109 NTND26 cable ..........................................................329 NTND27 cable ...................................................329, 331 NTND98AA cable .....................................................329 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card ............................511 NTRB21 TMDI card ...........................................649, 659

P
packetized data ........................................................321 pad switching algorithms NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card .....................424, 455 PAG (Paging) trunks IPE trunk card support .........................................57 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...................377, 426 NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card .....................434, 458 PE trunk card support ..........................................57 parity bits ..................................................................323 PCM (pulse code modulated) data .............................59 PCM (pulse code modulated) voice data ...................35 PE (peripheral equipment) comparison to IPE modules .................................35 installing line cards ...............................................33 PE (peripheral equipment) trunk cards compared to IPE equipment ................................59 planning forms ...................................................327, 332 polling .........................................................................59 by Controller Cards ..............................................59 port types for SDI cards (table) ..................................65 port-to-port loss NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card .... 374 port-to-port loss configurations NT8D14 Universal Trunk card ............................424 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card .............................455 ports ...65, 66, 318, 319, 321323, 337, 461, 462, 469, 471, 472, 669671 addresses ...................................................318, 322 and port types ..................................65, 66, 462, 471 disabling .............................................................337 electrical interfaces .....................................319, 323 enabling ..............................................................337 how addressed (on NT8D41BA) .................462, 471 receiving data on ................................................321 RS-232-C ............................................461, 469, 669 serial ............................................462, 471, 670, 671 serial, uses for ............................................462, 472 specifications ......................................................323 supported ...........................................................322 power consumption ....................................................67 power requirements .............119, 126, 250, 326, 355, 370 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card ...............................................119, 126 NT5D60AA CLASS Modem card .......................250 NT8D02 Digital Line Card ..................................355 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card .... 370 power requirements and protection NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...........................415

O
OAID (outgoing automatic incoming dial) trunks IPE trunk card support .........................................57 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...........................404 off hook detection analog line interface units ....................................38 off hook/on hook signaling ..........................................59 off-hook detection analog line interface units ....................................40 analog lines ..........................................................42 off-premise applications line cards for .............................................32, 40, 54 Off-Premise Station ...................................................117 Off-Premise Station card (NT1R20) ...........................89 ON/OFF switch setting options ...................................87 option settings ............................................................87 option switches (NT8D41BA QSDI) diagram showing location of .......................462, 471 outgoing (analog) calls ...............................................42 outgoing calls DX signaling .......................................................446 E and M Type I signaling ....................................440 E and M Type II signaling ...................................443 ground start operation ........................................390 loop start operation ............................................385 OAID operation ..................................................405 senderized operation for DID and LDR trunks ....
403

two-way, LDR, TIE trunk operation ....................397 Overload substate .............................................334, 340

688

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card ............................449 power supply precautions for circuit card maintenance .............74 PRI D-channel Diagnostic Program ..........................336 PRI trunks, cables and connections ..................329, 331 printer ports .......................................................462, 472 prioritized interrupts ..................................................318 programmable serial ports ................................319, 323 PROM (Programmable Read Only Memory) ............319 PSDL ........................................................................654 PSP/PIP (polarity-sensitive/-insensitive packs) ....385,
390

Q
QCAD290 cables ......................................................678 QCAD328 cable ........................................................329 QCAD42 cables ........................................................678 QMT11 Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module option settings ....................................................109 QMT8 Add-on Data Module option settings ....................................................109 QPA62 Call Detail Recording 32 K RAM card option settings ....................................................109 QPC239 Recorded Telephone Dictation Trunk card option settings ....................................................110 QPC30 4 K RAM card option settings ....................................................109 QPC31 8 K RAM card option settings ....................................................109 QPC327 Multifrequency Sender/Receiver card option settings ....................................................110 QPC33 Tape Interface card option settings ....................................................109 QPC41 Miscellaneous card option settings ....................................................109 QPC414 Network card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 caution on enabling switch ...................................76 option settings ....................................................110 QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 option settings ....................................................109 QPC441 3-Port Extender card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 option settings ....................................................110 QPC471 Clock Controller card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 QPC578 Integrated Services Digital Line card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71

QPC71 E and M Trunk card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 QPC757 cards ..........................................................315 QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card card slots by Meridian 1 system ...........................71 QPC841 cards ..........................................................315 QPC841 QSDI (Quad Serial Data Interface) ....65, 141, 669, 670, 672, 674, 675, 678 applications ........................................................678 cabling ................................................................678 configuring ..........................................................674 connector pin assignments ................................672 described ....................................................141, 669 mounting .......................................................65, 669 switch settings and locations ..............................675

R
RAM (Random Access Memory) ..............................317 RAN (Recorded Announcement) trunks IPE trunk card support .........................................57 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...................377, 408 receive interface .......................................................321 Recovery Threshold substate ...........................334, 340 relative humidity limitations .......................................326 replacing MSDL cards ..............................................339 Reset Threshold substate .................................334, 340 resetting MSDLs .......................................................337 reverse-wiring compensation ....................................388 ringer limitations NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card ......................................................127 ringing signaling .........................................................59 RS-232 interface ...............................................319, 323 RS-232-C interface .................65, 66, 461, 469, 477, 669 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board ....65, 66, 461, 469,
477

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface Card .........669 RS-422 interface ...............................................319, 323 RST MSDL x command ............................................337

S
S/T Interface Line cards (SILC) ................................301 SCSI (Small Computer Systems Interface) ..............319 SDI (serial data interface) cards compatibility with Meridian 1 options ...................65 configuring system software ................................68

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

689

connectable synchronous and asynchronous devices ....................................................66 features ................................................................66 installation ......................................................65, 68 maintenance ........................................................68 ports and port types .............................................65 specifications .......................................................67 SDI cards ..................................................................315 Self-Testing substate .........................................334, 340 self-tests ...............................................59, 320, 337339 Self-tests Failed substate ..................................334, 340 Self-tests Passed substate ................................334, 340 serial connectors, where located ................................65 serial interface ..........................................................319 serial ports NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Card ....462, 471, 472 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface Card .........670 shared RAM ..............................................................317 Shared RAM Tests Failed substate ...................334, 340 signal functions NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board ..................464, 474 QPC841 QSDI (Quad Serial Data Interface) ......672 signal rates .................................................................65 signaling technology circuits ..................................................................64 DS-30X loops .................................................59, 64 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...........................383 NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card .....................438, 439 SL-1 network loops ..............................................64 signaling words ...........................................................35 SLFT MSDL x command ...................................337, 338 SLIC (subscriber line interface circuit) ........................40 slots ............................................................................65 slots, available ..........................................................322 software ....................................................................317 SRAM Tests Failed substate ....................................340 start mode for recorded messages ...........................411 STAT MSDL command ......................................337, 340 STAT MSDL x command ...................................338, 340 states, MSDL .....................................................333, 340 static discharges cautions to prevent ...............................................74 status, displaying ...............................................337, 338 stop bits ....................................................................323 superloops ..................................................................59 switch setting options .................................................87 switch settings ...................................................322, 327 switch settings and locations NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board ..................465, 475 switch settings, QSDI

addresses (table) .........................108, 466, 467, 476 baud rates ...........................................107, 466, 475 DCE/DTE emulation ............................109, 467, 476 switches ......................................................................33 symptoms and actions system disabled actions .....................................340 synchronous device compatibility ...............................65 synchronous ports .............................................319, 322 system controlled maintenance ................................336 system disabled MSDL states ...........................334, 340 system initialization ...................................................336

T
TCM (time compressed multiplexed) data ....35, 40, 41, 347, 349, 353 loop interfaces ...............................41, 347, 349, 353 temperature ranges ....................................................67 temperature requirements ........................................326 terminal equipment connecting line cards ...........................................33 terminal ports ....................................................462, 472 terminals administration and maint., link to Meridian 1 ....461,
469

background for hotels/motels .........66, 461, 469, 669 for administration and maintenance .............66, 669 testing conference cards .................................................79 digitone receiver cards .........................................81 line cards ..............................................................82 multifrequency sender cards ................................82 multifrequency signaling cards .............................83 network cards .......................................................83 self-tests by IPE line cards ...................................35 self-tests by NT1R20 OPS card .........................118 tone and digit switch cards ...................................85 trunk cards ...........................................................84 threshold messages ..........................................321, 340 TIE trunks IPE trunk card support .........................................57 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card .....377, 395, 401, 404 timeslots ................................................................35, 59 tip and ring facilities .........................................33, 35, 42 tone and digit switch cards testing ..................................................................85 transmission modes ..........................................319, 323 transmit buffer ...........................................................321 transmit interface ......................................................321 trunk cards operation ..............................................................59

690

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

selecting for IPE architecture ...............................56 selecting for PE architecture ................................56 testing ..................................................................84 trunk interface units ..............................................64 two-way, LDR, TIE trunk operation NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card ...........................395

U
U Interface Line Card (UILC) ....................................309 UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter) .......................................................462, 472, 671 UART for addressing on the QSDI ............108, 467, 476

voice-only communication ..........................................33 voltage surge protection .... 32, 40, 55, 117, 126, 356, 370 grounding .............................................................55 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card ......................................................126 NT8D02 Digital Line Card ..................................356 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card .... 370 voltages ......................................................................67

W
WATS (Wide Area Telephone Service) trunks IPE trunk card support ..................................57, 377 words (loop data format) ............................................59 wrist straps .................................................................74

V
variable gain filters ................................................39, 64

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010

691

692

Circuit Card Reference

November 2010